You are on page 1of 571

The

Ecology
of
Seashores
Marine Science Series
The CRC Marine Science Series is dedicated to providing state-of-the-
art coverage of important topics in marine biology, marine chemistry, marine
geology, and physical oceanography. The series includes volumes that focus
on the synthesis of recent advances in marine science.

CRC MARINE SCIENCE SERIES

SERIES EDITOR

Michael J. Kennish, Ph.D.

PUBLISHED TITLES

Artificial Reef Evaluation with Application to Natural Marine Habitats,


William Seaman, Jr.
Chemical Oceanography, Second Edition, Frank J. Millero
Coastal Ecosystem Processes, Daniel M. Alongi
Ecology of Estuaries: Anthropogenic Effects, Michael J. Kennish
Ecology of Marine Bivalves: An Ecosystem Approach, Richard F. Dame
Ecology of Marine Invertebrate Larvae, Larry McEdward
Environmental Oceanography, Second Edition, Tom Beer
Estuary Restoration and Maintenance: The National Estuary Program,
Michael J. Kennish
Eutrophication Processes in Coastal Systems: Origin and Succession
of Plankton Blooms and Effects on Secondary Production in
Gulf Coast Estuaries, Robert J. Livingston
Handbook of Marine Mineral Deposits, David S. Cronan
Handbook for Restoring Tidal Wetlands, Joy B. Zedler
Intertidal Deposits: River Mouths, Tidal Flats, and Coastal Lagoons,
Doeke Eisma
Morphodynamics of Inner Continental Shelves, L. Donelson Wright
Ocean Pollution: Effects on Living Resources and Humans, Carl J. Sindermann
Physical Oceanographic Processes of the Great Barrier Reef, Eric Wolanski
The Physiology of Fishes, Second Edition, David H. Evans
Pollution Impacts on Marine Biotic Communities, Michael J. Kennish
Practical Handbook of Estuarine and Marine Pollution, Michael J. Kennish
Seagrasses: Monitoring, Ecology, Physiology, and Management,
Stephen A. Bortone
The
Ecology
of
Seashores
George A. Knox, M.B.E., F.R.S.N.Z.

CRC Press
Boca Raton London New York Washington, D.C.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Knox, G. A.
The ecology of seashores / by George A. Knox.
p. cm. — (Marine science series)
Includes bibliographical references (p. ).
ISBN 0-8493-0008-8
1. Seashore ecology. I. Title. II. Series.

QH541.5.S35 K66 2000


577.69′9—dc21 00-058573
CIP

This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reprinted material is quoted with permission, and sources are
indicated. A wide variety of references are listed. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the author and the
publisher cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or for the consequences of their use.

Neither this book nor any part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
microfilming, and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publisher.

The consent of CRC Press LLC does not extend to copying for general distribution, for promotion, for creating new works, or for resale. Specific
permission must be obtained in writing from CRC Press LLC for such copying.

Direct all inquiries to CRC Press LLC, 2000 N.W. Corporate Blvd., Boca Raton, Florida 33431.

Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation,
without intent to infringe.

© 2001 by CRC Press LLC

No claim to original U.S. Government works


International Standard Book Number 0-8493-0008-8
Library of Congress Card Number 00-058573
Printed in the United States of America 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Printed on acid-free paper
Preface
Because of its accessibility, the intertidal zone has offered resource development and conservation in Southeast Asia
excellent opportunities to study the adaptations of indi- with special reference to Indonesia (Knox and Miyabara,
vidual organisms and populations to their environment, 1983). This estuarine research culminated in 1983 with
and the factors controlling community composition. Early the publication of a two-volume work on estuarine eco-
work on seashores concentrated on the problems of life systems (Knox, 1983a,b).
in an environment characterized by steep gradients in Over the years I have also been involved in research
physical conditions, but in more recent years, the focus on the intertidal ecology of rocky shores (Knox, 1963a;
of research on the fascinating shore ecosystems has been 1968; 1969b; 1988; in preparation; Knox and Duncan,
on understanding the processes controlling their produc- in preparation) and sand beaches (Knox, 1969a). Field
tivity and dynamic functioning. The emphasis has been work has been carried out on rocky shores throughout
on processes such as primary production, grazing, preda- New Zealand, the Subantarctic Islands (Snares, Auck-
tion, competition, impact of disturbance, secondary pro- land, Campbell, and Chatham Islands), Antarctica, the
duction, detritus formation, decomposition, and the role west coast of Chile, and the southern coasts of Australia.
of microorganisms. Shores in Peru, Argentina, the eastern and western coasts
My own involvement in seashore research began when of Canada and the United States, England and Scotland,
I embarked on a M.Sc. thesis in zoology on the ecology and tropical shores in Guam, the Palau Islands, Fiji, and
of the rocky shores at Taylors Mistake, Banks Peninsula, Hawaii have been briefly examined. A book on New
with special reference to the serpulid polychaete Pomato- Zealand seashore ecology will be published shortly
ceros cariniferus (Knox, 1948; 1953). In the late 1950s, (Knox, in preparation). This work has also involved an
I became involved in research on a local estuary, the Avon- examination of the evolution and biogeography of the
Heathcote Estuary. This research evolved into a compre- Southern Hemisphere, especially the Pacific Ocean,
hensive interdisciplinary research program that has con- intertidal and shallow water biotas (Knox, 1960; 1963a;
tinued until the present time. It has involved a large num- 1975; 1988).
ber of research associates, research assistants, and The approach used in this book is somewhat different
research students and culminated in two major reports from that used in many texts in marine ecology in that the
(Knox and Kilner, 1973; Knox, 1992). A multiauthor book emphasis is on ecological processes and the use of systems
bringing together the results of 50 years of research on analysis in understanding such processes. This book is an
this estuarine ecosystem is in an advanced stage (Knox attempt to bring some order to some of the most complex
and Robb, in preparation). Over the period of 1959 to of ecosystem types, those of the seashores of the world.
1983, I directed the activities of the Estuarine Research Wherever possible the energy circuit language of symbols
Unit, Zoology Department, University of Canterbury, and diagrams developed by H. T. Odum has been used as
Christchurch. This unit carried out research on estuarine a basis of understanding (Odum, 1983).
and coastal ecosystems throughout New Zealand and com- The book is divided into seven chapters. The first
piled some 28 major reports. The research aimed at under- provides an introduction and sets the scene for the suc-
standing the interaction of estuarine plants, microorgan- ceeding chapters. The second deals with zonation patterns
isms, animals, and man with each other and their on hard shores, the basic causes of zonation, the biology
environment. Such research, while contributing to basic of the major divisions of the biota, the biology of some
ecological principles, also provided information necessary key faunal components (mussels, limpets, and barnacles),
for the management of New Zealand coastal ecosystems and the flora and fauna of special habitats. The third
(Knox, 1983c). I was scientific coordinator of a multidis- chapter covers the physicochemical environment of soft
ciplinary study of the Ahuriri Estuary, Hawke Bay (Knox shores, and the general ecology of the biota from produc-
and Fenwick, 1978; Knox, 1979b), and coordinator of the ers through microbes to macrofauna. Two large sections
biological aspects of the Upper Waitemata Harbour Catch- deal with microbial ecology and detritus and nutrient
ment Study, a comprehensive five-year interdisciplinary cycles in representative ecosystems. The fourth chapter
study of the land and water resources of the mangrove- gives an account of ecological niches on the shore and
fringed Upper Waitemata Harbour, Auckland (Knox, the establishment and maintenance of zonation patterns.
1983a; 1983b). A fellowship at the East-West Center, Chapter 5 attempts to synthesize the various factors such
Honolulu, enabled me to undertake a study of coastal zone as grazing, competition, predation, disturbance, and
succession that determine the distribution, diversity, bio- literature, I have had to be selective in the material included.
mass, and production of the various categories of con- Thus, of necessity, I have concentrated on work published
sumers. Energy budgets, patterns of energy flow, trophic since 1970, and in particular in the last decade. Regretfully,
structure, and food webs are discussed in Chapter 6, while except in a few instances, it has not been possible to develop
in Chapter 7, examples of ecosystem models for the var- the history of the concepts considered. Examples have been
ious ecosystem types on both hard and soft shores are carefully chosen from the pool of published research to
detailed. Finally, the application of the relatively new illustrate these concepts. There are doubtless other exam-
technique of network analysis to gain greater insight into ples that could have been equally used, and I apologize to
ecosystem processes and enable the comparison of differ- authors whose work has not been included. I have attempted
ent ecosystems is outlined. to include as wide a geographic range of examples as pos-
As will be seen by the reference list at the end of this sible, and in particular have included Southern Hemisphere
book, there is a considerable volume of recent literature on examples that often do not appear in texts originating in the
seashore ecosystems, although the list contains only a frac- Northern Hemisphere.
tion of the published work. Extensive literature citations The book has been designed for use by upper level
have been included so that the book might serve as a undergraduate and graduate students and professionals
resource for those engaged in research on and management engaged in coastal zone research and management. I hope
of the coastal zone. Because of this growing volume of that they find it useful.
Author
George A. Knox, M.B.E., F.R.S.N.Z., was head of the teen summer expeditions to McMurdo Sound, Antarctica;
Department of Zoology, University of Canterbury, the establishment of the Snares Islands Research Pro-
Christchurch, New Zealand, from 1959 to 1976. He is now gramme (participated in three field expeditions); and par-
professor-emeritus in zoology. ticipation in field expeditions to Campbell and Auckland
Professor Knox was born in New Zealand and Islands. He has published over 100 scientific papers and
received his education at the University of Canterbury 28 environmental reports, written five books, and edited
where he was appointed a staff member in 1948. He has and co-authored three other volumes.
been a visiting fellow at the East-West Center, Honolulu, Professor Knox has received a number of awards and
and a visiting professor at the Department of Oceanogra- fellowships for his contributions to science, including Fel-
phy, Texas A&M University and the Department of Envi- low of the Royal Society of New Zealand (FRSNZ), 1963;
ronmental Engineering, University of Florida, Gainesville. Hutton Medal, Royal Society of New Zealand, 1978; Con-
He has visited and worked in laboratories in the U.S., servation Trophy, New Zealand Antarctic Society; Mem-
Canada, Chile, Japan, Australia, Western Europe, the ber of the Most Excellent Order of the British Empire
USSR, and China. (MBE), 1985; New Zealand Marine Sciences Society
Professor Knox’s research has been wide ranging and Award for Outstanding Contribution to Marine Science in
includes: (1) the systematics and distribution of polycha- New Zealand, 1985; and the New Zealand Association of
eta with special reference to New Zealand and Antarctica; Scientists’ Sir Ernest Marsden Medal for Service to Sci-
(2) rocky shore intertidal ecology and biogeography; (3) ence, 1985.
the ecology and conservation of islands; (4) studies on the Throughout his career, professor Knox has been active
pelagic and benthic ecosystems beneath the sea ice in in international scientific organizations. He has been a
McMurdo Sound, Antarctica; and (5) estuarine and coastal member of the Scientific Committee for Oceanic Research
ecology and management. He established and directed the (SCOR) and the Special Committee for the International
Estuarine Research Unit in the Department of Zoology Biological Programme (SCIBP). He has been a delegate
and the University of Canterbury Antarctic Research Unit. to the Scientific Committee for Antarctic Research (SCAR)
He has participated in many field expeditions, including since 1969, serving 4-year terms as secretary and president,
the Chatham Islands 1954 Expedition (leader); the Royal and a member of the governing board of the International
Society of London Darwin Centennial Expedition to Association for Ecology from 1965 to 1990, also serving
southern Chile (marine biologist and deputy leader); thir- 4-year terms as secretary-general and president.
Acknowledgments
I would like to express my indebtedness to the late Professor My thanks are also due to all those who gave me
Edward Percival, who by his enthusiasm and teaching skills permission to reproduce original figures and tables. Finally,
started me on my career as a marine biologist, to Professor I am indebted to John Sulzycki and the staff of CRC Press,
Howard Odum, who inspired by interest in the energy anal- in particular Amy Rodriguez and Pat Roberson, for their
ysis approach to ecosystem modeling, and to my colleagues patience and support during the preparation of this volume
in New Zealand and various parts of the world, with whom and for seeing the project through to the completion of such
I have discussed many of the ideas in this book. a high quality product.

George A. Knox
November, 2000
Christchurch, New Zealand
Contents
Chapter 1 The Environment
1.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Environmental Gradients and Stresses on the Shore...........................................................................2
1.3 Salient Features of the Shore Environment .........................................................................................2
1.4 Patterns of Zonation on the Shore .....................................................................................................16

Chapter 2 Hard Shores


2.1 Zonation Patterns on Hard Shores .....................................................................................................20
2.2 Zonation Patterns on Representative Shores .....................................................................................24
2.3 The Causes of Zonation .....................................................................................................................36
2.4 Hard Shore Microalgae ......................................................................................................................51
2.5 Hard Shore Micro- and Meiofauna....................................................................................................53
2.6 Rocky Shore Lichens .........................................................................................................................54
2.7 Hard Shore Macroalgae .....................................................................................................................56
2.8 Key Faunal Components ....................................................................................................................58
2.9 Special Habitats..................................................................................................................................70

Chapter 3 Soft Shores


3.1 Soft Shores as a Habitat.....................................................................................................................87
3.2 The Physicochemical Environment....................................................................................................92
3.3 Soft Shore Types ................................................................................................................................96
3.4 Estuaries .............................................................................................................................................98
3.5 Soft Shore Primary Producers .........................................................................................................107
3.6 Soft Shore Fauna..............................................................................................................................153
3.7 Biological Modification of the Sediment ........................................................................................181
3.8 Microbial Ecology and Organic Detritus.........................................................................................188
3.9 Nutrient Cycling...............................................................................................................................209
3.10 Estuarine Shelf Interactions .............................................................................................................228

Chapter 4 Adaptations to Shore Life


4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................238
4.2 Ecological Niches on the Shore.......................................................................................................238
4.3 The Establishment of Zonation Patterns..........................................................................................251
4.4 The Maintenance of Zonation Patterns............................................................................................263

Chapter 5 Control of Community Structure


5.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................277
5.2 Hard Shores ......................................................................................................................................277
5.3 Soft Shores .......................................................................................................................................317
5.4 Synthesis of Factors Involved in Controlling Community Structure..............................................344

Chapter 6 Energy Flow, Food Webs, and Material Cycling


6.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................356
6.2 Food Sources ....................................................................................................................................356
6.3 Energy Budgets for Individual Species ...........................................................................................360
6.4 Optimal Foraging .............................................................................................................................374
6.5 Secondary Production ......................................................................................................................377
6.6 P:B Ratios and Production Efficiency .............................................................................................380
6.7 Relative Contribution of Soft Shore Benthic Infauna to Secondary Production............................381
6.8 Community Metabolism...................................................................................................................385
6.9 Trophic Structure and Food Webs ...................................................................................................389
6.10 Carbon Flow Models........................................................................................................................406
6.11 Stable Isotopes and Food Web Analysis..........................................................................................412
6.12 Top-down and Bottom-up Control of Trophic Structure.................................................................421

Chapter 7 Ecosystem Models


7.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................426
7.2 Hard Shores ......................................................................................................................................427
7.3 Sand Beaches....................................................................................................................................428
7.4 Intertidal Mudflat in the Lynher Estuary, Cornwall, U.K. ..............................................................433
7.5 Salt Marshes .....................................................................................................................................433
7.6 Sea Grass Ecosystems......................................................................................................................440
7.7 Mangrove Ecosystems......................................................................................................................442
7.8 Estuaries ...........................................................................................................................................443
7.9 Network Analysis .............................................................................................................................456
7.10 Potential Applications of the Ascendency Concept.........................................................................469
7.11 Emergy Analysis ..............................................................................................................................471

Appendix.........................................................................................................................................................................473

References.......................................................................................................................................................................477

Index ...............................................................................................................................................................................543
The Environment
1
CONTENTS

1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................1


1.2 Environmental Gradients and Stresses on the Shore.................................................................................................2
1.3 Salient Features of the Shore Environment...............................................................................................................2
1.3.1 Seawater..........................................................................................................................................................2
1.3.2 Tides ...............................................................................................................................................................4
1.3.3 Tidal Range and Proportions .........................................................................................................................4
1.3.4 Submersion and Emersion .............................................................................................................................7
1.3.5 Modifying Factors ..........................................................................................................................................9
1.3.5.1 Wave Action ..................................................................................................................................10
1.3.5.2 Topography and Aspect.................................................................................................................13
1.3.5.3 Climatic Factors ............................................................................................................................16
1.4 Patterns of Zonation on the Shore ...........................................................................................................................16

1.1 INTRODUCTION slope of the shore and the amplitude of the tides. This may
vary from less than a meter on vertical rock faces where
The relatively narrow strip where the land meets the sea the tidal amplitude is small to several kilometers on soft
provides the most diverse range of habitats for living shores where the tidal amplitude is high. The physical
organisms anywhere on the earth. It offers a unique blend features of this zone are of immense complexity, varying
of habitats not found elsewhere. Animals and plants living not only geographically, but from coast to coast in the
there experience marked daily changes in environmental same region and within comparatively short distances on
conditions as the tides ebb and flow. These variations any one shore. Whether narrow or wide, this region is
create stresses to which the species have adapted by astonishingly rich in both the number of species of plants
organic evolution over long periods of time. and animals and the densities of the individual species. In
The seashore is best defined as that part of the coast- the following pages we shall explore the complex shore
line extending from the lowest level uncovered by the environment, the ways in which representative species are
spring tides to the highest point washed or splashed by adapted to life in a constantly changing environment, how
the waves. This intertidal or littoral zone does not, how- they interact with each other, how the structure of the
ever, merge abruptly with the land above or the perma- various communities is controlled, and how energy and
nently submerged sublittoral zone below. Above the high- materials cycle in the different ecosystems.
est point reached by the waves, salt spray influences a Three interlocking factors determine the type of com-
zone which, on very exposed coasts, may extend several munity on the seashore: (1) the amount and intensity of
hundred meters up the shore. Below the lowest point wave action; (2) the type of substrate (whether rock, sand,
reached by the tides, a gradient in the quantity and quality mud, or some combination of these); and (3) the amplitude
of light is reflected in the depth distribution of the plants of the tides. To consider each of these in turn:
and animals found there. Furthermore, some sublittoral
species extend up into the intertidal zone proper. In this 1. Waves are caused by wind, and their size is
book, both of the transitional zones between the intertidal primarily determined by the uninterrupted dis-
zone and the land above and the sublittoral below will tance or “fetch” over which the wind can blow,
be considered. the velocity and direction of the wind, and to a
The extent of the intertidal zone depends on a variety lesser extent the depth of the water. Thus, the
of factors, the most important of which are the angle of severity of wave action in any given locality is

1
2 The Ecology of Seashores

determined by its geographical position in rela- ration. Thus, across the intertidal gradient shore, organ-
tion to the factors listed above. As a conse- isms are subjected to increasing stress.
quence, there is every gradation in wave shock, As wave action increases along the horizontal exposure
from the pounding surf of exposed shores on gradient, the upper shore is increasingly subject to wetting
the western coasts of the main land masses to by surging waves and spray, more food is transported to
the quiet waters of deep inlets, narrow estuaries, filter-feeders, and better supplies of oxygen and nutrients
and fjords. are available to the plants and animals. On the other hand,
2. From a biological point of view, there are two increased stresses may be imposed on some organisms,
major types of shores, “hard” and “soft,” the e.g., problems of settlement, adhesion, and propensity for
former often referred to as rocky shores and the dislodgement and abrasive action of sand.
latter as sand and mud shores. The environmen- The type of substrate, as discussed in Chapters 2 and
tal features and modes of life differ so much 3, determines the type of community that can survive.
between these two types that little overlap, if These gradients interact in very complex ways with
any, exists between the species populations the biological communities living on and in the sub-
inhabiting them. There is, however, a gradation strate. In the succeeding chapters we shall explore these
from rocky shores through boulder beaches, interactions.
pebble beaches to sand beaches, and the latter
grade through muddy sand to mudflats. Never-
theless, it is convenient to preserve the distinc- 1.3 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE SHORE
tion between “hard” (rock and boulders) and ENVIRONMENT
“soft” (sand and mud) shores.
3. The third important factor, tidal exposure, will 1.3.1 SEAWATER
be considered in detail later. It is sufficient here When intertidal organisms are covered by the tides, they
to note that the tidal range, or vertical distance, are subjected to the same physiological conditions of tem-
between high and low water not only varies perature and salinity as those permanently submerged in
with the lunar cycle, but also geographically. the sublittoral below. Seawater from a physiological point
The ebb and flow of the semidiurnal rise and of view is a very complex solution. The aspects of this
fall of the tide result in periodic emersion and complexity that are of biological significance are ion con-
submersion of the intertidal zone, the extent of centration, density, and osmotic pressure. The osmotic
which depends on a variety of factors (see Sec- properties of seawater result from the total amount of
tion 1.3). dissolved salts. Seawater is composed of a number of
different compounds that can be divided into the following
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL GRADIENTS AND phases (Millero and Sohn, 1991):
STRESSES ON THE SHORE
1. Solids (material that does not pass through a
Seashores are characterized by three main environmental 0.45 µm filter)
gradients: a. Particulate organic matter (plant and animal
detritus)
1. The vertical (intertidal) gradient from sea to land. b. Particulate inorganic material (minerals)
2. The horizontal gradient of exposure to wave 2. Gases
action. a. Conservative (N2, Ar, Xe)
3. The particle size gradient from solid rock b. Nonconservative (O2 and CO2)
through boulders, pebbles, and coarse and fine 3. Colloids (pass through 0.45 µm filter, but are
sands, to silts and clays. not dissolved)
a. Organic
Across the intertidal gradient, there is a change from b. Inorganic
the highly stable, buffered subtidal environment to an 4. Dissolved solutes
unstable and increasingly stressed environment with a. Inorganic solutes
increasing tidal height. Upshore the relatively stable envi- • Major (> 1 ppm)
ronment changes until at the top of the intertidal zone • Minor (< 1 ppm)
(including the area influenced by wave splash and spray) b. Organic solutes
it merges with the unstable, terrestrial environment with
diurnal and seasonal changes in temperature, light, humid- On average, seawater is composed of 96.52% water
ity, wind, and variable salinity due to rainfall and evapo- and 3.49% dissolved substances, mostly salts. The latter
The Environment 3

TABLE 1.1
Concentrations of the Principal Ions in Seawater in Moles
per Kilogram, in Parts per Thousand by Weight, and in Percent
of Total Salts
Percent by Percent of
Ion Moles kg–1 Weight Total Salts

Chloride (Cl–) 0.549 18.980 55.2


Sulfate (SO42–) 0.0762 2.649 7.71
Bicarbonate (HCO3–) 0.0023 0.140 0.35 negative ions
Bromide (Br–) 0.008 0.065 0.19 (anions) = 21.861%
Borate (H2BO3–) 0.0004 0.026 0.07
Fluoride (F–) 0.000004 0.001 0.0001
Sodium (Na+) 0.468 10.556 30.40
Magnesium (Mg++) 0.532 3.70 3.70
Calcium (Ca++) 0.0103 0.400 1.16 positive ions
Potassium (K++) 0.0099 0.400 1.10 (cations) = 12.621%
Strontium (Sr++) 0.0002 0.013 0.035
Overall total salinity = 34.482%

can be conveniently grouped into major and minor con- The international standard method of estimating salinity
stituents. The major constituents, which are found every- was based on determination by titration of the chlorine
where in the ocean in virtually the same relative propor- content (chlorinity) of the water (see Strickland and Par-
tions, are termed conservative elements. The minor sons, 1972), and the salinity was calculated from the rela-
constituents, on the other hand, show marked variations tionship: S‰ = 1.8065 Cl‰ (Sharp and Cuthbertson,
in their relative concentrations due to selective removal 1982). This definition assumes, among other things, that
from the water by living organisms, and are termed non- all organic matter is oxidized, the carbonates are converted
conservative elements. to oxides, and the bromide and iodide have been replaced
The major constituents, comprising 99.9% of all dis- by chloride. Titration is time consuming, and various types
solved salts, are sodium, magnesium, calcium, potassium, of conductivity salinometers are now used for the deter-
and strontium cations and the chloride, sulfate, carbonate, mination of salinity. Thus, the practical salinity of a sam-
bicarbonate, and bromide anions, together with boric acid ple of seawater is defined in terms of the conductivity
mostly in the undissociated state (Table 1.1). The most ratio, K15, which is defined by:
important nonconservative constituents are the major plant
nutrients, phosphates and nitrates, together with silicon, Conductivity of the seawater sample
K 15 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
which is required by diatoms for the construction of their Conductivity of standard KCl solution
frustules and by radiolarians for their skeletons.
In addition to the dissolved inorganic substances, sea- at 15°C and 1 atmosphere pressure, the concentration of
water, especially at inshore locations, contains appreciable the standard KCl being 32.3456 gram kg–1. The practical
amounts of organic material, both particulate (detritus) salinity is related to the ratio K15 by a complicated equation.
and dissolved. The role of organic matter in material Other methods of determining salinity include the
cycling and in shore food webs will be dealt with in later refractometer, which measures light refraction and the
sections of this book. hydrometer, which measures density.
The concentrations of the dissolved substances in sea- In the open sea salinities commonly range from 32.00
water provide a means of determining the salt content of to 37.00. The differences reflect local effects of evaporation,
seawater. The total amount of inorganic material dissolved rain, freezing and melting of ice, or the influx of river water.
in seawater expressed as weight in grams per kilogram (or Certain seas have markedly higher or lower salinities: the
parts per thousand) is termed the salinity, and is usually Mediterranean, due to high evaporation and little freshwater
around 35 gram kg–1, or 35 parts per mille. Until the early influx, has salinities ranging from 38.40 to 39.00; the Baltic,
1980s, salinity values were expressed in parts per thou- which is a large brackish water body, ranges from 10.00 at
sand, or per mille, for which the symbol is “‰,” with the the mouth to 3.00 at the northern extremity.
average salinity being 35‰. However, it is now standard Regions where freshwaters mix with seawater are
practice to dispense with the symbol “‰,” because as termed estuarine. In such regions, salinities undergo great
detailed below, salinity is now defined in terms of ratio. variations depending on the state of the tide, the amount
4 The Ecology of Seashores

(Figure 1.2a, b). These two tides appear to pass around


TABLE 1.2 the Earth due to the Earth’s rotation about its axis. The
Salinities of Various Types of Water period of rotation of the Earth-Moon couple, however, is
29.53 D; thus there is an average retardation of the time
Type of Water Salinity (%)
of each tide by 24.5 min.
Freshwater 0–0.5 The same process applies to the couple formed by the
Oligohaline brackish water 0.5–3.0 Earth and the Sun. However, the center of rotation is closer
Mesohaline brackish water 3.0–10.0 to the Sun because of the latter’s greater mass, although
Polyhaline brackish water 10.0–17.0 the tide-generating forces are approximately 46% of those
Oligohaline seawater 17–30 produced by the Moon, due to the vastly greater distance
Mesohaline seawater 30–34 of the Sun from the Earth. Thus, there are two pairs of
Polyhaline seawater 34–38
tides with different periodicities. Those caused by the Sun
Brine > 38
occur at intervals of 12 h, while those caused by the Moon
occur at intervals of 12.4 h. These two tides drift in and
of freshwater input from the inflowing rivers and streams, out of phase over a period of c. 14.7 days. When the tides
and in some land-locked systems, the balance between caused by the Sun coincide with those caused by the
rainfall and evaporation. On the basis of the range of Moon, they result in maximal high and low tides, called
salinities encountered, the various types of water can be spring tides. When the two tides are out of phase, tidal
classified in the categories listed in Table 1.2. The varia- rise and fall are at a minimum; these are called neap tides.
tions in salinity that occur in estuaries and lagoons will Thus, spring and neap tides are related to the phases of
be dealt with in Section 4.4. the Moon as shown in Figures 1.2c and d. Theoretically
The important biological effects of salinity variations this results in a semidiurnal tidal pattern, with two tidal
are the consequences of movement of water molecules maxima and two minima in each lunar day, with a lag of
along water potential gradients and the flow of ions along a little under an hour between the corresponding tides on
electrochemical gradients (Lobban et al., 1985). These successive days (Figure 1.2). However, the actual situation
processes are regulated in part by semipermeable mem- is not as simple as this, as tides with unequal highs and
branes that surround cells, chloroplasts, vacuoles, etc. unequal lows occur, and in some cases there is only one
Estuarine organisms and those living in tide pools on tide per day.
rocky coasts, especially those high on the shore, are sub- The inclination of the Earth’s axis at 23.5° off the
ject to salinity fluctuations, and they must cope with the vertical (relative to the plane of the Earth’s orbit about the
osmotic stress that this entails. When exposed to the air Sun), and the 5° inclination of the Moon’s orbital plane
by receding tides, evaporation causes an increase in the to the orbital plane of the Earth are the causes of inequal-
salinity of surface films on seaweeds and the soft part of ities in the magnitude of the two tides each day at certain
animals. Rainfall, on the other hand, results in a decrease latitudes and at different times of the year.
in the salinity of these surface films.
1.3.3 TIDAL RANGE AND PROPORTIONS
1.3.2 TIDES
In general, tidal cycles are of three types (Figure 1.3).
Tides are caused by the gravitational pull of the Sun and Diurnal tides have one high and one low per day; this is
Moon on the Earth, and their regular variations in height an unusual type, occurring in parts of the Gulf of Mexico.
and time result from the regular differences in the posi- Semidiurnal tides rise and fall twice a day, with successive
tions of the Sun and Moon to each other (Figure 1.1). highs and lows more or less equal in height; this type is
The Earth and the Moon together rotate around a com- common along open Atlantic Ocean and New Zealand
mon point (C) called the center of rotation. Any point on coasts (Figure 1.3). Mixed tides occur twice a day with
the surface of the Earth (or Moon) is subjected to two unequal highs and lows (Figure 1.4). They are character-
forces: a centrifugal force tending to displace it away istic of Pacific and Indian Ocean coasts, as well as in
from C, and the gravitational acceleration of the Moon smaller basins such as the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of
tending to displace it toward the Moon. If two points A St. Lawrence (Gross, 1982). In addition, there are storm
and B on the opposite sides of the Earth are considered, tides with irregular periods, usually of several days,
both the magnitude and vectorial sum of these forces will caused by barometric changes and winds.
be different, since A lies further from the center of rota- Spring tides occur on average about every 14 days.
tion than B. The vectorial sum of the forces at both A However, this period is not quite constant. During the year,
and B will be directed perpendicularly away from the the spring tides narrow their range while the neap tides
Earth’s center. This causes the seawater to be displaced widen their range until there is a long period with inde-
to form two high tides on the opposite sides of the Earth terminate tides, and then the tides that were spring become
The Environment 5

FIGURE 1.1 Tides. (a) Tide-generating forces. C, center of rotation of the Earth-Moon couple (vertical line axis of rotation). A, B,
diametrically opposite points on the Earth’s surface. The gravitational acceleration of the Moon on point B(m’) is greater than on
A(m’’). The centrifugal force acting on B(cf’’) is less than on A(c’’). Tide-generating forces (arrows below Earth) are the vectorial
sum of gravitational and centrifugal forces at A and B (broad arrows). (b) Inequality of tides. (c), (d) spring and neap tides, respectively.
See text for explanation. (From Harris, V.A., Sessile Animals of the Seashore, Chapman & Hall, London, 1990, 6. With permission.).
6 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 1.2 Tide chart for Fort Denison, Sydney, Australia, showing predicted height of successive tides throughout the month of
January and the corresponding phases of the moon (based on tidal predictions for 1987). (From Harris, V.A., Sessile Animals of the
Seashore, Chapman & Hall, London, 1990, 9. With permission.)

neaps and the neaps become springs. This change takes zero tide. The definition of this level varies from country
place about every 12 to 14 months. Spring/neap tide dif- to country and even from coast to coast in the same coun-
ferences reach a maximum twice a year near the vernal try. Predicted tides are given in tide tables published by
and autumnal equinoxes. the appropriate agency in each country. However, the
The height of the waterline on the shore is measured actual height reached at high and low water may depart
with reference to a standard level, the Chart Datum, or from these predictions due to difference in barometric

FIGURE 1.3 Diagram illustrating the three main tidal regimes: (a) diurnal (one high and one low tide each lunar day; (b) mixed
tides (with highs and lows of different heights each lunar day); (c) semidiurnal (with only a slight difference between the two high
tides on each lunar day). HHW = High high water; LHW = Low high water; HLW = High low water; LLW = Low low water.
The Environment 7

FIGURE 1.4 The nomenclature of tidal levels for springs and neaps, showing the extent of the range and tidal rise and fall as related
to “Chart Datum.”

pressure and wind (see Figure 2.28). A rise in barometric is a significant change in the percentage of submergences
pressure equivalent to 2.4 cm of mercury is sufficient to between EHWN and MHWN. From EHWN up, the plants
depress the water level by approximately 29 cm. Strong and animals on the shore will be subject to increasing
winds tend to hasten or retard the arrival of the tidal crest periods of continuous exposure to air. Those above
as it progresses along a coastline. MHWN will generally experience several days each fort-
The configuration of the land masses may impede night without tidal submergence, and the higher they are
water movement and markedly delay the tide in different on the shore, the longer will be the period of continuous
areas of a coastline. In deep narrow inlets and estuaries, emergence until above MHWN; this period may last sev-
the high and low tides may be several hours later at the eral weeks.
head than at the entrance. In the open sea, the effects of A significant change in the percentage of exposure
the Moon’s gravitational pull is spread over a wide area also occurs between MLWN and MLWS. From levels
producing a tidal bulge no more than 0.5 cm high. This below ELWS, where submersion and emersion occur
explains why some small oceanic islands have small tidal twice daily, the percentage of emergences decreases rap-
ranges seldom exceeding 1.0 m. This contrasts with 17 m idly, until below MLWS the plants and animals are uncov-
spring tides in the Bay of Fundy, Canada, the 13 m tides ered only a few times a year at the ELWS tides. The annual
in the Severn Estuary, England, and the 12+ m tides in percentage of exposure to air for various levels on the
Northern Australia. shore can be plotted from tidal records to produce an
By averaging the height of the tidal oscillations, hor- emersion curve. Two such curves are shown in Figure 1.6,
izontal lines can be imagined on the shore representing one for Taylors Mistake, New Zealand (Knox, 1953) and
various tidal levels as depicted in Figure 1.4. These tidal one for Holyhead in Great Britain (Lewis, 1964). The
levels are used when referring to tidal ranges and are difference in the rate of change of percentage exposure to
useful when defining the positions of plants and animals air is greatest in the vicinity of high and low water neaps.
on the shore. Table 1.3 gives definitions of the terms and Such levels are often referred to as “critical levels” (Doty,
the common abbreviations used when referring to the 1946), and the concept will be dealt with in detail in
tidal levels. Section 2.3.8.
It should be pointed out that the impact of changes in
1.3.4 SUBMERSION AND EMERSION the percentage exposure to air as deduced from tide tables
is subject to modification by wave action, climatic con-
If the percentage monthly submergence at high tide and ditions, and the times at which low water occurs. This is
the percentage monthly exposure at low tide for a given illustrated in Figure 1.6, where the rise and fall of three
locality are plotted (Figure 1.5), it can be seen that there consecutive spring tides during the midsummer on the
8 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 1.3
Tidal Terms and Definitions
Term Abbreviation Definition

Extreme high-water spring EHWS The highest level reached by the sea on the greatest spring tides of the year.
Mean high-water spring MHWS The average of the higher levels reached by the sea on the fortnightly
spring tides.
Mean high-water neap MHWN The average of the lowest high waters reached by the sea on the fortnightly
neap tides.
Extreme high-water neap EHWN The lowest of the high waters reached by the neap tides during the year.
Mean tide level MTL The average of the high and low waters throughout the year.
Extreme low-water neap ELWN The highest of the low waters reached by the neap tides during the year.
Mean low-water neap MLWN The average of highest low waters reached by the sea on the fortnightly
neap tides.
Mean low-water spring MLWS The average of lowest levels reached by the sea on the fortnightly spring
tides.
Extreme low-water spring ELWS The lowest level reached by the sea on the greatest spring tides of the year.

FIGURE 1.5 Annual percentage exposure to air at various levels on the shore. A. Taylors Mistake, South Island, New Zealand.
(Redrawn from Knox, G.A., Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z., 83, 193, 1953. With permission.) B. Holyhead, Great Britain. (Redrawn from
Lewis, J.R., The Ecology of Rocky Shores, English University Press, London, 1964, 25. With permission.)
The Environment 9

FIGURE 1.6 Comparison of exposure to sun during daytime tidal cycles near Sydney, Australia. (a) During neap tides, organisms
on the middle shore are immersed during the period of maximum insolation (stippled). (b) Maximum periods of exposure to the sun
occur c. 2 days before maximum spring tides, when low tide occurs between 13:30 and 15:30 hours. MTL, mean tide level; MHWS,
mean high water spring tides; MLWS, mean low water spring tides. (Redrawn from Harris, V.A., Sessile Animals of the Seashore,
Chapman & Hall, London, 1990, 10. With permission.)

coast of Sydney, New South Wales, Australia, has been the upper shore may not be submerged for several days
plotted (Figure 1.6a), together with three neap tides occur- in succession, in contrast to the spring tides, during which
ring 7 days later (Figure 1.6b). Solar radiation at these at least one period of submergence occurs each day.
times would have been most intense during the middle of
the day (10.00 to 15.00 local time), but the impact of the 1.3.5 MODIFYING FACTORS
sun at high temperatures would have been very different
on the two occasions. During spring tides, the middle So far our discussion of tidal rise and fall has been con-
shore would be exposed to the sun throughout the low tide cerned with the predicted levels of rise and fall giving
period, subjecting both the plants and animals on the shore average tidal heights and exposure times. As already noted,
to severe stress. On the other hand, during neap tides the there are departures from predicted levels for a variety of
shore would be covered during the middle of the day, thus reasons, and it should be emphasized that one single period
the plants and animals would not be subject to stress. of extreme conditions may be critical for many species. In
During the hours of darkness, there would be no harmful addition, the operation of the tidal factor varies throughout
impact of sunlight and increased temperatures, and it the year, from month to month as well as from week to
would be expected that the activity of the animals would week and day to day. It also operates with different inten-
increase at such times. During neap tides, organisms on sity at different stages in the life cycle of many intertidal
10 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 1.7 Features of a progressive wave.

organisms. A period of continuous exposure to air that may loss before it is expended against some distant coast. In
be tolerated by an adult plant or animal might well be fatal the Southern Hemisphere, huge swells generate very large
to a newly settled sporeling or larval stage. waves that crash on exposed western coasts. When a wave
The effect of the tidal factor is also subject to alteration breaks against a vertical cliff, its velocity is abruptly
by a range of modifying factors, as they are sometimes brought to zero, causing sudden pressure changes. Harger
called. These have previously been listed as wave action, (1970) found that the mean wave impact ranged from 1.4
topography (including aspect and angle of slope), the × 103 N m–2 to 9 × 105 N m–2 (i.e., from c. 0.01 to 9
nature of the substratum, climatic factors (climate), and a atmospheres) on the coast of California. Pressures during
variety of biotic interactions of which competition and storms could rise considerably above these values.
predation are the most important. Water particles within a wave oscillate clockwise in a
circular motion that is equal to the height of the wave
1.3.5.1 Wave Action (Figure 1.8). This orbital motion decreases with depth until
at the depth of half the wavelength, the orbital motion
This is perhaps the most important single factor that mod- becomes negligible. As the wave approaches shallow water,
ifies the vertical range of organisms on the shore and the its advance becomes slowed, and the wave form changes
species composition of the communities found there. In when the depth becomes less than half the wave length.
addition, on soft shores, wave action is an important agent Friction with the seabed causes the water particles to move
in molding the shore profile and determining the type and in an ellipse, and the particles over the seafloor move more
distribution of the sediment; on hard shores it is the prin- or less backward and forward. As a result of this friction,
cipal erosive agent. Wavecut platforms are prominent fea- the deeper water in the wave lags behind the wave crest,
tures of hard shore topography and shore slope, crevicing, the wave shortens, and the crest tends to overhang the
channeling, and undercutting. The presence of boulders trough until a point is reached where it topples over and
and pebbles are consequences of wave action combined breaks. This occurs when H/L = 1/7 and the water depth =
with the weathering of rocks of different geological com- 1.3 H. The wave then surges up the shore as the “wash.”
position and hardness. Breakers are of three types: spilling, plunging, and
Waves — Waves are generated by wind stress on the surging. Plunging breakers occur when circumstances
water surface, with friction between air and water causing cause the water particles under the crest to travel faster
a viscous drag which stretches the surface like an elastic than the wave crest itself and the crest then plunges into
membrane. This distortion by the wind and its restoration the wave trough ahead as a water jet. Spilling breakers
by surface tension generates the undulations that we call (Figure 1.9) occur when the maximum vertical accelera-
waves. Thus, waves transfer energy from winds at sea to tion in the wave motion increases until it exceeds the
the coastal zone. downward gravitational motion. The water particles then
Basic wave features are illustrated in Figure 1.7. Wave start popping out of the wave surface.
length (L) is the horizontal distance between successive The type of breaker is determined by two factors, the
crests, and wave height (H) is the vertical height from deepwater wave steepness (H/L) and the beach slope (Fig-
trough to crest. The time required for successive crests to ure 1.10). Spilling breakers occur when steep waves reach
pass a fixed point is the wave period (T). The wave steep- a gently sloping beach, while plunging breakers occur on
ness is H/L and the wave speed C = L/T. The height and all slopes, but with a lower wave steepness. The third type
period of a wave, and hence its energy, are related to the of breaker, the surging breaker, occurs with very low wave
velocity, time, and fetch (the unobstructed distance over steepness and steep beach slope. Here the wave does not
which it has been blowing) of the wind that generated it. break, but surges up the beach face and then is reflected
Ocean swell can transfer prodigious amounts of energy, back to the sea. There is not a sharp transition between
generated by storms at sea, over vast distances with little these types and they grade into each other.
The Environment 11

FIGURE 1.8 Particle motion in waves.

Wave energy is dissipated in the breaker zone. Spilling there is a mass flow of water shoreward. Water accumu-
breakers dissipate their energy gradually, while plunging lated on the beach by the waves is discharged out of the
breakers dissipate it forcibly. The dissipated energy sus- surf zone by rip currents (see Chapter 3).
tains a “set-up” (or rise) of the mean water level within When the wave motion reaches the bottom, the wave
the breaker zone. At the surface, within the breaker zone, decelerates. Such a change in one section of the wave

FIGURE 1.9 Wave setup for spilling breakers. (After Swart, D.H., in Sandy Beaches as Ecosystems, McLachlan, A. and Erasmus,
T., Eds., Dr. W. Junk Publishers, The Hague, 1983, 19. With permission.)
12 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 1.10 Types of wave breaking as a function of wave steepness and beach slope. (After Kjeldsen, S.P. and Olsen, G.B.
(1972). Redrawn from McLachlan, A., Erasmus, T., Eds., Sandy Beaches as Ecosystems, Dr. W. Junk, 1983, 17. With permission.)

causes a change in direction. This refraction, or bending ters to measure wave forces (Jones and Demetropoulos,
of waves as they approach the shore, tends to align them 1968) can provide quantitative data.
to the contours of the coastline. Waves approaching a It is customary in discussing the impact of wave action
headland meet the shallower water sooner. Consequently, to use the term “exposed” to describe its severity. This is
they converge on the headland and diverge and spread out difficult to quantify, but a number of attempts have been
in the bays. This tends to focus the wave energy on the made to categorize shores from the viewpoint of wave
headlands and dissipate it in the bays (Figure 1.11). Con- exposure (Guiler, 1959; Ballantyne, 1961; Lewis, 1964;
vergence of wave energy also occurs over raised areas of Rasmussen, 1965; Dalby, 1980). Table 1.4 lists the cate-
the seabed, such as reefs and bars. In Chapter 3 we shall gories and the bases upon which they have been estab-
consider in detail the constructive and destructive effects lished for several of these attempts. The categories of
of waves on beaches. Guiler and Rasmussen are based on physical data, whereas
A major factor complicating the action of waves on those of Ballantyne and Lewis are based on the use of
rocky shores in particular is the topography of the shore, biological indicator organisms, with each category estab-
which can completely upset expectation of the effect of lished on the abundance of a series of such indicator organ-
waves based solely on considerations of wind strength and isms. In the succeeding chapters in this book, the catego-
direction and length of fetch. In general, the more gentle ries defined by Lewis (1964) are used. “Very exposed”
the slope and the more extensive the shore, the less the shores are those found on headlands, stacks, and offshore
wave effect, as the energy is dissipated low on the shore islands subject to strong swell and violent wave action,
with the result that the upper parts are little affected by while “very sheltered” shores are found at the headwaters
splash and spray. To the leeward side of promontories, or of deep inlets where wave action is virtually absent.
in sheltered bays and estuaries, the force of the waves is Where waves and swell are constantly experienced,
greatly diminished, and in landlocked fjords or lochs the their general effect is to raise the effective tidal levels (see
effect of the waves is reduced to virtually zero. In these Section 2.3.1 for a detailed discussion). This leads to a
quiet waters, only locally generated waves of low energy clear quantitative difference in the vertical distribution of
lap the shore. On hard shores, the impact of the waves is the plants and animals on the shore. In addition, there is
complicated by local conditions, with wave action varying a qualitative difference in the kinds and numbers of spe-
greatly on the seaward and landward sides of stacks, rocks, cies present between sheltered and wave-exposed shores.
boulders and reefs, and the angle of slope of the shore. Many species cannot tolerate wave exposure and are only
With increasing steepness of slope, wave action tends to found on sheltered shores, while other species cannot live
be more violent, and the level reached by splash and spray on shores where wave action is absent or slight.
extends higher up the shore. Because of these variations, Rapidly moving water caused by waves also exerts a
it is very difficult to establish specific categories of expo- strong lateral force (drag) on any plant or animal that
sure to wave action based solely on physical data. How- projects above the substratum. However, the direction
ever, developments in instrumentation using dynamome- from which this force comes is unpredictable and varies
The Environment 13

FIGURE 1.11 Wave refraction.

from moment to moment, but nevertheless the species the water is turbulent. Figure 1.12 illustrates the turbulent
regularly exposed to such conditions have evolved many flow over an irregular shore at four stages during a tidal
adaptations to cope with them. cycle. It can be seen that the intensity and direction of the
In order to understand processes such as exchange of water flow vary not only with the state of the tide but with
gases, uptake of minerals, and settlement of sporelings by the contours of the surface. Such variations will impact
plants, and the processes of respiration, filter feeding, and on the processes discussed above.
larval settlement in animals, there is a need to know some-
thing about water flow close to surfaces (Lobban et al., 1.3.5.2 Topography and Aspect
1985). As water flows over a surface, the velocity
decreases toward the surface because of the drag that is The effects of topography on the distribution of intertidal
created. Water flow may be laminar or turbulent, and the organisms is very complicated due to the enormous variety
slow-moving velocity boundary layer is much thinner if of shores ranging from mudflats through sand-mud
14 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 1.4
Wave Exposure Scales for Hard Shores
Ballantyne Lewis Rasmussen
(1961) (1964) (1965) Coast Type

1. Extremely exposed 1.Very exposed Open


2. Very exposed Class A Open
3. Exposed 2. Exposed Open
4. Semi-exposed 3. Semi-exposed Class B Protected outer
5. Fairly sheltered Class D Protected outer
6. Sheltered 4. Sheltered Class E Inlets and estuaries
7. Very sheltered 5. Very sheltered Inlets and estuaries
8. Extremely sheltered Inlets and estuaries

beaches, sand beaches, pebble beaches, and boulder drain rapidly as the tide falls or the waves recede after
beaches to wide rock platforms and steep vertical cliffs. impact. On the other hand, undulating platforms and gen-
In addition, the type of rock, whether soft and friable, hard tle slopes will retain water and dry out more slowly, while
and resistant to erosion, or smooth or rough, is important the presence of tide pools can complicate distribution pat-
in determining the kinds and numbers of species present. terns considerably. The desiccating effects of emersion are
Where the rock shores are steep and smooth, they will mitigated on the latter type of shore, and consequently

FIGURE 1.12 Water currents along an irregular shore at four stages during a tidal cycle, showing the complexities of water flow.
The sizes of the arrows indicate relative current strengths. The seven transects marked by dashed lines were categorized into five
current regimes (a–e): (a) sheltered back eddy with no measurable currents; (b) moderate ebb (0.20–0.25 m sec–1) and very reduced
flood; (c) moderate ebb (0.35 m sec–1) and flood (0.20 m sec–1); (d) strong ebb (0.40–0.60 m sec–1) and very reduced flood; (e) strong
ebb (0.80 m sec–1) and moderate flood (0.20–0.25 m sec–1). The most exposed transects (d and e) exhibited erratic pulsations of water
motion during ebb tide. (Redrawn from Matheson, A.C., Tveter, E., Daly, M., and Howard, J., Botanica Marina, 20, 282, 1977. With
permission.)
The Environment 15

FIGURE 1.13 A diagrammatic section through Brandon Island, British Columbia, with the coast of Departure Bay in the background:
A–J, lower limit of terrestrial lichens; D–K, upper limit of main barnacle population; b, lower limit of Chthalamus subzone; E–L,
upper limit of main Fucus population; G–N, lower limit of most barnacles; H, upper limit of ‘beard’ zone; L, low water of a low
spring tide. (From Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A., Life between the Tidemarks on Rocky Shores, W.H. Freeman & Co., San
Francisco, 1972, 211. With permission.)

there is an upward extension of the upper limits of many vulgata occurred at higher levels on the shore on shaded
species. Dipping strata and rocks that weather easily pro- surfaces than on illuminated ones, and the effect was more
vide overhangs and caves under or in which light is pronounced when the shaded surface coincided with expo-
reduced and humidity increased. The slope of the shore sure to intense wave action.
plays an important role in modifying the effects of wave Stephenson and Stephenson (1961; 1972) carried out
action; on angled slopes the waves sweep higher up the a detailed survey of the intertidal flora and fauna of Bran-
shore and steep faces increase the effects of spray from don Island in Departure Bay, British Columbia. The island
strong wave action. This is reflected in the upward exten- is largely sheltered from wave action, and while the north-
sion of the vertical ranges of many species. Thus, one of ern side consists of steep shaded cliffs, the southern side
the important effects of variations in topography is to slopes gently and is exposed to the sun (Figure 1.13). The
modify the effects of wave action. zonation patterns on each of the two coasts are markedly
Another related factor is the shore aspect or a partic- different, despite the similarity of the tidal range and wave
ular region of a shore. Typically, organisms extend higher action on each side of the island. Figure 1.14 illustrates
up the shore on the shaded sides of boulders and gullies the relation of the zone boundaries to some eight tidal
than on the sides exposed to the sun. Shaded positions levels. Line A marks the lower limit of terrestrial lichens
mitigate the problems of desiccation and thermal stress, on both coasts and lies very close to level I (the maximum
and when coupled with strong wave action allow a signif- higher high water). Lines D and K show the upper bound-
icant upshore extension of sublittoral organisms (for aries of barnacles on the south and north coasts, respec-
examples see Lewis, 1954a,b). While organisms that live tively. Line D lies between levels 4 and 5, the minimum
high on the shore are more resistant to desiccation and of higher low waters, while line K corresponds with levels
thermal stress, they are nevertheless affected by aspect. 2 and 3, which coincide as the maximum higher low
Evans (1947) demonstrated that the British limpet Patella waters and the minimum higher high waters. Thus, the
16 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 1.14 The relation of some zone boundaries to tide levels at Brandon Island, Departure Bay, British Columbia. (From
Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A., Life between the Tidemarks on Rocky Shores, W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, 1972, 13.
With permission.)

barnacle limit differs in relation to tidal levels on the two steep, the bands are narrow; where the range of the tides is
shores. Line H indicates the beard (brown birdlike and great, or where the slope of the beach is gentle, the zones
mosslike algae) zone on the south coast, which is almost are wide. Heavy wave action widens the zones and the upper
the same as that of the large anemone, or Metridium (M. and lower boundaries tend to become less distinct.
senile fimbricatum) zone on the north coast, both at tide Superimposed on this vertical zonation pattern is a
level 8, the maximum of lower low waters. Other zonal gradient in species diversity at various levels on the shore.
limits also differ on the two shores. Stephenson and Higher up the shore, environmental conditions become
Stephenson (1972) point out that such differences in the more extreme, and the abundance and distribution of the
zonation patterns must be largely due to the slope and organisms there will be controlled by physical factors such
aspect of the respective shores, although tidal level must as extremes of temperature and desiccation. Thus, there is
also play a part in controlling the distribution patterns. a reduction in the number of species higher up the shore
(Knox, 1953). This pattern of species abundance where
1.3.5.3 Climatic Factors species diversity is high at the lower tidal levels and
decreases up shore occurs in both plants and animals,
Climatic factors such as temperature, humidity, degree of although other factors such as competition for space and
insolation, rainfall, and amount of ice (in high latitudes) food (see Dayton, 1971; Connell, 1972; Harger, 1970) and
can play an important role in the distribution of plants and predation (Connell, 1961a,b; Paine, 1966; 1971) can have
animals on the shore. These climatic factors interact with important modifying effects on the distribution limits of
the type of substrate, aspect, topography, tidal rise and many species. Figure 1.15 depicts the distribution of the
fall, and wave action. The shore climate will be discussed algae and the major faunal components on a rocky shore
in detail in Chapter 5. at Dalebrook, on the East Cape Peninsula, South Africa. A
number of features are evident in this diagram. First, the
1.4 PATTERNS OF ZONATION ON total number of species present declines with increasing
THE SHORE height on the shore, similar to what occurs on other shores
(see Colman, 1933). Secondly, filter-feeding organisms are
Few features of the shore are more obvious than zonation, dominant lower on the shore, where they are immersed
or the vertical banding of the organisms living there. While longer and are thus able to feed for longer periods of time.
such banding is most clearly evident on hard shores, it At higher levels their biomass is drastically reduced, reflect-
nevertheless occurs to a greater or lesser extent on soft ing the reduced time available for feeding. Herbivores also
shores. In estuaries, as we shall see later, the marsh vegeta- predominate on the lower shore, where they are responsible
tion characteristically exhibits a zonal pattern of the distri- for the reduction that occurs in algal biomass. In contrast,
bution of the component species. Such patterns are one carnivores, which are able to exploit food resources over
response to the impact of tidal rise and fall. Generally, where much of the intertidal zone, are present in smaller densities
the range of the tides is small or the slope of the beach is than their prey organisms.
The Environment 17

FIGURE 1.15 Transect of a rocky shore at Dalebrook, on the East Cape Peninsula, South Africa, showing the number of species
of macrofauna per 2 × 0.5 m2 samples (above) and the distribution of the macrophytes and principal components of the macrofauna.
Note that (a) the number of species decreases toward the unpredictable conditions of the upper shore; (b) the standing stock of algae
is reduced on the lower shore by the effects of grazing by herbivores (principally Patella); (c) the filter feeders decline dramatically
with height on the shore, reflecting the decrease in available feeding time; and (d) the biomass of predators is small but moderately
uniformly spread over the intertidal zone. Biomass data are expressed as grams (ash-free dry wgt m–2). (Redrawn from Newell, R.C.,
The Biology of Intertidal Animals, 3rd ed., Marine Ecological Surveys, Fasherman, Kent, 1979, 3. With permission.)
Hard Shores
2
CONTENTS

2.1 Zonation Patterns on Hard Shores ...........................................................................................................................20


2.1.1 The Shore Environment and Zonation Patterns...........................................................................................20
2.1.2 Zonation Terminology..................................................................................................................................20
2.1.3 Widespread Features of Zonation Patterns ..................................................................................................23
2.2 Zonation Patterns on Representative Shores ...........................................................................................................24
2.2.1 The British Isles ...........................................................................................................................................24
2.2.2 The Northwest Atlantic Shores....................................................................................................................27
2.2.3 The Pacific Coast of North America ...........................................................................................................29
2.2.4 New Zealand ................................................................................................................................................31
2.2.5 South Africa .................................................................................................................................................33
2.3 The Causes of Zonation ...........................................................................................................................................36
2.3.1 Wave Action and Zonation...........................................................................................................................36
2.3.1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................36
2.3.1.2 The Problem of Defining Wave Exposure.................................................................................... 36
2.3.1.3 The General Effects of Wave Action ............................................................................................38
2.3.2 Tidal Currents and Zonation ........................................................................................................................41
2.3.3 Substrate, Topography, Aspect, and Zonation .............................................................................................42
2.3.4 Sand and Zonation .......................................................................................................................................42
2.3.5 Climatic Factors and Zonation.....................................................................................................................44
2.3.5.1 Solar Radiation..............................................................................................................................44
2.3.5.2 Temperature ...................................................................................................................................45
2.3.6 Desiccation and Zonation ............................................................................................................................45
2.3.7 Biotic Factors and Zonation.........................................................................................................................46
2.3.8 Factor Interactions........................................................................................................................................46
2.3.9 Critical Levels ..............................................................................................................................................47
2.4 Hard Shore Microalgae ............................................................................................................................................51
2.5 Hard Shore Micro- and Meiofauna..........................................................................................................................53
2.6 Rocky Shore Lichens ...............................................................................................................................................54
2.6.1 Species Composition and Distribution Patterns ..........................................................................................54
2.6.1.1 British Isles....................................................................................................................................55
2.6.1.2 The sub-Antarctic Region .............................................................................................................55
2.7 Hard Shore Macroalgae ...........................................................................................................................................56
2.7.1 Zonation Patterns..........................................................................................................................................56
2.7.2 Factors Controlling the Lower Limits of Intertidal Microalgae .................................................................56
2.7.3 Factors Controlling the Upper Limits of Intertidal Microalgae..................................................................56
2.8 Key Faunal Components ..........................................................................................................................................58
2.8.1 Mussels .........................................................................................................................................................58
2.8.1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................58
2.8.1.2 Factors Limiting Mussel Zonation................................................................................................59
2.8.1.3 Mussels as a Habitat Structure for Associated Organisms ..........................................................59
2.8.1.4 Role of Mussel Beds in Coastal Ecosystems ...............................................................................60
2.8.2 Limpets .........................................................................................................................................................61
2.8.2.1 Adaptations to Intertidal Living....................................................................................................61

19
20 The Ecology of Seashores

2.8.2.2 Factors Controlling Vertical Distribution......................................................................................61


2.8.2.3 Algal–Limpet Interactions............................................................................................................. 61
2.8.2.4 Limpet–Barnacle Interactions .......................................................................................................62
2.8.2.5 Intra- and Interspecific Interactions ..............................................................................................63
2.8.2.6 Limpet–Predator Interactions........................................................................................................63
2.8.3 Barnacles ......................................................................................................................................................64
2.8.3.1 Adaptation to Intertidal Life .........................................................................................................64
2.8.3.2 Settlement ......................................................................................................................................65
2.8.3.3 Factors Affecting Settlement.........................................................................................................66
2.8.3.4 Variability in Settlement and Recruitment ...................................................................................67
2.8.3.5 Barnacle Distribution Patterns ......................................................................................................68
2.8.3.6 Predation and Other Biotic Pressures ...........................................................................................69
2.9 Special Habitats........................................................................................................................................................70
2.9.1 Boulder Beaches...........................................................................................................................................70
2.9.1.1 Boulder Types................................................................................................................................70
2.9.1.2 The Boulder Environment.............................................................................................................70
2.9.1.3 Disturbance and Boulder Community Structure ..........................................................................72
2.9.2 The Fauna Inhabiting Littoral Seaweeds .....................................................................................................73
2.9.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................73
2.9.2.2 Community Composition ..............................................................................................................73
2.9.2.3 Seasonal Change in Species Composition....................................................................................74
2.9.2.4 Factors Influencing Community Diversity and Abundance .........................................................75
2.9.3 Rock Pools ...................................................................................................................................................76
2.9.3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................76
2.9.3.2 The Physicochemical Environment...............................................................................................77
2.9.3.3 Temporal and Spatial Patterns in the Tidepool Biota ..................................................................77
2.9.3.4 Factors Affecting Community Organization................................................................................. 78
2.9.3.5 Conclusions ...................................................................................................................................79
2.9.4. Kelp Beds .....................................................................................................................................................79
2.9.4.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................79
2.9.4.2 Species Composition, Distribution, and Zonation........................................................................80
2.9.4.3 Kelp Bed Fauna.............................................................................................................................80
2.9.4.4 Reproduction, Recruitment, and Dispersal ...................................................................................82
2.9.4.5 Impact of Grazers on Kelp Communities.....................................................................................82
2.9.4.6 Predation........................................................................................................................................83
2.9.4.7 Growth and Production .................................................................................................................83

2.1 ZONATION PATTERNS ON distribution patterns of intertidal organisms, and have


HARD SHORES shown that such zones are of universal occurrence on
rocky shores, although their tidal level and width is depen-
2.2.1 THE SHORE ENVIRONMENT AND dent on a number of factors, of which exposure to wave
ZONATION PATTERNS action is the most important. More recent reviews of zona-
tion patterns are to be found in Knox (1960; 1963a; 1975),
The vertical distribution of plants and animals on the shore Newell (1979), Lobban et al. (1985), Peres (1982a,b),
is rarely, if ever, random. On most shores, as the tide Norton (1985), and Russell (1991).
recedes, conspicuous bands appear on the shore as a result
of the color of the organisms dominating a particular level 2.2.2 ZONATION TERMINOLOGY
roughly parallel to the water line (Figure 2.1). In other
places, while the bands or zones are less conspicuous and A variety of schemes have been proposed to delineate the
less readily distinguishable, they are rarely, if ever, com- various zones found on rocky shores, and I do not propose
pletely absent. Stephenson and Stephenson (1949; 1972) to review them here. Details of these schemes can be found
and Southward (1958) and Lewis (1955; 1961; 1964) have in Southward (1958), Hedgpeth (1962), Hodgkin (1960),
summarized much of the earlier information on zonation and Lewis (1964). Based on the work of Lewis (1964) and
Hard Shores 21

FIGURE 2.1 A comparison of the widespread features of zonation with an example that complicates them. A coast is shown on
which smooth granite spurs are exposed to considerable wave action. On the middle spur, some of the widespread features are
summarized and the following succession is shown. A, littoral fringe (= Littorina zone), blackened below by myxophyceans; B,
eulittoral (balanoid zone), occupied by barnacles above and lithothamnia below; C, sublittoral fringe, dominated in this case by
laminarians growing over lithothamnia. On the other spurs (foreground and background) the actual zonation from the Atlantic coast
of Nova Scotia is shown. Here the simplicity of the basic plan is complicated by maplike black patches in the littoral fringe, consisting
of Codiolum, Calothrix, and Plectonema; the existence of a strongly developed belt of Fucus (mostly F. vesciculosus and F. endentatus,
in this example) occupying a large part of the eulittoral zone and overgrowing the uppermost barnacles; and a distinct belt of Chondrus
crispus growing over the lower part of the eulittoral zone and largely obliterating the belt of lithothamnia, which, on the middle spur,
extends over the laminarians. (From Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A., Life Between Tidemarks on Rocky Shores, W.H. Freeman,
San Francisco, 1972, 386. With permission.)

Stephenson and Stephenson (1972), who recognized three accounts for the impact of wave action in broadening and
primary zones on marine rocky shores, each characterized extending the vertical height of the zones. This takes into
by particular kinds of organisms, the scheme given in account the actual exposure time and not the theoretical
Table 2.1 and shown in Figure 2.2 will be used in the time as determined from tide tables. In his scheme, Lewis
following discussion. extended the term littoral to include the Stephensons’
In the Stephenson and Stephenson scheme, the inter- supralittoral fringe and called the latter the littoral fringe.
tidal zone is called the littoral zone extending from the The rest of the littoral zone down to the upper limit of the
extreme high water of spring tides (EHWS) to the extreme laminarians is called the eulittoral zone. Lewis did not
low water of spring tides (ELWS). A midlittoral zone distinguish a zone equivalent to the Stephensons’ infralit-
extends from the upper limit of the barnacles down to the toral fringe. In this book, cases where a fringing zone
lower limit of large brown algae (e.g., laminarians). A between the eulittoral and the sublittoral is recognized will
supralittoral fringe straddles EHWS extending from the be called the sublittoral fringe.
upper limit of the barnacles to the lower limit of the As Russell (1991) points out, identification of the
terrestrial vegetation of the supralittoral zone. Its upper primary zones by inspection of a shore is necessarily
limit often coincides with the upper limit of littorinid influenced by the species composition of the topmost layer
snails. Below ELWS is the infralittoral zone, which is the of the communities. He illustrates this in the diagram
upper part of the permanently submerged subtidal or sub- reproduced in Figure 2.3 of the stratification of the algal
littoral zone. Between the upper limits of the infralittoral vegetation of the eulittoral zone on a Netherlands dyke as
zone a fringing zone, between the midlittoral and the described by Den Hartog (1959). At the rock face surface,
infralittoral, the infralittoral fringe, is often distinguished. the entire extent of the zone is covered by the crustose red
The principal difference between the Stephensons’ alga Hildenbrandia rubra. The middle stratum, also of red
scheme and that proposed by Lewis is that the latter algae, has an upper band of Catenella caespitosa and a
22 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 2.1
Table Showing the Principal Zones of Universal Occurrence on Hard Shores
Tidal Level Zone Indicator Organisms

Terrestrial vegetation,
MARITIME ZONE orange and green
lichens

Extreme high water Upper limit of littorinids


of spring tides Melaraphe (=Littorina) neritoides
LITTORAL FRINGE

LITTORAL ZONE
Ligia, Petrobius,
Verrucaria etc.
Upper limit of barnacles
Barnacles
Mussels
EULITTORAL ZONE
Limpets
Fucoids
(plus many other organisms)

Extreme low water Upper limit of laminarians


of spring tides Rhodophyceae
SUBLITTORAL ZONE
Ascidians
(plus many other organisms)

lower band of Mastocarpus stellatus. Finally the outer zonation is a three-dimensional phenomenon and that the
canopy layer consists of large brown (fucoid) algae in four zones defined by the uppermost stratum may conceal a
conspicuous belts, with Pelvetia caniculata at the top, number of other patterns.
followed successively by Fucus spiralis, Ascophyllum As Lobban et al. (1985) point out, there are difficulties
nodosum, and Fucus serratus. This demonstrates that in defining zones on the shore in terms of the organisms

FIGURE 2.2 Diagram showing the effect of exposure to wave action on the intertidal zones of shore in the British Isles. (Modified
from Lewis, J.R., The Ecology of Rocky Shores, English University Press, London, 1964, 49. With permission.)
Hard Shores 23

FIGURE 2.3 Stratification of vegetation in the eulittoral zone of a dyke in The Netherlands. The rock surface (1) bears the encrusting
red alga Hildenbrandia rubra, the second stratum (2) consists of Cantenella caespitosa and Mastocarpus stellatus, and the canopy
(3) comprises, in descending order, Pelvetia canaliculatus, Fucus spiralis, Ascophyllum nodosum, and Fucus serratus. Based on a
diagram in den Hartog (1959). (Redrawn from Russell, G. in Intertidal and Littoral Ecosystems, Ecosystems of the World 24,
Mathieson, A.C. and Nienhuis, P.H., Eds., Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1991, 44. With permission.)

found on them. Floras and faunas change geographically, number of widespread features or tendencies (Stephenson
and while a topographically uniform shore may have a and Stephenson, 1972) as follows:
uniform zonal distribution pattern, a broken shoreline of
varying exposure to wave action and/or a broken substra- 1. Near the high water mark there is a zone that is
tum of irregular rocks and boulders can present a confusing wetted by waves only in heavy weather, but
pattern, with the zones breaking down into patches. How- affected by spray to a greater or lesser extent. The
ever, if comparisons of surfaces with the same exposure, number of species is relatively small, and
slope, and aspect are compared, then like patterns emerge. includes particular species adapted to semiarid
In addition to variability in space, there is also vari- conditions, and belonging to the gastropod genus
ability in time. There are seasonal and successional Littorina, and related genera, or to genera of
changes in the vegetation and in the timing of disturbance snails containing similarly adapted species. Semi-
that make space available for settlement (Dethier, 1984). terrestrial crustaceans, such as isopods of the
The net result is a changing mosaic pattern of distribution. genus Ligia, are also characteristic of this zone.
Vertical limits of many species can vary from year to year 2. The surface of the rock in the zone described
(Figure 2.4), perhaps dependent on variations in emersion- above, especially in the lower part, is blackened
submersion histories. Relative abundances and distribution by encrustations of blue-green algae, or lichens
of species which may be nearly equal competitors change of the Verrucaria type, or both. This is a most
over time (Lewis, 1982). Among the algae, the presence persistent feature of the zone. Depending on the
or absence of a particular species at a given locality can latitude and geographic location, other grey,
be interpreted to mean that conditions there have been green blue-green, and orange lichens (the latter
suitable for its growth since it settled (Lobban et al., 1985). belonging to the genus Caloplaca) paint
Absence, on the other hand, only indicates that at a par- splashes of color on the rocks.
ticular time conditions were unfavorable for the settlement 3. The middle part of the shore typically includes
of the reproductive bodies of that species, such as unfa- numerous balanoid barnacles belonging to gen-
vorable currents or extreme desiccating conditions. era such as Balamus, Semibalanus, Chthalamus,
and Tetraclita. The upper limit of the zone is
2.1.3 WIDESPREAD FEATURES OF ZONATION marked by the disappearance of barnacles in
quantity. Herbivorous and carnivorous gastro-
PATTERNS
pods, especially limpets, whelks, and chitons are
A consideration of the zonation patterns discussed above often abundant. On some shores, algae, espe-
and in the next section (2.2) of this chapter reveals a cially fucoids, may form conspicuous bands.
24 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.4 Year-to-year changes in upper and lower limits of two intertidal kelp species on three transects at an exposed site on
the west coast of Vancouver Island, British Columbia. A gently shelving platform, a rocky point, and a narrow channel are compared.
(Redrawn from Druehl, L.D. and Green, J.M., Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser., 9, 168, 1982. With permission.)

4. The lowest part of the shore is uncovered only northern parts and up to 12°C in part of the Irish Sea and
by spring tides and is characterized by a diverse the southeastern coasts. The range of spring tides varies
assemblage of species. In cold-temperate from 0.6 m to 12 m, although ranges of between 7 and 12
regions, it consists of a forest of brown algae m are more common. Detailed accounts of the zonation
(e.g., laminarians) with an undergrowth of patterns on the shores of the British Isles are to be found
smaller algae, especially reds, between the in Lewis (1964) and Stephenson and Stephenson (1972).
holdfasts. In warm-temperate regions, it may The general pattern of zonation is as follows: (1) a
support (a) a dense covering of simple ascidians littoral fringe dominated by “black” lichens, dark micro-
(e.g., Pyura), (b) a dense mat of small mixed phytes, and littorinid snails, (2) a eulittoral zone domi-
algae, primarily reds, or (c) other communities. nated by various combinations of barnacles, mussels, lim-
pets, snails, and brown (fucoid) and red algae; and (3) a
sublittoral fringe dominated by laminarian algae.
2.2 ZONATION PATTERNS ON Littoral Fringe: The upper limit of the littoral fringe
REPRESENTATIVE SHORES is placed at the junction between the black lichens and the
In this section we will briefly detail the principal zonation band of orange and/or grey lichens above, although on
patterns on a range of shore from both the southern and other shores this latter zone is regarded as the upper littoral
northern hemispheres. From this survey it will be seen fringe. Two species of lichens dominate much of this black
that although there are similarities between the patterns, zone, Verrucaria throughout and Lichina confinis toward
and while some taxa (e.g., barnacles, mussels, herbivorous the upper limit. In wave-swept places, algal growth super-
and carnivorous gastropods, limpets, and some algal spe- imposed on the lichens takes the form of a very fine layer
cies) are found on most shores, there are considerable dominated by cyanophyceans (Calothrix spp. in particu-
differences in the distribution patterns related to the lati- lar), and, more locally, filamentous green and red algae
tude of the shore (affecting seasonal ranges in temperature (Ulothrix, Urospora, and Bangia). Superimposed on this
and other climatic variables), the patterns of the tides, and are the larger red alga, Porphyra umbilicalis, and species
in the species composition of the shore communities. of the green algal genus, Enteromorpha. Most of these
algae are seasonal in occurrence.
2.2.1 THE BRITISH ISLES The lower limit of the littoral fringe is taken as the
upper limit of barnacles in quantity. Where Chthalamus
The British Isles are approximately 1,125 km long and stellatus predominates (in southwestern areas generally
are subject to cool-temperate climatic conditions. The sea- and exposed situations in the west and northwest), the
sonal variation in sea temperatures is roughly 7°C in “barnacle line” is higher than in areas where Balanus
Hard Shores 25

other by exceptionally heavy growths of long-fronded


fucoid algae.

1. Barnacle-dominated shores (Figure 2.6):


Where they are abundant, barnacles can extend
from their sharp upper limit to within a few
centimeters of the topmost laminarians. Bala-
nus balanoides is the most ubiquitous, while
Chthalamus stellatus predominates in the
southwest but is absent from North Sea coasts
and the entire eastern half of the English Chan-
nel. On moderately exposed sites in southwest
England and Wales a third larger species, Bal-
anus perforatus, occupies a belt 60 to 90 cm
high immediately above the laminarians, or
forms isolated patches at higher levels. Since
the late 1940s, the Australasian barnacle, Elm-
inius modestus, has established itself in harbors
and estuaries and along the less exposed coasts,
mainly at the expense of Balanus balanoides.
Associated animals include limpets (Patella
depressa, P. vulgata, and P. aspersa) and
whelks (Gibbula cineraria, G. umbilicalis, and
Nucella lapillus).
2. Fucus-dominated shores (Figure 2.7): As expo-
sure decreases, there is a progressive replace-
ment of barnacle- and mussel-dominated
communities by fucoids, beginning with the
appearance of Fucus vesiculosus f. linearis. Pel-
vetia gradually appears in the littoral fringe and
F. serratus begins to mingle with the low level
Himanthalia. As the larger and sheltered shore
form of F. vesiculosus replaces F. vesiculosus f.
linearis, F. spiralis appears and F. serratus dis-
places Himanthalia. Next, Ascophyllum
FIGURE 2.5 Simplified diagram showing the littoral fringe on: nodosum starts to appear in the flatter and more
A. Balanus shore; B. situations on the north-west coasts where protected places among the F. vesiculosus. This
Chthalamus is confined to exposure; and C. Chthalamus shores process culminates in very sheltered bays and
in the British Isles. (From Lewis, J.R., The Ecology of Rocky locks with luxuriant narrow belts of Pelvetia and
Shores, English University Press, London, 1964, 54. With per- F. spiralis surrounding a midshore belt of long-
mission.) fronded Ascophyllum, with a narrow belt of F.
spiralis just above the laminarians (Figure 2.7).
balanoides is present alone (on the north and east coasts, The relative proportions of the eulittoral zone
and in sheltered areas of the west and northwest). Conse- occupied by Ascophyllum, F. vesiculosus, and
quently, some conspicuous zone-forming plants of narrow F. serratus vary greatly.
vertical range (the lichen Lichina pygmaea and Fucus
spiralis) lie largely within the eulittoral zone on “Chthal- The shade of the fucoids enables Laurencia, Leathe-
amus shores” and partly, or completely in the littoral fringe sia, and other members of the red algal belt to extend
on “Balanus shores” (Figure 2.5). The characteristic ani- upshore, but under the dense growths of Ascophyllum and
mals in the littoral fringe are littorinid snails, Littorina F. serratus they are replaced by lithothamnion. As the
neritoides and L. saxatilus. Other animals are mites, the fucoids develop there is a loss of such open-coast species
thysanuran, Pterobius maritimus, and the eulittoral mol- as Littorina littorea, Patella aspersa, P. depressa, Balanus
luscs, Patella vulgata and Littorina littorea. perforatus, and Mytilus edulis, with its associated fauna.
Eulittoral Zone: At one extreme this zone is domi- The topshell, Gibbula umbilicalis, becomes plentiful
nated by (1) barnacles or mussels (or both), and (2) at the throughout the middle zone and is joined by G. cineraria
26 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.6 A barnacle-dominated face near Hope Cove, South Devon, typical of many exposed and south-facing areas of the
English Channel coast. (From Lewis, J.R., The Ecology of Rocky Shores, English University Press, London, 1964, 78. With permission.)

FIGURE 2.7 Representation of a moderately sheltered Fucus-dominated shore. (From Lewis, J.R., The Ecology of Rocky Shores,
English University Press, London, 1964, 119. With permission.)
Hard Shores 27

and Monodonta lineata in the lower and upper levels, and relatively warm water (often near 20°C, or locally
respectively. Littorina saxatilus is joined by L. obtusata, even higher) in the summer.
mainly in the fucoids, and by large number of L. littorea. Descriptions of zonation patterns on New England
Sublittoral Fringe and Upper Sublittoral: The flora coasts can be found in J.L. Menge (1974; 1975), B.A.
of the sublittoral fringe is characteristically dominated by Menge (1976), B.A. Menge and Sutherland (1976), Lub-
laminarians. Most of the permanently submerged “forest” chenco and Menge (1978), Menge and Lubchenco (1981),
consists of Laminaria hyperborea. Above this species on Mathieson et al. (1991), and Vadas and Elner (1992). The
open coasts, two species predominate — Alaria esculenta basic zonation patterns of the New England coasts are
in very exposed situations, and Laminaria digitata else- depicted in Figure 2.8.
where. They form a continuous narrow belt, typically not Littoral Fringe: The littoral fringe is characterized
more than 30 to 60 cm deep. As L. digitata replaces Alaria by blue-green algae (Calothrix, Lyngbya, Rivularia, etc.)
the undercanopy algal growth becomes more variable and and ephemeral macrophytes (such as Bangia, Blidingia,
luxuriant, and commonly includes species such as Cera- Coliolum, Porphyra, Prasiola, Ulothrix, and Urospora,
mium spp., Chondrus crispus, Cladophora rupestris, Cys- lichens (such as Verrucaria maura), and a periwinkle (Lit-
toclonium purpureum, Delessaria sanguinea, Dictyota torina saxatilis).
dichotoma, Membranoptera alata, Plocamium coc- Eulittoral Zone: On a typical semi-exposed rocky
cineum, Plumaria elegans, Polysiphonia spp., and Rhody- shore, three major zones occur (Lubchenco, 1980): (1) an
menia palmata. upper barnacle zone with Semibalanus balanoides domi-
The fauna of this zone changes from one of relatively nating; (2) a mid-shore brown algal zone with Ascophyl-
large numbers of a few species to one of small numbers lum nodosum and/or Fucus spp.; and (3) a lower red algal
of very many species. A few eulittoral species extend zone with Chondrus crispus and Mastocarpus stellatus.
down into this zone such as Patella aspersa, Gibbula The S. balanoides zone exhibits a conspicuous uplift-
cineraria, Mytilus edulis, and barnacle (Verrucaria stro- ing with increasing wave action, while the brown and red
emia and Balanus crenatus). Sublittoral species that occur, algal zones are compressed and displaced downwards.
depending on the degree of wave exposure, include Barnacles may also extend down into the lower eulittoral
sponges, hydroids, anemones, tubiculous polychaetes, zone, particularly in extremely exposed habitats. Other
bryozoans, and ascidians. species include the predatory dogwhelk, Nucella lapillus,
and the periwinkle, Littorina littorea. On some exposed
2.2.2 THE NORTHWEST ATLANTIC SHORES shores the dwarf fucoid, Fucus distichus ssp. uncaps,
grows on the barnacles. Depending upon wave action and
This encompasses the North American coastline between other associated physical and biological factors, either A.
Cape Cod/Nantucket Shoals and Newfoundland, and nodosum or Fucus spp. will dominate the mid-shore (Lub-
exhibits conspicuous regional differences in temperature, chenco, 1980). As in Europe, A. nodosum is most abundant
tidal fluctuation, ice scouring, wave exposure, and nutrient in sheltered sites and is replaced by F. vesiculosus and F.
enrichment. This area has been extensively studied by a distichus ssp. dentatus with increasing wave exposure.
number of investigators (see references by A.R.O. Chap- Under extreme wave action the fucoids are limited and
man, 1981, 1984, 1990; C.R. Johnson, 1985; C.S. Lobban; Mytilus edulis becomes the major occupier of space in the
J. Lubchenco; K.H. Mann; A.C. Mathieson; B.A. Menge; mid-shore. In the lower eulittoral zone, C. crispus and/or
J.L. Menge; J.D. Pringle, 1987; and R.S. Steneck, 1982, Mastocarpus stellatus dominate at all but the most
1983, 1986. Stephenson and Stephenson (1954a,b; 1972) exposed sites, where mussels are the most abundant mac-
have given accounts of the zonation patterns in Nova roorganism. C. crispus is found mainly on shelving and
Scotia and Prince Edward Island, and Mathieson et al. horizontal surfaces, whereas M. stellatus dominates the
(1991) have recently reviewed northwest Atlantic shores. vertical ones (Pringle and Mathieson, 1987). Substrata
Tidal ranges within the area vary considerably. Aver- with intermediate slopes are populated by a mixture of
age tidal ranges within the Gulf of Maine vary from 2.5 both algae.
to 6.5 m (mean spring tides = 2.9 to 6.4 m), while those In the mid-eulittoral, competition between Mytilus
elsewhere vary from 2.7 to 11.7 m (mean spring tides = edulis and Semibalanus balanoides is the dominant bio-
3.1 to 13.3 m) in the Bay of Fundy, 0.7 to 2.2 m on the logical interaction. Predation and herbivory are the main
Atlantic coast of Nova Scotia, and 0.8 to 1.9 on the coast factors affecting space utilization (Menge and Sutherland,
of Newfoundland. In the Bay of Fundy the annual tem- 1976; Menge, 1978a,b; Lubchenco, 1983; 1986). By clear-
perature range is moderate, the maximum being 1.8°C in ing space, Nucella lapillus and other predators of Mytilus
February to a maximum of 11.4°C in September. Salinities edulis allow the persistence of Fucus vesciculosus and
of the surface waters vary from 30 to 33. For the Atlantic Ascophyllum nodosum on semiprotected and protected
coast of Nova Scotia, intertidal populations are subjected sites, respectively (Keser and Larson, 1984a,b). Both
to very cold waters (sometimes below 0°C) in the winter, fucoids are competitively inferior to many ephemeral
28 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.8 Schematic diagram showing the vertical distribution patterns of major taxa on northwest Atlantic shores. (a) A relatively
exposed shore. (b) A moderately sheltered shore. The vertical distribution is shown by the length of the arrows, while the width
depicts the relative abundance or functional importance. A dashed line indicates a changing or ephemeral, seasonal pattern. (Redrawn
from Vadas, R.L. and Elner, R.W., in Plant-Animal Interactions in the Marine Benthos, John, D.M. and Hawkins, S.J., Eds., Clarendon
Press, Oxford, 1992, 36, 37. With permission.)

algae (such as Enteromorpha spp., Porphyra spp., and The chiton, Tonicella ruber, and the sea urchin, Strongy-
Ulva lactuca.) locentrotus droebachiensis, graze within the lower eulit-
In addition to Mytilus edulis and Semibalanus bal- toral and sublittoral zones. The whelk, Nucella lapillus,
anoides, numerous other invertebrate species, both sessile and two crab species, Carcinus maenas and Cancer irro-
and motile, characterize the eulittoral zone. Several her- tatus, and a starfish, Asterias vulgaris, are important pred-
bivorous crustaceans and gastropods are common (Vadas, ators in both the lower eulittoral and sublittoral zones. The
1985), including amphipods (such as Hyale nilssoni), her- abundance of these species decreases with increasing
bivorous snails (Littorina littorea, L. obtusata, L. saxatilis, wave exposure. This allows M. edulis to achieve domi-
and Lacuna vincta), and limpets (Acmaea testudinalis). nance over Chondrus crispus and Semibalanus balanoides
Hard Shores 29

FIGURE 2.9 Schematic diagram showing the patterns of distribution of the New England sublittoral. (Redrawn from Vadas, R.L.
and Elner, R.W., in Plant-Animal Interactions in the Marine Benthos, John, D.M. and Hawkins, S.J., Eds., Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1992, 44. With permission.)

(Menge, 1976; 1983; Lubchenco and Menge, 1978; Lub- the Aleutian Islands to 20°C near Baja California. Inshore
chenco, 1980). Conversely on sheltered shores, heavy pre- temperatures are affected by coastal upwelling, a seasonal
dation on mussels by the starfish, Asterias spp., the crab, feature most prevalent off California and Baja California.
Carcinus maenas, the lobster, Homarus americanus, and Tides along the northeast Pacific coast are mixed semi-
sea ducks, allow its replacement by the alga C. crispus. diurnal: two highs and two lows occur in each lunar day,
Sublittoral Zone (Figure 2.9): The composition and with successive high and low waters and successive low
ecology of this zone is discussed in detail in Section 2.9.5. waters each having different heights. The difference
It supports a diverse epiflora and epifauna on rocky sub- between high and low tides range from 1.6 to 6.0 m,
strates. Dominant large macroalgae are the kelps Lami- generally increasing with higher latitude. The coastline
naria longicirrus, L. digitata, L. saccharina, and Agarum from Alaska to Baja California includes three main zones:
cribosum. However, other algae such as Desmarestia can cold-temperate, warm-temperate, and tropical.
form extensive beds, and species such as Chondrus dom- There is considerable literature on the ecology of the
inate the understory layer. Crustose corallines such as shores of this region. There are a number of recent reviews
species of Lithothamnion, Clathromorphum, and Phyma- of northeast Pacific shores in general (Carefoot, 1977;
tolithon are ubiquitous (Steneck, 1983; 1986). The prin- Ricketts et al., 1985), rocky shores (Moore and Seed,
cipal predators of sublittoral grazers are lobsters, Homarus 1986; Foster et al., 1988; 1991), and shallow subtidal
americanus, Cancer spp., green crabs, seastars, Asterias rocky reefs (Dayton, 1985b; Foster and Schiel, 1985;
spp., and numerous fish species (see Keats et al., 1987). Schiel and Foster, 1986).
Two alternative community states of the sublittoral There is considerable variation in the zonation pat-
community exist, depending on the population density of terns and species composition both geographically and
the sea urchin, Strongylocentrotus droebachiensis. When locally. Zonation patterns will be described with special
sea urchins are rare, communities of kelp and other mac- reference to central California.
rophytes flourish. Where corallines dominate, the system Littoral Fringe: This zone is only infrequently wetted
(“barrens phase”) is maintained through intense grazing by storm waves and spray. It is mainly bare rock or cov-
by sea urchins (see Figure 2.9). ered with small green and blue-green algae. Larger green
algae (Enteromorpha spp., Ulva spp.) or red (Porphyra
2.2.3 THE PACIFIC COAST OF NORTH AMERICA spp., Bangia vermicularis) algae and masses of benthic
diatoms may be present, especially in winter and spring
The northeast Pacific coastline stretches nearly 2000 km (Cubit, 1975). The few animals that occupy this zone
from Alaska (53°N) to the tip of Baja California (23°N). include the limpet, Collisella digitalis, other gastropods
In the northeast Pacific, temperatures range from 5°C near such as Littorina keenae, and isopods (Ligia spp.).
30 The Ecology of Seashores

Upper Eulittoral: This zone is characterized by Sublittoral Zone: This zone has a marked three-
dense populations of barnacles (Balanus glandula). In dimensional structure provided by large stipate and float-
addition to the barnacles, the algae Endocladia muricata, bearing kelps. Surface-canopy kelps such as Macrocystis
Mastocarpus papillatus, and Pelvetia fastigiata are con- pyrifera occupy the entire water column; stipate kelps
spicuous and characteristic members of this zone. The such as Pterogophora californica and Laminaria spp. may
small periwinkle, Littorina scutulata, the turban snail, form an additional vegetation layer within two meters of
Tegula funebralis, and several species of limpets also the bottom of the kelp forests. A third layer of foliose red
occur in this zone. and brown algae, as well as articulated corallines, is com-
Mid-eulittoral: On moderate to fully exposed mon beneath the understory kelps, with a final layer of
shores, the most conspicuous species are mussels (pre- filamentous and encrusting species on the bottom. There
dominantly Mytilus californianus) and gooseneck barna- is considerable variation in species composition over the
cles (Pollicipes polymerus). Other characteristic species, length of the coastline. Common surface-canopy algae are
especially on the more protected shores, are the preda- Alaria fistulosa in southwestern Alaska, Macrocystis inte-
tory snail, Nucella emarginata, the chitons, Katharina grifolia and Nereocystis leutkeana from eastern Alaska to
tunicata and Nuttallina californica, and the red alga, Pt. Conception, California, and Macrocystis pyrifera from
Iridaea flaccida. near Santa Cruz, California, to Baja California.
Lower Eulittoral: This zone is typically covered by Stephenson and Stephenson (1972) have described in
carpets of the surf-grass (Phyllospadix spp.), various kelps detail the zonation patterns on the coasts of Pacific Grove
(particularly Laminaria setchellii), and a variety of red on the Monterey Peninsula (36° 30’N to 36° 38”N) in
algae. This zone grades into the sublittoral, with its upper central California. Figure 2.10 depicts these patterns on
margin forming the sublittoral fringe. steep slopes with reference to the influence of wave action.

FIGURE 2.10 A comparison of the zonation of steep slopes at different localities in the Pacific Grove region of California. The
various slopes are subject to different types and degrees of wave action. The line across the center of the figure indicates the boundary
between the upper and lower balanoid zones. (From Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A., Life between Tidemarks on Rocky Shores,
W.H. Freeman, San Francisco, 1972, Pl. 16. With permission.)
Hard Shores 31

Littoral Fringe: Two periwinkles, Littorina planaxis Corallina gracilis, C. chilensis, Bossea dichotoma, and
and L. scululata occur in vast numbers. The former con- Calliarthron setchelliae. A distinctive feature of all but
tinues down into the upper eulittoral, while the latter the more exposed shores in the area where M. califor-
extends further down the shore. Other animals character- nianus beds occur is the appearance of the characteristic
istic of this zone are the isopod, Ligia occidentalis, the Pacific coast palmlike laminarian, Postelsia palmaeformis.
crab, Pachygrapsus crassipes, and the limpet, Acmaea Sublittoral Fringe: A number of laminarians are
digitalis. Algae present are encrusting forms, especially characteristic of the sublittoral fringe, especially on steep
Hildenbrandia occidentalis. Blue-green algae cause a slopes. Three species, Egregia menziesii, Alaria margin-
blackening of the rocks (species include Entophysalis ata, and Lessoniopsis littoralis, form a sequence with Les-
granulosa, Calothrix crustacea, Rivularia battersii). soniopsis on the most exposed shores. Other fringe species
Upper Eulittoral: The dominant barnacle is Balanus are the laminarians, Costaria costata, and Laminaria set-
glandula, often occurring in dense sheets. The smaller chellii and Cystoseira osmundacea (Sargassacea). Ani-
Chthalamus fissus is scattered among the Balanus, while mals found in this zone include abalones (Haliotis rufe-
a third species, Tetraclita squamosa, is most abundant in scens and H. cracherodii), seastars (Pisaster ochraceus,
a belt overlapping the junction between the upper and Patiria minuata), and sea urchins (Strongylocentrotus pur-
lower eulittoral. A fourth species, Balanus cariosus, is puratus). The sublittoral is dominated by the laminarians
present but never abundant. Other animals are two small Nereocystis and Macrocystic pyrifera.
whelks, Acanthina lapilloides and Thais emarginata, and
the trochid, Tegula funebralis. The two commonest lim- 2.2.4 NEW ZEALAND
pets are Acmaea scabra and A. digitalis.
Algal growths consist mainly of irregular patches or Zonation patterns on New Zealand coasts will be
tufts of turf algae (a mixture of species including Gigatina described with reference to the central South Island east
papillata, Endocladia muricata, Cladophora trichotoma, coast (Figure 2.11). Descriptions of zonation patterns on
sporelings of Fucus, and small plants of Pelvetia, Por- New Zealand shores will be found in Batham (1956;
phyra, and Rhodoglossum affine). 1958), Knox (1953; 1960; 1963; 1969b; 1975), and Mor-
Lower Eulittoral: All three barnacles that character- ton and Miller (1968).
ize the upper eulittoral extend somewhat into the lower Littoral Fringe: This is subdivided into two sub-
eulittoral, where they are in competition with algal turfs zones: (1) an upper subzone with dense lichen cover com-
and only flourish in clearings. Balanus glandula may be prising the black Verrucaria, yellow-orange species of
plentiful at the top of this zone, Tetraclita is often common, Caloplaca and Xanthoria, and white, grey, or grey-green
and Chthalamus dalli may form dense sheets at the bottom species of Ramalina, Physicia, Lecanora, Placopsis,
of the zone. As exposure increases, dense beds of mussels Parmelia, and Pertusaria; and (2) a lower or black zone
(Mytilus californianus) occur and may extend up into the characterized by blue-green algae and the lichen Verru-
lower part of the upper eulittoral. Another common clump- caria. The mosslike red alga Stichosiphonia arbuscula
forming species is the goose-necked barnacle, Pollicipes often straddle the margin between the littoral fringe and
polymerus. The trochid, Tegula finebralis, may occur in the barnacle zone below. Two species of littorinids, Lit-
vast quantities in this zone. The limpets, Acmaea pelta, A. torina unifasciata and L. cincta are codominant. The
limatula, A. scutum, and A. mitra, all occur here, while the former species extends down to MLWN while the latter
giant limpet, Lottia gigantea, occupies a restricted band extends down to MTL. Several seasonal alga species can
overlapping the upper part of this zone and the lower part extend into the lower zone, including Porphyra spp.,
of the upper eulittoral. Common chitons include Nuttallina Pylarella littoralis, Prasiola crispa, and species of Ecto-
californica, Lepidochiton hartwegii, Mopalia mucosa, and carpus, Ulothrix, Rhizoclonium, Lola, and Enteromorpha.
the large Katharina tunicata. Anemones are also a con- Eulittoral Zone: The upper and mid-eulittoral zones
spicuous feature of the lower eulittoral. Three species are a barnacle-mussel-tubeworm zone. On exposed coasts,
occur, and the smallest, Anthopleura elegantissima, often the small barnacle Chamaesipho columna may dominate
forms extensive sheets in sheltered places. The other two the zone and form an almost complete cover. Where the
larger species are A. xanthogrammica and A. artemisia. surface is broken the small black mussel, Xenostrobus
A conspicuous feature of the sheltered rocks is a pulex, is scattered throughout, while the serpulid tube-
blackish-brown turf of short algae. The species involved worm, Pomatoceros cariniferus, and the blue mussel Myti-
are red algae comprising four species of Gigartina (G. lus galloprovincialis form aggregations in crevices and on
agardhii, G. canaliculata, G. leptorhynchus, and G. pap- ledges. Where surf action is stronger, the larger barnacle
illosa), Rhodoglossum affine, Porphyra perforata, and Epopella plicata joins C. columna to form a mixed com-
Endocladia muricata. Larger plants that occur among the munity. E. plicata, however, does not extend as high as
turf include species of Iridaea. As exposure increases, this C. columna, but in some places it may dominate to the
turf gives way to a coarser coralline turf composed of almost complete exclusion of the latter species below
32

FIGURE 2.11 Diagrammatic representation of the changes that occur in the zonation of the dominant plants and animals on the rocky shores of Banks Peninsula (east coast, South
Island, New Zealand) with increase in shelter from wave exposure. (Modified from Knox, G.A., in The Natural History of Canterbury, Knox, G.A., Ed., A.H. & A.W. Reed, Wellington,
1969, 551. With permission.)
The Ecology of Seashores
Hard Shores 33

MLWN. The barnacles may be replaced by a broad band ture of the lower eulittoral from about MLWN to MLWS
of mussels from EHWN down to MLWN. This “mussel is a well-defined band of large bull kelps, Durvillaea ant-
band” may consist only of the blue mussel, but often the arctica and D. willana, with the former generally higher
ribbed mussel, Aulacomya ater maoriana, may be on the shore than the latter. In some places D. antarctica
codominant or subordinate, and the green-lipped mussel, may be the only species present, while in others the two
Perna canaliculus, may penetrate the lower portion of the species intermingle.
band from below. With increase in shelter, the mussels Depending on the substrate and degree of wave expo-
may be replaced from ELWN down by a thick encrustation sure, the rock surface between the holdfasts may be cov-
of the serpulid tubeworm, Pomatoceros cariniferus. ered with calcareous “lithothamnion” or with encrusting
Throughout both the upper and mid-eulittoral, X. pulex growths of species of Lithophyllum, Melobesia, Crodelia,
may form subzones at any level. A number of other bar- and other calcareous red algae, or with dense mats of
nacle species, Elminius modestus, Tetraclita purpuras- Corallina, Jania, or Amphiura, or may bear a rich under-
cens, and the stalked barnacle, Pollicipes spinosus, may flora of predominantly red algae.
be present, depending on the exposure to wave action. Large animals extending into the lower eulittoral from
Two limpets are characteristic of the “barnacle zone,” the sublittoral fringe are the large chitons Guildingia
Cellana ornata occurring throughout its vertical extent, obtecta, Diaphoroplax biramosa, the pauas Haliotis iris
while C. radians is more characteristic of the mid-eulit- and H. auatralis, the large herbivorous gastropod Cookia
toral. The chiton, Chiton pelliserpentis, is highly charac- sulcata, the whelks Haustrum haustorium and Lepsithais
teristic of coasts of all degrees of exposure. Other species lacunosus, the starfish Patierella regularis, Calvasterias
that occur throughout are the limpets Notoacmea parvi- suteri, Astrostole scabra, and Coscinasterias calamaria,
conoidea, Patelloida corticata, and Siphonaria zelandica. and the sea urchin Evechinus chloroticus.
Herbivorous gastropods include Melagraphia aethiops With a decrease in wave action the Durvillaea is
(above MLW to ELWS), Risellopsis varia, Turbo sma- replaced by a narrow band of the brown alga Xiphophora
ragada, and Zediloma digna, while carnivorous whelks chondrophylla along the upper part of the zone, with Car-
include Lepsiella albomarginata, L. scobina, Neothais pophyllum maschalocarpum below. On some shores
scalaris, and Lepsithais lacunosa. Xiphophora may be replaced by a “mixed” or a Carpo-
Superimposed on the barnacle are a series of bands phyllum turf. The mixed turf is composed of Halopteris
of algae, many of which are seasonal in occurrence. The spp., Glossophora kunthii, Zonaria subarticulata, dwarfed
most constant species are browns, Scytothamnus australis, Cystophora, and species of Polysiphonia, Lophurella, and
replaced by S. fasciculatus on more sheltered shores, from Laurencia. With further increase in shelter, the brown alga
MHWN to MTL, and Splachnidium rugosum from MTL Cystophora scalaris joins Carpophyllum, Xiphophora dis-
to MLWN. Of the reds, Porphyra umbilicalis may be appears, and these two species extend upward to replace
locally abundant in winter and spring throughout the upper it. Two other species of Cystophora may be codominant,
eulittoral. Other seasonal growths in the lower part of the C. retrofexa on the more exposed parts of the range and
mid-eulittoral are the browns Ilea fascia, Scytosiphon lom- C. torulosa in the more sheltered parts.
entaria, Myriogloia, Colponemia sinuosa, Leathesia dif- Sublittoral Fringe: While the dominant Durvillaea,
formis, Adenocystis utricularis, and the greens, especially Cystophora, and Carpophyllum species of the lower eulit-
species of Ulva, Enteromorpha, and Bryopsis. toral may extend varying distances through the sublittoral
With an increase in local shelter, the barnacle, mus- fringe into the sublittoral, the dominant algae change. The
sels, and tubeworms are replaced in the lower portion of dominant species are the brown algae Lessonia variegata
the mid-eulittoral by a Corallina-Hormosira banksii band. and Marginarella boryana. Often a band of red algae
This association may carpet a wide area where wavecut characterizes the sublittoral fringe below the Durvillaea
platforms occur at this level. Below the Hormosira, the or Carpophyllum bands. Many of the species are the same
development of the Corallina turf is rather variable. It as those found beneath the Durvillaea in the lower eulit-
ranges from a pink paint formed by the basal portions of toral. Other large algae characteristic of the sublittoral
Corallina officinalis to a mixed turf of Corallina, Gigar- zone are Cystophora platylobium, Sargassum sinclairii,
tina spp., Echinothamnion spp., Polysiphonia spp., Cham- Ecklonia radiata, and Macrocystic pyrifera.
pia novaezealandiae, and Halopteris spicigera.
Lower Eulittoral: While animals are generally the 2.2.5 SOUTH AFRICA
dominant forms throughout the upper and mid-eulittoral
zones, a sharp change takes place at the boundary of the The southern African region extends from the northern
lower eulittoral. Except for the large mussel, Perna canal- border of Namibia (17°S) to the southern border of
iculis, the catseye topshell, Turbo smargada, and the Mozambique (21°S) (Figure 2.12). The overall length of
stalked ascidian, Pyura pachydermatina, the dominant the coastline is about 4,000 km. The eastern coast is
species are algae. On wave-beaten coasts the salient fea- influenced by the warm Agulhus Current, while the west-
34 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.12 Major oceanographic features around the coast of southern Africa and associated shore communities. (Adapted from
Branch, G.M. and Branch, M.L., The Living Shores of Southern Africa, C. Struik, Cape Town, 1984, 14. With permission.)

ern coast is bathed by the cold Benguela Current. Surface Littoral Fringe — West Coast: The dominant spe-
water in the Agulhus Current ranges from 21 to 26°C cies is Littorina africana var. knysnaensis. As on the south
and the salinity is 35.4. Along the west coast there are coasts it is invaded by species from below, the three spe-
regions of upwelling of cold water (8 to 14°C). On the cies listed for the south coast plus outliers of the limpet,
east coast, mean monthly sea surface temperatures range Patella granularis. Patches of Bostrychia mixta and
from 22°C in the winter to 27°C in the summer, while clumps of Porphyra capensis are locally abundant.
on the south coast they range from 15 to 22°C, respec- Eulittoral Zone — East Coast: The upper eulittoral
tively. The entire region is subject to a simple diurnal is populated primarily by barnacles and limpets. The prin-
tidal regime, with a spring-tide amplitude of some 2 to cipal barnacle species are Chthalamus dentatus, Tetraclita
2.5 m and a neap-tidal range of about 1 m. Three bio- serrata, and Octomeris angulosa. The limpets are Patella
geographic provinces can be distinguished: East Coast concolor, P. granularis, and Cellana capensis and species
Subtropical, South Coast Warm Temperate, and West of Siphonaria. Another characteristic species is the oyster,
Coast Cold Temperate. Saccostrea cucullata. A very common snail is Oxystele
Vertical zonation (Figure 2.13) has been studied in tabularis. The algae present are mostly small, primarily
southern African rocky shores since the 1930s when T.A. Gelidium reptans and Caulacanthus ustulatus.
Stephenson and his team conducted surveys round the The lower eulittoral in many areas is dominated by
coast, summarized in Stephenson (1948) and Stephenson algae. Typical constituents of the algal turf are Gelidium
and Stephenson (1972). More recent accounts are given reptans and Caulacanthus ustulatus at higher levels and
by Brown and Jarman (1978), Branch and Branch (1981), Gigartina minima, Hypnea arenaria, Centroceros clavu-
and Field and Griffiths (1991). latum, and Herposiphonia heringii at lower levels. Barna-
Littoral Fringe — East Coast: Littorinid snails (Lit- cles and serpulid tubeworms, Pomatoleios kraussii, com-
torina kraussii, L. africana, and Nodilittorina natalensis) pete with the algal turf. With increasing exposure, the
are the most abundant animals. Algae usually form moss- barnacles and Pomatoleios are replaced by zooanthids
like patches that include species of Bostrychia, Rhizoclo- (Zoanthus natalensis). In very exposed conditions, the
nium, Gelidium, and Herposiphonia. alga H. spicifera displaces the zooanthids and the brown
Littoral Fringe — South Coast: Littorina africana mussel, Perna perna, forms extensive clumps.
var. knysnaensis is incredibly abundant in this zone. Snails Eulittoral Zone — South Coast: The upper eulittoral
that invade the zone from the eulittoral below are Oxystele supports vigorous populations of the barnacles Chthala-
variegata and Thais dubia together with the limpet Helcion mus dentalus, Tetraclita serrata, and Octomeris angulosa.
pectunculus. Algae are few, apart from the patches of Bos- Limpets, especially Patella granularis, are common, and
trychia mixta and a variable amount of Porphyra capensis. in many places it is associated with Helcion pentunctulus
Hard Shores 35

FIGURE 2.13 The principal features of the zonation patterns on the west, south, and east coasts of South Africa. Only a few species
characteristic of the zones are shown, and perhaps overlaps in vertical distribution are ignored for the sake of simplicity. (Redrawn
from Branch, G.M. and Branch, M.L., The Living Shores of Southern Africa, C. Struik, Capetown, 1984, 27, 26, 29. With permission.)

and species of Siphonaria. The periwinkle Oxystele var- Gelidium cartiligineum. With increasing shelter there is a
iegata replaces the east coast O. tubularis. Algae are short turf of mosslike algae including corallines with epi-
scarce, but there is often Porphyra, Colpomenia capensis, phytes and Hypnea spicifera, Gigartina radula, and G.
Splachnidium rugosum, Ulva sp., and mosslike Caulacan- papillosa. Larger algae include species such as Sargassum
thus ustulatua and Bostrychia mixta. heterophyllum, Caulerpa ligulata, Dictyota dichotoma,
The lower eulittoral has extensive growths of the ser- Colpomenia capensis, Laurencia flexuosa, L. glomerata,
pulid tubeworm Pomatoleios kraussii and the sandy tube and L. natalensis.
of Gunnarea capensis. A third polychaete, Dodecaceria Eulittoral Zone — West Coast: The upper eulittoral
pulchra, is a common feature of this subzone. In the lower has a sparse barnacle cover (Chthalamus dentatus, Tetra-
part there are extensive beds of the mussel Perna perna. clita serrata, and Octomerus angulosa) and Patella gran-
At the bottom of this subzone, a well-developed mosaic ularis is the most conspicuous animal. There is a belt of
of the large limpet Patella cochlear and lithothamnion high-growing Porphyra. Below the Porphyra are mixed
covers the rock surface with ephemeral algae forming algal growths of Chatangeum saccatum, C. ornatum, and
typical algal gardens. Where wave action is strong, the P. Ulva lactuca; these algae in turn become mixed with and
cochlear is replaced by Perna perna and algae such as largely replaced by Iridopsis capensis, Aeodes orbitosa,
36 The Ecology of Seashores

and two brown algae, Splachnidium rugosum and Chord- urchins (Parechinus), holothurians, and the spiny lobster,
aria capensis. Jasus lalandii.
In the lower eulittoral, lithothamnion covers the rocks.
The most common larger algae in the uppermost part of
the lithothamnia are Aeodes orbitosa, Splachnidium rug- 2.3 CAUSES OF ZONATION
osum and Chordaria capensis. The sandy tubes of
Gunnarea capensis may cover the rocks over extensive 2.3.1 WAVE ACTION AND ZONATION
areas. As shelter increases, the tubes of this species form 2.3.1.1 Introduction
a narrow band or ridge between the Patella cochlear belt
and the main P. granularis population. P. cochlear is dom- Wave action is the most important factor that causes vari-
inant on the southern part of the west coast, but to the ation in the patterns of distribution of organisms on the
north it is replaced by P. argenvillei. Four important algae shore, modifying the height of a particular zone and deter-
of the P. cochlear — P. argenvillei belt are Champia mining the kinds of species present. Wave-exposed shores
lumbricalis, Plocamium cornutum, Gigartina striata, and are characterized by large water forces due to the action
G. radula. The dominant mussel of the south coast, Perna of breaking and surging waves, little or no sediment set-
perna, disappears on the west coast to be replaced by the tling on the shore (although in some situations sand scour-
blue-black Chloromytilus meridionalis and the ribbed Aul- ing), and thorough mixing of the inshore waters, resulting
acomya ater. in variations in temperature, salinity, and nutrients. Shel-
Sublittoral Fringe — East Coast: The population of tered habitats, in contrast, are characterized by little hydro-
the sublittoral fringe varies greatly from place to place. In dynamic stress, siltation, and inshore water stratification,
some regions it is occupied by the ascidian, Pyura causing marked daily or seasonal changes in temperature
stolonifera, in dense concentrations; in other places it is salinity and nutrient concentrations. The effects of wave
replaced by limpets and lithothamnia, but in most places action on a small scale are shown in the differences in
algae dominate. The latter takes the form of a dense sward zonation patterns between the landward and seaward sides
of small species of varying composition; in places it is of rocks and large boulders. On a larger scale these dif-
dominated by Hypnea rosea and Rhodymenia natalensis, ferences can be seen in progression from exposed head-
and elsewhere by Gelidium rigidum and Galaxaura natal- lands into sheltered bays and harbors. This can be seen in
ensis. Larger species such as the brown algae Sargassum Figure 2.14, which illustrates the distribution of seaweeds
longifolium, Ecklonia radiata, and Dictyopteris in relation to wave exposure in North Wales. Here sea-
dichotoma, and the green alga Caulerpa ligulata may be weeds thrive best on sheltered or semi-sheltered shores
locally important. where luxuriant stands of Fucus spp., and Ascophyllum
Sublittoral Fringe — South Coast: In most places nodosum thrive with individual plants often of large size,
the sharply defined lower limit of Patella cochlear marks reaching, in the case of Ascophyllum, a length of several
the beginning of the sublittoral fringe. Here the ascidian meters. With increasing wave exposure, fucoid algae
Pyura stolonifera usually forms a continuous cover. The become progressively sparser and the plants stunted. As
associated fauna is varied — anemones, compound ascid- exposure increases, the fucoids are usually replaced by
ians, and Alcyonium falax. Where ascidians do not dom- red algae, Porphyra and Mastocarpus, and on the lower
inate, algae, especially the larger corallines, dominate. shore the laminarians Laminaria saccharina and L. digi-
Associated species are Gelidium cartilagineum, G. rigi- tata are replaced by the kelp Alaria esculenta.
dum, Caulerpa ligulata, Plocamium corallorhiza, and
Hypnea spicifera. Among the larger species are Sargassum 2.3.1.2 The Problem of Defining Wave Exposure
heterophyllum, S. longifolium, and Zonaria interrupta.
Sublittoral Fringe — West Coast: Here the sublit- How to define wave exposure? It has proved to be difficult
toral region proper is occupied by giant laminarians, Lam- to precisely define the degree of wave exposure that any
inaria schinzli, L. pallida, and Macrocystis pyrifera. While particular shore experiences, and it is usually taken to be
the lower limit of the P. cochlear — P. argenvillea belt an integrated index of the severity of the hydrodynamic
marks the top of the sublittoral fringe, the latter does not environment to which the plants and animals are exposed.
form a distinct zone. The upper fringe of kelp beds is Thus it has tended to be defined on the basis of the type
inhabited by species characteristic of the lower part of the of community of the plants and animals on the shore and
P. cochlear — P. argenvillea belt (P. argenvillea, Buno- the presence or absence of so-called indicator species.
dactis reynaudi, Gunnerea capensis, Champia lumbrica- Denny (1995) has recently developed a method for
lis, Plocamium cornutum, species of Gigartina, corallines, predicting physical disturbance of wave action. The steps
and lithothamnion). The kelp bed community structure has involved in this method are depicted in Figure 2.15. In his
been described by Field et al. (1980). It includes a mosaic paper Denny (1995) outlines the theoretical basis for cal-
patchwork of understory algae, mussels (Aulacomya), sea culating the various steps depicted in the figure. Step 5 is
Hard Shores

FIGURE 2.14 The distribution of littoral seaweeds in relation to wave exposure in North Wales. F.sp. = Fucus spiralis; Asco = Ascophyllum nodosum; L. sac. = Laminaria saccharina;
EHWS = Extreme High Water of Spring Tides; ELWS = Extreme Low Water of Spring Tides; Mastocarpus = Gigartina stellata. (From Norton, T.A., in The Ecology of Rocky Coasts,
Moore, P.G. and Seed, R., Eds., Hodder & Straughton, London, 1985, 8. After Jones and Demetropoulos, 1968. With permission.)
37
38 The Ecology of Seashores

area and volume, as well as on the velocity and acceler-


ation of the fluid past the organism.
As originally noted by Denny et al. (1985), attach-
ment strength tends to scale with area; thus at large size,
isometrically growing organisms (whose volumes
increase faster than their area) will feel increasingly large
acceleration forces relative to their attachment strengths.
This means that acceleration forces (acting in conjunction
with drag) have the potential to set upper limits on size
in wave-exposed organisms. Blanchette (1997) tested this
prediction in the field by reciprocally transplanting indi-
viduals of the brown alga Fucus gardneri between wave-
exposed and wave-protected sites. Mean sizes of wave-
exposed plants transplanted to protected sites increased
significantly relative to exposed control transplants. Mean
sizes of wave-protected plants transplanted to exposed
sites decreased significantly in size relative to protected
control transplants.
Denny (1995) tested his predictive model by predict-
ing the rate at which patches of bare substratum are formed
FIGURE 2.15 A flow chart of the steps involved in calculating in the beds of the mussel Mytilus californianus, a domi-
the probability of dislodgement for an individual plant or animal nant competitor for space on the rocky shore of the Pacific
at a given site on a rocky shore. (Redrawn from Denny, M.W., Northwest. Predicted rates were very similar to those mea-
Ecol. Monogr., 65, 374, 1995. With permission.) sured in the field. Thus the model has the potential to
provide useful input into models of intertidal patch
an important one in which three forces are involved: drag, dynamics. An analysis of data from several sites round the
acceleration force, and lift. Drag is the force that tends to world suggested that the yearly average “waviness” of the
push objects in the direction of the flow. This force ocean at any particular site can (over the course of
increases with the square of the water velocity relative to decades) vary by as much as 80% of the long-term mean.
an organism, and is proportional to an organism’s pro- Denny predicted that an increase of 1 m in yearly average
jected area. The second force, the acceleration force, acts significant wave height would result in a fourfold increase
along the direction of the flow (Denny et al., 1985; Denny, in the rate of patch formation in a mussel bed.
1988; 1989; 1993; Gaylord et al., 1994). It scales linearly
with the water’s acceleration and is proportional to the 2.3.1.3 The General Effects of Wave Action
volume of the organism. The third force, lift, acts perpen-
dicular to the direction of the flow. Denny and his The general effects of wave action can be summarized as
coworkers (Denny, 1988; 1989; 1991; 1993; Denny and follows:
Gaines, 1990) have developed methologies for estimating
these three forces and thus determining the forces required 1. A general shift of the concentration center of
to dislodge plants and animals of different sizes. most of the species of the eulittoral and the
The powerful forces discussed above scale with size littoral fringe.
and consequently set mechanical limits as to the size of 2. An expansion of the vertical range of each
organisms in wave-swept environments. Water motion species.
along wave-swept rocky shores produce some of the most 3. A relative lowering of the concentration centers
powerful hydrodynamic forces on earth, and since such of some species in the upper sublittoral and the
forces scale with size, they may exert selective pressures lower eulittoral.
for small size. The first theoretical and quantitative attempt 4. The disappearance of a many species that are
to explore the possibility that wave forces could set intolerant of wave action.
mechanical limits on size was undertaken by Denny et al. 5. The appearance of a few species that appear to
(1985). They hypothesized that hydrodynamic forces act- tolerate or require wave action.
ing on organisms along wave-swept shores tend to 6. A marked increase in the filter-feeding biomass
increase with increasing body size, faster than the ability on wave-exposed shores.
of the organism to maintain its attachment to the rock 7. A higher overall biomass on the more exposed
surface. Hydrodynamic forces depend on an organism’s shores.
Hard Shores 39

FIGURE 2.16 Diagram showing the vertical distribution (feet above chartum datum) of intertidal algae on an exposed coast (North
Gravel) and sheltered coast (North Haven) on Fair Isle, Scotland. (Modified from Burrows, E.M., Conway, E., Lodge, S.M., and
Powell, H.T., J. Ecol., 42, 286, 1954. With permission.)

8. A change in trophic structure. On sheltered but absent on the exposed coast at North Gravel. It can
shores, attached algae are the primary producers also be seen that the vertical zones of those species that
at the base of the food web, whereas on exposed occurred at both localities were considerably elevated on
shores, water column primary production is at the exposed coast, e.g., Porphyra umbilicalis had a vertical
the base of the food web in shore communities range of 1.5 ft on the sheltered coast compared with 16
in which the standing crop of consumers is ft on the exposed coast.
higher than that of the primary producers. Figure 2.17 depicts the distribution of two periwinkle
species Littorina unifasciata and Littorina cincta with
Selected examples illustrating the above effects fol- reference to exposure and shelter at three New Zealand
low. Burrows et al. (1954) compared the distribution of a localities from north to south. L. unifasciata is rare or
number of intertidal algal species on Fair Isle, Scotland. absent on the northern coasts, but increases in density to
They found that not only were the species different in the south. The reverse trend is evident for L. cincta. The
exposed and sheltered areas, but that the corresponding vertical distribution of both species increases with wave
algal zones were displaced upward by as much as 12 ft exposure. The density of L. unifasciata tends to increase
(3.05 m) on shores exposed to strong wave action. From with wave exposure, whereas that of L. cincta is main-
Figure 2.16 it can be seen that Ectocarpus fasciculatus, tained especially at the southernmost locality.
Fucus inflatus f. distiches, Rhodomenia palmata, Polysi- Ohgaki (1989) investigated the daily vertical move-
phonia urceolata, Corallina officinalis, and Alalia escu- ment if the littoral fringe periwinkle Nodolittorina exigua
lenta were all absent on the sheltered coast of North in relation to wave height on the Japanese coast. The
Haven. On the other hand, species such as Ascophyllum position of the snails on a cliff shore were high when the
nodosum, Polysipohonia vesiculosus, and Cladophora wave-reach was high and ascended with increasing height
rupestris were present on sheltered shores at North Haven, of the wave-reach. The snails moved a long distance
40 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.17 Distribution and abundance of two littorinids, Littorins unifasciata (left) and Littorina cincta (right) with reference
to exposure and shelter at three New Zealand localities from North to South. Density expressed as grams per m–2. (From Morton, J.
and Miller, M., The New Zealand Seashore, Collins, Auckland, 1968, 350. Courtesy of W.J. Ballantyne.)

upward in the late summer, when typhoon swells occur, ing by the high densities of the limpet Patella cochlear
and moved gradually downward again in the autumn, par- (up to 1000 m–2; Branch 1975b) in the cochlear zone on
allel to decreasing wave-reach. exposed shores resulted in a dramatic decrease in algal
McQuaid and Branch (1985) have investigated the cover in this zone. Filter-feeding biomass in the sublittoral
trophic structure of rocky intertidal communities in the fringe on exposed shores was high and there was a
Cape of Good Hope, South Africa, in relation to wave decrease in algal biomass relative to that on sheltered
action, and discussed the implications for energy flow shores. On exposed shores the filter-feeding biomass was
through the communities. Figures 2.18A and 2.18B com- high in the upper balanoid zone. Among the minor trophic
pare the vertical distribution of the total and trophic com- components, trends of vertical zonation were less obvious,
partment biomass on sheltered and exposed shores. Expo- but the biomass of carnivores did correlate positively with
sure influenced both the vertical distribution and the that of filter feeders and was greatest in the sublittoral
trophic composition of the total biomass. Total biomass fringe. The essential differences between the two shore
showed a simple decrease upshore on sheltered shores, types is the addition of a very large filter-feeding compo-
but the pattern was more complex with greater exposure. nent on exposed shores. Filter-feeding biomass is gener-
Filter feeders, carnivores, and omnivores all exhibited sig- ally low on sheltered shores; on exposed shores it is very
nificantly higher biomass under exposed conditions. Graz- much higher, up to 6,533 g m–2 shell-free dry weight.
Hard Shores 41

Thus the balance between consumers and primary pro-


ducers is considerably different on the two shore types,
implying alterations in the net balance between import
and export of production between these two communities
and the inshore marine system. The high filter-feeding
biomass on the exposed shores results from the importa-
tion of primary production from the water column to the
shore community in which the standing crop of consumers
is considerably higher than that of the primary producers.

2.3.2 TIDAL CURRENTS AND ZONATION


Swift tidal currents are developed where there are narrow
inlets to lochs, fjords, and enclosed embayments. Where
such inlets are lined with rocky shores, a distinctive flora
and fauna and vertical zonation is found. Such tidal rapids
provide conditions intermediate between sheltered and
exposed coasts. Swift water currents maintain an ample
supply of plankton for filter feeders and intertidal animals
such as hydroids and anemones that feed on small plank-
ters, a plentiful supply of nutrients for plant growth, prevent
deposition of silt, and provide protection from wave action.
Many of the algae growing in the tidal rapids have
morphological adaptations to withstand strong currents.
For example, Macrocystis integrifolia blades from tidal
rapids are intermediate in size and shape between shel-
tered and exposed plants (Druehl, 1978). Plants in tidal
rapids frequently grow to immense size, perhaps due to
the ample nutrient supply.
Some of the most thoroughly studied tidal rapids in
the world are those at the entrance to Lough Ine, County
Cork, Ireland (Kitching, 1987). Although these rapids are
somewhat atypical in having a large population of the
brown alga Saccorhiza polygchides (Lewis, 1964), other
features are typical of loch and fjord channels of western
Ireland and Scotland. As water velocity increases from
the inside of the loch toward the channel, calm water
plants such as Halidrys siliquosa and Laminaria saccha-
rina gradually give way to plants characteristic of mod-
erately exposed shores, such as Himanthalia elongata. In
the fastest currents, such as over the sill in the middle of
Lough Ine Rapids, where current velocity reaches 2.6 m
s–1, the water becomes turbulent and exposed coast plants
such as Laminaria digitata and L. hyperborea generally
appear. In some rapids Halidrys may persist into rapid
currents, flourishing side by side with L. digitata, an
unusual combination of sheltered and exposed coast
plants (Lewis, 1964).
The fauna of tidal rapids is invariably dominated by
five groups of animals: sponges, hydroids, anemones,
FIGURE 2.18 Vertical distribution of total and trophic compart-
polyzoans, and ascidians. The distribution of these species
ment biomass on: A, sheltered shores; B, exposed shores. A:
algae; H: herbivores; F.F: filter-feeders; O: omnivores; D: detri- shows a similar trend to that discussed above for the algae.
tovores; S: scavengers; C: carnivores. (Redrawn for McQuaid, Thus there is a tendency for the more robust, less easily
C.D. and Branch, G.M., Mar. Ecol. Progr. Ser., 22, 158, 1985. damaged types of colonies to appear when the current
With permission.) becomes strongest.
42 The Ecology of Seashores

2.3.3 SUBSTRATE, TOPOGRAPHY, ASPECT, AND of the modifying effect of aspect and angle of slope on
ZONATION tidal-dependent zonation patterns. Figure 2.19 after
Batham (1958) shows the vertical zonation of a number of
The nature of the substratum can influence the kinds of species at Portobello, Otago Harbour, New Zealand, on
plants and animals that may be present on hard shores. sun-facing and shaded surfaces. Various species such as
Rock surfaces may be smooth and polished or pitted and the red algae Stichosiphonia arbuscula and littorinid snails
rugose. This surface texture influences the settling of the have elevated ranges and greater densities on shaded sur-
larval stages of many species (see Section 5.4.3). Moore faces; encrusting and tufted coralline algae up to well
and Kitching (1939) have shown that minor variations in above MTL. Aspect also affects the abundance of many
the abundance of algae, and the barnacles Balanus bal- eulittoral species. On the one hand, the black lichen Lichina
anoides and Chthalamus stellatus on rocky shores are pygmaea, which is dense on sun-facing rocks, is almost
often associated with variations in the roughness of the absent on shaded ones; while on the other the tunicate
rock surface. The hardness of the rock also determines Pyura suteri is practically confined to shaded sites. In
whether rock-boring species such as bivalve molluscs of general, aspect affects vertical zoning more on the upper
the family Pholaridae are present. parts of the shore where desiccation is more pronounced.
Wave action, topography, and aspect need to be con-
sidered together, as the two latter features may modify the 2.3.4 SAND AND ZONATION
effects of the first. The effects of topography are very
complicated, arising from the great variety of rocky shores Most rocky shores include considerable sand intermixed
ranging from boulder-strewn shores to wide rock plat- with the biota attached to rock substrates, and fluctuations
forms and steep cliffs. On broken shores, elevation of in the degree of sand deposition and coverage are common
vertical zone with strong wave action may be evident on (Littler, 1980a; Littler and Littler, 1981; Littler et al., 1983;
the seaward side of rock masses, while on the sheltered 1991). Devinny and Volse (1978) postulated the following
side, zonation patterns and species characteristic of shel- three mechanisms of sediment damage to attached algae:
tered shores may be found. The angle of slope is important (1) smothering due to reduced light, nutrients, or dissolved
in modifying the zonation patterns and species composi- gases; (2) physical injury due to scouring; and (3) detri-
tion on shores of comparable wave exposure. Under con- mental changes of the surrounding interstitial microenvi-
ditions of shelter from wave action, zonation patterns are ronment. These three mechanisms also apply to sessile
determined primarily by emersion/submersion factors. A and motile animal species. Taylor and Littler (1982) dis-
shore with a gentle slope will have a wide littoral zone tinguish different effects due to sand impacts, stress
where poor drainage and extensive tidal pools permit an (smothering), and disturbance (scouring), with the greater
upward extension of sublittoral fringe species. Conversely, effect due to the former. In addition, opportunities for
where the shore is steep, such as on cliff faces, jetties, and feeding, both for filter feeders, grazers, and predators, are
piers, the whole of the littoral zone is condensed into a reduced with sand cover. Sand has been reported to phys-
narrow band corresponding to tidal rise and fall. ically scour the underlying substratum, thus making bare
Under exposed conditions, the angle of the slope plays space available for colonization when the substrate
an important role in modifying the effect of wave action. reemerges from the sand cover (Climberg et al., 1973).
Where the slope is gentle there may be little uplift of the Littler et al. (1983) studied over a 3-year period the
higher intertidal zones. Gently sloping surfaces generally impact of variable sand deposition on a Southern Califor-
remain damper than vertical ones, and this can influence nia rocky intertidal system, ranging from about zero to
the vertical distribution of many species. Local topogra- total inundation over different portions of the study area.
phy also affects the presence of many species that find An apparent subclimax association of delicate high-pro-
suitable conditions in depressions, drainage channels, tide ducing macrophytes (Chaetomorpha linum, Cladophora
pools, and crevices. Here conditions of humidity and columbina, Ulva lobata, and Enteromorpha intestinalis)
shade may enable them to penetrate higher on the shore and highly productive macroinvertebrates (Tetraclita
than they can on open surfaces. rubescens, Chthalamus fissus, C. dalli, Phragmatopoma
The aspect of a shore, or a particular region of a shore, californica) that corresponds to opportunistic strategists
is important in determining the upper limits of many inter- (sensu Grime, 1977) dominated the low-lying intertidal
tidal species. Broken and gullied shores provide many areas routinely buried by sand and exhibited zonational
examples of the upward extension of both plants and ani- patterns reflecting both tidal height and degree of sand
mals on shaded surfaces. Such surfaces, to some extent, coverage. A number of characteristics (Odum, 1971) dis-
offset the rigors of desiccation and thermal stress and, for tinguish those species subjected to recurrent mortalities
example, allow an upward extension of sublittoral organ- due to sand stress including: (1) high productivity, (2) low
isms. The example discussed earlier of zonation patterns biomass, (3) opportunistic life histories, and (4) emphasis
on Brandon Island (see Section 1.3.5.2) is a good example on the herbivore trophic level. For example, high produc-
Hard Shores 43

FIGURE 2.19 Vertical zonation of selected species at Portobello, South Island, New Zealand, on shaded ( ) and sun-facing
surfaces ( ). Redrawn from Batham, E.J., Trans. R. Soc. N.Z., 85, 459, 1956. With permission.)

tivity has been reported for the green algae Ulva lobata, Sand inundation thus resulted in subclimax and mature
Enteromprpha intestinalis, Cladophora columbina, and intertidal communities being intermixed in a mosaic-like
Chaetomorpha lineum (Littler, 1980b; Littler and Arnold, pattern, and this augmented the within-habitat diversity,
1982), and they are all of low biomass. Opportunistic contrary to the belief that periodic inundation by sand
reproductive strategies have been suggested for Entero- would reduce species diversity by eliminating organisms
morpha sp. (Fahey, 1953) and Ulva sp. (Littler and Mur- intolerant of sand scour and sand smothering (e.g., Daly
ray, 1975). It is well documented that these two species and Mathieson, 1977; Littler and Littler, 1980). Levin and
are rapid colonizers (Littler and Murray, 1975; Sousa, Paine (1974) predicted, and others (Sousa, 1979a; Littler
1979b; Littler, 1980b). and Littler, 1981; McQuaid and Dower, 1990) found that
Refuge habitats on rock pinnacles (sand free) were disturbances such as sand scour and inundation, when
dominated by long-lived molluscs such as Mytilus califor- localized, may induce diversity as a result of mixed patches
nianus, Haliotis cracherodii, and Lottia gigantea. The undergoing different stages of succession. McQuaid and
lower limits of these biologically competent taxa (sensu Dower (1990) recently studied faunal richness on 10 reg-
Vermeij, 1978) appear to be determined by the physical ularly sand-inundated shores on the Cape region of South
smothering action of the sand. The stress-tolerant anemone Africa. They confirmed that inundation promoted richness
Anthropleura elegantissima dominated the upper intertidal by increasing habitat heterogeneity. Table 2.2 compares
macroinvertebrate cover because of reproductive, behav- total faunal species richness for sandy beaches, rocky
ioral, and physiological adaptations to the stresses of aerial shores, and sand-inundated rocky shores. It shows that the
exposure and sand burial. The dominant plant in the lower number of “rocky shore” species recorded was remarkably
intertidal pools was the biotically competent surf grass similar to results for noninundated shores in the Western
Phyllospadix scouleri, because of its large size and rhi- Cape of South Africa (McQuaid, 1980). In addition, there
zomatous root system, which traps and binds sediments. is a component of psammophilic or “sandy shore” species
The most numerous of the mobile macroinvertebrates, the found in the sand deposits themselves. Thus, inundation
snail Tegula funebralis, is able to migrate away from the of these shores clearly caused enrichment, rather than
winter sand inundation to refuge habitats. impoverishment, of the biota.
44 The Ecology of Seashores

response to reducing the impact of the infrared end of the


TABLE 2.2 spectrum. In contrast, calcification, and hence growth in
Total Faunal Species Richness for Sandy Beaches, corals takes place more rapidly during daylight (Goreau
Rocky Shores, and Sand-Inundated Shores of South and Goreau, 1959). Reef-building corals have symbiotic
Africa algae in their tissues that carry out photosynthesis during
daylight hours.
Rocky Shore Psammophilic Sunlight influences the behavior of marine animals in
Species Species Total
many ways apart from inhibition of activity. The direction
Sandy beaches 0 21 21 of light is used by the larvae of many intertidal animals
(East Cape) as a cue for orientation. The transition from daylight to
Rocky shores 254 0 254 darkness activates diurnal rhythms of activity and many
(West Cape) physiological processes, and day length (photoperiod)
Inundated rocky shores 255 26 281 may determine the onset of breeding, or the timing of
(East Cape) events such as spawning.
Note: Data for sandy beaches (East Cape) from McLachlan Radiant energy from the sun’s rays encompasses the
(1977a,b), McLachlan et al. (1981), and Woolridge et al. (1981). Data electromagnetic spectrum from long-wave, low-energy to
for rocky shores (West Cape) from McQuaid (1980). Data for sand- short-wave, high-energy rays. “Light” refers to the narrow
inundated shores from McQuaid & Dower (1990). region of the spectrum visible to the human eye, plus the
Source: From McQuaid, C.D. and Dower, K.M., Oecologia, 143, ultraviolet and infrared wavelengths. One of the most
1990. With permission. important variables controlling plant photosynthesis is the
“photosynthetically active radiation,” PAR, or light in the
range of wavelengths from 400 to 700 nm. There is, how-
Several macroalgal species have adapted to resist sand ever, some evidence that photosynthetic absorbance
scour and even months of burial. These species include extends down to 300 nm in the green alga Ulva lactuca
Gymnogongrus linearis, Laminaria sinclairii, Phaeostro- and the tetrasporangial stage (Tralliella intricata) of the
phion irregulare, and Ahnfeltia spp. from the west coast red alga Bonnemaisonia hamifera (Halldal, 1964).
of North America and Sphacelaria radicans on the east Light hitting the surface of the water is reduced by
coast of North America (Daly and Mathieson, 1977). two processes, refraction and absorption. The percentage
Characteristics of these algae (Lobban et al., 1985) include of reflected light depends on the angle of the sun to the
tough, usually cylindrical thalli with thick cell walls; great water and also on the state, or roughness of the water. As
ability to regenerate, or an asexual reproductive cycle solar energy penetrates the water it is attenuated in both
functionally equivalent to regeneration (Norton, 1985); quantity and quality. The attenuation results from absorp-
reproduction timed to occur when the plants are uncov- tion and scattering by dissolved and suspended substances
ered; and physiological adaptations to withstand nutrient in the water. Water itself absorbs maximally in the infrared
deprivation, anaerobic conditions, and H2S. and far red above 700 nm. Other wavelengths are screened
out as the light passes through the water. The quality of
2.3.5 CLIMATIC FACTORS AND ZONATION light is important in determining the distribution of sea-
2.3.5.1 Solar Radiation weeds with a number of pigments that absorb various
portions of the visible wavelengths for photosynthesis and
Light is a key factor affecting both plants and animals on reflect others (Figure 2.20). The reflected wavelengths
the shore, but it is also very complex. The ebb and flow impart the distinctive colors to the plants.
of the tides has a profound effect on the quantity and Green seaweeds use mainly chlorophyll pigments,
quality of the light reaching the photosynthetic plants on which absorb light in the red and blue portions of the
the shore. The primary importance of light to the plants spectrum. Because they rely heavily on red light for pho-
is in providing the initial energy for photosynthesis, and tosynthesis, they are found in shallow habitats. Red algae
ultimately for all biological processes. It is also the signal also have chlorophyll, but this pigment is masked by phy-
for many events throughout the life cycles of the algae, coerythrin and phycocyanin pigments, which absorb in
including reproduction, growth, and distribution. Light the green and orange portions of the spectrum. Because
also influences the behavior and activity of most animal they use most of the visible spectrum for photosynthesis,
species. Many more animals are active on the shore during and can use light from the middle, or green, portion of
nighttime low tides than in the daytime. The barnacle the spectrum more effectively than light from the blue or
Semibalanus balanoides is often larger when growing in red regions, they can live at all depths but generally prefer
the shade than in direct sunlight. Wethey (1985) found the low intertidal or upper sublittoral. Brown algae have
that this barnacle could survive higher on the shore when both chlorophyll and fucxanthin pigments, the latter
shielded from direct sunlight, although this may be a absorbing in the blue-green wavelengths. Brown algae are
Hard Shores 45

spectrum can have deleterious effects on both plant and


animal tissues. This can cause bleaching in some seaweeds.
The role of light in photosynthesis and primary pro-
duction will be dealt with later in the relevant sections.

2.3.5.2 Temperature
The intertidal zone experiences varying degrees of expo-
sure to atmospheric conditions depending on the level on
the shore, and hence exposure to solar radiation. Depend-
ing on the latitude and climate air temperatures, this zone
may have a daily fluctuation that exceeds the annual fluc-
tuation of the sea. Temperatures on the shore in the winter
due to freezing conditions may fall 10°C or more below
the sea temperatures, and in the summer may rise 15 to
20° or more above them. Rock surfaces receiving direct
insolation will have surface temperatures much higher
than the air temperatures. Black basaltic rock heats up
more rapidly and reaches higher temperatures than does
light-colored coral limestone, mudstones, and chalk.
Basaltic reefs on the New South Wales coast of Australia
frequently exceed 45°C on summer days.
Temperature is a most fundamental factor for all
organisms because of its effects on molecular activities
and properties, and hence, on virtually all aspects of
metabolism. Atmospheric temperatures are subject to
extensive modification by a suite of microenvironmental
situations. Factors such as shading affect the influx of heat
to an organism, whereas other factors such as evaporation
may reduce body temperatures. Irradiance (heating) may
be reduced by shading, clouds, water, algal growth, and
shore topography (including overhangs, crevices, and
direction of slope). Small-scale topographic features also
give shelter from wind (air movement over the surface),
and hence from evaporative cooling.
FIGURE 2.20 Absorption of light by green, red, and brown Figure 2.21 gives two examples of measurements of
seaweeds. Green seaweeds absorb maximally in the blue and red intertidal temperatures recorded during emersion on a hot
portions of the spectrum; hence, they appear green in color. The day. In Figure 2.21 the alga Enterocladia muricata is a
brown color of seaweeds results from absorption near the middle stiff tufted plant; the temperature of the interior of the
of the spectrum, which removes more of the green. Red algae clump, which is shaded yet open to the air, remains con-
absorb light in the green portion of the spectrum and thus appear
siderably cooler than the air or open rock surface (Glynn,
red in color. (After Blinks, L.R., J. Mar. Res., 14, 366, 367, 384,
1965). The red alga Porphyra fasicola, in contrast, is flat-
1955.)
tened against the rock surface when the tide is out, and
on a calm day it heats up to a much higher temperature
found in the mid- and lower eulittoral and extend to depths than the air (Biebel, 1970). The graphs also show the sharp
of 10 to 15 m or more in the upper sublittoral. drop that occurs in the temperature when the tide covers
Light is an important factor in determining the upper the plants. Most notable is the drop in surface temperature
limits of some species. Algae such as Ulva, Cladophora, of the Porphyra thallus from 33°C to 13°C in a matter of
and Porphyra living on the middle and upper shores are minutes as the water reaches it.
unaffected by strong sunlight, but the kelp Laminaria,
which is adapted to low light levels in the sublittoral zone, 2.3.6 DESICCATION AND ZONATION
reduces its rate of photosynthesis in strong sunlight and
during emersion. Long exposure can cause destruction of Many observations have demonstrated that desiccation
photosynthetic pigments. Many seaweeds from the sublit- effects are particularly important in setting the upper limits
toral zone are killed by 2 hours of exposure to direct of the intertidal distributions of many species, such as: (1)
sunlight when out of the water. The ultraviolet part of the the elevation of zones in areas of wave splash (see Figure
46 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.21 (Left) Temperature observations of three microhabitats in the high intertidal Endocladia-Balanus association at
Monterey, California, as related to low water exposure. Also shown is the air temperature at a nearby weather station during the
observation period. The horizontal bar and line at the top of the graph show, for the level observed, the approximate duration of
submerged (cross-hatching), awash (clear), and exposed (line) periods. (Right) Porphyra fasicola thallus temperature during ebb tide
on a calm day. Left from Glynn (1965); Right from Biebel (1970). (Redrawn from Lobban, C.S., Harrison, P.T., and Duncan, M.T.,
The Physiological Ecology of Seaweeds, Cambridge University Press, New York, 1985, 37. With permission.)

2.14), and on shaded slopes; (2) the enhanced growth of climate for many species. Secondly, the algae themselves
certain organisms, e.g., the green alga Enteromorpha in provide a substrate for a great variety of epiphytic algae,
areas of freshwater seepage; (3) the higher distribution sessile animals such as anemones, hydroids, tube-building
of some species, such as mussels, where seawater seeps polychaetes, colonial ascidians, etc., and motile species
from high tidal pools. Direct evidence of the effects of such as amphipods, isopods, and polychaetes.
desiccation on intertidal organisms is well documented Other biological interactions involved in determining
in the scientific literature and will be discussed further in the vertical distributions are grazing, predation, and com-
Chapter 6. petition. These interactions will be considered fully in
Chapter 6.
2.3.7 BIOTIC FACTORS AND ZONATION
2.3.8 FACTOR INTERACTIONS
Plants and animals may influence the zonation of other
species in a variety of ways. Firstly, the presence of algae The environment of an organism comprises many factors,
at a certain level on the shore may reduce the problems each almost constantly varying and interacting with each
of desiccation for other species by providing a microcli- other to determine the vertical zone occupied by a partic-
mate when the shore is exposed at low tide, where suitable ular species on the shore. According to Lobban et al.
humidity conditions enable an animal species to extend (1985) factor interactions can be grouped as follows: (1)
higher on the shore than they would in the absence of the multifaceted factors; (2) interactions between environ-
algae. Mussel beds also provide a similar favorable micro- mental variables; (3) interaction between environmental
Hard Shores 47

variables and biological factors; and (4) sequential effects. and Green, 1982; Swithenbanks, 1982), its validity has
These will not be discussed in detail here, but will be been frequently challenged (e.g., Connell, 1972; Stephen-
examined further in Chapters 5 and 6. son and Stephenson, 1972; Edwards, 1972; Wolcott, 1973;
Many environmental variables are complex, e.g., light Underwood, 1978a; Chaloupka and Hall, 1984). Critical
quality and quantity not only change with depth, but also reviews of the CTLs are to be found in Underwood
change with turbidity and the nature of the particles in (1978a) and Chaloupka and Hall (1984).
suspension in the water. Emersion usually involves desic- As Underwood (1978a) points out, if CTLs actually
cation, heating or chilling, removal of most of the nutri- exist, then the boundaries of distribution of intertidal
ents, and frequently changes in the salinity of the water in organisms should be dispersed nonrandomly, i.e., they
the surface films on plants, and in the respiratory surfaces should be underdispersed along the intertidal gradient.
of animals. There are also complex interactions among Knox (1953) tested this for a rocky shore at Taylors Mis-
environmental variables. Water motion can affect turbidity take, Banks Peninsula, New Zealand. From Figure 2.22 it
and siltation as well as nutrient availability. Interactions can be seen that the greatest number of upper and lower
between environmental variables and biological factors limits were grouped in the vicinity of MLWN and EHWN.
include both the ways in which biological parameters such The former marks the lower limits of the main mid-eulit-
as age, phenotype, and genotype affect an organism’s toral populations such as the barnacles Epopella plicata
response to an environmental variable, and also the effects and Chamaesipho columna, the tubeworm Pomatoceros
that an organism has on the environment. The environment cariniferus, and the mussel Mytilus galloprovincialis, and
of a given species includes other organisms, with which it the upper limits of the principal lower eulittoral algae such
interacts through intra- and interspecific competition, as Durvillaea willana, Carpophyllum maschalocarpum,
predator–prey relationships, and basiphyte–epiphyte rela- and Cystophora scalari. The EHWN level marks the lower
tionships. Other organisms may greatly modify the envi- limits of a few high intertidal species such as the alga
ronment of a particular individual or population. Protec- Stichosiphonia arbuscula and the upper limit of a number
tion from strong irradiance and desiccation by canopy of filter feeders (barnacles, bivalves, and Pomatoceros).
algae is important to the survival of newly settled sporel- Generally, earlier studies have calculated the submer-
ings and the larvae of many species, and the survival of sion/emersion history of a shore from predicted or
understory algae and many sessile (e.g., sponges, bryozo- recorded tidal levels. However, as Druehl and Green
ans, colonial ascidians) and motile (e.g., gastropod mol- (1982) point out, such approaches fail to describe the sub-
luscs) animal species. Grazing damage may destroy plants, mersion/emersion history accurately, insofar as they do not
yet some species depend on grazers for their own survival. account for wave conditions over extended periods, or for
Finally, there are factor interactions through sequential the influence of local topographic conditions. Figure 2.23
effects. In general, any factor that alters the growth, form, from Druehl and Green (1982) compares submer-
reproductive, or physiological condition of an organism is gence/emergence data for a rocky point on Vancouver
apt to change the response of that organism to other fac- Island, British Columbia derived from predicted tide
tors, both at the same time and in the future. heights over one lunar cycle with the actual tidal heights
that take into account wave conditions. Their data demon-
2.3.9 CRITICAL LEVELS strate that wave action causes substantial changes in actual
submergence/submergence events from those predicted
Early hypotheses to account for the patterns of zonation from tidal data, and that the extent of these changes is
and vertical distribution of species on rocky shores dependent upon topography and season. This is demon-
involved the concept of critical tidal levels (CTLs) (Col- strated in Figure 2.23, which compares the measured accu-
man, 1933; Southward, 1958; Lewis, 1964; Newell, 1979). mulated time submerged as a function of elevation above
The critical level concept was originally developed by zero tide level for a rocky point, a channel, and a gently
Colman (1933) and elaborated by Doty (Doty, 1946; Doty sloping rock face, all within 50 m of each other, compared
and Archer, 1950). They advanced the view that at certain with data from tidal predictions. Druehl and Green (1982)
levels on the shore (critical levels), the rate of change of found that in some instances, limits of vertical distribution
tidal emersion and submersion was greater than at other of algae over their 6-year study period ranged over 1 m
levels. At these levels a disproportionate number of spe- (or over 1/3 of the maximum tidal amplitude). Other stud-
cies reached their limit of tolerance to the periods of ies have demonstrated a seasonal change in the vertical
emersion or submersion during the tidal cycle. While the limits of intertidal plants (Druehel and Hsiao, 1977;
critical tidal level hypothesis has been widely supported Schonbeck and Norton, 1978). Over the period of their
as a major factor in explaining zonation on rocky shore study, Druehel and Green (1982) found that while vertical
intertidal communities (Beveridge and Chapman, 1950; floristic patterns changed from year to year, as well as
Doty and Archer, 1950; Knox, 1953; Lewis, 1964; among the three topographies (rocky point, channel, and
Townsend and Lawson, 1972; Carefoot, 1977; Druehel gently shelving rock face), there was a general tendency
48 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.22 Total number of species, number of upper limits, number of lower limits, and total number of limits at various levels on
the shore at Taylors Mistake, South Island, New Zealand. (Redrawn from Knox, G.A., Trans. R. Soc. N.Z., 82 , 192 , 1953. With permission.)

FIGURE 2.23 Submergence-emergence data from a site on Vancouver Island, British Columbia. (a) Measured accumulated time
submerged as a function of elevation above zero tide for a rocky point (P), a channel (C), and a gently shelving rock face (F), all
within 50 m of one another, compared to data from 6-min tidal predictions (U). (b) Predicted tide heights over a lunar cycle. (c)
Actual tide heights and wave heights at the rocky point. The wave height data are derived form twice-daily observations. (Redrawn
from Druehl, L.D. and Green, M., Mar. Ecol. Progr. Ser., 9, 165, 166, 1982. With permission.)
Hard Shores 49

for the majority of species to alter their limits in a common antarctica, a prominant species on Macquarie Island
mode from year to year. These results suggest the presence shores, has been shown to be greatly affected by the graz-
of common factor(s) where stress/benefit effects on the ing activities of limpets on newly settled sporelings (Hay,
vertical limits of the plants vary from year to year, but that 1982) and speculate that the limpet Nacella macquariensis
for any one year, they have a more or less uniform effect. on Macquarie Island probably plays an important role in
Underwood (1978a), in a study of the upper and lower determining the upper limit of the kelp. However, they fail
boundaries on five shores in different parts of Great Brit- to mention that the removal of both limpets and barnacles
ain, found no evidence that critical tide levels exist, on southern South Island shores did not result in kelp
because there was no evidence that the upper or lower sporelings colonizing levels above the normal limit of
boundaries of the distribution of vertical distribution were Durvillaea. Furthermore, the sporelings that settled and
in any way aggregated. He points out that if CTLs actually grew above the normal upper limit of Durvillaea at Kaik-
exist, then the boundaries of distribution of intertidal spe- oura further north on the South Island coast were unable
cies should be dispersed nonrandomly, i.e., they should to survive hot, dry conditions during the summer, and Hay
be underdispersed, or clumped, along an intertidal gradi- (1982) considered that while the removal of limpets did
ent. Underwood (1978b) described a method for detecting raise the level colonized by sporelings, the upper margin
nonrandom patterns of distribution of species along a gra- of D. antarctica is determined mainly by the physiological
dient. He developed an occupancy model based on the tolerance of the sporelings to desiccation. On the Snares
method of Pielou (1975), but correcting for biases in the Islands, while numerous small plants were found under
method as applied by Pielou and Routledge (1976). Cha- the D. antarctica canopy, only a few scattered, stunted
loupka and Hall (1984) later elaborated a restricted occu- plants occured above the the upper limit of the holdfast
pancy model, as an alternative model to the unrestricted attachments. Limpets were not abundant in the zone above
occupancy model used by Underwood to test the null the Durvillaea, and it may be inferred that the upper limit
hypothesis that the upper and lower limits of intertidal of D. antarctica on the Snares Islands shores is probably
species are dispersed randomly with respect to the inter- determined mainly by physical factors.
tidal gradient. They used their model to analyze the dis- A second major concentration of upper and lower
tribution of species boundaries on the intertidal rocky limits occurs at the upper limit of the Pachymenia zone.
shores of sub-Antarctic Macquarie Island. They found that This zone is dominated by the red algae Pachymenis luso-
the observed species were randomly dispersed along the ria, Gigartina spp., Notogenia fastigista, and Haliptilon
intertidal gradient, concluded that there was no evidence roseum. Other green, brown, and red algae are minor
to support the CTL hypothesis, and suggested that tidal components. Grazing by the limpet, Cellana strigilis, and
emersion was not a significant factor in structuring inter- the siphonariids, Kerguelenella strwartiana and Sipho-
tidal communities on Macquarie Island. naria zelandica, which are common in the zone above,
Knox and Duncan (in preparation) tested the CTL probably plays a role in combination with desiccation in
hypothesis in an investigation of species vertical zonation determining the upper limits of the algae.
patterns along 13 transects ranging from sheltered to Field observations, however, lend support to the view
exposed on the sub-Antarctic Snares Islands to the south that desiccation plays an important role in determining the
of New Zealand. Figure 2.24 plots the upper and lower upper limits of intertidal algae. Many algae extend further
limits for the dominant species on the Snares Islands upshore wherever they are protected from desiccation by
shores. From the plots it can be seen that there are clusters repeated wave splash (Burrows et al., 1954; Lewis, 1964),
of vertical limits at a number of levels on the shore. The by an overlying canopy of larger algae (Menge, 1976), or
major ones coincide with the upper limits of the bull kelp by inhabiting shady places (Norton et al., 1981). Year-
Durvillaea antarctica and the red alga Pachymenia lusoria round observations on the condition of the intertidal algae
and the lower limits of the lichens of the littoral fringe. growing in situ on the shores of the Isle of Cumbrae,
Possible causes of these clumpings are discussed below. Scotland, showed that the upper limit of the zones occu-
The upper limit of the kelp D. antarctica is a conspic- pied by the fucoid algae Pelvetia canaliculata, Fucus spi-
uous feature of southern shores, and it coincides approx- ralis, and Ascophyllum nodosum were periodically pruned
imately with the mean low water of neap tides. On steep back by environmental factors when drying conditions
exposed cliff faces, the attachment zone of the Durvillaea coincided with neap tides, which exposed the plants to
holdfasts occupies a vertical zone of no more than 1 meter, aerial conditions for long periods. Laboratory experiments
and often less, while on broken exposed coasts with reefs also demonstrated that the ability to tolerate desiccation
and boulders it may extend over a vertical height of 4 to and then resume growth when resubmerged was greatest
5 meters. Hay (1982) found that on the New Zealand in P. canaliculata, the species found highest on the shore,
mainland, the upper limit of Durvillaea extended to higher and was progressively less in the species inhabiting suc-
levels in the southern part of the South Island than in the cessively lower levels. Similar correlations between ver-
northern part. Chapalouka and Hall (1984) state that D. tical distribution and drought tolerance have been reported
50

FIGURE 2.24 Upper and lower limits of intertidal plants and animals on the shores of the Snares Islands, New Zealand.
The Ecology of Seashores
Hard Shores 51

for other species of intertidal algae. Other workers, how- ing, predation, competition, and other intra- and interspe-
ever, (e.g., Edwards, 1972; Dromgoole, 1980) have found cific interactions.
no direct relationship between rate of dehydration and
location on the shore. 2.4 HARD SHORE MICROALGAE
On a number of occasions in the field I have observed
the pruning back effect discussed by Schonbeck and A film of organic material and microorganisms coats the
Norton (1978). In January 1986 on the Snares Islands, littoral rock surfaces, the shells of animals such as bivalve
when a period of calm weather coincided with exceptional molluscs, and the fronds of algae. In addition to diatoms
neap tides with a small range and relatively high temper- and blue-green algae, bacteria and protozoa are abundant
atures (16°C+), there was a dramatic die-off of the alga in such films, which are the first site of attachment and
at the top of the Pachymenia zone. In particular, the red early growth of all settling macroalgae and sessile animals
algae Pachymenis lusoria and Halipton roseum were (Wahl, 1989). This microbial film is the main food resource
bleached white. of microphagous herbivores whose grazing activities reg-
A third major grouping of limits occurs near the lower ulate and even prevent macroalgal recruitment and growth
boundary of the lichen zone, which is a conspinuous fea- (for reviews see Underwood, 1979; Lubchenco and Gaines,
ture of the littoral zonation patterns of the Subantarctic 1981; Hawkins and Hartnoll, 1983a). Although the impor-
islands (Knox, 1968, 1975, 1988c). This boundary is tance of this microbial film has long been recognized, its
marked by the lower limit of the white lichen, Pertusaria study has received much less attention than that of the
graphica. On the east coast of the Snares Islands, this is macrobiota (MacLulich, 1983; Hill and Hawkins, 1990).
several meters above low water spring tide level and pro- Temporal variation in the microalgal community has
gressively extends lower down the shore as shelter from been investigated at a number of different geographic
wave action increases. It appears that the high shore lichens localities (North America, Castenholz, 1961; Australia,
cannot withstand prolonged immersion in seawater. MacLulich, 1983; Underwood, 1984a,b,c; Great Britain,
It has thus been established that on some shores, the Hill and Hawkins, 1990), but very little work has been
upper and lower limits of species distributions are con- carried out on the patchiness of these benthic microalgal
centrated at particular levels on the shore. However, the communities (Hill and Hawkins, 1990). The importance
relationship of these levels (CTLs) to the tidal factor is of microalgae in the diet of microphagous grazers has been
not clear-cut, and there is a dearth of experimental evi- demonstrated many times (Medlin, 1981; Raffaelli, 1985;
dence that has tested growth, survival, and reproduction Hill and Hawkins, 1990).
just above and below a CTL. A variety of studies have Hill and Hawkins (1990) studied the seasonal and
shown that abiotic factors associated with an intertidal spatial variation in the distribution and abundance of rocky
position can limit the vertical distribution of marine algae. shore microalgae on moderately exposed shores on the
Observations on postearthquake shores of Alaska demon- Isle of Man. They found that the microbial biomass
strated that moderately uplifted intertidal communities increased during the late autumn, peaked in the winter,
could not survive at a higher intertidal level, but that and declined to relatively low levels during late spring and
communities shifted downward could survive at their new summer. This result was generally consistent with previ-
position (Haven, 1971). Further, transplant studies on ously reported studies (Castenholz, 1961; 1963; MacLu-
intertidal fucoids have demonstrated that the upper limits lich, 1983; Underwood, 1984a). Both MacLulich (1983)
of two Fucus species are determined by physical factors and Hill and Hawkins (1990) found that algal diversity
(Schonbeck and Norton, 1978). increased in the late spring and summer. Hill and Hawkins
A number of factors complicate possible correlations (1990) also found considerable spatial differences in
between distributional limits and CTLs, notably wave microalgal abundance and composition. Diatom abun-
action and the ability of organisms to become acclimated dance, dominated by the firmly attached stalked species,
during periods of subcritical conditions. Further, the crit- Acanthes, was greatest on barnacles, while filamentous
ical period may apply to reproduction and settlement, or algal cover was greatest on open rock. In his investigation
survival after settlement, rather than the ability of the of the microalgal flora on an intertidal rock platform near
adults to survive and grow at a particular level. Also, as Sydney, Australia, MacLulich (1983) found that the com-
discussed above, it may not be the average continuous munity was dominated by a blue-green alga, Anacystis sp.,
emersion that is critical, but a period of unusual continu- a situation not previously described in any similar system.
ous emersion that coincides with abnormally high summer Also present were diatoms and various red, green, and
temperatures. As will be discussed in Chapter 6, physical brown algal sporelings. Both density and variety were
factors and their impact on the physiological functioning greater lower on the shore and at more exposed sites. He
of intertidal species are only part of the explanation of suggested that the great variety of the microalgal assem-
zonation patterns. There are also a number of biological blages that he found may be due to: (1) the density of
controls that determine the upper and lower limits: graz- Anacystis sp. spores and microscopic red, green, and
52 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.25 Seasonal patterns of vertical distribution of microalgae measured by chlorophyll concentrations in samples at five
levels of the shore: n = 8 in each case; standard. Errors are not shown, to avoid confusion, but ranged from 0.04–0.65 (with 85% of
samples < 0.32); levels sampled were , 1 (highest); , 2; , 3; , 4; , 5 (lowest). (Redrawn from Underwood, A.J., J. Exp.


Mar. Biol. Ecol., 78, 199, 1984a. With permission.)

brown algae was greatly reduced during the summer, abruptly at all levels. This decrease was greatest at the
thereby increasing the observed variety; (2) diatoms (as a lower levels, resulting in little or no difference among the
group) increased both in variety and number during the abundances of the microalgae at the five heights during
summer; and (3) gastropods increased in number and the summer. These seasonal changes were unrelated to
activity during the summer, which may have resulted in a any major changes in the densities of the grazers. Other
reduction in the density of certain preferred species (Mac- workers have also described a greater concentration of
Lulich, 1983). chlorophyll (Nicotri, 1977), or number of diatoms (Round,
Gastropod molluscs, especially limpets, are the prin- 1971) toward the lower levels on the shore. These inves-
cipal grazers on these microalgal communities, and the tigators explained this as a response to periods of emersion
question as to whether there is preferential grazing has and the inability of the microalgae to withstand prolonged
been investigated in a number of studies (see Castenholz, periods of desiccation, increased temperature, and
1961; 1963; Foster, 1975; Underwood, 1984a,b). Gastro- increased light intensity at the higher levels on the shore.
pod grazing will be further explored in Chapter 6. Castenholz (1961), however, pointed out that the increased
Underwood (1984a) estimated the abundance of abundance of diatoms toward the lower levels on Oregon
microalgae on the shores of Cape Banks, Botany Bay, shores may have been due to the fact that grazing pressure
New South Wales, Australia, by assays of the concentra- due to limpets and species of Littorina decreased at lower
tion of chlorophyll on and in the surface of sandstone rock levels. In later studies Castenholz (1963) revealed that the
at five levels on the shore at approximately monthly inter- pattern of distribution on various surfaces depended to a
vals. This (Figure 2.25) revealed a vertical gradient of very great extent on the aspect of the substratum. Thus,
increasing abundance of microalgae toward the bottom of on balance it seems that much of the vertical distribution
the shore, except in the summer. This trend was not cor- of intertidal microalgae may be a direct result of physio-
related with decreasing abundance of microalgal grazers. logical stresses during low tide. Superimposed on this is
During the summer the abundance of microalgae declined the effect of grazers.
Hard Shores 53

2.5 HARD SHORE MICRO- AND of the shore, meiofaunal density and biomass increased
MEIOFAUNA (Figure 2.26).
In 1985 Heip et al. reviewed the ecology of marine
Mare (1942) divided the benthos into three categories: nematodes, noting that when macrophytes are present in
the macrobenthos, including all organisms too large to the littoral zone, an enormous increase in food availability,
pass through a 1-mm sieve; the meiobenthos, including habitat complexity, and shelter is created. In sheltered areas
those that do pass through a 1-mm mesh but are retained the algae accumulate sediment and detritus, and such plants
by a 0.1-mm mesh; and the microbenthos, those forms have a richer nematode fauna. Moore (1978) found that the
that pass through a 0.1-mm mesh. Coull and Wells nematodes inhabiting holdfasts of kelp (Laminaria) were
(1983), on the other hand, define meiofauna as mostly epigrowth feeders and omnivores. Kito (1982) stud-
micrometazoans that pass through a 0.5-mm mesh. The ied the nematodes from the thalli of the brown alga Sar-
microbenthos comprises mainly bacteria, small protozo- gassum confusum in Japan and found that the nematodes
ans, especially flagellates, ciliates, and amoebae. The were second in abundance to the harpacticoid copepods.
meiobenthos includes many small copepods, nematodes, Harpacticoid copepods are usually the second most
flatworms, the larval stages of various molluscs, poly- abundant meifaunal taxon in marine sediments, with free-
chaetes, and other animals, rotifers, gastrotrichs, gna- living nematodes regularly ranking first in terms of the
thostomulids, and the larger foraminiferans. Of these, total number of individuals. However, harpacticoids are
the copepods and the nematodes are numerically the reported to comprise from 11 to 60% of the phytal (sea-
most important. They are metabolically important mem- weed-associated) meiofauna (Hicks 1977b). Phytal har-
bers of the benthic ecosystem (Gerlach, 1971) and are pacticoids have been investigated in South Africa (Bechley
known to be prey items for a variety of larger animals and McLachlan, 1980), New Zealand (Hicks, 1977a,b,c;
(Coull and Bell, 1979), particularly juvenile fishes 1985a; Coull and Wells, 1983). They comprise two
(Hicks and Coull, 1983). groups: (1) those characteristic of sediments trapped by
Most of the investigations on marine meiobenthic the algae, and (2) the true phytal dwelling forms. The
ecology have been carried out on soft shores, and there is highest diversity for harpacticoid assemblages is recorded
a considerable body of literature concerning this. In con- from algal holdfast communities (Moore, 1979), while
trast, there is very limited knowledge of the meiofauna of Hicks (1977c) has also recorded high densities from the
rocky shores, apart from the harpacticoid copepods fronds of the brown alga Ecklonia radiata.
(Hicks, 1980; 1985a; Hicks and Coull, 1983). In 1980, Often when algal fronds are heavily loaded with silt-
Platt and Warwick reviewed the significance of free-living clay or detritus, a fauna typical of most sediments, i.e., a
nematodes in littoral ecosystems and cited only two ref- nematode-dominated fauna, is found. If only the fronds
erences (Moore, 1978; Warwick, 1977) that were studies or blades of the algae are considered, then copepods are
on the nematodes of rocky shores. the dominant taxon. Increased surface area (complexity)
The exceptions to the paucity of studies of rocky shore of the plant substratum generally leads to a concomitant
meiofauna include those of Gibbons and Griffiths (1986) increase in copepod numbers and/or species (Hicks,
and Gibbons (1989) in South Africa, Coull et al. (1983) 1977c; 1980). Hicks (1977c) distinguishes two general
on the phytal meiofauna in South Carolina, U.S.A., and subassociations of phytal harpacticoids, those character-
the extensive study of the phytal meiofauna of the rocky istic of the sediments trapped by the algae, and the true
intertidal at Island Bay, Wellington, New Zealand (Hicks, phytal dwelling forms. Many of the latter are ovoid to
1977a,b,c; 1980; Coull and Wells, 1983). Gibbons (1989) subovoid in shape and often dorsoventrally flattened or
investigated the impact of organic sediments on a rocky laterally compressed (amphipod shaped). Phytal assem-
shore in relation to tidal elevation, using artificial “algal” blages are remarkably similar in different parts of the
mats of differing complexity. Sediment accumulation was world (Hicks and Coull, 1983). The highest known species
correlated with habitat structure and increased at higher diversity for harpacticoid assemblages has been recorded
elevations. The meiofaunal communities were similar to from algal holdfast communities (Moore, 1979) and shal-
those previously reported from intertidal algae (Hicks, low water algal frond assemblages also have high diversity
1977a; Edgar, 1983a,b,c,d; Johnson and Scheibling, 1987; (Hicks, 1977c).
Coull, 1988). The meiofauna was dominated by small There is a considerable volume of literature demon-
interstitial forms, notably harpacticoid copepods, copepod strating the importance of harpacticoids as food for larval,
nauplii, amphipods, and nematodes. Densities recorded juvenile, and small fishes (for references see Hicks and
on the high shore were as great as those on the low Coull, 1983). Meiobenthic harpacticoids ingest either
intertidal, although the diversity (especially of the larger epipelic (benthic) or epiphytic diatoms, phytoflagellates,
forms) and biomass were markedly lower. As a result of bacteria, either as aggregated cells or as detritus associ-
the increasingly favorable environment toward the bottom ates, blue-green algae, ciliates, and mucoid substances
54 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.26 The distribution of major (5% total biomass) meiofaunal groups among artificial mats at three studied elevations
above Chart Datum. A: MHWN; B: MTL; C: MLWS. Complex mats are sample numbers 1, 3, 7, 8, 15–17; mats of medium complexity
size are numbers 4, 5, 10–12, 18–20; and simple mats are numbers 6, 13, 14, 21-23. (Redrawn from Gibbons, M.J., Est. Coastal
Shelf Sci., 27, 585, 1989. With permission.)

(Hicks and Coull, 1983). A number of species such as the 2.6 ROCKY SHORE LICHENS
frond-mining species Diarthrodes cystoecus feed on the
medullary tissues of the macroalgae. Coull and Wells 2.6.1 SPECIES COMPOSITION AND DISTRIBUTION
(1983) in a series of experiments on the rocky intertidal PATTERNS
at Island Bay, Wellington, New Zealand, demonstrated
that substrate complexity was an important factor in reduc- Although lichens are a common feature of most rocky
ing fish predation on phytal harpacticoids. They found that shores, they are more often than not neglected in accounts
the red alga Corallina officinalis, the most complex struc- of shore zonation patterns. As Fletcher (1980) points out,
ture tested, was the only refuge for harpacticoids from although almost 450 species of lichens inhabit and can
blenny (Helcogramma medium) predation for the total dominate the eulittoral, littoral fringe, and supralittoral
meiofaua and the dominant taxon, copepods. rocks of seashores around the British Isles, there is little
Hard Shores 55

published information on their distribution, biological bright orange Caloplaca marina, with a reduced cover of
interactions, and physiological properties. Of these 450 grey species.
species, the vast majority occur in the supralittoral.
On most temperate shores the region above high 2.6.1.2 The sub-Antarctic Region
water mark is blackened by an overgrowth of blue-green
algae and lichens called the “black zone” by Stephenson One of the characteristic features of the littoral zones of
and Stephenson (1972). The dominant plant associations the sub-Antarctic region is the prominent role played by
are: (1) Cyanophyta (Calothrix, Plectonema, Gloecapsa, lichens of various species, especially in the littoral fringe
etc.); (2) Lichina pygmaea (Lecanorales, Lichenes); and (Skottsberg, 1941; Knox, 1960, 1968). Anyone who has
(3) Lichina maura (Verrucariales, Lichenes). Lichen dis- visited the islands of the sub-Antarctic must be impressed
tribution on rocky shores will be illustrated with refer- with the broad band of white and grey lichens, often with
ence to the British Isles and the southern sub-Antarctic bands of orange, in the transition zone between the eulit-
region. toral and the maritime terrestrial vegetation. This band,
depending on the degree of exposure to wave action, may
2.6.1.1 British Isles be many meters in vertical height.
The distribution of the lichen flora has only been
Eulittoral Zone: This zone is rarely dominated by examined in detail on two of the island groups, the Auck-
lichens. Arthropyvenia sublittoralis may be locally fre- land Islands (Knox, 1968) and the Snares Islands (Sains-
quent on chalk and limestone shores where it penetrates bury, 1972). Personal observations have also been made
down to the uppermost limit of Laminaria. Lichina pyg- on Campbell Island and the sub-Antarctic coasts of South
maea on most shores straddles the margin between the America. In the Auckland Islands, a total of 21 species
littoral fringe and the upper eulittoral, but on Chthalamus has been recorded. This list will no doubt be extended
shores is confined to the barnacle zone. considerably with more intensive collecting. The zonation
Littoral Fringe: This zone, in contrast to the one is dominated by four species of Verrucaria that form a
below, has an extensive lichen cover. It is dominated by series from the upper littoral fringe to the lower eulittoral.
Verrucaria mucosa and V. halizoa in the lower part, above Species of Verrucaria are also prominent in other areas of
which is V. striatula, followed by V. amphibia and finally the sub-Antarctic, e.g., Marion and Prince Edward (De
V. maurea, which is by far the most important species. Villiers, 1976) and Kerguelen (Delepine and Hureau,
Lichina pygmaea appears among V. mucosa and the upper- 1968; Arnaud, 1974), and in the Antarctic (Dodge, 1962;
most barnacle on sunny shores, provided that wave action Knox, 1968).
is moderate, while Lichina confinis occupies the middle Sainsbury (1972) subdivided the lichen zone on the
and upper parts of the Verrucaria zone. V. mucosa similarly Snares Islands into an upper portion (upper littoral fringe)
becomes rare on wave-exposed shores. Lichina confinis is terminating at the lower range of Caloplaca sublobulata.
common among the uppermost patches of V. maura on This upper portion receives a constant low level of spray
sunny, sheltered shores. The three British marine Atrhopy- and often comparatively high levels of desiccation. The
renia spp. intermingle with marine Verrucaria spp. lower portion (lower littoral fringe) is not as strongly
On some shores in the upper part of the littoral fringe desiccated, and receives spray and wave wash that changes
and extending up into the supralittoral, there occurs what greatly with weather conditions.
has been termed the “Orange Belt.” The dominant species Sainsbury (1972) has investigated the faunal commu-
are orange Caloplaca marina and the white-to-grey nity associated with the lichens and other plants of the
Lecanora helicopis, L. actophila, and Catillaria chaly- littoral fringe on the Snares Islands. He recorded 60+
beia. Arthonia phaeobaea, Lecania erysibe, and species including 16 Diptera (4 breeding), 1 Hymenoptera,
Caloplaca thallincola are frequent under suitable condi- 4 Coleoptera (all of which had larvae associated with the
tions. Often Caloplaca marina forms a lower zone, with lichens), 5 Collembola, 1 Tardigrada, 1 Pseudoscorpion-
Lacanora actophila above, but much local intermingling idae, 1 Araneae, 26 Acarina, and 2 Amphipoda. Rotifers
can occur. In addition, the species composition of the belt and nematodes were also present. He found that the var-
can vary. For example, on shaded shores, Caloplaca ious lichen species had their own specific assemblage and
marina is replaced by a sparser cover of orange Caloplaca he was able to develop a preliminary food web for the
thallincola, while on these same shore Arthronia phae- system. The primary consumers could be divided into four
obaea, Lacania erysibe, Catillaria chalybeia, and groups, feeding either on the lichens themselves, on free-
Lacanora helicopis become more frequent. Consequently living microalgae, on free-living fungi, or on detritus.
this subzone is seldom orange on shaded shores, and Kromberg (1988) investigated the fauna of the “black
becomes leaden-grey, with only occasional patches of zone” in the littoral fringe of the rocky shores of northern
orange Caloplaca spp. On the other hand, sunny shores Europe. Here the encrusting lichen Verrucaria maura
are dominated by creamy-white Lacanora actophila and grows preferentially along dry and wave-exposed shores.
56 The Ecology of Seashores

Where crevices are available, they are inhabited by a ter- kept permanently submerged rather than repeatedly being
restrial fauna composed of Nanorchestes amphibius and exposed to air (Norton, 1985). Therefore it can be assumed
Bdella septemtrionalis (Acarina), Anurida maritima (Col- that they could live lower on the shore and that other
lembola), Strigamia maritima (Chilopoda), Pterobius factors must restrict their lower limits. The only seaweed
brevistylis (Archaeognatha), and by aquatic forms such as that may require periodic emersion is the high-level spe-
Ligia oceanica (Isopoda) and Littorina neritoides (Gas- cies Pelvetia canaliculata. When transplanted to the mid-
tropoda). Small shrub-like lichens (Lichina pygmaea) are shore, it thrived throughout the summer, but during the
inhabited by species such as the isopod Campecopea hir- winter it declined and eventually decayed (Schonbeck and
suta, the molluscs Lasaea rubra, Mytilus edulis (juvenile), Norton, 1980). Thus most species of eulittoral macroalgae
Littorina neritoides, L. saxatilis, the mites Hyadesia fusca, can survive at lower levels on the shore than those they
Ameronothrus spp., and Limoniidae instars (Geranomyia normally inhabit.
unicolor). A number of investigations have tested the role of
Cyanophyta prefer sheltered shores and show a high interspecific competition in limiting the distribution of
tolerance to freshwater influences. The fauna here is com- macroalgae. Removal of the plants of one species usually
posed of a few aquatic animals: Hyadesia fusca (Acarina), allows other species to extend their ranges. For example,
Mniobia symbotica (Rotatoria), Telmatogeton japonicus on North American shores, the removal of Chondrus cris-
(Chironomidae), Echiniscoides sigismundi (Tardigrada), pus allowed Fucus to colonize the Chondrus zone (Menge,
Littorina saxatilis (Gastropoda), and several eulittoral and 1976), and Fucus serratus occasionally appeared in
terrestrial invaders. cleared areas in the sublittoral on British shores (Kain,
Kromberg (1988) recorded a total of 67 species 1975). In another experiment, the clearing of Ascophyllum
including 17 Nematoda, 13 Acarina, 11 Insecta, and 8 nodosum resulted in the colonization of the cleared areas
Copepoda-Harpacticoida. The most abundant species by Fucus spiralis from above (Kain, 1975). Schonbeck
were Rotatoria (Mniobia symbiotica), Tardigrada (Echi- and Norton (1980) denuded areas of the shore in which
niscoides sigismundi), Acarina (Hyadesia fusca), Collem- Pelvetia and F. spiralis grew when both species were fer-
bola (Anurida maritima, Hypogastrura viatica), and Chi- tile. They allowed the areas to become colonized by both
ronomidae (Telematogeton japonicus). Terrestrial animals species and then weeded out F. spiralis plants from parts
enter this zone from the supralittoral for feeding, e.g., of the cleared areas. In the unweeded areas, Pelvetia came
Anurida maritima, Hypogastrura viatica, Bdella sep- to dominate only within its usual zone, but when F. spiralis
temtrionalis, and Abrolophus rubipes. was removed, Pelvetia ranged well down into the Fucus
zone. F. spiralis outcompeted Pelvetia primarily due to its
vastly greater growth rate.
2.7 HARD SHORE MACROALGAE On a gradient of environmental conditions, competi-
2.7.1 ZONATION PATTERNS tion between species can result in zonal distribution pat-
terns. It has been shown that several species of fucoids
Aspects of the distribution of rocky shore macroalgae have grow more slowly toward their upper limits than they do
already been dealt with in previous sections of this chapter. lower on the shore (Schonbeck and Norton, 1979). Such
Here we will describe and compare algal zonation patterns growth inhibition is partially due to the fact that the plants
on representative shores from a range of geographic areas. grow faster when submerged longer, but also because sub-
As a starting point, we shall illustrate such patterns with lethal aerial emersion causes intermittent hiatuses in
those on an intermediately exposed shore in the British growth, the effects of which may persist after resubmer-
Isles, a shore dominated by fucoid and laminarian algae. gence. As a consequence, the uppermost plants of a zone
On a shore where there is a complete coverage of fucoids, may be stunted, fail to form a substantial canopy, and
the vertical sequence from the top of the shore is Pelvetia exhibit reduced fertility (Norton et al., 1981).
canaliculata, Fucus spiralis, Ascophyllum nodosum, and/or
Fucus vesiculosus, F. serratus (with Laurencia pinnatifida), 2.7.3 FACTORS CONTROLLING THE UPPER LIMITS
Laminaria digitata, and L. hyperborea. Figure 2.27 com- OF INTERTIDAL MACROALGAE
pares this zonation pattern with that of shores on the North
American east coast, the North American west coast, Chile, For intertidal macroalgae, aerial emersion should consti-
New Zealand, temperate Australia, and South Africa. tute an adverse stress since it has been demonstrated that
they grow best when submerged (Schonbeck and Norton,
2.7.2 FACTORS CONTROLLING THE LOWER LIMITS 1980), and prolonged emersion high on the shore can prove
OF INTERTIDAL MACROALGAE
fatal. Protection from the worst effects of aerial emersion
(such as in shaded situations, in rockpools, or beneath an
It has been demonstrated that a number of algal species overlying canopy of other macroalgae) enables many spe-
of the upper shore exhibit their most rapid growth when cies to survive higher on the shore than normal. Thus, it
Hard Shores

FIGURE 2.27 Comparison of algal zonation patterns on the shores of Great Britain, North American east coast, North American west coast, Chile, New Zealand, and South Africa.
57
58 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.28 Zone sharpening in the littoral fringe at Hunterston, Ayreshire, Scotland. A: Vertical distribution of settled propagules,
from summer, 1975, until winter, 1978–79. B: Vertical distribution of macroscopic plants, February, 1979. P = Prasiola stipata; U
= Urospora bangioides; B = Bildingia minima; Po = Porphyra umbilicalis; Pc = Pelvetia canaliculata; F = Fucus spiralis; f = Fucus
plants of indeterminate species. L.A.T = Lowest Astronomical Tide. (Modified from Clokie, J.J.P. and Boney, A.D., in The Shore
Environment, Vol. 2. Ecosystems, Price, J.H., Irvine, D.E.G., and Farnham, W.F., Eds., Academic Press, London, 1980b, 645. With
permission.)

would appear that desiccation and overheating are of some may grow for a period, they are subsequently killed
importance in limiting the upward extension of macroalgae off so that the zone of the adult plants is “sharpened.” This
on the shore. This was confirmed by Schonbeck and sharpening is illustrated by the study of Hay (1982) on
Norton (1978), who studied the zonation of littoral fucoid factors affecting the upper limits of the southern bull kelp,
algae on the west coast of Scotland where there were five Durvillaea antarctica, on southern New Zealand shores.
species of fucoids, each forming a well-marked zone.
Schonbeck and Norton (1978) correlated the condition
of algae on the shore with climatic conditions over a 2.8 KEY FAUNAL COMPONENTS
period of two and a half years. They found that the upper Three groups of animals dominate the eulittoral zone:
limits of the zones highest on the shore, i.e., those domi- mussels, limpets, and barnacles. In this section we shall
nated by Pelvetia canaliculata, Fucus spiralis, and Asco- examine the dynamics of these groups and the role they
phyllum nodosum, were periodically “pruned back” during play in structuring intertidal ecosystems.
the summer. The picture that emerged from this study was
of plants that could survive for long periods at the upper
margin of their zone, but that a few critical days in the 2.8.1 MUSSELS
summer were sufficient to damage and often kill individ- 2.8.1.1 Introduction
uals that had settled above the level where they could
survive such a critical period. In species such as F. spiralis, Mussels (Family Mytilidae) are dominant space occupiers
in which growth is rapid, damaged plants were quickly on exposed or semiexposed rocky shores in temperate
replaced as those at the upper edge of the zone could be habitats throughout the world, especially on horizontal or
killed off and recolonized during a single summer. How- gently sloping surfaces. They are one of the most produc-
ever, if the slower growing Pelvetia plants were killed, it tive species on earth, rivaling the productivity of tropical
took much longer for them to recolonize the area. rainforests and kelp beds (Whittaker, 1975), with a stand-
Propogules of rocky shore algae generally settle over ing crop of up to 6.5 kg m–2 and a productivity of ca. 2.0
a wider vertical range on the shore than occupied by the kg m–2 yr–1 for low littoral Mytilus californianus beds at
adult plants (Figure 2.28). They therefore settle in posi- Tatoosh Island, Washington (U.S.A.).
tions where survival to adulthood is extremely unlikely. Although most mytilid populations are found in the
Considerable truncation of the settlement vertical range mid- and low eulittoral zones, all appear to have the ability
takes place due to the death of the sporelings, and although to live sublittorally. However, species such as Aulacomya
Hard Shores 59

ater and Choromytilus meridionalis in South Africa and seastars Asterias spp., and three crabs Cancer spp. and
Modiolus modiolus in New England (U.S.A.), have dense Carcinus sp. (Menge, 1976; 1978a,b; 1979; 1983; Lub-
shallow sublittoral populations. Mytilus edulis and its spe- chenco and Menge, 1978; Menge and Lubchenco, 1981).
cies complex are most the widely distributed species living Predator-controlled lower limits of three other mytilid
in circumpolar temperate habitats in both the Northern species have been shown experimentally by R.T. Paine
and Southern Hemispheres (Seed, 1976). Suchanek (1985) in which he removed predatory seastars: Pisaster in
provides a detailed summary of the vertical and geograph- Washington, U.S.A. (Paine, 1974), Stichaster in New
ical ranges of the principal mytilid species found through- Zealand (Paine, 1971), and Heliaster in Chile (Paine et
out the world. al., 1985). In each case when predators were removed,
the dominant mussels at each site (Mytilus californianus,
2.8.1.2 Factors Limiting Mussel Zonation Perna canaliculus, and Perimytilus purpuratus, respec-
tively) extended their vertical ranges downward. When
Upper Limits — Mytilid upper limits are often very con- the predators were allowed to return to the sites, the
stant over long periods of time (Lewis, 1964; 1977; Paine, Perimytilus system returned to its original condition.
1974; 1984). At Tatoosh Island, Washington, Paine (1974; However, in some instances Perna and Mytilus were able
1976; 1994) has shown a constancy in the upper limits of to grow beyond the size capable of being consumed by
Mytilus californianus over 12 years (1971–83). Data by the seastars (Paine, 1976).
Suchanek (provided by Paine) show moderate stability for Competition has also been shown to control the lower
the upper limits of both M. edulis and M. californianus. limits of mussel species. Experimental manipulations of
While reduced food intake at high shore levels may populations of Perna in New Zealand by Paine (1971)
result in slower growth rates and smaller-sized adults have shown that in addition to being controlled at its lower
(Seed, 1976; Griffiths, 1981a,b), it appears that physio- limit by the predatory seastar Stichaster, it can also be
logical intolerance of desiccation is the single most sig- outcompeted by the bull kelp, Durvillaea antactica, which
nificant factor determining the upper limit of mussels. occur at the same level on the shore. When Durvillaea is
Mortality from high temperatures and/or desiccation has removed, Perna settles and grows in the vacated space.
been well documented (Suchanek, 1979; Griffiths, 1981a; On Washington coasts, M. edulis occurs on (1) a high
Tsuchiya, 1983). In a well-planned series of field and littoral band occupying about 0.3 m in vertical extent, (2)
laboratory studies, Kennedy (1976) determined the influ- in mid- to low-shore gaps formed in the M. californianus
ence of temperature and desiccation on three New Zealand band, and (3) in holdfasts of the kelp Lessoniopsis. When-
mussel species, M. galloprovincialis, Perna canaliculus, ever M. californianus was removed, either by winter
and Aulacomya mater. His results indicated that their rel- storms or experimentally, M. edulis colonized the lower
ative positions on the shore (M. galloprovincialis highest littoral sites.
and P. canaliculus lowest) were consistent with their
respective tolerances to temperature, and especially des- 2.8.1.3 Mussels as a Habitat for Associated
iccation. He also found that there were combined and/or Organisms
synergistic effects of temperature, wind, relative humidity,
and species-specific or age-specific behavioral differences Mussel beds are often multilayered and as such they pro-
on desiccation-related mortality. In high latitudes, freezing vide a habitat and refuge for a wide variety of associated
can be equally important as desiccation. organisms. The mussel bed habitat consists of three major
Lower Limits — A number of observational and/or components: the mussel matrix (mussel shells and byssal
experimental studies have shown that biological factors attachments), a diverse assemblage of associated organ-
(i.e., predation and competition) set the lower limits at isms, and the accumulated sediment and detritus within
which mussels grow on the shore. The pioneer work on the bed, especially at the base. The mussel matrix is more
this was carried out by Newcombe (1935) in the Bay of complicated than the surrounding substratum and as such
Fundy. He found that a suite of predators, a sea urchin provides a greater diversity of niches, thus leading to
(Strongylocentrotus), a dogwhelk (Nucella), and espe- increased species richness. As the matrix thickness
cially two species of seastar (Asterias) determined the increases, it: (1) decreases the influence of wave action,
lower limits of Mytilus edulis populations. In Ireland, temperature, and sunlight at the base of the bed; and (2)
Ebling et al. (1964) and Kitching and Ebling (1967) have increases relative humidity and sedimentation. For M. edu-
described a somewhat similar suite of predators that feed lis the matrix may reach a thickness of 10 cm (Nixon et
on M. edulis (the crabs Carcinus and Liocarcinus, the al., 1971), while for M. californianus the matrix is often
dogwhelk Nucella, and the seastar Marthasterias), and five or six mussel layers deep, reaching a thickness of
suggested that they controlled its littoral distribution. In about 35 cm (Suchanek, 1985).
New England the distribution of M. edulis is also con- The macroflora and fauna found in the mussel beds
trolled by a guild of predators: the dogwhelk Nucella, two fall into three categories: (1) epibiota (the fauna and flora
60 The Ecology of Seashores

that grow on, or bore into mussel shells); (2) mobile fauna 2.8.1.4 Role of Mussel Beds in Coastal
(organisms that move freely through the mussel matrix); Ecosystems
and (3) infauna (those organisms that are restricted to and
often dependent upon the organic detritus, sediment, and Mussels as filter feeders are an important component of
shell fragments that collect within the matrix). rocky shore ecosystems in most geographic areas. They
often represent a considerable biomass, and their filtration
1. Epibiota: A number of algae grow on the mus- activities can have a considerable impact on the properties
sel shells, especially encrusting corallines and of the water column in their vicinity. It is not unusual for
seasonal ephemerals such as Enteromorpha and the filtration capacity of these suspension feeders to be on
Ulva. Sessile invertebrates include barnacles, the order of one fifth to one third of the total system water
serpulid tubeworms, other tube-building poly- volume, thus imposing on the phytoplankton a mortality
chaetes, bryozoans, hydroids, anemones, and rate on the order of 0.20 to 0.33 day–1 (Dame et al., 1991;
ascidians. Limpets and chitons are often found Hily, 1991).
attached to the mussel shells. A number of spe- Many studies have shown that mussel suspension
cies including polychaetes and barnacles bore feeders play a significant role in coupling the pelagic and
into the calcarious mussel shells. benthic components of coastal ecosystems by:
2. Mobile fauna: This includes a great variety of
species, especially crustaceans (isopods, 1. Filtration of large quantities of material from
amphipods, tanaids, shrimps, and crabs). Other the water columns.
species include a variety of errant polychaetes 2. Reduction and possible local depletion of phy-
(e.g., hesionids, syllids, nereids, polynoids), toplankton concentrations.
asteroids, ophiuroids, herbivorous and carniv- 3. The biodeposition of large quantities of high-
orous gastropods, opisthobranchs, and some quality organic material.
small fishes. Some of these species prey on the 4. Remineralization of biodeposits.
mussels, while others use the mussel bed as 5. Release of inorganic nutrients to the water
shelter from desiccation when the tide is out or column.
as protection from predators. A number of 6. Increasing the availability of dissolved nutrients.
small bivalves (such as Lasaea spp.) can also 7. Affecting the nutrient ratios in the water column.
be found in the mussel matrix. Many of the
species found in the beds are the same as the In addition, the mussel beds themselves provide: (1)
epifauna of the macroalgae at the same level a rich food source for a variety of predators, especially
on the shore. gastropods, starfish, crabs, lobsters, fishes, and birds (see
3. Infauna: The accumulated detritus comprises Sections 6.2.3.2 and 6.3.5.7); (2) a substrate for the attach-
feces, pseudofeces, other organic detritus, and ment of a range of sessile animals and plants; and (3) a
inorganic components such as sediment, shell habitat and food resource for a rich community of meio-
fragments, sponge spicules, and sea urchin fauna and invertebrate macrofauna.
spines. In a 22-cm thick Mytilus californianus Tidal currents transport water masses from a large
bed in Washington, the dry weight of detritus surrounding area to the sites where mussel beds occur,
may reach 65 kg m–2 (Suchanek, 1985). A com- and thus enable a continuous input of fresh phytoplankton.
parable value for a 10-cm thick M. edulis bed Phytoplankton, however, constitutes only a minor propor-
in Rhode Island is 14.4 kg m–2, with an organic tion of the particulate organic matter in the water column
content of 3.86% (Nixon et al., 1971) seston (Hickel, 1984). The seston will also contain detritus
derived from a variety of sources, in particular kelp and
Species richness of the associated macrobenthic com- other algal detritus, resuspended phytoplankton, protozoa,
munity has been determined for a number of mussel com- and bacteria. While the non-phytoplankton food sources
munities: 303 taxa for a Mytilus californianus community may contribute to the energy requirements of the mussels,
(Suchanek, 1979; 1980), 90 for a Modiolus modiolus com- laboratory experiments have shown that Mytilus edulis
munity (Brown and Seed, 1977), and 69 for a M. edulis exhibits poor growth when supplied only with non-phy-
community (Tsuchiya and Nishihara, 1985). Both species toplankton food (Williams, 1981). Maximal clearance
richness and associated diversity indices are correlated rates for mussel beds range between 6 and 12 m3 m–2 hr–1
with age and the structural complexity of the mussel (for a summary see Jorgensen, 1990). Feeding by the
matrix (Suchanek, 1979). Species richness is also corre- mussels gives rise to the biodeposition of large quantities
lated with height on the shore; the higher on the shore, of feces and pseudofeces. Some of these will be retained
the fewer associated species. within the mussel bed or among the algal growths in the
Hard Shores 61

vicinity. Depending on wave action and the intensity of wave action is severe, and those with a much lower ratio
tidal currents, some will be carried away to be deposited (0.36), which live at less wave-exposed sites. The attach-
in adjacent bottom areas, where they provide food for ment of limpets is largely due to the pedal mucus (Grenon
detritivores and deposit feeders. Through their metabolic and Walker, 1980).
activities, the mussels release nutrients to the water col-
umn and remineralize deposited material, either in the 2.8.2.2 Factors Controlling Vertical Distribution
mussel bed matrix or on adjacent hard or soft sediments
releasing nutrients for further algal growth. While there is evidence that physical conditions (extreme
high temperatures or extreme cold) may at times be lethal,
2.8.2 LIMPETS whether this controls the upper limits of limpet distribu-
tion is open to question. We do have many reported exam-
Limpets are a major component of rocky shore intertidal ples of limpet death due to extremely cold winters, or
and shallow sublittoral ecosystems. Recent reviews of when high temperatures coincide with prolonged low
their biology and role in the dynamics of littoral and tides. Wolcott (1973) studied the ecology and distribution
sublittoral community dynamics include those of Branch of five species of acmaeid limpets over three years. He
(1981; 1986), while their role as herbivores has been found that field temperatures never became lethal and that
reviewed by Lubchenco and Gaines (1981) and Hawkins salinity variations seemed unlikely to control zonation.
and Hartnoll (1983a). However, high shore species were periodically affected by
desiccation. Wolcott developed a hypothesis that high-
2.8.2.1 Adaptations to Intertidal Living shore limpets fringe on a habitat that is physically
demanding (and potentially lethal), but relatively unex-
Homing to a fixed site on the shore after feeding excur- ploited. He proposed that it would profit high-shore lim-
sions is characteristic of many limpet species, and has pets to expand their range upward to the limit of their
long been assumed to be a behavior that protects against tolerance to benefit from unexploited food resources, even
desiccation (see Figure 5.11). Homing ensures that the if this involved the risk of death. The increased reproduc-
shell fits flush with the substratum. Limpets can thus tive effort due to the higher food supply would offset
clamp down on the rock surface and protect the soft parts losses due to mortality. In contrast, mid- to low-shore
from drying out and from extreme external salinities. Tem- limpets do not have access to such unexploited resources
peratures, which may approach lethal limits on hot sum- and consequently remain well within their limits of phys-
mer days, can be countered by lifting the shell, thus cool- ical tolerance, their zonation not set by physical condi-
ing the body by evaporation (Lowell, 1984). Several tions, but rather by behavior and interaction with other
littoral limpets migrate upshore during cooler conditions organisms. Choat (1977) found that when he experimen-
and then retreat downshore in the summer (Lewis, 1954a; tally removed a high-shore limpet (Collisella digitalis), a
Breen, 1972). Shell shape and texture can be correlated mid-shore species (C. strigatella) expanded its range
with physical conditions. High shore limpets tend to be upward in the absence of competition.
tall, thus decreasing the area exposed to solar radiation Juveniles of many limpets are limited to the lower
(Vermeij, 1973). Shade-dwelling individuals often have shore, while adults move upshore as they grow, thus estab-
smooth shells, while those exposed to direct sunlight are lishing size gradients on the shore (Vermeij, 1973). Juve-
often sculptured. niles of other species are restricted to cryptic habitats until
The relative tolerance of limpets to wave action is they are large enough to tolerate the stresses of open rock
influenced partly by shell shape and partly by adhesion faces. Recruitment, coupled with early mortality, are major
(Branch, 1981). Kelp-dwelling species have streamlined factors determining the population density of limpets.
shells, while in rock-dwelling species, shell shape pro-
foundly influences the drag imposed by wave action. 2.8.2.3 Algal–Limpet Interactions
Branch and Marsh (1978) demonstrated fourfold differ-
ences in drag between tall-domed species and those with Many studies (e.g., Underwood, 1980; Hay, 1982; Jerna-
flat shells. Despite these patterns they could find no cor- koff, 1983; and see reviews by Branch, 1981; 1986; Lub-
relations between shell shape and relative intensity of chenco and Gaines, 1981; Hawkins and Hartnoll, 1983a)
wave action that each species normally experienced. There have established that limpets can regulate the abundance
was, however, a correlation between wave action and the and distribution of littoral algae. Other authors have
power of attachment, which was found to vary consider- described how limpets eliminate or control the growth of
ably between species from 69,990 g m–2 in Patella argen- microflora on hard surfaces (Castenholz, 1961; Nicotri,
villei to 484 g m–2 in Acmaea dorsuosa (see Branch, 1981). 1977). Patallacean limpets with their strong radular teeth
Limpets could be divided into two groups: those with a are capable of excavating the rock surface and removing
high ratio of drag to tenacity (0.80), all of which live where all of the microalgae and algal sporelings, while Sipho-
62 The Ecology of Seashores

narian limpets with their relatively fragile teeth can only gastropods less active in the winter when the upright
rasp at the surface, and usually feed by breaking off pieces phase is prevalent.
of macroalgae (Creese and Underwood, 1982), thus sel- Limpet grazing can also influence the species compo-
dom affecting the abundance of the microalgae. The reg- sition and diversity of the algae (Lubchenco and Gaines,
ulation of algae by limpets depends on the rate of algal 1981). Jara and Moreno (1984) have shown that limpets
growth. On the mid- and high shore where physical and chitons virtually prevent the growth of the upright
stresses reduce algal growth, limpets dominate and little foliose form of the red alga Iridaea boryana in southern
algal growth is evident. However, lower on the shore the Chile. This then permits the development of short-lived
growth of algal sporelings may be rapid enough for some algae such as Petalonia and Scytosiphon, which are nor-
plants to escape grazing and develop. mally competitively excluded by I. boryana.
On many shores, limpets are abundant on the high
and mid-shore, but are replaced by dense algal growths 2.8.2.4 Limpet–Barnacle Interactions
on the low shore. A clear exception to this pattern is the
large limpet Patella cochlear, which dominates a narrow Barnacles and limpets may have both positive and nega-
band at the level of low water spring tides on African tive effects on each other. Limpets often hinder or prevent
shores (see Figure 2.12), reaching densities of 1600 m–2 the establishment of barnacle by grazing on newly settled
(Branch, 1975a). Algae flourish both above and below cyprids or “bulldozing” juvenile barnacles from the rocks
the cochlear zone, and experimental removal of P. (Dayton, 1975; Denley and Underwood, 1979; Under-
cochlear results in substantial algal growth. Once mac- wood et al., 1983). Barnacles reduce the growth rate and
roalgae establish themselves, they may prevent further reproductive output of some limpets (Choat, 1977;
settling of P. cochlear for extended periods. P. cochlear Underwood et al., 1983). At the same time, densities of
reaches its greatest density under moderate, but not juvenile limpets are often positively correlated with the
severe wave action, being replaced by algae on sheltered density of barnacles (Choat, 1977). Barnacles appear to
shores and by mussels on very exposed shores. The suc- hinder the grazing of at least three limpets that are mod-
cess of P. cochlear is related to its specialized habit of erate or large in size (Choat, 1977). The relationship
developing “gardens” of fine red algae that are highly between barnacle, and limpets is further complicated
productive and apparently essential to sustain the high when interactions with algae are taken into consideration.
densities (Branch, 1981). If isolated limpets are removed, Underwood et al. (1983) have shown that at very high
their scars are occupied by juvenile limpets that abandon densities, the limpet Cellana tramoserica reduces recruit-
their normal position on the shells of larger adults to ment and survival of the barnacle Tesseropora rosea, but
occupy the vacant scars. This is the reason for the stable in the absence of this limpet, and even when densities are
populations of P. cochlear. low, algae develop and smother the barnacles, or prevent
The limpet Acmaea tessulata is regularly associated further settlement.
with the coralline alga Clathromorphum circumscriptum, A number of authors have discussed cyclic changes
which depends on its grazing to remove epiphytes that that occur in limpet and algal abundance on British shores
would otherwise smother it (Steneck, 1982). In tropical (Southward and Southward, 1978; Hartnoll and Hawkins,
Panama the abundance of a blue-green algal crust (? 1980; Hawkins, 1981a,b; 1983). Large algae such as
Schizothrix calicula) is inversely related to the dominant Fucus species reduce barnacle settlement. The limpet
limpet Siphonaria gigas. Experimental removal of S. Patella vulgata immigrates onto strands of Fucus and
gigas increased the cover of Schizothrix but decreased prevents the development of further algal sporelings.
other encrusting species (e.g., Ralfsia) that appeared to be Eventually the adult Fucus are eliminated by wave action,
outcompeted by Schizothrix in the absence of S. gigas assisted by the limpets, which weaken their stipes. As the
(Levings and Garrity, 1984). fucoids decline, barnacle settlement increases. The barna-
Various authors have suggested that a heteromorphic cles retard colonization by some algae, such as diatoms
algal life cycle — an alternation of an encrusting stage and Enteromorpha, but they seem to enhance the settle-
with an upright foliose stage — is an adaptation to vari- ment of fucoids because their sporelings settle on and
ations in the intensity of grazing. For example, Slocum between the barnacles where they are relatively inacces-
(1980) demonstrated that the alga Gigatina papillosa has sible to the limpets. As a result, these sporelings can
a flat crustose phase that is dependent on grazers to pre- escape the limpet grazing until they are large enough to
vent its overgrowth and an upright foliose phase that be comparatively immune to grazing (Hawkins, 1981b).
flourishes when grazing is reduced, and is a superior In Chile, Jara and Moreno (1984) have shown that the
competitor. Dethier (1981) came to similar conclusions, removal of limpets and chitons allows the red alga Iridaea
and Lubchenco and Cubit (1980) have linked the two boryana to form a foliose canopy largely excluding bar-
phases with seasonal changes in herbivory with grazing nacles. However, in the presence of the grazers, the growth
Hard Shores 63

of I. boryana is restricted to a crustose sheet and barnacles above and below this “cochlear zone,” but only occurs
become abundant. in this zone after experimental removal of P. cochlear
(Branch, (1976).
2.8.2.5 Intra- and Interspecific Competition Interference and territoriality also play important roles
in the distribution of limpets. A dramatic example of ter-
In a range of studies, intraspecific competition has been ritorial behavior is that of Lottia gigantea, a large limpet
shown to influence growth, survival, recruitment, body that occupies patches of algal film on the western North
weight, and reproductive output (Branch, 1975a,b; Creese, American coast, which it defends by thrusting against
1980; Fletcher, 1984a,b; and see Branch, 1981; 1984 for intruders (Stimpson, 1970). Removal of L. gigantea
reviews). There are several possible mechanisms for results in invasion of its territory by numerous small
reducing intraspecific competition. Breen (1972) and acmaeid limpets that eliminate the algal film. Lottia gen-
Branch (1975b) have described how the limpets Colisella erally excludes these acmaeids from its territory and also
digitalis and Patella granularis migrate upshore as they ousts herbivorous gastropods and some space-occupying
age, leading to size gradients, with the largest limpets organisms, and retards the encroachment of mussels. The
highest on the shore. Workman (1983) analyzed the ener- growth rate of L. gigantea is correlated with the size of
getics of high- and low-shore populations of Patella vul- its territory, and it expands its territory when algae are
gata and showed that although consumption and growth scarce so that its density is higher when food is abundant
are higher on the low shore, longevity is greater on the (Stimpson, 1973). Territoriality is well known in a number
high shore, with the result that lifetime reproductive effort of other limpet species, e.g., Patella compressa (Branch,
is greater on the upper shore. 1975a), P. cochlear (Branch, 1975b), P. longicosta, and P.
Interspecific competition between limpet species has tabularis (Branch, 1976; 1981). Most species of limpets
been reported in widely separated geographic localities. exhibit evasive action when they intrude on other limpets’
Haven (1973) experimentally removed either Collisella territory (Branch, 1986).
digitalis or C. scabra from shores where the two species
coexisted, and found that each of the species grew faster 2.8.2.6 Limpet–Predator Interactions
in the absence of the other. Similarly, by manipulating the
densities of three gastropods in experimental cages, Many animals are important predators on limpets, includ-
Underwood (1978b) demonstrated that the snail Nerita ing whelks (Black, 1978), crabs (Chaplin, 1968), starfish
atramentosa outcompeted both the snail Bembicium (Dayton et al., 1977; Blankley and Branch, 1985), octopus
nanum and the limpet Cellana tramoserica, with the body (Wells, 1980), gulls (Blankley, 1981; Lindberg and Chu,
weight of the two latter species decreasing in proportion 1983), oystercatchers (Hockey, 1983; Hockey and Under-
to the density of C. tramentosa, which moves farther and hill, 1984), and fish (Stobbs, 1980).
feeds faster than the other species. C tramoserica, in an Blankley and Branch (1985) have estimated the annual
experiment where it was caged with two pulmonate lim- consumption of the limpet Nacella delesserti, the domi-
pets, Siphonaria denticulata and S. virgulata, was found nant macroinvertebrate on the shores of the Subantarctic
to outcompete the two siphonarians, which grew more Marion Island. They found that the starfish Anasteria rupi-
slowly and experienced a higher mortality rate (Creese cola accounted for 40% of the mortality of the limpets in
and Underwood, 1982). the size range 25 to 60 mm; in shallow water the kelp gull
It has been demonstrated that the zonation of certain Larus dominicanus consumed 20% of the limpets over 35
limpets is influenced by interspecific competition. Choat mm in length; and the Antarctic cod Notothenia corriceps
(1977) demonstrated that the removal of the high-shore accounted for an estimated 15 to 30% of the limpets. Parry
Collisella digitalis allowed another species, C. striga- (1982) estimated that each year oystercatchers (Haemoto-
tella, to move upshore. Black (1979) found that the sipho- pus fuliginosus) ate 9% of the population of Cellana tra-
narian Siphonaria kurrachaensis had a bimodal pattern, moserica at Victoria, Australia, and that wrasses (Pseudo-
being more abundant above and below the mid-shore labrus spp.) annually remove 52 to 80% of the population
zone dominated by Notoacmaea onychitis. After experi- of Patellate alticostata and about 100% of Patella peroni.
mental removal of all the limpets from the shore, Black Thus it is clear that for at least some limpets, predation is
recorded that S. kurrachaensis established itself and a major source of mortality.
developed its highest densities in the zone normally occu- In South Africa there have been extensive studies of
pied by N. onychitis. On South African shores, the large the influence of seabirds on rocky shore communities
limpet, Patella cochlear, dominates the low-shore zone comparing mainland sites lacking large bird populations
(Stephenson, 1936; Stephenson and Stephenson, 1972) with offshore seabird islands. The African black oyster-
and excludes practically all other limpet species (see catcher, Haematopus moquini, reaches a density of 75
Figure 2.29). One species, Patella longicosta, is common birds km–1 on the islands, whereas on the mainland the
64 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.29 Conceptual model of the interactions between birds, limpets, and macroalgae on seabird islands off the west coast
of South Africa. (Redrawn from Branch, G.M., The Ecology of Rocky Coasts, Moore, P.C. and Seed, R., Eds., Hodder & Straughton,
London, 1986, 116. With permission.)

corresponding density is about 3 birds km–1. On the islands the degree of wave action, competition for the space occu-
the oystercatcher predation reduces the limpet population, pied by the barnacles occurs with mussels and algae.
and the resulting reduced limpet grazing enables large While a single barnacle species may dominate the shore,
beds of macroalgae to develop in conditions of nutrient more often two or more species of barnacle compete for
enrichment from seabird guano. This favors waders, which space. On most shores, limpets and chitons coexist with
feed on the abundant cryptic fauna associated with the the barnacles, as well as littorinid snails, other herbivorous
macroalgae. Figure 2.29 illustrates the interactions gastropods, and whelks. Spaces among the barnacles har-
between birds, limpets, and macroalgae on the islands bor other smaller animals, including the small bivalve
(Branch, 1986). Lasaea spp, small crustaceans (harpacticoid copepods,
Limpets have been shown to detect predators at a amphipods, isopods), and often considerable numbers of
distance and they have evolved species-specific responses mites and dipteran larvae.
that allow them to escape. In most cases this involves
elevation of the shell and rapid flight away from the pred- 2.8.3.1 Adaptations to Intertidal Life
ator (Branch, 1978). Large individuals of Patella oculus
and P. grenatina on South African shores lift the shell and Differential barnacle zonation on rocky shores implies
smash it down on predators — a behavior that is size varying adaptation to the tidal regime and the modifying
specific and predator specific (Branch, 1979). Both the factors discussed above. It is well established that the
habit of homing to a scar and the timing of activity upper limits are largely determined by physical factors
rhythms may be important in reducing predation. associated with tidal emersion and that the lower limits
are set by a complex of biological relationships. Distribu-
2.8.3 BARNACLES tion and density is also strongly influenced by recruitment
(see below).
Barnacles are one of the most conspicuous features of the The relatively impermeable shell of the barnacle is
eulittoral zone of temperate shores throughout the world both protection against predators and desiccation loss.
where they may cover the rock surface to the exclusion In order to survive high on the shore, barnacles must be
of other attached or almost stationary animals, except able to tolerate stresses such as reduced feeding time,
limpets and chitons. Depending on the type of shore and high temperatures, and desiccation. Those species that
Hard Shores 65

FIGURE 2.30 Time–temperature relationships of shore and barnacles at Leigh, New Zealand. Maximum duration of temperature at
three levels (a = highest; c = lowest) compared to time–temperature survival curves in adults of three barnacle species from the same
shore. Adult Epopella plicata and Chamaesipho columna are never exposed for more than one tidal cycle; Chamaesipho brunnea
can be emersed for two weeks between spring tides during calm weather. (Redrawn from Forster, B.A., in Barnacle Biology,
Southward, A.J., Ed., A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam, 1987, 121. With permission.)

occur high on the shore are better able to cope with these 2.8.3.2 Settlement
stresses, as has been demonstrated for barnacles on Brit-
ish shores (Forster, 1969; 1971a). High temperatures Adult barnacles as sessile organisms require a suitable
accelerate evaporation and desiccation during emersion. area of substratum to which each individual becomes per-
Newly settled cyprids are particularly susceptible to des- manently attached. Connell (1985) defines settlement as
iccation (Connell, 1961b; Forster, 1971b), but with the point when an individual first takes up permanent
growth they can survive the effects of desiccation longer residence on the substratum. Recruitment, on the other
(Forster, 1971a). High tidal chthamalid barnacles have hand, is a measure of the recently settled individuals that
particularly good desiccation tolerance and frequently have survived for a period after settlement. Numerous
have to survive several days of continuous emersion on studies have addressed variations in the distribution and
calm days. Figure 2.30 depicts the maximum duration abundance of barnacles on rocky shores (e.g., Lewis,
of temperatures measured at three levels on the shore at 1964; Hawkins and Hartnoll, 1983b; Caffey, 1985; Con-
Leigh, New Zealand, compared with the time-tempera- nell, 1985; Gaines and Roughgarden, 1985; Pineda, 1994).
ture survival curves in adults of three species of barna- Many factors influence the settlement of intertidal barna-
cles on the same shore (Forster, 1969). The vertical cles. These include light quality, orientation and intensity,
distribution of these three species is shown in Figure surface reflection, color and background illumination
2.30. It can be seen that the temperature tolerance cor- (Smith, 1948), surface angle (Pomerat and Renier, 1942),
relates with their vertical distribution. Adult Epopella water movement (Crisp, 1955), surface texture (Crisp and
plicata and Chamaesipho columna are never exposed to Barnes, 1954; Yule and Walker, 1985), water agitation and
air for more than part of a tidal cycle, whereas Chamae- exposure to waves (Smith, 1946), water depth (Bousefield,
sipho brunnea can be emersed for two weeks between 1954), shore level (Strathman and Branscomb, 1979), the
spring tides during calm weather. Many shore barnacles presence and abundance of conspecifics, and fragments or
are living close to their tolerance limits. The adaptations extracts of conspecifics or related species (see Crisp, 1974;
that enable them to do this are a combination of physi- Larman et al., 1982; Rittschoff et al., 1984), algal primary
ological and behavioral ones, the former for enhanced films (Strathman et al,, 1981; Hudson et al., 1983), and
temperature tolerance, the latter for keeping the opercu- the nature of molecular films (Rittschoff et al., 1984).
lar closed tightly during emersion to reduce water loss Settlement patterns in barnacles have recently been
(Forster, 1971a). reviewed by Hui and Moyse (1987). Settlement refers to all
66 The Ecology of Seashores

the behavioral events in the barnacle life cycle leading to two shores in the northern Gulf of California. He found
and including attachment. These events can be divided into that its vertical upper limit was, on average, 25 cm lower
two phases: planktonic, or swimming, and an epibenthic on a basalt shore than on a nearby granite shore, probably
phase (Chabot and Bouget, 1988) as detailed below. because of greater postsettlement mortality on basalt than
on granite near the upper limits of their distribution; this
1. The swimming phase. In the swimming phase, difference may be related to the thermal capacity of each
upward movement concentrates the cyprids rock type, as the basalt gets much hotter than the granite.
near the surface of the water. This ensures con- In a series of experiments, Johnson and Strathman
tact with the intertidal substrate given onshore (1989) found that settlement of the larvae of the barnacle
winds and currents. Balanus glandula was decreased on slate tiles that had
2. The epibenthic phase. Contact with the substra- previously been occupied by the postmetamorphic stages
tum initiates exploratory crawling behavior. At of the whelk Nucella lamellosa, which is an important
this point cyprids are able to make active com- predator on barnacles (Connell, 1970; Dayton, 1971;
parisons and choices between various prospec- Palmer, 1984). Settlement of another barnacle species,
tive settlement positions near their original point Semibalanus carinosus, was not as greatly affected (Fig-
of contact (Yule and Walker, 1985). During this ure 2.31). A similar but lesser effect occurred after the
phase, the cyprids use benthic diatoms on the treatment of the tiles with traces of a potential disturber
substrate as cues. If the conditions are suitable, of settled larvae, the limpet Tectura scutum and mucous
the cyprids more closely explore the substratum of the brown alga Fucus dischus.
(see Newell, 1979). Three epibenthic phases are Most barnacle cyprids tested in the laboratory settle
involved in examining the substratum (Crisp, more readily on surfaces bearing settled conspecifics or
1974): (a) a “broad exploration phase” during on surfaces that have been treated with extracts of con-
which the cyprid takes a more or less straight specifics than on bare, untreated controls (Knight-Jones,
path on the substratum, turning infrequently; 1953; Gabbot and Larman, 1987). This effect, termed
then (b) after a long enough stay on the substra- gregariousness, has been interpreted as an attraction that
tum, another behavior is adopted, that of “close increases settlement density on surfaces suitable for sub-
exploration,” characterized by short movements sequent survival in the field. Barnett and Crisp (1979) have
with frequent changes of direction; and lastly, suggested that gregariousness leads to reductions in local
(c) as attachment nears, the cyprid enters the diversity, tending to aid the establishment of monospecific
“inspection phase” during which there are at zones on the shore.
most to-and-fro movements within its own What, then, is the adaptive advantage of gregarious-
length. Finally, the cyprid becomes attached to ness? Although adult Semibalanus balanoides are rarely
the substratum by a small disc on each of the found above HWNT, its cyprids sometimes settle densely
antennules, secretes the basal attachment from above this level, but die before metamorphosis, or when
the cement glands, which occupy much of the neap tides coincide with hot weather (Connell, 1961a). A
preoral region, and metamorphoses into the recent field study (Wethey, 1984) found that S. balanoides
adult barnacle. cyprids are more responsive to other recently settled con-
specifics than to recently metamorphosed spat, or to the
2.8.3.3 Factors Affecting Settlement bases of detached adults. Any settlement outside the zone
occupied by adults would, therefore, lead to increased
A number of factors have been shown to affect the settle- settlement there. Thus, gregariousness cannot restrict
ment of barnacles, including rock type, the presence of intertidal barnacles to specific zones on the shore. Hui and
adults of the same or related species, and the presence of Moyse (1987) postulate that gregariousness is an effect
substrate previously occupied by a mobile predator. The that contributes mainly to the rejection of unfavorable
different composition of the rock on the shore can poten- substratum as opposed to one that increases settlement on
tially affect the settlement and establishment of barnacles. favorable substratum.
Caffey (1982) showed that there were no consistent dif- There is extensive literature on the cues that induce
ferences in the recruitment and survivorship of the inter- the settlement of barnacle cyprids. Water movement
tidal barnacle Tessopora rosea on four different types of (Crisp, 1955), surface texture (Barnes, 1956), light (Bar-
rock experimentally transplanted to widely separated nes et al., 1951), the presence of conspecifics (Knight-
shores. However, Moore and Kitching (1939) suggested Jones, 1953; Wethey, 1984), and other indicator species
that rock type strongly influenced the distribution of the (Strathman et al., 1981) have all been found to be impor-
barnacle Chthalamus stellatus on British shores. Raimondi tant determinants of local spatial patterns in intertidal
(1988a) recently investigated the settlement, recruitment, barnacles. It is important for the larvae to settle between
and zonation of the barnacle Chthalamus anisopoma on the upper and lower limits at which the species can survive
Hard Shores 67

FIGURE 2.31 Comparison of the patterns of distribution of adults and newly settled cyprids of Semibalanus balanoides and
Chthalamus montagui at Millport, Scotland, with diagrammatic representation of factors that result in adult pattern, and the influence
of interspecific competition and other factors on the distribution of the barnacle Chthalamus stellatus. (Based on data from Connell,
J.H., Ecol. Monogr., 31, 710, 1961b. With permission.)

and reproduce. Strathman and Branscomb (1979) have tor-resistant morphology in response to Acanthina. The
argued that cues indicating the upper limits of a species variability of the upper limits noted above may be the
distribution are more reliable guides for settlement than result of the variability of the settlement cues at the time
those that indicate a lower limit, because the physical of settlement. In a further study, Raimondi (1991) found
stress that defines upper limits is less variable than bio- that settlement of C. anisopoma was largely restricted to
logical stress, which largely determines the lower limit. areas within the adult distribution. This is support for the
Raimondi (1988b) found that the upper limit of hypothesis that the larvae are induced to settle by a bio-
Chthalamus anisopoma in the northern Gulf of California chemical attribute of Chthalamus, or some related factor
was extremely variable, ranging from 1.5 to 2.6 m above (e.g., a bacterial film associated with the barnacle).
MTL. Chthalamus showed increased settlement in
response to chemical cues produced by several species 2.8.3.4 Variability in Settlement and
whose vertical distribution overlapped with its vertical Recruitment
distribution. He found that Chthalamus did not recruit to
areas with the blue-green bacterium Calothrix, regardless Variability in settlement and recruitment of intertidal bar-
of whether barnacle extract had been applied, but that nacles has been widely documented (Connell, 1961a; 1985;
where Calothrix was removed, there were significantly Denley and Underwood, 1979; Caffey, 1982; Grosberg,
more recruits to sites where barnacle extracts were 1982; Hawkins and Hartnoll, 1982; Kendall et al., 1982;
applied. There was significantly more settlement in Gaines et al., 1985; Gaines and Roughgarden, 1985;
response to cues associated with the gastropod Nerita Wethey, 1985; Raimondi, 1990; Bertness et al., 1992). A
funiculata that occurred with Chthalamus than to N. funic- variety of mechanisms have been proposed to account for
ulata that occurred above the upper limit of Chthalamus. this settlement variability. Factors affecting the delivery of
Another species that induced settlement was the whelk, cyprids from offshore to nearshore include reproductive
Acanthina angelica, a major predator of adult Chthala- output of adults (Barnes, 1956; 1962; Connell, 1961a;
mus. Acanthina may be a good settlement cue because it Geraci and Romairone, 1982), winds and current (Barnes,
is a reliable indicator of the vertical distribution of Chthal- 1956; Hawkins and Hartnoll, 1982), tides, and tidally gen-
amus, and because (1) the clusters of Acanthina that erated internal waves (De Wolf, 1973; Shanks, 1983).
induce settlement may move away before the new barnacle Mechanisms affecting delivery from nearshore waters to the
become edible, and (2) Chthalamus can develop a preda- rock surface are inadequately studied, but nearshore turbu-
68 The Ecology of Seashores

lence (Denny and Shibata, 1989), stratification of the larvae occur. Where Semibalanus balanoides and Chthalamus
in the water column (Grosberg, 1982), and site-specific montagui are found on the same shore in the British Isles,
variation in abundance of competent larvae (Gaines et al., the latter species is zoned above the former. In a study of
1985) are all possibilities. Factors affecting attachment to the ecology of these species at Millport, Isle of Cumbrae,
the rock surface and subsequent metamorphosis have been Scotland, Connell (1961a,b) found that the upper limit
the subject of a number of studies. Certain physical char- was determined by the desiccation tolerance of the spe-
acteristics of surfaces, such as texture or contour (Crisp and cies, while the lower limit of C. montagui was attributable
Barnes, 1954; Barnes, 1956; Wethey, 1986) and composi- to its inability to survive the spatial competition in the S.
tion (Rittschof et al., 1984; Raimondi, 1988b) have been balanoides zone. Although the settlement of C. montagui
shown to influence settlement. The presence of conspecifics cyprids was not limited to the zone occupied by the adults,
can increase (Knight-Jones, 1953), or in high densities nearly all of the C. montagui that settled in the S. bal-
decrease (Connell, 1961b; 1985) settlement. Other species anoides zone were crushed, lifted off, or smothered before
may act as settlement inducers (Strathman et al., 1981; the end of the first year. This mortality seemed to be due
Raimondi, 1988b) or inhibitors (Rittschof et al., 1984). almost entirely to crowding by the fast-growing S. bal-
Bertness et al. (1992) examined the roles of variation anoides, while little intraspecific crowding was observed
in larval supply, settlement rates, and early settlement in C. montagui. The net result was a very narrow overlap
mortality in recruitment success in two populations of the between the adults of the two species (Figure 2.31).
barnacle Semibalanus balanoides. Water column larval On other shores in Great Britain, a third barnacle spe-
supplies differed fourfold between populations. In the high cies is present, the immigrant species from New Zealand,
larval supply population, settlement sites were rapidly Elminius modestus. This species has a wide vertical distri-
saturated with settlers. As a consequence of the saturation bution, ranging from the sublittoral almost up to HWST,
of settlement sites, settlement in the remaining free space and while it dominates on estuarine shores, it is rare, though
was intensified to 15 times higher than in the population present, on exposed clear water shores. The spread of E.
with lower larval abundances. Within-population patterns modestus in the British Isles and in northwest Europe has
in settlement were also conspicuous, but of lower magni- been well documented. Hui (1983) and Hui and Moyse
tude than interpopulation differences. Settlement (1987) have studied the settlement and survival of this
decreased with increasing tidal height but increased both species at Munbles, South Wales, and arrived at the follow-
with wave action and proximity of conspecifics. Both ing conclusions: (1) E. modestus settled readily on estab-
Bertness et al. (1992) and Pineda (1994) consider the lished adult barnacles, as well as on bare rock; (2) crowding
available settling area important in understanding spatial by both newly settled and established S. balanoides was
variation between sites and temporal variation within sites. the major cause of mortality in E. modestus; (3) E. modes-
Settlement intensification takes place where available set- tus, which had settled epizoically on S. balanoides, suffered
tlement area becomes limiting. crowding mortality comparable to those settled on bare
rock; (4) E. modestus suffered mortality due to interspecific
2.8.3.5 Barnacle Distribution Patterns crowding of the same order as C. montagui when the
aggressor was newly settled S. balanoides, but fared some-
In order to breed, the adults of cross-fertilizing individuals what better than did C. montagui when the mortality was
must be close to each other. However, the relationships caused by established adult S. balanoides; and (5) neither
among neighboring conspecific adults may range from epizoics nor nearby settlement of E. modestus caused
intense competition to obligate parasitism. Spatial com- appreciable mortality to S. balanoides adults. While S. bal-
petition among barnacles is greatest in the intertidal spe- anoides has a minimum 1-year generation time, E. modes-
cies (Stanley and Newman, 1980). The spatfall of abun- tus, with a maximum generation time of 14 weeks (Barnes
dant shore barnacles often occurs in such density that as and Barnes, 1962), can ensure an abundant continuous spat-
they grow, contact between individuals is common. Con- fall during the summer that will enable it to occupy all the
nell (1961a,b) has termed the effects of continued growth available space at the time of settlement of S. balanoides.
of contiguous barnacles “crowding.” Growth in such sit- Luckens (1970; 1975a,b; 1976) studied the relation-
uations can lead to physical crushing of an individual, ship between the barnacles Epopella plicata, Chamaesi-
undercutting and uplifting, and smothering, all leading to pho columna, and C. brunnea at Leigh, New Zealand
the death of an individual. Sometimes when diametric (Figure 2.32). She found that C. brunnea seemed to be
growth is restricted by crowding, growth occurs in an restricted to the upper shore by C. columna in the same
upward direction, leading to the formation of hummocks way as described above for the exclusion of S. balanoides
(Barnes and Powell, 1950). Such hummocks are more by E. modestus on sheltered shores, i.e., the prolonged
susceptible to dislodgement. settlement season of C. columna reduced the availability
Where two or more species of barnacle densely pop- of substrata for C. brunnea, which has a short settlement
ulate the same substratum, competition for space can season and avoids settlement on top of established barna-
Hard Shores 69

FIGURE 2.32 Vertical distribution of the adults and larvae of the barnacles Epopella plicata, Chamaesipho columna, and C. brunnea
and the predatory gastropods Lepsiella scobina and Thais orbita on the shore at Leigh, New Zealand, and the relative importance
of physical and biological controls that operate to determine the distributions. (After Luckens, P.A., N.Z. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 9, 38,
1975b. With permission.)

cles. E. plicata and C. columna, on the other hand, have 1970; 1975a; Menge, 1976; 1983; Palmer, 1983; 1984;
completely overlapping distributions on the same shore. and others), flatworms (Luckens, 1970; Hurley, 1975),
Their coexistence seems to be due, as in E. modestus and starfish (Paine, 1966), crabs (Menge, 1983), and fish
S. balanoides on British shores, to their different settle- (Newman, 1960).
ment patterns, growth rates, and shell strength. Whereas In northern New Zealand, the muricid gastropod Lep-
both breed throughout the year, C. columna settled mainly siella scobina does not occur with Chamaesipho brunnea
on sheets of bare rock or on the top of other barnacles, (Figure 2.33). The slower growth rate of C. brunnea,
whereas E. plicata frequently settled on the distal parts of reaching reproductive maturity in 3 years compared with
the shell wall of adult conspecifics to form clumps. C. 3 months for C. columna, means that it would be threat-
columna is short lived but fast growing, whereas E. plicata ened with extinction if it were in the range of muricid
is long lived and slow growing. As a result, where E. predators, and the breeding populations of C. brunnea are
plicata become large and well established, it becomes restricted to the upper shore. Thus, the high shore is a
difficult for C. columna to displace them, while where C. refuge for slow-growing barnacles. Others attain a size
columna was densely settled, E. plicata could only settle refuge in that their shells become too thick for the muri-
on the top of sheets of C. columna where they are poorly cids to complete drilling through them during a tidal
attached and easily dislodged. Thus, the outcome of inter- period. The mid-shore Epopella plicata grow to about 2
specific barnacle interaction is clearly dependent on the cm diameter, and at about 1 cm, are immune to predation
timing and density of the first colonists, the influence of from L. scobina (Luckens, 1975a; 1976). However, they
the first colonizers on the settlement of others, and the are still vulnerable to a different and larger muricid, Thais
relative growth rates of the competing species in effecting orbita, which is restricted to the lower shore and crevices.
mechanical smothering or dislodging. Its predation results in a mid-shore band of E. plicata in
a tidal refuge from T. orbita and a size refuge from L.
2.8.3.6 Predation and Other Biotic Pressures scobina. Sebens and Lewis (1985) found that populations
of the large barnacle Semibalanus cariosus in the San
The principal predators on barnacles are muricid gastro- Juan Islands, Washington, U.S.A., were dominated by
pods (see Figure 2.33) (Connell, 1961a,b; Luckens, small (2 to 9 mm diameter) individuals, but there was
70 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.33 Distribution of barnacles and muricid gastropod predators on three shores. Barnacle settlements range to limits of
dashed lines; adult survival to solid lines. HWS — high water spring tides; HWN — high water neap tides; MTL — mid tide level;
LWN — low water neap tides; LWS — low water spring tides. Millport (after Connell, 1961a), Leigh (after Luckens, 1975b) with
semidiurnal tides, San Juan Islands (after Connell, 1970) with mixed tides. (Redrawn from Forster, B.A., in Barnacle Biology,
Southward, A.J., Ed., A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam, 1987, 120. With permission.)

often a distinct peak of larger barnacle (>20 mm) in the bles under the influence of strong wave action may build
population size–frequency distribution at a particular site. up a mobile shore in which the stones may be smoothly
During the winter of 1968–69, a massive death of preda- rounded by constant abrasion against each other. Such
tory gastropods (Thais spp.) occurred. After that event, beaches develop shelving ramps and the component rocks
an extraordinarily large fraction of the S. cariosis popu- become roughly graded, with the larger rocks lower on
lation survived and grew to a large size. It was these the shore and the smallest on the upper shore. The most
survivors that produced the distinct peak of large barna- inhospitable of shore habitats are those beaches where
cles present in 1973–77. small pebbles and gravel, often several meters thick, are
Predation is not the only cause of barnacle mortality. constantly in motion due to wave action. Thus, there is a
Small barnacles can be bulldozed by grazing limpets great variety of boulder types and consequently a great
(Dayton, 1971; Creese, 1982), whiplashed by macroalgal variety of microclimates and microhabitats.
fronds (Menge, 1976; Grant, 1977), or encroached by Recent investigation of boulder communities include
mussels (Paine, 1974; Grant, 1977). those of Sousa (1979b), McGuiness (1984; 1987a,b), and
McGuiness and Underwood (1986). A comprehensive
account of the flora and fauna of New Zealand beaches is
2.9 SPECIAL HABITATS to be found in Morton and Miller (1968).
2.9.1 BOULDER BEACHES
2.9.1.2 The Boulder Environment
2.9.1.1 Boulder Types
Boulder beaches are subject to the same physical factors
Rocks that are present between the tides may be arranged that are important on rocky shores, such as tidal rise and
in a variety of ways. Large irregular boulders may cover fall and wave action. However, they have a number of
a shore and be so lodged that they resist movement by special features:
waves. In a like manner on tidal flats, boulders may be
immobilized by being embedded in sediment (sand or silt). 1. The size range of the boulders. This is important
On some shores, small boulders or large stones and peb- for two reasons: (a) small boulders are prone to
Hard Shores 71

overturning and casting about by wave action On the more sheltered boulder beaches where sedi-
(Osman, 1977; Sousa, 1979a,b), whereas large ment and shell fragments collect, an assemblage of poly-
boulders are more stable, and depending on the chaetes belonging to the families Nereidae, Cirratulidae,
specific conditions of exposure to wave action Capitellidae, and Terebellidae are to be found. The deeper
and the degree to which they may be embedded sediments are anaerobic and the species present resemble
in sediment, they may not be subject to distur- the faunal associations of mudflats.
bance; (b) the top of a small boulder at the same Figure 2.34 gives a profile of a boulder beach in north-
level of the shore as a large boulder will be ern New Zealand with the intertidal distribution of the
immersed considerably longer on both the ebb dominant species. On such a beach, the surface may
and flood tides (Underwood, 1980; Underwood remain bare of plants and animals down to ELWN and
and Jernakoff, 1984); and (c) the landward side beyond to where the boulders are larger and cemented
of large boulders provides greater shelter and together by coralline and lithothamnion encrusting algae.
shade than small boulders. Down to MLWN, the common mobile snails are the per-
2. The amount of sediment present. Depending on iwinkle Littorina unifasciata, and the topshells Mela-
the coarseness of the sediment, the boulders are graphia aethiops and Nerita melanotragus. An abbreviated
subject to sand scour and burial by sand. barnacle zone develops at LWN, beyond which scattered
3. The nature of the boulder beach interstitial rock oysters and crusts of the red alga, Apophloea sinclarii,
environment. This varies with the sizes of the are found. Further down the shore there may be a narrow
boulders, large stones, or pebbles that comprise belt of Corallina, with the brown kelp Carpophyllum
the beach. Where the sizes are small enough maschalocarpum, the seasonal brown alga Petalonia fas-
and the beach comes under strong wave action, cia, and patches of the encrusting alga Ralfsia verrucosa.
they build up a mobile shore of smoothly The interstitial fauna toward high tide level is well
rounded or flatly abraded stones. On these developed, and zoned by depth as well as by distance down
shores, water drains rapidly through the inter- the shore. The chief source of food is terrestrial plant
stices between the stones and pebbles, and debris. Several lizards (skinks and geckos) are found here.
while the surface is mobile, the deeper portions Other common species are the wingless beach earwig
are subject to little movement. The nature and Anisolabis littorea, amphipods (Talorchestia sp.), beetles
diversity of the community living between the (especially wingless staphylinids), collembolans, spiders,
interstices of such beaches is largely deter- mites, and the beach centipede, Scolioplanes sp. Further
mined by the input of organic matter largely below the surface is the air-breathing snail, Suterilla neo-
derived from macroalgae on nearby littoral and zelanica. Further down the shore Suterilla is replaced by
sublittoral rocky habitats and soft sediment sea another snail, Marinula filholi. Where algal wrack collects,
grass beds. Environmental stresses such as des- abundant larvae of the kelp-flies Coelopa littoralis and
iccation are lessened in this interstitial environ- Borborus empiricus are found. On the upper shore the
ment where temperature extremes are highshore crab Cyclograpsus lavauxii, and the isopod Ligia
dampened and humidity is high. novaezealandiae, scavenge between the boulders. Under
the boulders in the middle shore, two common crabs are
Where the constituent boulders or stones are stable, a found, Leptograpsus variegatus and Heterozius rotundi-
distinctive assemblage develops on their undersides. Here, frons, together with the half-crab Petrolithses elongatus
light is reduced, temperature changes are dampened, and and the shrimps Betaeus aequimanus and Alope spinifrons.
humidity is high. The outer margins of the undersurfaces Clean boulders fully submerged at each tide have a
often have a fauna of encrusting organisms, coralline distinctive fauna beneath, including the anemones Isac-
algae, barnacles, tubeworms, limpets, and chitons that are tinia tenebrosa and Isactinia olivacea. Other sessile ani-
absent from the upper surfaces. Also under the boulder, mals beneath the stones include the serpulid tubeworms
the assemblage often includes encrusting coralline algae Pomatoceros cariniferus and Hydroides norvegica. A vari-
and bryozoans, vermetid molluscs, sponges, anemones, ety of gastropods may be abundant, including Nerita mel-
colonial and solitary ascidians, flatworms, tube-building anotragus, Zediloma atrovirens, Z. arida, Z. digna, and
polychaetes, rock oysters, brachiopods, and opistho- Anisodiloma lugubri, and the fragile limpets, Notoacmea
branchs. On the substrate beneath the stones, a number of daedala and Atalacmea fragilis. Common chitons on these
scavengers or detritovores can often be found in dense boulders include Chiton pelliserpentis and Amaurochiton
aggregations. The dominant taxa include amphipods, glaucus. Toward the low tidal coralline fringe, the cats-
crabs (especially species belonging to the family eye, Turbo smaragda, and the larger limpets Cellana radi-
Grapsidae), porcellanid half-crabs (on New Zealand shore ans and C. stellifera, are found on and beneath the boul-
the half-crab, Petrolithses elongatus, occurs in thousands ders. At and beyond mean low water, two abalone species,
of individuals m–2), and various carnivorous gastropods. Haliotis iris and H. australis, are found.
72 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 2.34 Profile of a boulder beach with typical distribution of some typical members of the fauna at Smuggler’s Bay, Northern
New Zealand. Species: 1. Anisolabis littorea; 2. Beatus aequimanus: 3. Chiton pellesserpentis; 4. Amaurochiton glaucus; 5. Suterilla
neozelanica; 6. Cyclograpsis lavauxi; 7. Heterozius rotundifrons; 8. Petrolosthes elongatus; 9. Melagraphia aethiops; 10. Turbo
smargada; 11. Marinula filholi; 12. Zediloma atrovirens; 13. Nerita melanotragus; 14. Notoacmea daedala; 15. Atalacmea fragilis;
16. Trachelochismus pinnulatus; 17. Cellana radians; 18. Cellana stellifera; 19. Haliotis iris. (From Morton, J. and Miller, M., The
New Zealand Seashore, Collins, London, 1964, 103. With permission.)

2.9.1.3 Disturbance and Boulder Community of disturbance on somewhat smaller rocks prevented dom-
Structure inance and allowed more species to coexist. The very
small rocks were so disturbed, however, that only the few
Boulder communities are subject to disturbance on a species able to colonize and grow quickly were present.
greater scale than rocky shore communities. The most In contrast to Sousa’s findings, McGuiness (1987a,b),
common physical disturbances in boulder fields are due in a study of intertidal boulders on rock platforms on the
to the movement of the boulders themselves and the move- New South Wales coasts, found that the percentage of the
ment of the surrounding sediment resulting in coverage tops of rocks occupied by sessile species, predominantly
or scouring by sand. Movement of the boulders is depen- algae, was never related to the size of the rock. Further,
dent on the intensity of the waves. Such movement is while some algae were less abundant on the smaller rocks,
greater in the intertidal than the sublittoral (Osman, 1977). consistent with the effects of disturbance, others were
Sousa (1979a,b; 1980) noted that one type of disturbance most abundant on these rocks, or occasionally on rocks
to algae in intertidal boulders resulted when a boulder was in the middle size classes. The assemblages on the largest
overturned, and another when a boulder was cast against rocks were more diverse (McGuiness, 1984), but this
another. In the latter case, abrasion can denude the boulder could result from their larger surface-area sampling more
of its biota. of the available colonists (McGuiness 1984; 1987a,b).
Sousa (1979a,b; 1980) studied algal assemblages on On the basis of his experiments, McGuiness (1987a)
boulders and found that the total space occupied increased concluded that few of the patterns of abundance that he
with rock size, with nearly 100% cover on large rocks. observed could result from domination of space in the
Diversity, in contrast, was greatest on rocks of intermedi- absence of disturbance. An alternative explanation for
ate size. He explained these results by the Intermediate these patterns involves the interaction of the effects of
Disturbance Model (Connell, 1978). Diversity was small, exposure during low tide and grazing, both known to be
and cover great, on the largest rocks because one foliose important on open platforms (Underwood, 1980; 1985;
alga, resistant to physical stress and grazing, was able to Underwood and Jernakoff, 1981; 1984). The time for
outlast other species and dominate space. The greater rates which the top of the rock was exposed above water
Hard Shores 73

increased with rock size (McGuiness and Underwood, most significant stages of its life history. Such species
1986). The difference was especially pronounced in the might be termed primary, or obligate epiphytes. Secondary
low shore area where, during the average low tide, small epiphytes are purely opportunistic, eurytrophic species
rocks were not exposed at all, but the tops of large rocks that are able to utilize one or more of the algae over part
were out of the water for up to two hours (McGuiness and of their habitat range, but are neither restricted to nor
Underwood, 1986). The decline in the abundance of crusts dependent upon them. Primary epiphytes would include
with rock size on the shore studied may have been due to sessile species whose larvae display a faculty for discrim-
this increase in the period of exposure. ination at settlement, leading to a restricted distribution
Disturbance by sand and waves did, however, appear on one or a few algal species. Numerous examples are to
to be of major importance to sessile species on the under- be found among tubeworms, bryozoans, and hydroids. The
sides of boulders. Patterns of diversity consistent with the definition would also include specialized algal grazers and
Intermediate Disturbance Model were observed by browsers. The secondary epiphytes of importance in the
McGuiness (1987b) in low shore areas. Further, with very dynamics of algal communities include: (1) nonselective
few exceptions, species were most abundant on the algal feeders; (2) species that depend on epiphytic algae
medium to large rocks. Indeed, most space was typically as a food source (many algal species are host to a wide
occupied on the largest rocks, and total cover often range of smaller epiphytic algae, especially filamentous
approached 100%. Sponges, ascidians, and bryozoans reds and greens); and (3) predators that depend on the
often overgrew more solitary forms, notably polychaetes primary epiphytes as a food source.
and barnacles, and experiments revealed that the abun-
dance of the latter forms was limited by a lack of space 2.9.2.2 Community Composition
for settlement. High on the shore, these interactions were
not observed, and competition for space could not reduce The study of the fauna of coastal seaweeds started with
abundance on larger rocks. Colman (1940), who studied the fauna of eight algal spe-
cies along intertidal transects at Wembury, England, and
identified 177 species of invertebrates. The numbers of
2.9.2 THE FAUNA INHABITING LITTORAL SEAWEEDS each taxonomic group per 100 g of algae are given in
2.9.2.1 Introduction Table 2.3. Numerically, the dominant groups were the
Copepoda, Isopoda, and Amphipoda. Following this pio-
Marine algae provide a number of resources for both inver- neer investigation, other studies were carried out by
tebrates and fishes. Due to their abundance, especially on Wieser (1953) and Hagerman (1966). Broad-based
the lower shore and the sublittoral, they supply a greatly reviews of algal invertebrate communities are those of
increased surface area for the attachment of sessile or Meadows and Campbell (1972) and Scheltema (1974).
nonsessile sedentary species. They also provide shelter, Hayward (1980) has provided an excellent recent review
offering a refuge for motile species during periods of low of such communities. The most comprehensive study of
tide, where desiccation effects are mitigated, and where phytal communities is that of Edgar (1983a,b,c,d), who
they have protection from predators. They also act as carried out an investigation on the Tasmanian coast from
sediment traps, thus providing an additional habitat for low water to a depth of 5 m. A list of the number of species
burrowing species, especially the meiofauna. Finally, the in each taxonomic group and their total abundance is given
algae are an important food source, either directly, in the in Table 2.4. Gammaridean amphipods had the largest
case of algal browsing species, or indirectly for species number of species (70) and the greatest numerical abun-
grazing on microalgal films and epiphytes on the fronds, dance. Polychaetes (57 species) and Gastropoda (26 spe-
or by providing detritus eventually fed upon by detrito- cies) were the next most diverse taxa. In terms of total
vores, especially in nearby soft sediments. abundance, caprellid amphipods and polychaetes ranked
The animals that utilize one or more of these resources second and third. In the bulk of studies to date on the
are generally termed epiphytes. Species found on the algae phytal fauna, Crustacea, especially Amphipoda and Iso-
may be confined to one or a group of species, e.g., the poda, dominate.
anemone Crichophorus nutrix, which is only found on the Morton and Miller (1968) described the fauna of the
fronds of the New Zealand brown algae Carpophyllum coralline alga, Corallina officinalis, on northern New
and Cystophora, or may occur on a variable range of Zealand shores. Corallina carries a wealth of small epi-
species depending on their morphology. Others only tem- phytic algae, and silt and shell debris collects between its
porarily utilize the algae for food and/or shelter and do tangled fronds. Especially in rock pools, Corallina forms
not have a permanent association with the algae upon a multilayered habitat. Two molluscs that use it directly
which they may be found. Hayward (1980) considers that for food are Turbo smaragda and Zeacumantus subcari-
the term epiphyte should apply only to a species that is natus, as well as a host of smaller gastropods, including
directly dependent on an algal resource for at least the juvenile T. smaragda, Zebittum exile, Eatoniella olivacea,
74 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 2.3
Abundances of the Fauna Inhabiting Seaweeds on British Shores (In no. 100 g–1)
Ascophyllum
nodosum and Laminaria
Pelvetia Fucus Lichina Fucus Polycriphorics Fucus Gigartina digitata
Invertebrate Fauna canaliculata spiralis pygmnea resiculosus lanosa serratus stellata holdfrots

Porifera — — — — — — — 8.3
Coelenterata — — — — 3.0 0.2 216.0 31.0
Turbellana and Nemertinea — 0.3 — 5.3 63.6 0.5 2.8 40.2
Nematoda 3.4 3.2 — 3.3 76.1 21.2 16.5 247.8
Polychaeta — 0.8 — — 72.6 0.6 73.8 2056.0
Oligochaeta 0.2 3.2 11.0 0.3 39.2 0.2 — 9.7
Sipunculoidea — — — 2.0 — 0.3 10.8 1.5
Ostricoda — 0.5 — 16.0 353.3 3.0 0.5 7.5
Copepoda — 25.8 — 221.0 272.2 178.0 1676.2 54.0
Cirripedia — — 287.0 — — — 1.2 51.0
Tanaidacea — — — — 0.2 — — 13.7
Isopoda 15.2 0.5 2886.0 4.3 30.0 8.1 32.2 6.3
Amphipoda 15.4 46.3 35.0 1.3 48.1 4.3 83.8 125.3
Decapoda — 0.2 — — 0.2 0.1 — 4.0
Pycnogonida — — — — 0.2 — — 3.7
Acarina — 3.2 436.0 135.7 222.4 75.6 758.8 7.3
Inscita 0.8 1.3 161.0 2.3 58.3 2.0 — —
Bivalvia — — 9447.0 — 14.8 0.8 42.0 96.2
Gastropoda 8.8 13.5 435.0 67.0 163.3 23.5 72.2 19.5
Byozoa — — — — 0.2 6.1 158.2 73.5
Turicata — — — — — — — 7.8
TOTAL 43.8 98.8 13716.0 458.5 1417.7 324.6 3145.0 2864.3

Source: Data from Colman, J., J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K., 24, 172, 1940. With permission.

E. varicolor, E. delli, E. huttoni, Rissoa hamiltoni, and position and abundance of the algal hosts. Tropical and
Estea zosterophila. Many amphipod species are to be temperate marine plants are generally considered to show
found on the fronds, including representatives of the fam- opposing phenologies (Conover, 1964). The standing
ilies Lysianassidae, Stegocephalidae, Talitridae, Gam- crops of temperate plants are greatest in summer while
maridae, Amphithoidae, and Ampeliscidae. The isopod those of the tropical species reach maxima during periods
fauna includes representatives of the genera Cerceis, Cil- of low water temperatures. (De Wneede, 1976). In his
icaea, and Isocladus. Small bivalves are usually very study of algal growth in temperate Tasmanian waters,
numerous, including Notolepton citrinum, Lasaea hine- Edgar (1983b) found that there were two major algal
moa, and Nucula hartvigiana. Other species include growth pulses: one in spring-summer and one in winter-
tanaids, the opisthobranch, Alaja cylindrica, small ophi- spring. Sargassum bracteolosum, Cystophora retroflexa,
uroids, Amphiura sp., the small crab, Halicarcinus innom- Caulocystis cephalornithos, and Zonaria turneriana had
inata, larvae of the marine caddis, Philanisus plebejus, maximum growth rates in winter-spring, while Sargassum
and the sipunculid, Dendrosromum aeneum. Where sedi- verruculosum grew most rapidly over summer. Epiphytic
ment collects at the base of the plants, a host of polychaete algae generally respond to the same environmental con-
species, including deposit and filter feeders and carnivores ditions as the host algae. Sargassum muticum in the British
(especially syllids) are found. Common species are the Isles was found to be colonized by epiphytes shortly after
nereid, Perinereis camiguinoides, the hesionid, Podarke the onset of fertility in summer (Jephson and Gray, 1977).
angustifrons, and the polynoid, Lepidonotus polychroma. The biomass of the epiphytes and the epiphytic fauna was
greatly reduced in the winter.
2.9.2.3 Seasonal Changes in Species In Tasmania, Edgar (1983b) found almost identical
Composition patterns in the monthly variation in epiphytic weight and
animal abundance. Close relationships between epiphytic
Seasonal changes in species composition and abundance algae and animal abundance were also found previously
are correlated with seasonal changes in the species com- by Wieser (1959) and Hagerman (1966), while Jannson
Hard Shores 75

levels. The gut contents of two carnivorous fish (Neodax


TABLE 2.4 balteatus and Nesogobius pulchellus) and one omnivorous
Abundances and Number of Species of fish (Acanthaluteres spilomelanurus) contained many of
Invertebrates Inhabiting Macroalgae on the phytal species, and these predators were extremely
Tasmanian Shores abundant within the study area. Predation pressure would
be maximal in autumn due to the increased metabolic rates
Number of Total of the fish at higher water temperatures, considerable prey
Animal Group Species Abundance
densities, and declining structural complexity of the fila-
Gammaridean Amphipoda 70 22,262 mentous algae.
Caprellid Amphipoda 5 7,772 Edgar (1983a) concluded that the most likely hypoth-
Tanaidacea 6 918 esis to explain the observed seasonal flux in the phytal
Sphaeromatid Isopoda 6 530 fauna involves epiphytic growth regulating the dynamics
Asellote Isopoda 11 520 of the phytal community. The low number of grazers
Anthurid Isopoda 4 49 present during the winter months cannot control a burst
Gnathid Isopoda 1 32
of productivity of filamentous algae as light levels increase
Idotheid Isopoda 1 24
in spring and early summer. Animal numbers rise during
Cumacea 2 22
Mysidacea 1 9
the summer months in response to the considerable habitat
Caridea 4 28 heterogeneity and production of epiphytes, but, as these
Anomura 1 1 resources are removed by grazers in autumn, predation
Brachyura 5 17 and lack of recruitment reduce the number of invertebrates
Insecta 1 28 to comparatively low winter and spring levels.
Pycnogonida 4 221
Chaetognatha 2 9 2.9.2.4 Factors Influencing Community
Anthozoa 1 18
Diversity and Abundance
Platyhelminthes 4 38
Polychaeta 51 3,559 Phytal communities are controlled by a variety of physical
Oligochaeta 3 33 and chemical factors, including algal shape (Hicks,
Nemertea 9 96
1977b), water depth (Dahl, 1948), wave exposure and
Gastropoda 26 531
water movement (Norton, 1971; Fenwick, 1976), season
Amphiura 1 2
Holothuridea 3 13
(Mukai, 1971), turbidity and detrital load (Dahl, 1948;
Echinoidea 1 4 Moore, 1978), and salinity (Dahl, 1948). Determining the
Ophiuroidea 1 34 relative importance of each of these factors has proved
Asteroidea 2 32 difficult due to interactions among them.
Pisces 4 24
Total 230 36,826 1. Water depth and wave action: The zonation of
Source: Data from Edgar, G.J., J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol., 70,
phytal communities with depth was initially
137, 1983c. With permission. shown by the investigations of Kitching et al.
(1934) and Dahl (1948), and is generally rec-
ognized to be caused by diminishing wave tur-
(1974) showed that fluctuations in the density of meio- bulence with depth (Hagerman, 1966; Fenwick,
fauna corresponds directly with changes in the standing 1976). Edgar (1983a) found that in Tasmania,
crop of filamentous Cladophora and Ceramium. As well water depth had the greatest influence on the
as being comparatively inaccessible to external predators, distribution of the phytal fauna. Amphipods
phytal grazers and detritovores living among the dense peaked in abundance in shallow water (<2 m
growth of filamentous algae would also benefit from the depth), while isopods and molluscs were most
considerable abundance of food resources. Many of the common in the deepest (>5 m) areas investi-
animal groups in the Tasmanian study showed monthly gated. Podocerid and caprellid amphipods,
doubling of population sizes in late spring and early sum- which are filter feeders at one site, were poorly
mer. The decrease in animal numbers in autumn was represented in sheltered bays at any depth, but
equally rapid, indicating that recruitment was low and comprised >90% of the motile fauna on an
mortality was high at this time of the year. It was unlikely exposed site. At another site, caprellids and
that mass emigration of animals occurred, because of lim- podocerids dominated the fauna down to 2 m,
ited algal growth in adjacent habitats, or that the fauna but were virtually absent below that level. At
was reduced by extreme physical factors. Thus, predators that depth, there was a major dichotomy in the
must have been responsible for this decline in population fauna. Water movement differed significantly
76 The Ecology of Seashores

between the two fauna zones, with turbulent between environmental stability (as measured
flow providing a large suspension-feeding niche by wave exposure) and species density. Animal
in the upper zone and greater settling of parti- heterogeneity was also maximal at intermediate
cles in the lower zone allowing for increased levels of wave exposure. The reduced values of
numbers of detritovores. diversity indices in conditions of extreme expo-
2. Algal structure: Edgar (1983a) found that sure certainly occurred because few phytal spe-
within a depth zone there were quantitative dif- cies are capable of surviving the disturbances
ferences in the abundance of animal species on that elongate algae underwent at wave-swept
dissimilar algae. These differences were partly sites. The reasons for the reduced species rich-
caused by a close correspondence between algal ness in calm habitats are more complex and are
shape and faunal size structure. Small animals, possibly the result of the aversion of many
particularly amphipods, were more likely to be phytal species to the high detritus levels present
present on filamentous algae than on plants with on the sheltered algae, and also to the slightly
wide thalli, while larger animals showed the greater seasonal variation in water tempera-
opposite response. Animals retained on a tures. Alternatively, superiorly competitive
0.5-mm sieve were most abundant on plants phytal species may have excluded less compet-
with branch widths considerably less than their itive species.
body sizes. These animals would be more likely 5. Food resources: Both the biomass of filamen-
to respond to individual branches than to total tous epiphytes and water depth (which was con-
surface area. Larger amphipods (2.8-mm sieve sidered to be directly related to water movement
size) had peaks of abundance on blades 4.7 mm and the flux of suspended food particles) were
wide and possibly may distribute themselves found by Edgar (1983c) to be strongly corre-
with reference to surface area. The large amphi- lated with the abundance and dominance of the
pod, Erichthonius braziliensis, was found by phytal assemblage. Thus, the availability of
Connell (1963) to use behavioral mechanisms food is an important factor affecting community
to space individuals evenly over a flat surface, diversity and abundance.
and Stoner (1980) concluded after a series of
experiments that the amphipods, Cymadusa
2.9.3 ROCK POOLS
compta and Grandidierella bonnieroides, were
equally distributed among differently shaped 2.9.3.1 Introduction
sea grasses with similar surface areas, but that
a third species, Melita elongata, showed a much Rock pools (or tidepools) form an unusual and patchily
greater preference for filamentous algae than distributed habitat with markedly different characteristics
sea grasses. from other coastal habitats. During low tide they are iso-
3. Habitat complexity: Edgar (1983c) found that lated bodies of water providing a kind of subtidal refuge
simple, flat-thalloid algae and finely filamen- without the effects of waves or current flow. Conditions
tous plants had very low species richness and in the pools are, however, highly regulated by the tidal
heterogeneity. Both number of species and cycle. The degree of fluctuation in the physical conditions
abundance were positively related to the “diver- within the pools will vary greatly with tidal height, with
sity” (sensu heterogeneity) of physical struc- the lower pools being less variable than the higher ones.
tures such as branch widths within the plant, In addition, depending on their depth and shape, each pool
but not to the surface area/weight ratio (the can be differentially affected by disturbance. Some pools
degree of dissection). These relationships are located higher on the shore above the influence of tides
probably dependent on an increase in the num- and waves (except in exceptional conditions) harbor what
ber of habitats with increasing algal complexity are basically freshwater or brackish water (due often to
and/or increasing animal abundance with salt input from spray) communities.
increasing surface area. The size structures Studies on intertidal rock pools have been mostly
within the habitat also seem to be of consider- qualitative (e.g., Sze, 1980; Femino and Mathieson, 1980).
able importance, possibly because additional Most studies have focused on macroalgae, with little atten-
species may be able to survive within an envi- tion being given to sessile or motile animals (Goss-Cus-
ronment if sufficient refuges within a given size tard et al., 1979). The studies have generally concentrated
range are available from predators. on three aspects of rock pool ecology: seasonal cycle of
4. Environmental stability: In Edgar’s (1983c) algae in the pools, zonation within the pools, and the role
study, a bell-shaped relationship similar to that of disturbance in pool. Variability in the biological com-
predicted by Huston (1979) was deduced munities in the pools has been attributed to differences in
Hard Shores 77

FIGURE 2.35 Temperature changes in three pools at different heights in the intertidal zone near Halifax, Nova Scotia, May 8–9,
1970. Times of high tide indicated by arrows, darkness by the cross-hatched bars. Pools 1 and 2, between neap and spring higher
high waters, were generaly flushed twice daily, except for pool 1 during periods of calm or neap tides. Pool 3, 0.4 m above extreme
high water, was washed only during severe storms and contained no perennial macroscopic algae. (Redrawn from Edelstein, T. and
McLachlan, J., Mar. Biol., 30, 310, 311, 1975. With permission.)

their physical characteristics (e.g., area, volume, and at night (Figure 2.35), while in the winter they may be
depth) (Astles, 1993; Metaxis et al., 1994). Also, because appreciably colder than the sea. Daily changes in temper-
a number of factors determine the extent of tidal exchange ature can often result in thermal stratification of the water
into the pools (e.g., orientation, wave exposure, height of in the deeper supralittoral pool (McGregor, 1965).
the surrounding rocks, and drainage patterns), height High temperatures and evaporation can lead to an
above Chart Datum does not accurately describe the tidal increase in salinity, especially in pools not flooded for
position of a pool. Tidepools separated by a very small several days by the tide. Heavy rainfall followed by tidal
vertical distance may receive very different tidal inputs flooding can lead to particularly violent fluctuations in
and thus harbor different biological communities. salinity. Salinity stratification can occur seasonally
because of freezing in the winter, evaporation in the sum-
2.9.3.2 The Physicochemical Environment mer, and rainfall (Morris and Taylor, 1983). Daily fluctu-
ations in oxygen saturation, alkalinity, and pH have also
Physical conditions within pools vary greatly, but the been recorded, which are due to biological processes in
larger and deeper a pool and the lower its position on the the pools (McGregor, 1965; Morris and Taylor, 1983).
shore, the more it will correspond to a sublittoral habitat Thus the physical environment of tidepools fluctuates ver-
in terms of the stability of temperature, salinity, etc. Con- tically, horizontally, diurnally, and seasonally, although
versely, small or very shallow pools are more prone to not as much as the adjacent emergent rock surfaces. The
temperature and salinity changes. This is especially so for fluctuations, in turn, will vary with the volume, surface
pools at the highest tidal levels where they may be isolated area, and depth of the pool, as well as its height on the
from the sea over several tidal cycles. shore, degree of shading, drainage pattern (which depends
Temperature and salinity within the pools depend on the aspect), and exposure to waves and splash. Thus it
largely upon weather conditions, although shade and land is virtually impossible for two natural pools to be similar
drainage can have an overriding influence. Temperatures in all these characteristics; individual tidepools are unique
can vary daily by up to 15° depending on the height of in their physical regimes.
the pool along the intertidal gradient, wave exposure, the
volume of the pool, and the degree of shading (Goss- 2.9.3.3 Temporal and Spatial Patterns in the
Custard et al., 1979; Morris and Taylor, 1983; Huggett Tidepool Biota
and Griffiths, 1986). In general, depending on the level of
the pool on the shore, temperatures follow that of the air In general, the biological assemblages found in tidepools
to a much greater extent than the temperature of the sea, are similar to those described for emergent surfaces. Dif-
so that in the summer the shallow pools, or the surface ferences between the two types of habitat arise because
water of the deeper ones, are warmer by day but colder of the smaller fluctuations in physical conditions and/or
78 The Ecology of Seashores

more intense biological interactions in the pools. Two pha sp., and in the other, snails were present and the
main trends have been observed: dominant alga was Chondrus crispus. Lubchenco (1978)
added snails to the first pool and observed a decrease in
1. The uplift of species to higher levels on the the cover of the dominant Enteromorpha sp. On the other
shore in response to the absence of desiccation. hand, when she removed snails from the second pool she
2. The increased specialization and/or replacement observed a decrease in the cover of the dominant Chon-
of fully marine species toward higher levels. drus crispus. The cover of Fucus vesiculosus and ephem-
erals increased in a number of tidepools in the mid-inter-
Several taxa are more abundant in pools than on emer- tidal zone of a protected and a semiexposed shore in Maine
gent substrata. These include algae, e.g., the genera Cera- and Massachusetts, when littorinids were excluded (Lub-
mium, Spongoclonium, Corallina, and Rhizoclonium in chenco, 1982).
Maine, U.S.A. (Johnson and Skutch, 1928), Prionitis in A number of other studies have shown that grazers in
Washington, U.S.A. (Dethier, 1982), and Fucus distiches tidepools (mainly littorinids) have a negative effect on the
in Nova Scotia, Canada (Chapman and Johnson, 1990); abundance of some algal species, especially fucoids, a
and gastropods, e.g., the genus Cellana in New South positive effect on the abundance of ephemeral algae, and
Wales, Australia (Underwood, 1976), and Littorina lit- no effect on the encrusting genus Hildenbrandia and cor-
torea in Massachusetts, U.S.A. (Lubchenco, 1982). Mac- allines (Chapman, 1990; Dethier, 1982; Underwood and
roalgae such as fucoids, Scytosiphon, Spongomorpha, and Jernakoff, 1984).
Ulva, occur at higher intertidal levels in tidepools than on Predation: A limited number of studies have demon-
emergent surfaces on the northeast coast of North America strated the importance of predation in tidepools. Fair-
(Johnson and Skutch, 1928; Femino and Mathieson, 1980; weather (1987) found that whelks introduced into shallow
Chapman and Johnson, 1990). Similar observations have (1 to 4 cm deep) tidepools in New South Wales reduced
been made for mussels, chitons, limpets, and sea urchins the abundance of barnacles, tubeworms, and limpets. Lub-
in tidepools in British Columbia, Canada (Green, 1971) chenco (1978) suggested that littorinid populations in tide-
and for the surfgrass, Phyllospadix scouleri, in Washing- pools in Massachusetts may be controlled by predation by
ton (Dethier, 1984). the green crab, Carcinus maenas. In Washington, Dethier
Many species of benthic invertebrates and fish also (1980) showed that fish, and to a lesser extent sea anem-
show zonation along the intertidal gradient. The periwin- ones, can reduce the abundance of an harpacticoid cope-
kle, Littorina rudis, is mainly found in high pools, whereas pod, Tigriopus californicus, in tidepools in the high zone
L. littorea, whelks, mussels, and sea urchins are found in of rocky shores. In Island Bay, New Zealand, Coull and
low pools (Goss-Custard et al., 1979; Femino and Mathie- Wells (1983) observed high meiofauna mortality due to
son, 1980). Sze (1980) found that the abundance of L. fish predation in tidepools in the absence of Corallina
littorea increased from low to high pools. Zonation has officinalis, which acts as a refuge.
also been observed for various meiofaunal groups: flat- Competition: Interspecific competition may be
worms, rotifers, oligochaetes, cladocerans, cyclopoid important in regulating tidepool community structure, but
copepods, ostracods, barnacles, amphipods, isopods, and the evidence is sparse. Lubchenco (1982) and Chapman
chironomid larvae. Fish zonation in tidepools has been (1990) have documented decreases in fucoid canopy due
documented extensively but the results are not quantitative to competition with ephemeral algae and Chondrus cripsis
(Green, 1971; Gibson, 1982; Bennett and Griffiths, 1984; in tidepools in Massachusetts and Nova Scotia, respec-
Mgaya, 1992). Bennett and Griffiths (1984) detected a tively. Chapman and Johnson (1990) suggested that the
decrease in the number of fish species with increasing absence of a canopy of Ascophyllum nodosum can enhance
height above low water, which they attributed to intoler- recruitment of Fucus spiralis in tidepools in Nova Scotia.
ance to extreme physical conditions. Cecchi and Cinelli (1992) found that canopy removal in
Cystoseira spp. dominated tidepools on the west coast of
2.9.3.4 Factors Affecting Community Italy had no effect on either encrusting or articulated cor-
Organization allines (e.g., Corallina spp.) or on coarsely branched algae
(e.g., Gelidium pulchellum), but enhanced the abundance
Herbivory: Herbivory (grazing mainly by limpets and of delicately branched (e.g., Ceramium, Cladophora spp.)
littorinids) has been found to limit the distribution and and thickly branched (e.g., Padina pavonica) algal species.
abundance of algae in tidepools. Vadas (1977) showed that Recruitment: Recruitment is potentially an important
the removal of sea urchins resulted in increased macroal- factor in the organization of tidepool communities,
gal abundance and diversity in shallow tidepools in Wash- although no studies have addressed this directly. The vari-
ington. In Massachusetts, Lubchenco (1978) observed the ability in the response of the tidepool community to grazer
effect of herbivory in two mid-zone pools. In one, littorinid removal (Paine and Vadas, 1969) and in recovery from
snails were absent and the dominant alga was Enteromor- disturbance (Dethier, 1984) have been partially attributed
Hard Shores 79

to seasonal availability and “vagaries of recruitment” of 2.9.3.5 Conclusions


algal spores and invertebrate larvae from the surrounding
seawater. Chapman and Johnson (1990) suggested that A number of similarities and differences exist in commu-
differential recruitment success in high tidepools can lead nity organization between tidepools and emergent sub-
to competitive displacement between Fucus evanescens strata of rocky shores. Since many of the same species are
and F. vesiculosus. common to both habitats, they are biologically similar.
Physical Factors: The abundance of tidepool algae However, certain differences in the physical regime can
has been correlated with pool elevation (which determines result in differences in the species composition of the two
the length of emergence and the extent of temperature habitats. On the other hand, the amplitude of the fluctua-
fluctuations), and topography and shading by surrounding tions in the physical regime tends to be smaller in some
rocks (Johnson and Skutch, 1928). The number of species tidepools, particularly those located lower on the shore,
present is also correlated with tidepool depth and volume. making them more benign habitats. However, grazing and
Several studies have shown that deeper pools may support predation may be more intense in tidepools where both
more plant and invertebrate species (Fairweather and food and favorable foraging conditions (due to the ability
Underwood, 1991). Other studies have shown that fish of herbivores to graze irrespective of the state of the tide)
biomass, species number, and abundance may show sig- are provided. In addition, tidepools that are high on the
nificant correlations with pool area, depth, or volume shore and infrequently flushed by wave action can become
(Mgaya, 1992). stagnant, resulting in harsh conditions due to lack of nutri-
As on emergent substrata (Menge, 1976; 1978b; 1983; ents and food, and pronounced changes in physical con-
Lubchenco and Menge, 1978; Underwood and Jernakoff, ditions such as pH, salinity, and temperature. The decrease
1981), algal cover and abundance of littorinids and fish in in species diversity with increasing intertidal height is due
tidepools are correlated with wave exposure. Sze (1982) to the inability of many species to tolerate such conditions.
showed that some algae such as Enteromorpha, Spongo- The variability in community structure among pools
morpha, and Scytosiphon are more abundant in tidepools is larger than that on emergent substrata, with pools at the
on exposed shores where littorinids are absent, whereas same height on the same shore showing large variability
fucoids are more abundant in pools on protected shores. in species composition and abundance. Despite the large
Dethier (1984) also found that the cover of the dominant variability, some general patterns of species distribution in
algal species varied among pools of different wave expo- tidepools along an intertidal gradient have emerged from
sure. For example, the green alga, Collonsiella tubercu- the various studies. Most have shown that the dominant
lata, and the red alga, Rhodomelia larix, were found in space occupiers in lower tidepools in the northern temper-
pools higher on the shore in more exposed habitats (Deth- ate region are fucoid and coralline algae and mussels,
ier, 1982). Grossman (1982) found that the abundance of whereas the higher pools are dominated by green algae.
fish in tidepools decreased with increased wave action,
possibly because few species can adapt to higher turbu- 2.9.4 KELP BEDS
lence in exposed pools (Gibson, 1982). Green (1971) also 2.9.4.1 Introduction
found that the vertical distribution of cottid fish was
related to the degree of wave exposure in tidepools, with One of the most common sublittoral habitats throughout
fewer fish found in pools on lower, more exposed shores. the temperate regions of the world are large “forests” or
Physical Disturbance: There is little information on “beds” of kelp plants (large assemblages of brown algae
the effect of disturbance in determining the structure of of the order Laminariales). These communities are impor-
communities in tidepools. In tidepools in Washington, tant because of their high productivity and the diverse
Dethier (1984) used an operational definition of distur- associated invertebrate and fish communities they support.
bance as the destruction of biomass over a period of less They also give rise to large quantities of drift algae, espe-
than six months, which she subjectively categorized as cially after storm events. These detached plants are often
severe, moderate, or minimal (affecting most, some, or cast up on nearby beaches where they provide an energy
one or two species of a pool, respectively). Freezing and source for the beach communities.
heat stress were types of physical disturbance for the Since the kelp forests can extend up to 30 m or more
surfgrass, Phyllospadiz scouleri; bashing by logs and above the substratum, they give vertical structure to the
rocks were types of disturbance for mussels, anemones, sublittoral rocky communities. The sometimes extensive
and Cladophora spp. More disturbances were recorded in canopies can modify light levels to the substrate below,
low than in high zone pools, and the frequency of distur- reduce the impact of waves and turbulence, impact on the
bance was the same in wave-exposed pools as in more nutrient dynamics of the surrounding water, and limit the
protected sites. The rate of recovery from disturbance space available for other species to colonize. Recent
varied with species and depended upon the magnitude of reviews of the distribution and ecology of kelp beds
the disturbance. include those of North (1971a,b), Rosenthal et al. (1974),
80 The Ecology of Seashores

Dayton (1985a,b), Foster and Schiel (1985), Schiel and radiata and Lessonis variegata, as well as patches of
Foster (1986), Schiel (1990; 1994), and Kennelly (1995). Carpophyllum spp. In many areas, depths of 7 to 10 m
are devoid of large brown algae and are dominated by the
2.9.4.2 Species Composition, Distribution, and sea urchin Evechinus chloroticus. Deeper areas (11 to
Zonation 20 m) are characterized by stands of E. radiata and C.
flexuosum. On southern New Zealand shores (Figure
Species of the order Laminariales occur in both hemi- 2.36f), the upper fringe of the sublittoral is occupied by
spheres, but most are found in northern temperate and the bull kelp Durvillaea antarctica (Schiel, 1990) with D.
boreal areas (Moe and Silva, 1977). They are normally willana below, extending on some shores to 3 m (Hay,
confined to depths of 50 m or less in the sublittoral zone 1982). Cystophora spp. and Marginarella boryana often
(Foster and Schiel, 1985). Representatives of another form dense stands at various depths, interspersed with
order, the Fucales, are most important in the Southern stands of Carpophyllum and the laminarians E. radiata
Hemisphere, usually occurring in the shallow upper sub- and L. variegata. In semiexposed and sheltered waters,
littoral and the sublittoral fringe. Laminarians, but not the bladder kelp Macrocystis pyrifera often forms exten-
fucaleans, have alternate generations, the haploid, micro- sive beds. Between the holdfasts there often is a lush
scopic gametophyte, and the macroscopic sporophyte covering of red and brown algae.
plant (see Figure 2.36). Australian shores have fewer laminarians but more
Along the west coast of North America, three broad fucalean species than in New Zealand. Along the New
depth zones can be categorized in the upper sublittoral South Wales coasts (Figure 2.36g), a suite of Sargassum
(e.g., Druehl, 1970; Foster and Schiel, 1985) (Figure and Cystophora spp. are found in the upper sublittoral.
2.36). Inshore (0 to 5 m depth) there is a mixture of Below, the kelp community is dominated by Phyllospora
fucalians such as Cystoseira and Sargassum, and laminar- comosa in intermediate depths, and E. radiata below
ians such as Egregia and Eisenia. Middle depths (5 to (Kennelly and Larkum, 1984; Larkum, 1986). On southern
20 m) are dominated by the larger kelps Nereocystis and shores (Figure 2.36h), the upper fringe of the sublittoral
Macrocystis. Here there is a lush understory of a number is dominated by the bull kelp Durvillaea potatorum, with
of stipate laminarians. On the rock surfaces between the Cystophora, Sargassum, and Scyothalia spp. below. Eck-
kelp holdfasts there is a complex assemblage of smaller lonia radiata dominates from 5 to 40 m depths. In the
brown , red, and green algae, as well as sponges, ascidians, southernmost regions, especially in Tasmania, the bladder
bryozoans, and mobile invertebrates, especially the sea kelps (Macrocystis angustifolia in the north and M.
urchin Stronglocentrotus. pyrifera in the south) may be abundant, depending on the
The larger kelps with their surface canopies do not degree of wave action.
occur on the North Atlantic coasts. There, Fuscus species The largest and most studied laminarian is the “giant
occupy the shallow areas, and stipate laminarians such as kelp,” Macrocystis pyrifera, which is found along the east
Alaria are dominant (Mann, 1972a). On British coasts and west coasts of South America, the southern part of
(Figure 2.36b), Laminaria digitata occurs in the shallow the North American west coast, South Africa, southern
subtidal, with L. hyperborea, L. saccaharina, and Sac- Australia, New Zealand, and some sub-Antarctic islands.
corhiza polyschides occupying progressivley deeper areas. Another species, M. integrifolia, replaces M. pyrifera on
In contrast, southern Chile has few laminarians, with the North American west coast.
Lessonia species in the shallow sublittoral and a dominant
canopy of the bladder kelp Macrocystis pyrifera, with a 2.9.4.3 Kelp Bed Fauna
subcanopy of Lessonia species and other algae below (Fig-
ure 2.36c). In South Africa (Figure 2.36d), kelp forests A wide variety of sessile invertebrates, including sponges,
are dominated by two species of laminarians. At all depths ascidians, bryozoans, hydroids, sedentary polychaetes,
to 30 m the smaller Laminaria pallida can form dense molluscs, and brachiopods are found on the kelp fronds
beds (Diechmann, 1980), while in the shallower sublit- and the understory plants, in the kelp holdfasts, and on
toral, Ecklonia maxima, which reaches several meters in the rock surface. There is also a diverse fauna of motile
length and is held above the substratum by a bouyant stipe, invertebrates, including herbivorous and carnivorous gas-
is very abundant. tropods, and especially crustaceans that live on the algal
Australian and New Zealand sublittoral zones have a fronds. In a study of the fauna in the holdfasts of Macro-
more diverse flora with many fucalean species in the cystis pyrifera in southern Chile, Ojeda and Santelices
shallower waters and laminarians deeper down (Choat and (1984) found that it was about half as diversified as in
Schiel, 1982; Kennelly, 1995). In northern New Zealand California, where Ghelardi (1971) found 100+ species. In
(Figure 2.36e), the shallowest areas (0 to 3 m) are dom- Chile the most abundant taxa were echinoids and decapod
inated by Carpophyllum angustifolia and C. maschalo- crustaceans, whereas in California they were amphipods,
carpum. At 3 to 5 m there are dense stands of Ecklonia polychaetes, and isopods.
Hard Shores 81

FIGURE 2.36 Stylized depth profiles of kelp forests from several areas round the world. All of the species represented in a single
diagram may not be represented at a single site. A: Central California — several surface canopy kelps and understory kelps occur;
B: United Kingdom — stipate laminarians predominate; C: Southern Chile — Lessonia spp. form the upper boundary of Macrocystis
forests and occur in the understory; D: South Africa — Ecklonia maxima forms a surface canopy and Laminaria pallida occurs at
all depths to 20 m; E: Northern New Zealand — fucalean algae occur in shallow water, middle depths are dominated by sea urchins,
and Ecklonia radiata occurs in both shallow and deep water; F: Southern New Zealand — Durvillaea occupies shallow water and
Lessonia, Ecklonia, and several fucaleans occupy most depths; G: New South Wales — Cystophora spp. and Sargassum spp. occur
in shallow water above a zone of sea urchins, Phyllospora occurs at intermediate depths, and Ecklonia occurs at most depths; H:
South Australia — where Durvillaea occurs in shallow water and Ecklonia and several fucaleans occupy intermediate and greater
depths. (Redrawn from Scheil, D.R., in Marine Biology, Hammond, L.S. and Synnot, R.N., Eds., Longman Chesire, Sydney, 1994,
350. With permission.)

Typically, the major herbivorous invertebrates of the algal communities. Abalone (Haliotis spp.) are very abun-
kelp beds are sea urchins and gastropods. Sea urchins, as dant in exposed habitats, where they feed on drift algae.
discussed below, in particular exert a considerable influ- The most conspicuous motile components are the fish.
ence on the species composition and abundance of the Nearly 100 species of fish are known to inhabit the south-
82 The Ecology of Seashores

ern Californian kelp forests (Feder et al., 1974). In a study rates of settlement on both red algal turf and on crustose
comparing fish densities in Macrocystis forests and the coralline algae, but significantly lower rates on rock. Lar-
structurally less complex, temporarily unstable, Nereocys- vae also settled in response to a partially purified extract
tis beds, Bodkin (1986) found the biomass densities of the of coralline algae. The reduced settlement on natural rock
dominant water-column fish to be >50 % lower in the surfaces relative to either algal treatment and the signifi-
Nereocystis beds. Experimental clearing of Macrocystis cant settlement in response to the extract of coralline algae
from one 1-ha rock reef resulted in a 63% decline in the indicate that larvae discriminate between natural substrata
standing stock of fishes (Bodkin, 1988). Similar fish diver- and that they respond to a chemical settlement cue. The
sities and densities are found in other kelp forests, e.g., similar densities of young recruits of S. purpuratus on
those of New Zealand (Choat and Ayling, 1987). dominant substrata of barrens and kelp beds show that
differential settlement cannot explain the high densities of
2.9.4.4 Reproduction, Recruitment, and sea urchins in the barrens habitat. Movement between
Dispersal barrens and kelp beds is unlikely given the small sizes of
the newly recruited sea urchins relative to the large dis-
Laminarian and fucalean algae have discrete annual repro- tances often involved. Reduced postsettlement mortality
ductive periods, and recruits usually appear within a few of newly settlement individuals in the barrens is the likely
months of these (Schiel, 1988). Most of the species have mechanism leading to higher recruitment densities of the
limited means of propagule dispersal from the fertile parent sea urchins in the barrens relative to the kelp bed habitats.
plants, and recruits appear within a few meters of the repro-
ductive adults (Paine, 1979). In northern New Zealand, 2.9.4.5 Impact of Grazers on Kelp Communities
70% of viable recruits appeared within 8 m of fertile adults
for Ecklonia and three fucalean species (Schiel, 1988). Vast Grazing by sea urchins can have devastating effects on the
numbers of propagules may be necessary to produce suc- populations of marine algae, especially kelps of the order
cessful recruitment, e.g., Chapman (1984) found that for Laminariales (Lawrence, 1975; Harrold and Pearse,
Laminaria longicirurus in Nova Scotia, 9 × 109 spores m–2 1987). Such effects have been noted in algal communities
yr–1 produced 9 × 106 microscopic stages, from which only over a broad geographical range (see reviews of Lawrence,
a single sporophyte developed. The question, then, is how 1975; Duggins, 1980; and Schiel, 1990; 1994). Grazing
the species become widely distributed. This probably takes is most pronounced when the urchins form moving aggre-
place via drifting fertile plants. gations, or “fronts,” that eat almost all macroalgae in their
Sea urchins can vary enormously in abundance on kelp pathway producing “barren grounds” (e.g., Pearse et al.,
beds. The question is posed, do the differences in sea 1970; Leighton, 1971; Lawrence, 1975; Breen and Mann,
urchin density, especially between the so-called barren 1976). One such front reported by Leighton (1971) had
grounds where densities are high and the kelp forests densities of red and purple urchins exceeding 60 m–2, and
where densities are low, result from differential larval moved at a rate of 10 m month–1. Almost all the macroal-
settlement, postsettlement mortality, or movement? The gae disappeared in the wake of the front. These areas can
relationship between the alternative communities of sea remain barren for several years because some urchins
urchin-dominated barren grounds (barrens) and kelp for- remain behind the front and graze on newly recruited
ests have been investigated throughout the world. Several plants. Urchins in barren grounds appear to persist prima-
of these studies have noted high densities of small urchins rily on drift algae (Mathieson et al., 1977), but may also
in barrens relative to kelp bed habitats. These observations gain nourishment by grazing on microalgae (Chapman,
have involved several species in different geographical 1981) or by absorbing organic matter.
areas: Strongylocentrotus purpuratus and S. franciscanus Dean et al. (1984) studied the effects of grazing by
in California, U.S.A. (Pearse et al., 1970), S. droebachien- two species of sea urchins on two species of kelp (Mac-
sis in Nova Scotia, Canada (Lang and Mann, 1976), and rocystis pyrifera and Pterygophora californica) in south-
Evechinus chloroticus in northeast New Zealand (Andrew ern California from 1978 through 1981. Both red sea
and Choat, 1982; 1985). urchins, Strongylocentrotus franciscanus, and white sea
Rowley (1989) has investigated settlement and recruit- urchins, Lytechinus anamesus, were abundant and lived in
ment in the kelp beds of southern California. He found aggregations. The aggregation of red urchins were either
that newly settled individuals of both purple sea urchins relatively small and stationary, or relatively large and
(Strongylocentrotus purpuratus) and red sea urchins (S. motile (advancing at about 2 m month–1). Both stationary
franciscanus) were present in similar, high densities (1,000 and moving aggregations were observed at the same time,
S. purpuratus m–2) on foliose red algal turf, a dominant within 100 m of one another. Stationary aggregations
substratum of the kelp bed, and on crustose coralline algae, largely subsisted on drift kelp and had no effect on kelp
the dominant substratum of adjacent barrens. Larvae of S. recruitment or on the adult kelp abundance. In contrast,
putpuratus reared and tested in the laboratory showed high red sea urchins in large, motile aggregations or “fronts”
Hard Shores 83

ate all the macroalgae in their path. Dean et al. proposed At some sites along the coasts of central California and
that a scarcity of drift algae for food resulted in a change the Aleutian Islands in the Bering Sea, sea otters play a key
in the behavior pattern of the red urchins, and that this led role in kelp community dynamics, since they prey heavily
to the formation of large, motile aggregations. on sea urchins (Estes et al., 1978; Estes and Duggins, 1995).
The removal of sea urchins usually results in a large Where sea otters are abundant, the algal beds are well
recruitment of algae. This has occurred in experimental developed and the sea urchins tend to be small in size and
areas (Andrew and Choat, 1982), and on a larger scale confined to cryptic habitats (Duggins, 1980).
along the coastline of Nova Scotia following a mass mor- Predatory seastars can also impact on kelp communi-
tality of sea urchins (Miller and Colodey, 1983). The sub- ties by influencing the distribution and abundance of sea
sequent survival of the algae in these denuded areas urchins and gastropods. In southern California, the seastar
depends on many factors, including the impact of other Patiria miniata, by feeding on the urchin Lytechinus
grazers such as gastropods and fish, the availability of abamesus, lessens its grazing impact on juvenile kelp
algal propagules, and the seasonal timing of the clearance. plants (Schroeter et al., 1983; Dean et al. 1984). In the
In addition to sea urchins, other grazers are gastropod northern waters of the west coast of North America, the
molluscs. In California, three trochids of the genus Tegula large seastar Pycnopodia helianthoides feeds on sea
live and feed on the fronds of Macrocystis, but appear to urchins, reducing their densities and enabling algal
have no major impact. In northern New Zealand, high recruitment to take place (Duggins, 1983).
numbers of gastropods, including the limpet, Cellana stel- Of all the factors affecting the population dynamics
lifera, and the turbinid, Cookia sulcata, invade areas that of sea urchins, disease causes the greatest reduction in
have been heavily grazed by sea urchins (Ayling, 1981). numbers. Mass mortalities of sea urchins due to disease
These gastropods consume algal spores and germlings, such as those that have occurred in California (Pearse et
and thus help to maintain these areas free from kelp (Choat al., 1977) and Nova Scotia (Miller and Colodey, 1983)
and Andrew, 1986). Abalone are the largest grazers found can bring about a sudden switch from echinoid to algal
in kelp beds, and while small individuals graze on encrust- dominance (Miller, 1983).
ing algae and algal turfs, the larger animals feed almost
exclusively on drift algae. 2.9.4.7 Kelp Production
Some fish species are important herbivores in kelp
beds. In California the scorpidid, Medialuna californien- Productivity of kelps is very high, and the genus Macro-
sis, and the kyposid, Girella nigricans, have been found cystis has been extensively studied in the Californian and
to graze 90% of the exposed recruits of Macrocystis (>10 British Columbian kelp beds where its growth, production,
cm tall) (Harris et al., 1984). In New Zealand, the fish and standing crop have been measured (North, 1971a,b;
Odax pullus sometimes feeds on the reproductive Wheeler and Druehl, 1984; Coon, 1982). Productivity var-
branchlets of large brown algae, and at other times feeds ies considerably and in typical beds ranges from about
on the fronds of Ecklonia radiata. In New South Wales, 400 to 1,500 g C m–2 yr–1 for Macrocystis pyrifera, 1,200
grazing by O. cyanomelas causes the death of E. radiata to 1,900 g C m–2 yr–1 for Laminaria in the North Atlantic,
in patches of up to 100 m–2 (Andrew and Jones, 1990). and between 600 and 1,000 g C m–2 yr–1 for Ecklonia in
Australia and South Africa (Mann, 1973; 1982; Kirkman,
2.9.4.6 Predation 1984; Foster and Schiel, 1985). On an aerial basis, this is
up to 40 times that of the open ocean. The turnover of
Since sea urchins can have significant impact on kelp beds, biomass ranges from 3.8 to 20 times yr–1 for Laminaria
there has been considerable interest in the roles of sea in Nova Scotia (Mann, 1973) and is at least 3.5 times yr–1
urchin predators. In eastern Canada, the fishes, Anarhichas for Ecklonia in western Australia (Kirkman, 1984), and 7
lupus and Hippoglossoides platessoides, can break up times yr–1 for Macrocystis in California.
large aggregations of sea urchins, thereby modifying their Growth rates of Macrocystis species are high. In
grazing effects (Bernstein et al., 1981). The sheepshead Otago Harbour, New Zealand, Brown et al. (1997) mea-
wrasse, Semicossyphus pulcher, also feeds extensively on sured elongation rates of canopy 2 cm day–1 for canopy
sea urchins (Cowen, 1983), affecting their abundance. and 1.3 cm day–1 for submerged fronds. These were higher
Similar predation impacts of fish have been noted in New than those obtained by von Tussenbrock (1989) from a
Zealand (Andrew and Choat, 1982) and southern Australia shallow water site in the Falklands (1.3 to 2 cm day–1 for
(Hutchins and Thompson, 1983). Lobsters can also have canopy and 0.5 to 0.8 cm day–1 for submerged fronds).
an impact on sea urchin numbers and behavior. Increases However, the growth rates listed above are considerably
in sea urchin abundances in both California and Nova lower than those found by Zimmerman and Kremer (1986)
Scotia may be due in part to the decline in lobster abun- at a deep-water location in southern California (6 to 14
dances following intensive fishing (Tegner and Dayton, cm day–1 for submerged fronds). For M. intgrifolia in
1981; Wharton and Mann, 1981). British Columbia, the mean growth rates varied from a
84 The Ecology of Seashores

high of 4.3% day–1 to a low of –3.6% day–1 (Wheeler and carbon input to the kelp forest was estimated at 1300 g C
Druehl, 1986). Net mean assimilation rates of carbon var- m–2 of ocean bottom yr–1. Wheeler and Druehl calculated
ied from a high of 0.65 g C m–2 of foliage day–1 to a low that the forest production was 52 kg wet wgt m–2 yr–1. This
of –0.87 g C m–2 day–1. Annual carbon input on a foliage compares with estimates of 75 to 125 kg wet wgt m–2 yr–1
area basis was calculated at 250 g C m–2 yr–1. Annual calculated by Coon (1982) for Californian kelp forests.
Soft Shores
3
CONTENTS

3.1 Soft Shores as a Habitat...........................................................................................................................................87


3.1.1 Beach Formation ..........................................................................................................................................88
3.1.2 Sediment Characteristics ..............................................................................................................................88
3.1.3 Currents, Wave Action, and Beach Formation ............................................................................................90
3.1.4 Exposure Rating ...........................................................................................................................................91
3.2 The Physicochemical Environment..........................................................................................................................92
3.2.1 Interstitial Pore Space and Water Content...................................................................................................92
3.2.2 Temperature ..................................................................................................................................................94
3.2.3 Salinity..........................................................................................................................................................94
3.2.4 Oxygen Content ...........................................................................................................................................94
3.2.5 Organic Content ...........................................................................................................................................95
3.2.6 Stratification of the Interstitial System ........................................................................................................96
3.3 Soft Shore Types ......................................................................................................................................................97
3.4 Estuaries ...................................................................................................................................................................98
3.4.1 What is an Estuary? .....................................................................................................................................98
3.4.2 Special Features of Estuarine Ecosystems ................................................................................................101
3.4.3 Estuarine Geomorphology..........................................................................................................................104
3.4.3.1 Coastal Plain Estuaries (Drowned River Valleys) ......................................................................104
3.4.3.2 Coastal Plain Salt Marsh Estuaries.............................................................................................105
3.4.3.3 Lagoon Type Bar-Built Estuaries................................................................................................105
3.4.3.4 Lagoons .......................................................................................................................................105
3.4.3.5 Fjords...........................................................................................................................................105
3.4.3.6 Estuaries Produced by Tectonic Processes .................................................................................105
3.4.4 Estuarine Circulation and Salinity Processes ............................................................................................105
3.4.4.1 Circulation Patterns .....................................................................................................................105
3.4.4.2 Classification of Circulation and Salinity Patterns.....................................................................106
3.4.5 Estuarine Sediments ...................................................................................................................................106
3.5 Soft Shore Primary Producers ...............................................................................................................................107
3.5.1 The Microflora............................................................................................................................................107
3.5.1.1 Sand Beaches...............................................................................................................................107
3.5.1.2 Mudflats and Estuaries ................................................................................................................107
3.5.1.3 Benthic Microalgal Biomass and Production .............................................................................108
3.5.1.4 Factors Regulating Benthic Microalgal Distribution, Abundance, and Production...................110
3.5.1.5 A Model of Estuarine Benthic Microalgal Production ..............................................................111
3.5.1.6 Surf-Zone Phytoplankton ............................................................................................................111
3.5.1.7 Epiphytic Microalgae ..................................................................................................................114
3.5.2 Estuarine Phytoplankton ............................................................................................................................115
3.5.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................115
3.5.2.2 Composition of the Phytoplankton .............................................................................................116
3.5.2.3 Distribution and Seasonal Variation in Species Composition....................................................116
3.5.2.4 Biomass and Production .............................................................................................................117
3.5.2.5 Factors Regulating Estuarine Primary Production .....................................................................119
3.5.2.6 A Model of Estuarine Phytoplankton Production ......................................................................122

85
86 The Ecology of Seashores

3.5.3 Estuarine Macroalgae.................................................................................................................................123


3.5.3.1 Composition and Distribution.....................................................................................................123
3.5.3.2 Biomass and Production .............................................................................................................124
3.5.3.3 Impact of Benthic Macroalgal Mats on the Benthic Fauna .......................................................125
3.5.4 Sea Grass Systems .....................................................................................................................................126
3.5.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................126
3.5.4.2 Distribution and Zonation ...........................................................................................................127
3.5.4.3 Biomass and Production .............................................................................................................127
3.5.4.4 Factors Affecting Sea Grass Production .....................................................................................130
3.5.4.5 Fate of Sea Grass Primary Production .......................................................................................131
3.5.5 Salt Marshes ...............................................................................................................................................132
3.5.5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................132
3.5.5.2 Development, Distribution, and Zonation ..................................................................................132
3.5.5.3 Primary Production .....................................................................................................................133
3.5.5.4 Factors Affecting Production ......................................................................................................136
3.5.5.5 Marsh Estuarine Carbon Fluxes..................................................................................................139
3.5.6 Mangrove Systems .....................................................................................................................................143
3.5.6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................143
3.5.6.2 Distribution and Zonation ...........................................................................................................144
3.5.6.3 Environmental Factors.................................................................................................................146
3.5.6.4 Adaptations..................................................................................................................................146
3.5.6.5 Biomass and Production .............................................................................................................148
3.5.6.6 Litterfall.......................................................................................................................................148
3.5.6.7 The Fate of Mangrove Leaf Litter ..............................................................................................150
3.5.7 Relative Contribution of the Various Producers ........................................................................................153
3.6 Soft Shore Fauna....................................................................................................................................................153
3.6.1 Estuarine Zooplankton ...............................................................................................................................153
3.6.1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................153
3.6.1.2 Composition and Distribution.....................................................................................................154
3.6.1.3 Temporal and Spatial Patterns ....................................................................................................156
3.6.1.4 Biomass and Production .............................................................................................................157
3.6.1.5 Factors Influencing Distribution and Production........................................................................158
3.6.2 Interstitial Fauna.........................................................................................................................................159
3.6.2.1 The Interstitial Environment .......................................................................................................159
3.6.2.2 The Interstitial Biota ...................................................................................................................159
3.6.2.3 The Meiofauna ............................................................................................................................160
3.6.2.4 Meiofaunal Recruitment and Colonization.................................................................................162
3.6.2.5 Meiofaunal Population Density, Composition, and Distribution ...............................................162
3.6.2.6 Role of Meiofauna in Benthic Systems......................................................................................164
3.6.2.7 Factors Involved in the Structuring of Meiofaunal Communities .............................................166
3.6.3 Soft Shore Benthic Macrofauna.................................................................................................................166
3.6.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................166
3.6.3.2 Macrofaunal Zonation Patterns ...................................................................................................167
3.6.3.3 Diversity and Abundance ............................................................................................................173
3.6.3.4 Distribution Patterns of Estuarine Macrofauna ..........................................................................174
3.6.3.5 Epifauna.......................................................................................................................................175
3.6.3.6 The Hyperbenthos .......................................................................................................................175
3.6.3.7 Soft Shore Macrofaunal Feeding Types .....................................................................................175
3.6.4 Estuarine Nekton ........................................................................................................................................178
3.6.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................178
3.6.4.2 Taxonomic Composition .............................................................................................................178
3.6.4.3 Nektonic Food Webs ...................................................................................................................179
3.6.4.4 Patterns of Migration ..................................................................................................................180
3.6.4.5 The Estuary as a Nursery............................................................................................................181
Soft Shores 87

3.7 Biological Modification of the Sediment ..............................................................................................................181


3.7.1 Bioturbation and Biodeposition .................................................................................................................181
3.7.2 Impact of Bioturbation on the Benthic Infauna ........................................................................................183
3.7.3 Influence of Macrofaunal Activity on the Chemistry of the Sediments ...................................................184
3.7.4 Influence of Macrofaunal Activity on Microbial Activities in Intertidal Sediments ................................186
3.8 Microbial Ecology and Organic Detritus...............................................................................................................188
3.8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................188
3.8.2 Organic Matter ...........................................................................................................................................189
3.8.2.1 Sources of Organic Matter..........................................................................................................189
3.8.2.2 Quantities of Particulate Organic Matter (POM) .......................................................................192
3.8.2.3 Quantities of Dissolved Organic Matter (DOM)........................................................................193
3.8.3 River Input of Organic Carbon ..................................................................................................................193
3.8.4 Microbial Processes in Coastal Waters......................................................................................................195
3.8.4.1 Microbial Standing Stocks ..........................................................................................................195
3.8.4.2 Role of Microorganisms in Coastal Food Webs.........................................................................195
3.8.5 Aerobic Detrital Decomposition ................................................................................................................198
3.8.6 Microbial Processes in the Sediments .......................................................................................................199
3.8.6.1 Sediment Stratification and Microbial Processes .......................................................................199
3.8.6.2 Sediment Microbial Standing Stocks and Activity ....................................................................200
3.8.6.3 Anaerobic Processes in the Sediments .......................................................................................203
3.8.7 Microorganisms and Detritus as a Food Resource....................................................................................206
3.9 Nutrient Cycling.....................................................................................................................................................209
3.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................209
3.9.2 The Nitrogen Cycle....................................................................................................................................209
3.9.2.1 Transformations of Nitrogen.......................................................................................................209
3.9.2.2 The Coastal Nitrogen Cycle........................................................................................................210
3.9.2.3 Nitrogen Fixation, Nitrification, and Denitrification..................................................................211
3.9.3 Phosphorus Cycle.......................................................................................................................................212
3.9.4 Sediment-Water Interactions in Nutrient Dynamics..................................................................................214
3.9.4.1 Nutrient Fluxes across the Sediment-Water Interface ................................................................214
3.9.4.2 Causes and Mechanisms of the Migration of Nutrients at the Sediment-Water
Interface .......................................................................................................................................217
3.9.5 Nutrient Cycling in a High-Energy Surf-Zone Beach ..............................................................................218
3.9.6 Nutrient Cycling in Estuaries.....................................................................................................................219
3.9.7 Nutrient Cycling in Salt Marsh Ecosystems .............................................................................................219
3.9.8 Nutrient Cycling in Sea Grass Ecosystems ...............................................................................................223
3.9.9 Nutrient Cycling in Mangrove Ecosystems...............................................................................................225
3.9.10 Models of Mangrove-Nutrient Interactions ...............................................................................................227
3.10 Estuarine Shelf Interactions ...................................................................................................................................228
3.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................228
3.10.2 Some Case History Investigations .............................................................................................................230
3.10.2.1 North Inlet, South Carolina.........................................................................................................230
3.10.2.2 Beaufort, North Carolina ............................................................................................................231
3.10.2.3 Mangrove Forest Systems ...........................................................................................................232
3.10.3 Conclusions ................................................................................................................................................233

3.1 SOFT SHORES AS A HABITAT


As mentioned previously, there is a gradation in shore type now turn our attention to the other shore types, which are
from rock through pebble and sand to mud, although characterized by their relative instability. They are com-
mixed shores of sand or mud with rocky outcrops are posed of particles of various sizes ranging from pebbles
common. The characteristics of the flora and fauna of hard through coarse sands, fine sands to muds (silt and clay).
(rocky) shores has already been discussed in detail. We In this chapter we shall consider the ways in which soft
88 The Ecology of Seashores

shores are formed, their physical and chemical character- 3.1.2 SEDIMENT CHARACTERISTICS
istics, the nature of the communities found in the various
shore types, and their dynamic functioning. The most important feature of beach material particles is
their size. Particle size is generally classified according to
the Wentworth scale in phi units, where φ = –log2 diameter
3.1.1 BEACH FORMATION (mm). The Wenthworth classification is summarized in
Table 3.1. A classification scheme (Figure 3.1) is generally
Hard shores are erosion shores cut by wave action. Soft
used to describe differences in sediment texture by refer-
shores, on the other hand, are depositing shores formed
ence to the proportion of sand, silt, and clay. Such classi-
from particles that have been carried by water currents
fications are essentially arbitrary and many such gradings
from other areas. The material that forms these depos-
can be found in the engineering and geological literature.
iting shores is in part derived from the erosion shores,
but the bulk of the material, especially the silts and clays,
is derived from the land and transported down the rivers TABLE 3.1
to the sea. Wentworth Scale for Sediments
Beaches generally consist of a veneer of beach mate-
rial covering a beach platform of underlying rock Generic Wentworth Scale Particle Diameter
Name Size Range (mm)
formed by wave erosion. On sand beaches the two main
types of beach material are quartz (or silica) sands of Gravel Boulder < –8 > 256
terrestrial origin and carbonate sands of marine origin Cobble –6 to –8 64 to 256
Pebble –2 to –6 4 to 64
(particles weathered from mollusc shells and the skele-
Granule –1 to –2 2 to 4
tons of other animals). Other materials that may con- Sand Very coarse 0 to –1 1.0 to 2.0
tribute to beach sands include heavy minerals, basalt (of Coarse 1 to 0 0.50 to 2.0
volcanic origin), and feldspar. On sand-mud and mud- Medium 2 to 1 0.25 to 0.50
flats, silts and clays of terrestrial origin and organic Fine 3 to 2 0.125 to 0.50
Very fine 4 to 3 0.0625 to 0.125
material derived from river input and from the remains
Mud Silt 8 to 4 0.0039 to 0.0625
of dead animals and plants contribute to the composition Clay >8 < 0.0039
of the sediment.

FIGURE 3.1 Classification scheme for sediment texture according to percentage composition of silt, clay, and sand. (Redrawn from
Parsons, T.R., Takashi, M., and Hargrave, B.T., Biological Oceanographic Processes, 2nd. ed., Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1977, 193.
With permission.)
Soft Shores 89

TABLE 3.2 TABLE 3.3


Measures of Sediment Parameters Settling Velocities of Sediments
1. Measures of average size Median Diameter Settling Velocity
(a) Median particle diameter (Mdφ) is the diameter corresponding to Material (µm) (m day–1)
the 50% mark on the cumulative curve (φ50).
(b) Graphic mean particle curve (φ50). Fine sand 125–250 1040
Very fine sand 62–125 301
MZ = (φ16 + φ50 + φ84)/3.
Silt 31.2 75.2
2. Measures of uniformity of sorting 15.6 18.8
(a) Phi quartile deviation (QDφ), where QDφ = (φ75 – φ25)/2 7.8 4.7
(b) Inclusive graphic standard deviation (φI), where 3.9 1.2
Clay 1.95 0.3
( φ84 – φ16 ) ( φ95 – φ5 ) 0.98 0.074
I = ------------------------------ + ---------------------------
4 6.6
0.49 0.018
3. Measures of skewness (Skqφ), where 0.25 0.004
(a) Phi quartile skewness (Skqφ), where 0.12 0.001
Skq φ = (φ25 + φ75 – 2 φ 50)/2
Source: After King, C.M., Introduction to Marine Geology
(b) Inclusive graphic skewness (Sk1), where
and Geomorphology, Edward Arnold, London, 1975, 196.
( φ16 + φ84 – φ50 ) ( φ5 + φ95 – φ50 ) With permission.
Sk 1 = ---------------------------------------------- + -------------------------------------------
( 2 ( φ84 – φ16 ) ) ( 2 ( φ95 – φ5 ) )

4. Measures of kurtosis or peakedness: The type of beach developed in any particular locality
Graphic kurtosis (Ki), where is dependent on the velocity of the water currents and the
particle sizes of the available sediments. This is due to the
φ95 – φ5
K G = -----------------------------------------
2.44 ( φ75 – φ25 )
fact that particles carried in suspension fall out when the
current velocity falls below a certain level. This relation-
ship is shown in Table 3.3. From this table it can be seen
Analysis of sediment size fractions is generally car- that sands and coarse material settle rapidly, and any sed-
ried out by passing the dried sediment through a set of iment coarser than 15 µm will settle within a tidal cycle.
sieves of varying sizes and weighing the fractions retained For finer particles, the settling velocities are much lower.
on the sieves. Following this, further graphical analysis Consequently, the waters in estuaries and enclosed inlets
is generally carried out by plotting cumulative curves on tend to be turbid as silt and clay are carried in suspension
probability paper and calculating the parameters listed in until they settle on mudflats, as they will not be deposited
Table 3.2 (Folk, 1966). An important property is the unless the water is very still.
degree to which the sediments are sorted, i.e., of uniform Thus, pebble beaches are formed only in areas of
particle size or varying mixtures of different sized parti- strong wave action, with sand beaches where wave action
cles. Unless the sands are badly skewed, median and mean is moderate, and muddy shores are characteristic of quiet
particle diameters are very similar, and for most ocean waters of semienclosed bays, deep inlets, and estuaries.
beaches are in the range of fine to coarse sand. The inclu- The relationship between current speed and the erosion,
sive graphic standard deviation is the best index of the transportation, and deposition of sediments is shown in
sorting of the sediments. Values below 0.5 indicate good Figure 3.2. From this figure it can be seen that for pebbles
sorting, values between 0.5 and 1.0 moderate sorting, and 104 µm (1 cm) in diameter, erosion of the sediments will
values above 1.0 poor sorting, with a wide range of par- take place at current speeds over 150 cm sec–1. At current
ticle sizes present. Skewness measures the asymmetry of speeds between 150 and 90 cm sec–1, the pebbles will be
the cumulative curve, and plus or minus values indicate transported by the current, while at speeds of less than 90
excess amounts of fine or coarse material, respectively. cm sec–1 they will be deposited. Similarly, for a fine sand
The inclusive graphic skewness is the best measure of of 102 µm (0.1 mm) diameter, erosion will occur at speeds
this. Values between –0.1 and +0.1 indicate near symme- greater than 30 cm sec–1 and deposition will occur at
try, values above +0.1 indicate fine skewed sediments, speeds less than 15 cm sec–1. For silts and clays, a similar
while values below –0.1 indicate coarse skewed sedi- relationship exists. However, erosion velocities are
ments. For normal curves, KG (Kurtosis) is 1.0, while affected by the degree of consolidation of the sediment,
leptokurtic curves with a wide spread have values over which is a function of its water content.
1.0, and platykurtic curves, with little spread and much Throughout the intertidal area of a beach there is a
peakedness, have values below 1.0. gradient in substratum texture of finer particles at low tidal
90 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.2 Erosion, transportation, and depositional velocities for different particle sizes. Also illustrated is the effect of the water
content of the sediment on the degree of consolidation, which in turn modifies the erosion velocities. (Redrawn from Postma, H., in
Estuaries, Lauff, G., Ed., Publication No. 83, American Association for the Advancement of Science, Washington, D.C., 1967, 158.
With permission.)

levels to coarse particles higher up the shore. Figure 3.3 that part of the total volume of transported material mov-
illustrates these processes on a sand beach at Howick in ing close to the bed, and not much above the ripple height.
the Upper Waitemata Harbour, New Zealand. It is inter- Suspended load is that part transported above the bed.
esting to note that on the Zostera (eelgrass) flat there are Movement of material up and down beaches varies
finer deposits due to the reduction of water velocity by with the nature of the waves and shore level. As waves
the leaves of the plants. approach the beach and as the water becomes shallower
and the breakpoint approached, more and more sand is
3.1.3 CURRENTS, WAVE ACTION, AND BEACH caught up and transported. Inside the breakpoint the direc-
FORMATION tion of transport depends chiefly on the slope of the waves.
Steep waves are destructive, tending to move material
Figure 3.4 is a profile of a typical sandy beach environ- seaward, while flatter waves are constructive, tending to
ment on a temperate shore. Beyond the highest point move particles up the beach. The slope of the beach face
reached by waves on spring tides is the “Dune Zone.” The depends on the interaction of the swash/backwash pro-
“Beach Zone” extends from the upper limit of the drift cesses planing it. Swash running up a beach carries sand
line to the extreme low water level. It is subdivided into with it and therefore tends to cause accretion and a steep
the “Bachshore Zone” above high water, which is covered beach face. Backwash has the opposite effect. If a beach
only on exceptional tides, and the “Foreshore Zone” consists of very coarse material such as pebbles, the
extending from low water up to the limit of high water uprunning swash tends to drain into the beach face, thus
wave swash. The “Nearshore Zone” extends from low eliminating the backwash. The sediments are thus carried
water to the deepest limit of wave erosion. It is subdivided up the beach but not back again, resulting in a steep beach
into an “Inner Turbulent Zone” covering the region of face. Fine sand and sand-mud beaches, on the other hand,
breaking waves and an “Outer Turbulent Zone.” The pro- stay waterlogged because of their low permeability, so that
file of a sand beach may exhibit structures such as “berms” each swash is flattened by a full backwash, which flattens
and “ridges.” A berm is a flat-topped terrace on the back- the beach by removing sand. Thus the beach slope is a
shore, while a ridge is a bar running along the beach near function of the relationships between particle size and
low water. Below low water the corresponding features wave action (Figure 3.5). Each grade of beach material
are a “bar” and a “trough.” has a characteristic angle of slope; a gravel or shingle
The physical feature of beaches of importance to ecol- beach has a depositional slope of about 12°, and a rubble
ogists can be found in King (1975), and McLachlan and beach may have a slope of about 20°. Fine sand and mud
Erasmus (1983). Water movement results in shear stress beaches may have a slope of under 2°.
on the sea bed. This may move sediment off the bed, Material removed from a beach is carried out to sea
whereupon it may be transported by currents and waves. in the undertow. Waves that break obliquely on the shore
Cyclic water movement leads to the formation of ripples carry material up the shore at an angle, while the back-
on the sand. Sand can be transported in two modes — as wash, with its contained sediment, runs directly down the
bed load and as suspended load. Bed load is defined as beach. This means that with each breaking wave, some
Soft Shores 91

FIGURE 3.3 Distribution of sediment particles analyzed according to the Wentworth scale for three types of beach (A, upper beach;
B, lower beach; C, Zostera flat at Howick, Upper Waitemata Harbour, North Island, New Zealand), and a tidal mudflat in Lyttleton
Harbour, South Island, New Zealand (D). In E the same information is presented as cumulative curves. (A to D redrawn from Morton,
J. and Miller, M., The New Zealand Seashore, Collins, London, 1968, 441. With permission.)

material is carried a short distance along the beach by a ments. In the intertidal this occurs by the swash flushing
process known as beach drifting. Beach material can thus unsaturated sediments and in the subtidal by wave pump-
be transported considerable distances along the shore. ing, that is, by pressure changes associated with wave
The longshore transport of sediments is assisted by crests and troughs (Riedl, 1971; Riedl et al., 1972). Most
longshore currents, which run parallel to the shore (Figure filtration occurs on the upper beach around high tide.
3.6). Such currents are found when more water is brought Water seeps out of the beach slowly by gravity drainage,
ashore than can escape in the undertow; this leads to a mostly below the mean tide level. The volume of water
piling up of water that escapes by running parallel to the filtered increases with coarser sands and steeper beaches
beach. The interaction of surface gravity waves moving (McLachlan, 1982). Tidal range also has an influence, with
toward the beach, and edge waves moving along shore, maximum filtration volumes associated with small to
produces alternating zones of high and low waves, which moderate tidal ranges.
determines the position of rip currents. The classical pat-
tern that results from this is the horizontal eddy or cell 3.1.4 EXPOSURE RATING
known as the nearshore circulation pool.
Water filtration by the sediments: Large volumes of In the literature on beach ecology, the terms “exposed”
seawater are filtered by the intertidal and subtidal sedi- and “sheltered,” or “high” and “low,” are used in a very
92 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.4 Profiles of a typical sandy beach environment, showing the areas referred to in the text. (After McLachlan, A., in Sandy
Beaches as Ecosystems, McLachlan, A. and Erasmus, T., Eds., Dr. W. Junk Publishers, The Hague, 1983, 332. With permission.)

FIGURE 3.5 The relationship between beach particle size, exposure to wave action, and beach face angle in the western U.S.A.
(Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 21. After Wiegel, 1964. With
permission.)

subjective way. To one worker, a beach may be “exposed,” of plants and animals that characterize the deposits.
while to another it may be “moderately sheltered.” Among the most important of these are the interstitial pore
McLachlan (1980a) developed a more objective exposure space, water content, mobility, and depth to which the
rating for beaches on a 20 point scale. The parameters deposits are disturbed by wave action, the salinity and
considered included wave action, surf zone width, percent temperature of the interstitial water, the oxygen content,
of very fine sand, median particle diameter, depth of the the organic content, and the depth of the reducing layer.
reduced layer, and the presence or absence of animals with
stable burrows (Table 3.4). On the basis of the total score, 3.2.1 INTERSTITIAL PORE SPACE AND WATER
beaches were rated as shown in Table 3.5.
CONTENT

3.2 THE PHYSICOCHEMICAL The interstitial water of a beach is either retained in the
interstices between the sand grains as the tide falls, or is
ENVIRONMENT
replenished from below by capillary action. The quantity
Differences in particle size and the degree of sorting result of water that is retained within the sediment is a function
in important changes in the physicochemical properties of of the available pore space, which in turn is dependent on
the sediments, which are reflected in the density and kinds the degree of packing and the degree of sorting of the
Soft Shores 93

FIGURE 3.6 Nearshore cell circulation consisting of feeder offshore currents, rip currents, and a slow mass transport returning water
to the surf zone. (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 32. After
Sheppard and Inman, 1950. With permission.)

TABLE 3.4
Rating Scheme for Assessing the Degree of Exposure of Sandy Beaches
Parameter Rating Score

1. Wave action Practically absent 0


Variable, slight to moderate, wave height seldom exceeds 1 m 1
Continuous, moderate, wave height seldom exceeds 1 m 2
Continuous, heavy, wave height mostly exceeds 1 m 3
Continuous, extreme, wave height less than 1.5 m 4
2. Surf zone width (if Very wide, waves first break on bars 0
wave score exceeds 1) Moderate, waves usually break 50 to 150 m from shore 1
Narrow, large waves break on the beach 2
3. % very fine sand 5% 0
(62 to 125 µm) 1 to 5% 1
1% 2

4. Median particle Intertidal slope:


diameter (µm) 1/10 1/10–1/15 1/15–1/25 1/25–1/50 1/50

>710 5 6 7 7 7
500–710 4 5 6 7 7
350–500 3 4 5 6 7
250–350 2 3 4 5 6
180–250 1 2 3 4 5
<180 0 0 1 2 3
5. Depth of reduced 0 to 10 0
layers (cm) 10 to 25 1
25 to 50 2
50 to 80 3
80 or more 4
6. Animals with stable Present 0
burrows Absent 1
Maximum score 20
Minimum score 0

Source: From Brown A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990,
38. With permission.
94 The Ecology of Seashores

e.g., Arenicola, it has been shown that the speed of bur-


TABLE 3.5 rowing is dependent on the water content of the sediments
Beach Types and Descriptions and their resistance to shear.
(Scores as Awarded in Table 3.4)
3.2.2 TEMPERATURE
Score Beach Type Description
The temperature within the sediments is determined by
1 to 5 Very sheltered Virtually no wave action, shallow reduced
insolation, evaporation, wind, rain, tidal inundation, and
layers, abundant macrofaunal burrows
6 to 10 Sheltered Little wave action, reduced layers present,
the amount of pore water. In general there is a gradient
usually some macrofaunal burrows across the intertidal zone with maximum and minimum
11 to 15 Exposed Moderate to heavy wave action, reduced values occurring at the high water mark and low water
layers deep, usually no macrofaunal mark, respectively. Marked vertical temperature gradients
burrows can develop in the upper 10 cm of the sediments, below
16 to 20 Very exposed Heavy wave action, no reduced layers, which the temperature is fairly uniform, approaching that
macrofauna of highly mobile forms only of the overlying seawater. The vertical gradient is much
Source: From Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, steeper in the summer than in the winter in temperate
Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 31. With permission. regions. Thus, animals living in the sediment are buffered
against the temperature extremes that can occur when the
tide is out.
sediment. In poorly sorted sediments the smaller particles
pack into the interstices between the larger particles and
thus reduce the percentage pore space. Coarse, ill-sorted
3.2.3 SALINITY
sandy beaches have a relatively low porosity (approxi- The salinity of the interstitial water of the sediments rep-
mately 20%), whereas in more sheltered localities where resents an equilibrium between the overlying seawater and
the deposits are well-sorted, the water retention may the fresh water seeping out from the land. In estuaries
approach 45%. there is a horizontal salinity gradient from low water to
The rate of replacement of water lost by evaporation high water. The nature of this gradient depends on the
from the surface of the deposits is dependent upon the pattern of estuarine circulation and salinity stratification.
diameter of the channels between the sand grains. These There may be considerable differences between the inter-
channels decrease in size with a decrease in grain size so stitial salinities and those of the overlying water (see Fig-
that capillary rise is greatest in fine deposits. Thus, on ure 3.7 for some data from the Avon-Heathcote Estuary,
beaches with fine deposits where the slope of the shore is New Zealand). It can be seen that the interstitial salinity
low and the water retention (porosity) is high, the sediment is considerably dampened when compared to that of the
is permanently damp, whereas on coarse, ill-sorted overlying water. Tube-building invertebrates that irrigate
beaches where the slope is steep and the water retention their burrows can play a significant role in maintaining
low, the sediment contains less water and dries out quickly. the interstitial water salinity and other chemical properties
Related to the above characteristic of the sediments so that it approximates that of the overlying water (Aller,
are the properties of “thixotrophy” and “dilatancy,” which 1980; Montague, 1982). Many such species cease irriga-
affect the ease with which burrowing animals can pene- tion when the salinity of the overlying water falls below
trate into the substratum (Chapman, 1949). Visitors to the a certain level.
seaside will have noticed the whitening of the sand that Interstitial salinity variations are greatest on intertidal
occurs underfoot. This is caused by water being driven flats. During exposure to air, the salinities of the surface
from the interstices by the pressure applied until the sand sediment are subject to dilution by rain and concentration
becomes hard packed and dry. This property is called by evaporation. In a two-month study (September to Octo-
dilatancy, and such sands are called dilatant. These sands ber) of salinity in a Salicornia- Spartina marsh at Mission
are difficult to penetrate because the application of pres- Bay, San Diego, California, the water retained on the
sure causes them to harden. Dilatant sands usually have a marsh had a higher salinity than that of the bay (ca. 34)
water content of less than 22% by weight. When the water for 75% of the time, exceeding 40 for 37% of the time,
content of the sand is greater than 25% the sands become exceeding 45 for 10% of the time, and had a recorded
thixotrophic, and consequently softer and easier to pene- maximum value of 50 (Bradshaw, 1968).
trate. Thixotrophic sediments become less viscous upon
agitation and show a reduction in resistance with increased 3.2.4 OXYGEN CONTENT
rate of shear in contrast to dilitant sediments, which show
an increase in resistance. The most notorious examples of The oxygen content depends to a large extent on the drain-
thixotrophic sands are quicksands, which liquify when age of water through the sediments. Porosity and drainage
pressure is applied. In experiments with burrowing worms, time increase sharply when there is 20% or more of fine
Soft Shores 95

FIGURE 3.7 Salinity of bottom water at a low tide in the upper part of the Avon-Heathcote Estuary, New Zealand. (After Voller,
R.W., Salinity, sediment, exposure and invertebrate macrofaunal distributions on the mudflats of the Avon-Heathcote estuary,
Christchurch, M.Sc. thesis, Universiry of Canterbury, Christchurch, New Zealand, 1975. With permission.)

sand in a deposit, and in a similar manner, the oxygen This detritus is derived from the variety of sources dis-
concentration in the interstitial water varies with the per- cussed in Section 3.8.2. Since organic particles are light
centage of fine sand. In general, coarse sands have more and only settle out where the water is quiet, there is an
oxygen than do fine sands and muds. In poorly drained inverse relationship between the organic content of the
mudflats there is a pronounced vertical gradient in oxygen sediment and the turbulence of the water and hence grain
concentrations, high in the oxygenated layer and decreas- size. Organic detritus tends to clog the interstices between
ing rapidly below (Bradfield, 1964). In one study the val- the sediment grains and bind them together.
ues varied from saturation at the surface (due to the pho- The sediments of mudflats that are found in sheltered
tosynthetic activities of the microalgae) to 1.4 ml O2 l–1 bays and inlets and in the quiet lateral and upper parts
at 2 cm and 0.3 ml O2 l–1 at 5 cm. of estuaries are composed of fine material (clays and
As discussed below, the vertical gradient in oxygen silts) with ample organic material. These sediments have
content is related to the amount of organic matter in the a characteristic vertical layering (Figure 3.8) in bands of
sediment and the depth of the reducing layer. Animals that color (Fenchel, 1969; Fenchel and Riedl, 1970) due to
live in the deeper layer of the sediment where oxygen the one-way supply of light and oxygen and the biolog-
levels are low must either be tolerant of anaerobic condi- ical activity of the burrowing invertebrates, the meio-
tions or must retain a connection with the oxygenated fauna, and the microflora and fauna. At the sediment
surface layers and the overlying water, and maintain a flow surface there is a layer of often semifluid yellow or brown
of water over their respiratory surfaces. Burrowing poly- (due to the presence of ferric iron) oxidized sediment
chaetes either live in U-shaped burrows through which that is readily resuspended by turbulent currents. In this
water is circulated (e.g., Arenicola) by a pumping action layer the redox potential as measured by the Eh is around
of the body, or they maintain water circulation through +400 mV close to the surface and around +200 mV
simple burrows or tubes by ciliary and/or muscular action. deeper in this layer. Below this layer is the “grey zone”
Bivalves that live in anaerobic sediments maintain a con- or redox potential discontinuity (RPD) layer, a layer
nection to the surface via their siphons and thus maintain where oxidizing processes become replaced by reducing
a circulation of oxygenated water across their gills. processes. According to Fenchel and Riedl (1970): “Food
availability higher than oxygen input sufficient for the
3.2.5 ORGANIC CONTENT oxidization of food causes anaerobic conditions; hence
the steepness and depth of the RPD layer depend basi-
Sediments are profoundly modified by the input of organic cally on the equilibrium ‘food: oxygen flow into the
detritus that becomes incorporated in the surface sedi- interstices’.” The depth of the RPD layer depends upon
ments and through the activities of burrowing inverte- the organic content and grain size composition (mean
brates if mixed to the deeper part of the sediment column. size, sorting, % clay) of the sediment; an increase in the
96 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.8 Schematic representation of Eh and pH profiles and the vertical distribution of some compounds and ions in estuarine
sediments. The fully oxidized layer is dotted. (Redrawn from Fenchel, T., Ophelia, 6, 61, 1969. With permission.)

clay fraction and the amount of organic matter sharpens The interstitial system on sand beaches is subject to
and raises the RPD layer toward the surface, while an cyclic changes related to storm/calm, tidal, diel, and sea-
increase in mean grain size and sorting causes the RPD sonal cycles. In physically dynamic beaches, this results
layer to sink deeper into the sediment. In this RPD layer, in fluctuations in the water table, pore moisture content,
oxygen, as well as reduced compounds such as hydrogen and surface temperature and it may result in sharp changes
sulfide, are present in small amounts, while the Eh in the sediment chemical gradients. During warm condi-
decreases quickly from positive to negative values. The tions, the reduced layer may rise toward the surface, while
third and deepest layer is the “black zone” or “sulfide storms or photosynthetic activity by surface diatoms can
zone.” This layer is totally anaerobic, and within it, H2S drive this layer deeper.
occurs in substantial amounts, up to 700 ml l–1 in the
interstitial water of muddy sediments, while values 3.2.6 STRATIFICATION OF THE INTERSTITIAL SYSTEM
around 300 ml l–1 are common (Fenchel and Reidl, 1970).
Considerable amounts of H2S are found as ferrous sul- Particularly on exposed beaches toward the physical
fides, giving the sediment its characteristic black color. extreme, the great vertical extent of the system and the
The sediment layers can undergo vertical migrations cor- drainage it experiences at low tide permit the subdivision
related with changes in the following parameters of the intertidal beach into layers or strata. Various
(Fenchel, 1969; Fenchel and Reidl, 1970): (1) an increase schemes have been proposed to describe this, and one such
in protection from water movement reduces permeability scheme is shown in Figure 3.9 (Salvat, 1964; Pollock and
and brings the RPD layer closer to the surface; (2) higher Hammon, 1971; McLachlan, 1980b). The layers range
temperatures bring about a higher position of the RPD from dry surface sand at the top of the shore to perma-
layer, thus giving rise to seasonal changes in its level; nently saturated sand lower down. The permanently satu-
(3) input of organic matter cause the RPD layer to rise; rated layers have little circulation and tend to become
even a circadian rhythm has been observed where sun- stagnated, while the resurgence zone has gravitational
light, due to the oxidizing activity of phototropic bacteria water drainage through it during ebb tide; the retention
and microalgae, keeps the RPD layer down during day- zone loses gravitational water but retains capillary mois-
light, but it rises toward the surface for a major part of ture at low tide; and the zones of dry sand and drying sand
the night. The biochemical processes mediated by the lose even capillary movement. The zone of retention rep-
abundant microorganisms that occur within these layers resented optimum conditions for interstitial fauna, since
are of considerable importance for the functioning of the there is a good balance between water, oxygen and food
sediment ecosystem and they will be considered in detail input, physical stability, and lack of stagnation (Brown
in Section 3.8. and McLachlan, 1990).
Soft Shores 97

FIGURE 3.9 Stratification of the interstitial system on an exposed sandy beach. (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A.,
Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 148. After Salvat (1964) and Pollock & Hummon (1971). With permission.)

3.3 SOFT SHORE TYPES Graduations between the above types also occur. Spe-
cial types of both protected sand beaches and protected
On most coasts four main types of soft shores can be mudflats occur in estuaries where wave action is slight
recognized (Figure 3.10): and the main forces shaping the beaches are tidal rise and
fall, river flow, and wind-generated turbulence. In many
1. Shingle and pebble beaches: These occur where estuaries the upper shore intertidal areas are colonized by
wave action is strong, and they are character- marsh macrophytes or mangroves (on tropical shores).
ized by their steep slope. Short and Wright (1983) and Wright and Short (1983)
2. Open sand beaches: These occur along straight- have proposed a classification of beaches into three main
ish exposed coasts as smooth beaches with types as shown in Figure 3.11, with their special features
moderately steep slopes. They are frequently listed in Table 3.6. The two extremes of this system are
backed by wind-blown dunes. Sediments are the dissipative beach/surf zone and the reflective
coarse to fine sands that are often freely dis- beach/surf zone, with a series of intermediate states. The
turbed by wave action, and the beach profile is reflective end of the scale occurs when the beach is
frequently modified by storm events. exposed to strong wave action (surging breakers) and the
3. Protected sand beaches: These occur within sediments are coarse. Shingle beaches are of this type.
bays where there is some protection from strong On such beaches all the sediment is stored on the sub-
wave action. Destructive wave action is slight, aerial beach; there is no surf zone, and waves surge
due to the low pitch of the beach and the directly up the beach face. Cusps caused by edge waves
reduced fetch and steepness of the waves. The are typical of such beaches. The beach face is character-
sediments have a large proportion of fine sand ized by a step on the lower shore and a berm above the
and very fine sand and often some of the intertidal slope.
silt/clay fraction. As larger waves cut back a beach and spread out
4. Protected mudflats: These occur at the upper sediments to form a surf zone, the reflective beach is
ends of deep inlets and harbors or on the inner replaced by a series of intermediate forms. At the dissi-
side of barrier islands. Wave action is slight, pative end of the scale, the beach is flat and maximally
enabling the deposition of fine sediments and eroded, and the sediment is stored in a board surf zone
organic matter, and consequently are character- that may have multiple bars parallel to the beach. Waves
ized by a high proportion of the silt/clay frac- on such beaches tend to be spilling, and break a long way
tion. The beach slope is gentle. from the beach, often reforming and breaking again.
98 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.10 A. The four main types of soft shore. B. Beach profiles of the four types.

Between the two extremes, four intermediate states zones are reflective. This is the condition of many North
(Table 3.7) can be recognized. Intermediate beaches are European and British beaches.
characterized by high temporal variability, sand storage
both on the beach and in the surf zone, and bars and
troughs in a surf zone, usually supporting well-developed 3.4 ESTUARIES
rip currents. Reflective beaches usually occur where waves 3.4.1 WHAT IS AN ESTUARY?
exceed 2 m and sands are finer than 200 µm, whereas
reflective beaches are found where waves are less than Estuaries constitute the transition zone between the fresh-
0.5 m and sands are coarser than 400 µm. Short and water and marine environments. As such they have some
Wright (1984) have shown that the morphodynamic state characteristics of both environments, but they also have
of a beach can be described by the parameter Hb/W · T, unique properties of their own. Estuaries have been the
where Hb is the breaker height, T the wave period, and preferred sites of human settlement, and many of the
W the fall velocity (Stokes law) of the sand. This generally world’s major cities are situated on estuaries. From a purely
resolves into a scale of 1 to 6, which agrees closely with anthropomorphic point of view, estuaries have multiple
the six states from reflective to dissipative. Swart (1983) values. Their values lie in the biological resources of fish
has demonstrated that this correlates well with breaker and shellfish, which are of prime economic importance;
types (Figure 3.12); spilling breakers being characteristic their function as a fundamental link in the development of
of dissipative beaches, plunging waves of most interme- many species of fish and crustaceans (including economi-
diate beaches, and surging breakers of reflective beaches. cally important species such as flatfish, mullet, and
On fine-grained, macrotidal beaches, the lower tidal zones prawns), and in the migration of important species such as
are often flat and highly dissipative, while the high tidal salmon; their provision of feeding and breeding sites and
Soft Shores 99

FIGURE 3.11 The three major morphodynamic states of beaches and surf zones. (After Jones, A.R and Short, A.D., Coastal Marine
Ecology of Temperate Australia, University of New South Wales Press, Sydney. 1995, 139 and 140; and Short, A.D. and Wright,
I.D., Sandy Beaches as Ecosystems, Mclachlan, A. and Erasmus, T., Dr. W. Junk Publishers, The Hague, 1983, 135. With permission.)

stopover points on migration routes for many species of The term estuary is derived from the Latin aestuar-
ducks, geese, swans, and a great variety of wading birds; ium, meaning “tidal inlet of the sea.” Aestuarium in turn,
their mineral resources of sand, gravel, and sometimes oil; is derived from the term aestus, meaning “tidal.” There
their provision of harbors and transportation routes for are many definitions of an estuary that have been used in
commerce; their provision of locations for housing and the literature reflecting the particular scientific discipline
industrial plants; the recreational opportunities they pro- of the proposer, whether physical or chemical oceanog-
vide for hunting, fishing, boating, swimming, and aesthetic rapher, geologist, geomorphologist, or biologist. At the
enjoyment; and the opportunities they provide for educa- First International Conference on Estuaries held in Geor-
tion and scientific research (Allen, 1964). However, estu- gia in 1964, a confusing array of definitions was proposed.
aries not only have multipurpose values, they are extremely There was wide agreement that variable salinity is an
vulnerable to impact from human activities. essential feature of all estuarine systems, and the defini-
100 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.6
General Features of Different Beach Types
Modal Beach Type
Dissipative Intermediate Reflective

Energy source Infragravity standing waves Gravity and infragravity Gravity and edge waves
and bores waves, rips
Morphology Flat, with multiple bars Variable bars Deep water inshore
Slope 0.01 0.10–0.20 0.10–0.20
Sand storage Stores in surf zone Shifts between Stores on
Width of the surf 300–500 100–200 None
zone (m)
Dunes Usually large Intermediate Usually small
Filtered volumea Small Intermediate Large
Residence timea About 24 h 6 to 24 h About 6 h
Surf circulation Vertical bores on surface, Horizontal cells No surf zone. Minicirculation
undertow below within cusps
Surf zone diatoms Rich Variable None
Intertidal fauna Rich Variable Poor
a Filtered volume is the volume of seawater flushed daily through the intertidal sand; residence time is the time it takes
to percolate.

Source: After Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 31. With permission.

TABLE 3.7
Major Features of the Intermediate Beach Types
Beach Type and Width of Intertidal Beach Subtidal Rip Beach
Beach Morphology Surf Zone (m) Slope (m) Trough Bar Current Cusps3

(a) Longshore bar-trough ca. 200 0.05–0.20 Deep Straight or Weak +


crescentic
(b) Rhythmic bar and beach 150–200 0.05–0.10 Variable Crescentic Medium +
(c) Transverse1 bar and rip 150–200 0.05 — Transverse Strong +
(d) Edge-runnel2 100–150 0.01 — Terrance Weak +

Key: 1 — transverse = bar perpendicular to beach; 2 — runnel = small, shallow and narrow trough; and 3 — cusp =
regular crescentic sand formation in beach.

Source: After Short, A.D. and Wright, L.D., in Coastal Geomorphology in Australia, Thom, G.B., Ed., Acadenic Press,
Sydney, 1984. With permission.

tion proposed by Pritchard (1967a) was generally those concerned with estuarine ecology and dynamic func-
accepted. According to Pritchard, “an estuary is a semi- tioning of such systems, or to the diversity of environ-
enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connec- ments that are involved. Consequently, Day et al. (1987)
tion with the sea and within which seawater is measurably proposed the following functional definition:
diluted with freshwater derived from land drainage.”
However, as Day (1980; 1981b) points out, such a defi- An estuarine system is a coastal indentation that has a
nition excludes saline lakes with a salinity composition restricted connection to the ocean and remains open at
different than that of the sea, as well as marine inlets and least intermittently. The estuarine system can be subdi-
vided into three regions:
lagoons without freshwater inflow, and inlets on arid
coasts whose salinity is the same as that of the seas. (a) A tidal river zone, a fluvial zone characterized by lack
Fjords, which exhibit many of the characteristics of estu- of ocean salinity but subject to tidal rise and fall.
aries, are also excluded. (b) A mixing zone (the estuary proper) characterized by
However, the existing definitions are, as Day et al. water mass mixing and existence of strong gradients
(1980; 1987) point out, neither satisfying nor useful to of physical, chemical, and biotic quantities reaching
Soft Shores 101

FIGURE 3.12 Correlation between beach states and breaker types. (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of
Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 30. After Schwart, 1983. With permission.)

from the tidal river zone to the seaward location of a and it is this combination of characteristics that makes
river-mouth bar or ebb-tidal delta. them unique. Above all, it is the fluctuating salinity that
(c) A nearshore turbid zone in the open ocean between gives rise to their unique biological characteristics.
the mixing zone and the seaward edge of the tidal Research over the past few decades has led to the devel-
plume at full ebb tide.
opment of a number of generalizations concerning their
structure and function. These are discussed below.
This definition differs from other proposed definitions 1. Circulation patterns and salinity distributions:
in that it recognizes and includes a nearshore component Among the most distinctive characteristics of estuaries are
that is estuarine in character. As such the definition applies their circulation patterns and salinity distributions (Dyer,
to what can be considered as typical estuaries with all 1973). The particular patterns of water movement that
three zones present. However, as Day et al. point out, all occur within estuaries are the result of the combined influ-
three zones may not be present. For example, lagoons in ences of freshwater inflow, density distributions, wind,
arid regions with a small tidal range may not have a tidal waves, and tidal action. This results in patterns that vary
river zone and they may also lack a nearshore zone if the from stratified two-layered systems, characteristic of
freshwater input is nonexistent. If the river discharge is drowned river valleys and fjords, to well-mixed vertically
large, e.g., the Amazon, the mixing zone may be absent, homogeneous systems characteristic of shallow estuaries
with the mixing taking place in the nearshore zone. The constantly well mixed by waves and tides. Circulation
three zones are not static in any given system but are patterns are important since they transport nutrients, dis-
dynamic, with their positions changing on a variety of tribute plankton and larval stages of fish and invertebrates,
time scales from a tidal cycle to annual cycles to geolog- control salinity patterns, transport sediments, mix water
ical time scale. masses, dilute pollutants, and generally do useful work
(Carricker, 1967).
3.4.2 SPECIAL FEATURES OF ESTUARINE ECOSYSTEMS
2. Sediment distributions: Estuarine sediments have
The salient feature of estuarine ecosystems is that they are their own characteristics and complexity. In general, there
highly productive; in fact they have been considered to be is an upstream-downstream gradient from fine muddy sed-
among the most productive ecosystems of the world iments to sand, due to the interplay of different physical
(Scheleske and Odum, 1961; Knox, 1986a). This arises factors. In addition there is a gradient in substratum par-
from the unique set of geomorphological, physical, chem- ticle size across the intertidal areas from finer particles at
ical, and biological factors that are characteristic of such low tidal levels to coarser particles at high tidal level. The
systems. While no two estuaries are identical, they never- nature of the sediment is profoundly modified by the activ-
theless share a number of essential features in common, ity of burrowing invertebrates, especially the deposit feed-
102 The Ecology of Seashores

ers, as well as by the deposition of fecal pellets and tinuous source of large quantities of organic detritus (Teal,
pseudo-feces from deposit and suspension feeders, and 1962; Darnell, 1967b; Fenchel, 1970). In addition there is
the input of organic matter from inflowing rivers and from also a considerable input of detritus from the inflowing
marsh plants that line the margins and submerged macro- rivers, especially during storm events (Naimen and Sibert,
phytes. They are also the sites of intense microbial activity 1978). Nevertheless, the grazing food web based on phy-
which decomposes the complex organic detritus derived toplankton plays an important role in many estuaries, with
from plants and animals and makes available nutrients the phytoplankton being consumed by filter feeders such
such as ammonium nitrate and phosphate. as bivalve molluscs, zooplankton, and small planktivorous
3. Estuarine productivity: As mentioned above, estu- fish. In addition, the epiphytic microalgae are eaten by
aries are among the most productive ecosystems in the crustacean and fish grazers, and the benthic microalgae
world. Primary production in estuaries is complex, are consumed by deposit-feeding invertebrates, fishes such
involving various combinations of the following groups as mullets, and the sediment micro- and meiofauna. How-
of plants: ever, a substantial proportion of the microalgal production
is not consumed and is added to the detrital pool. The
a. Macrophytes (sea grasses, sedges, cordgrasses, detritus becomes colonized by bacteria, fungi, and other
mangroves, etc.) microorganisms (Fenchel, 1970). The detrital particles and
b. Epiphytic microalgae their associated microorganisms provide a basic food
c. Epiphytic macroalgae source for primary consumers such as zooplankton, most
d. Benthic microalgae (diatoms, flagellates, blue- benthic invertebrates, and some fishes.
green algae) Estuaries can range from those in which phytoplank-
e. Benthic macroalgae ton dominates as the principal primary producer to those
f. Phytoplankton in which macrophytes (marsh grasses or mangroves) dom-
inate, with every possible gradation in between. Many of
While no single study has simultaneously measured the estuarine consumers are selective or indiscriminate
all these components of organic matter production, their feeders on particles in suspension in the water column or
relative importance in different estuarine ecosystems is in the sediments they ingest. Thus, most of the biota of
reasonably well known. Many of the components are estuaries are best described as particle producers (microal-
highly dynamic and productive, e.g., a dense sea grass gae and organic particles derived primarily from plant
meadow may have more than 4,000 plants m–2, and have production) and particle consumers (Correll, 1978), and it
a standing stock of 1 to 2 kg dry wgt m–2. Reported is difficult to relate these to the traditional primary pro-
productivity of the sea grasses alone ranges from at least ducer-primary consumer categories. The first trophic level
5 to 15 g C m–2 day–1, and when other associated primary in the estuarine ecosystem is therefore best described as a
producers such as the epiphytes are taken into account, mixed trophic level, which in varying degrees is composed
the daily production can be well over 20 g C m–2 day–1 of herbivores, omnivores, and primary carnivores.
(McRoy and McMillan, 1977). 5. Factors that determine the specific nature of estu-
Westlake (1963) reviewed plant productivity on a glo- aries and estuarine productivity: The following features
bal scale and concluded that when agricultural systems are important in this context:
were excluded, tropical rainforests appeared to be the most
productive (5 to 8 kg m–2 organic dry wgt year–1), while a. Protection from oceanic forces: The degree to
salt marshes, reed swamps, and submerged macrophytes which they are protected and hence buffered
were the next most productive (in the ranges of 2.9 to 7.5 from direct oceanic forces.
kg m–2 year–1). Mean net primary production for estuaries b. Freshwater inflow: The amount of freshwater
as a whole is about 2 kg m–2 year–1; this compares with inflow, together with the input of nutrients and
0.75 for the total land and 0.1555 for the total ocean organic matter, both dissolved and particulate,
(Ryther, 1969; Mann, 1972a). plays an important role in the dynamics of estu-
4. Estuarine food webs and energy flow: The trophic arine ecosystems. It also plays a major role in
dynamics of estuaries are complex. As we have seen, the nutrient trap effect detailed below.
estuaries differ from the open ocean, which has phy- c. Water circulation patterns and tidal mixing:
toplankton as the sole producer in that there are always Water circulation patterns are determined by
several different primary producers present (see 3 above). riverine and tidal currents, density distributions,
Direct grazing by herbivores in general consumes only a and geomorphology. The rise and fall of the tide
very small proportion of the macrophyte and macroalgal is important in promoting the mixing of nutri-
production. The great bulk of the organic matter produced ent-rich water from the bottom (Mann, 1982).
(something over 90%) is processed through the detrital When the volume of the tidal exchange is large
food web. Annual plant growth and decay provides a con- compared with river input, vertical salinity gra-
Soft Shores 103

FIGURE 3.13 Schematic diagram of the nutrient conserving and modulating processes in estuaries, including the two-layered salt
wedge, plankton circulation pattern, sediment trap, the tidal marsh, vascular plant “nutrient pump,” and sediment-water nutrient
exchange.

dients may be broken down so that the salinity marshes also tend to trap particulate nitrogen
is uniform from top to bottom. The most notable and phosphorus and microbial action converts
salinity gradient, then, is that from the river to them into orthophosphate, ammonia, and dis-
the open sea. The sharpness of this gradient has solved organic phosphorus and nitrogen, which
a profound impact on water circulation and on are then exported back to the open waters of
many biological properties. Under such condi- the estuary (Axelrod et al., 1976).
tions, nutrients regenerated at the surface of the f. Sediment trapping: Rivers deliver to estuaries
sediments are rapidly carried to the surface large quantities of particulate mineral matter
where they become available to the phytoplank- derived from land erosion, e.g., the Rhode River
ton, e.g., in Narragansett Bay, Rhode Island estuary, U.S.A., receives about 1.2 t ha–1 of
(Kremer and Nixon, 1978). estuary per year from land runoff (Correll et al.,
d. The depth of the estuary: When estuaries are 1976). As detailed in Section 3.5, the fine par-
shallow the interaction between the water col- ticulate matter in suspension in river water floc-
umn and the bottom is strong. This allows nutri- culates and is deposited in a portion of the
ents released from the bottom to be rapidly estuary known as the sediment trap (Figure
mixed through the water column and made 3.13). In the Rhode River estuary, Correll
available to the phytoplankton. (1978) found that sediments were deposited in
e. Tidal marsh nutrient modulation: At times when this zone at an average rate of about 11 t ha–1
nutrients are high in the upper estuary surface year–1. These deposited sediments are rich in
waters, they tend to be taken up rapidly by the nutrients and organic matter depending on tidal
tidal marshes, mudflats, and bottom sediments level support large populations of sea grasses
(Correll et al., 1975). Conversely, at times of and marsh plants.
low nutrient concentrations in the surface g. Vascular plant “nutrient pump”: Eelgrasses
waters, a net release of nutrients occurs (Gar- and marsh plants have the capability to act as
dener, 1975). From a study of nutrient fluxes “nutrient pumps” between the surface waters
across the sediment-water interface in the turbid and the bottom sediments. On the one hand,
area of the Patuxent Estuary in Chesapeake Bay, they take up nutrients from the sediments, and
Boynton et al. (1980) concluded that: on the other, lose them to the water via death
and decomposition, leaching from the leavers
In general it appears that nutrient fluxes across the and perhaps by direct excretion.
sediment water interface represent an important h. Rate of geomorphological change: The rate of
source to the water column in summer when photo-
geomorphological change as determined by the
synthesis demand is high and water column stocks
various physical energies that move sediments
are low and, conversely, serve as a sink in winter
when demand is low and water column stocks are is important in determining the nature of the
high, thereby serving as a “buffering” function physical and biological characteristics of an
between supply and demand. estuary. Present-day estuaries were formed dur-
ing the last interglacial stage as sea level rose
Overall, in the long term, the reservoir of nutri- 120 m from 15,000 years ago up to the present
ents in the sediments remain relatively constant; level, which was reached approximately 5,000
in the short term, however, they act as nutrient years ago. Any future changes in sea level as a
filters or modulators (Axelrod et al., 1976). The consequence of global warming will have a
104 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.14 Diagrams illustrating the main types of estuarine circulation as seen in longitudinal section. A. Salt wedge estuary,
salt water is stippled. B. Partially mixed estuary; salt and fresh water partially mixed by tidal movements and internal waves. C.
Vertically homogeneous estuary isohalines for salinity are shown. D. Fjord; saline water is trapped by a sill. (From Knox, G.A.,
Estuarine Ecosystems: A Systems Approach, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida, 1986a, 31. With permission.)

major impact on the morphology of the present groups (Dyer, 1973): (1) coastal plain estuaries; (2)
estuaries. Much will depend on the future rates lagoons (or bar-built estuaries); (3) fjords; and (4) tecton-
of sedimentation resulting in the infilling of the ically produced estuaries. The distinction between lagoons
estuaries. According to the scheme of Davies and bar-built estuaries is not clear-cut. True lagoons have
(1973) there is a continuum of estuarine types. limited freshwater input compared with typical bar-built
At one end of the spectrum there are lagoons, estuaries (Figure 3.14).
which are produced by marine (wave action),
while at the opposite end there are deltas, which 3.4.3.1 Coastal Plain Estuaries (Drowned River
are produced by river processes rather than by Valleys)
marine activities. The intermediate types are
produced largely as a function of the interaction These are estuaries formed during the Flandarian Trans-
between wave energy and sediment transport gression, which ended about 3,000 B.C. In such estuaries
by the rivers entering the system. sedimentation has not kept pace with inundation and their
topography remains similar to that of river valleys. Sedi-
ments grade from silty muds at the top to coarse sands at
3.4.3 ESTUARINE GEOMORPHOLOGY
the mouth. Such estuaries are usually restricted to, and are
There are various classification of estuaries based on common in temperate latitudes. Examples of this type are
parameters such as topography, salinity structure, patterns the Thames and Mersey in the U.K., the Chesapeake Bay
of stratification, and circulation. From a geomorphological system in the eastern U.S., the Knysna in South Africa,
point of view, estuaries can be divided into four main and the Fitzroy River in Western Australia. In many of
Soft Shores 105

these estuaries the tidal range may be considerably less 3.4.3.5 Fjords
than half the mean depth, with a residence time of the water
flowing into the estuary of only several days. Such estuaries Fjords occur in regions that were covered by Pleistocene
are commonly either partially mixed or highly stratified. ice sheets, which deepened and widened existing river
valleys to a typical U-shape, leaving rock bars or sills of
3.4.3.2 Coastal Plain Salt Marsh Estuaries glacial deposits at their mouths. They normally have rocky
floors with a thin covering of sediments. Fjords are com-
Day et al. (1987) recognize another type of coastal plain mon in Norway, British Columbia, the Fjordland region
estuary, the salt marsh estuary or the salt marsh creek. of the South Island of New Zealand, and southern Chile.
These are commonly found along much of the U.S. east In regions of high rainfall such as the New Zealand Fjord-
coast, particularly from Cape Fear, North Carolina, to land region, the waters are highly stratified with a layer
Cape Canaveral, Florida. They also occur on other tem- of freshwater on the surface.
perate-tropical shores. They are characterized by the lack
of a major river inflow, but have a well-defined tidal drain- 3.4.3.6 Estuaries Produced by Tectonic
age network dendritically intersecting the extensive Processes
coastal salt marshes. Water and material exchange
between the salt marsh system and adjacent waters This is a catchall classification for estuaries that do not fit
through narrow tidal inlets. The estuary proper consists of into the above categories. Coastal indentations formed by
the drainage channels, which typically occupy less than faulting or by land subsidence, such as San Francisco Bay,
20% of the system area. are included in this category.

3.4.3.3 Lagoon Type Bar-Built Estuaries 3.4.4 ESTUARINE CIRCULATION AND SALINITY
PATTERNS (FIGURE 3.14)
These are usually shallow estuarine basins separated from
the sea by barrier sand islands and sand spits, broken by 3.4.4.1 Circulation Patterns
one or more inlets. In such estuaries recent sedimentation
has kept pace with inundation, and they usually have a Circulation patterns in estuaries are complex due to the
characteristic bar across the mouth. They are often shallow, intermixing of fresh and salt water, the configuration of
only a few meters deep, and have extensive shallow water- the estuarine basin (extent, depth, and size of opening to
ways inside the mouth. Such estuaries are especially com- the ocean), and the amount of tidal rise and fall. As river
mon in tropical regions, or in areas where there is active water is less dense than seawater, it tends to flow seaward
coastal deposition of sediments. Classic examples of such as a surface current, while the seawater tends to flow up-
estuaries are the extensive network of marine bays in Texas estuary as a bottom current. Depending on the degree of
and the Gippsland Lakes in Victoria, Australia. Other exam- mixing between the two layers, the seawater forms a salt
ples are many estuaries along the east coast of the U.S. and wedge extending toward the head of the estuary. As the
the Avon-Heathcote Estuary discussed in Section 6.3.2. tide rises and falls, the salt wedge advances and retreats
(Figure 3.14A) The volume of water between the high and
3.4.3.4 Lagoons low water levels is known as the tidal prism and as it
increases in volume from neap to spring tides, so does the
The distinction between lagoons and bar-built estuaries is velocity of the tidal currents.
not clear-cut. True lagoons have limited freshwater input Generally there is some degree of eddy diffusion and
compared with typical bar-built estuaries. True lagoons turbulent mixing at the interface between the surface layer
are common on all continents. The physical characteristics of freshwater and the seawater of the salt wedge. Depend-
and dynamics of the extensive system of lagoons along ing on the degree of mixing, the water column may
the Gulf of Mexico have been described by Hedgpeth become vertically stratified. This can vary from a gradual
(1967) and Langford (1976). Other studies of lagoons are increase in salinity with depth, to a situation where the
those of the Coorang Lagoon in South Australia (Noye, salinity becomes homogenous from the surface to the bot-
1973), the lagoons on the southeastern Australian coast tom if there is a high degree of turbulent mixing (as may
(Kench, 1999), and the St. Lucia Lagoon in South Africa occur in a shallow estuary due to wind and waves).
(Day, 1981c). Lagoons characteristically have large Estuarine circulation patterns affect or control many
expanses of open water and are uniformly shallow, often of the ecological processes within estuaries. An important
less than 2 m deep over large expanses. The physical characteristic is the residence time of a given parcel of
processes of lagoons are mostly wind dominated. They water in the estuary, which is a function of the circulation
are usually oriented parallel to the coast in contrast to pattern. Circulation patterns and residence time control
coastal plain estuaries, which are usually oriented normal the fluxes of dissolved constituents such as nutrients, dis-
to the coast (Fairbridge, 1980). solved organic matter, pollutants and salts, as well as of
106 The Ecology of Seashores

particulate material such as sediment, detritus, and plank- ples of this type of estuary are the James
ton. Three main driving forces of the circulation patterns River in the U.S.A., the Mersey and the
are: (1) gravitational circulation; (2) tidal currents; and (3) Thames in the U.K., and the Hawkesbury
wind-driven circulation (Day et al., 1987). River in Australia.
c. Vertically homogeneous estuaries: In these
3.4.4.2 Classification of Circulation and Salinity estuaries (Figure 3.14C), the salinity
Patterns decreases from the mouth toward the head
without pronounced vertical gradients in
A classification of estuaries based on current systems and salinity. This is the result of intense turbulent
salinity distributions has been developed by Pritchard mixing and is characteristic of shallow estu-
(1967b). aries with a large tidal range where the ratio
of tidal inflow to river flow is on the order
1. Positive or Normal Estuaries of 10:1. Estuaries of this type are the Solway
a. Salt wedge estuaries: These are character- Firth in the U.K. and Netarts Bay and Coos
ized by a dominant freshwater inflow, a Bay, Oregon, U.S.
small tidal range, and a large depth-to-width 2. Hypersaline or Negative Estuaries
ratio (Figure 3.14A). The salt wedge pene- Such estuaries have a reversed or negative
trates up the estuary depending on river flow salinity gradient where the salinity increases
and the state of the tide. Saltwater mixes into from seawater values at the mouth to hypersa-
the outward flowing freshwater, but the mix- line in the upper reaches where the water level
ture of freshwater downward into the salt- is below sea level, so that the net flow is land-
water is minimal. The degree of mixing is ward. These estuaries are found in regions sub-
largely dependent on the on the volume of ject to periodic drought. A classic example of
freshwater inflow. A layer of mixed water of a hypersaline estuary is the Lagoon Madre in
varying depth develops between the fresh- Texas as described by Hedgpeth (1967).
water and the seawater with marked halo- 3. Periodically Closed Estuaries
clines between them. Such estuaries are These are coastal water bodies referred to by
often referred to a highly stratified estuaries. Day (1951) as blind estuaries and termed estu-
The estuary of the Mississippi River and arine lagoons by Jennings and Bird (1967). The
some fjords are of this type. timing and period of their opening to the sea
b. Partially mixed estuaries: These are estuar- may vary considerably. They may be closed for
ies in which there are varying degrees of periods of a year or more or they may be open
mixing between the outward-flowing surface to the sea at frequent intervals. When they are
freshwater and the inward-flowing bottom closed there is no tidal rise and fall and no tidal
seawater so that the distinct boundaries that currents. According to the ratio of freshwater
occur in salt wedge estuaries do not occur inflow plus precipitation and seepage through
(Figure 3.14B). Turbulent mixing between the bar separating the estuary from the sea, the
the two layers is enhanced by a number of salinity may vary considerably (Day, 1981b).
factors: it increases (a) when the ratio There are many such estuaries in southern
between tidal inflow and freshwater outflow Africa such as the Umgababa estuary, in West-
approaches 1:1, (b) when there are irregular- ern Australia, and other arid coasts.
ities in the channel bed, and (c) in shallow
estuaries where the volume of the tidal prism 3.4.5 ESTUARINE SEDIMENTS
is large compared with the total volume of
the estuary basin. The velocity of the upper, Aspects of the characteristics of soft bottom sediments
freshwater layer is greatest at the surface and have already been dealt with in Section 3.1.2. Here we
decreases with depth until the interface with will relate these to estuarine sediments in particular. In
the bottom saltwater layer is reached when terms of sedimentation, estuaries are very complex envi-
the velocity is zero. In contrast, the velocity ronments. One principal reason for this is that the sedi-
of the lower layer increases below this inter- ments can arise from a number of sources; these include
face until it is retarded by friction with the sediments of terrestrial origin transported by rivers (flu-
bottom. The salinity of the upper layer vial sediments) and sediments from the sea (marine sed-
increases down-estuary while the salinity of iments). On high energy coasts where littoral drift is
the lower layer decreases up-estuary until strong, a flood-tide delta of marine sand may largely
the tip of the salt wedge is reached. Exam- occlude an inlet, and if the tides have a high amplitude,
Soft Shores 107

the marine sand is carried rapidly to the head of the such mixing is enhanced by the activities of bioturbating
estuary. Conversely on low energy coasts where littoral macroinvertebrates. The photic zone within the sediments
drift is minimal, little marine sand enters the estuary. The decreases with depth and is deeper on beaches with coarse
estuary basin may remain deep, or if the drainage basin sediment particles, but normally does not exceed 5 mm.
of the estuary is prone to erosion and the estuary is river The surface area of the sand grains with decreasing particle
dominated, the estuary may become largely filled by size provides increased area for the attachment of the
fluvial sediments. These are the extreme cases and gen- microflora, but also decreased pore space.
erally there is an upstream-downstream gradient of fine Some species such as the pennate diatom Hantzchia
silts and clays of mainly fluvial origin, to medium or undergo rhythmic vertical migrations associated with tidal
coarse sands of marine origin at the mouth (J.H. Day, and light cycles. On sheltered sand beaches in Massachu-
1981b). The sedimentological properties of estuaries setts, during daytime low tides, the cells move to the
have been reviewed by Postma (1967), Dyer (1973), and surface of the sand, returning to the subsurface interstitial
J.H. Day (1981b). spaces before the incoming tide reaches them.
For cohesive suspended particles, mainly in the clay There have only been a limited number of estimates
(<2 µm) and colloidal ranges, their behavior is modified of microfloral densities and production in beach sands,
by processes causing coagulation or flocculation. Silt and but values are known to reach 103 cells cm–3 under optimal
clay particles bear negative charges due to the adsorption conditions (Brown and McLachan, 1990).
of anions, particularly OH–, cation substitution in the crys-
tal lattice, and broken bonds at the edge of the particles 3.5.1.2 Mudflats and Estuaries
(Neihof and Loeb, 1972). These negative charges are bal-
anced by a double layer of hydrated cations. The thickness Sandy-mud and mud shores harbor a more diverse assem-
of this double layer depends mainly on the ionic concen- blage of pennate diatoms, blue-green algae, and flagellates
tration of the water in which the particles are suspended. (Fenchel, 1978; Admiraal, 1984). In the salt marshes of
River water usually has a low electrolyte content and the Georgia the benthic microflora includes a species-rich
charges on suspended particles repel each other. Estuarine assemblage of pennate diatoms that comprise 75 to 93%
water on the other hand, has a high electrolyte content so of the total microalgal biomass (Williams, 1962). Williams
that the repulsive charges diminish and when the particles found that on average 90% of the cells belonged to four
collide they unite to form a large spongy network or floc- genera: Cylindrotheca, Gyrosigma, Navicula, and Nitzs-
cule. The flocculation of silt particles, most types of chia. Filamentous blue-green algae (Anabaena oscillari-
humus, and the clay minerals illite and koalinite mainly oides, Micocoleus lyngbyaceous, and Schizothrix calicola)
occurs at salinities of 1 to 4. Flocculation starts at the head and a single species of Euglena constitute most of the
of the estuary and as the floccules grow they drift down- microalgal community.
stream with the water becoming increasingly turbid. In On an intertidal mudflat in the Avon-Heathcote Estu-
many estuaries this produces a so-called “turbidity maxi- ary, New Zealand, McClatchie et al. (1982) identified 64
mum.” The presence and magnitude of this turbidity max- diatom species. The dominant genera were Nitzschia (11
imum is controlled by a number of factors, including the species), Navicula (10 species), Acanthes (6 species), and
amount of suspended material in the water, the estuarine Amphira (4 species). The number of diatom taxa found
circulation pattern, and the settling velocity of the avail- were comparable with the range found in North American
able material (Postma, 1967). It moves downstream with estuaries. Sullivan (1975) found between 57 and 62 spe-
high river flow and upstream with low river flow. High cies in edaphic communities associated with vegetated
turbidity cuts down light penetration and consequently areas in a Delaware salt marsh, whereas a bare beach
influences primary production. lacking macroscopic vegetation supported only 43 spe-
cies, and a salt pan only 30 species.
The large nonflagellated euglenoid Euglena obtusa
3.5 SOFT SHORE PRIMARY PRODUCERS is a cosmopolitan component of estuarine and mudflat
microalgal assemblages, being abundant in fine muds and
3.5.1 THE MICROFLORA especially in areas of high organic and nutrient inputs
3.5.1.1 Sand Beaches (Steffensen,1969). Palmer and Round (1965) in a study
in the Avon River estuary, England, found that E. obtusa
The benthic microflora of beach sands includes bacteria, had a pattern of migration in the muddy sediment, mov-
blue-green algae, autotrophic flagellates, and diatoms. ing down 2 mm prior to being covered by the tide, or in
These may be attached to sand grains (episammon), or response to reduced light. Some diatoms’ vertical migra-
they may be free living in the interstices between the sand tions appear to have the characteristics of an endogenous
grains. On beaches with vigorous wave action, living dia- circadian rhythm (Palmer and Round, 1965; Brown et
toms may be mixed to considerable depths in the sediment; al., 1972).
108 The Ecology of Seashores

3.5.1.3 Benthic Microalgal Biomass and Biomass — Joint (1978) investigated microalgal pro-
Production duction on a mudflat in the River Lynher estuary, Corn-
wall, England. The seasonal cycle of chlorophyll a content
Biomass is generally estimated by determining the chlo- of the surface sediment is shown in Figure 3.15. The
rophyll a content of a measured volume or weight of increase in chlorophyll a in April coincided with an
sediment. There are difficulties with chlorophyll determi- increased rate of photosynthesis. The increase in the stand-
nations as the sediments contain high concentrations of ing stock of the chlorophyll a between March and April
chlorophyll degredation products. There are also many was 39 g–1 dry sediment, equivalent to an increase in
technical problems that are encountered in estimating pro- biomass of 12.5 g C m–2, if a carbon to chlorophyll a ratio
duction of benthic microalgae. This stems from the char- of 50 is assumed; the calculated photosynthetic production
acteristics of the environment in which they live. Pomeroy for the same period was 20 g C m–2. There was a decrease
et al. (1981) describe it in the following terms: in the chlorophyll a content of the surface sediment during
May, but this increased again in July. The decrease in the
The microalgae live in and on the top few millimeters of chlorophyll a content was assumed to be due to bioturba-
sediment, a habitat whose microenvironment is very dif- tion by benthic invertebrates and consumption by het-
ficult to describe. The interface represents a boundary
erotrophs as they were at a maximum at this time. This
between a dark, nutrient-rich, anaerobic sediment and
was supported by studies of depth profiles of chlorophyll
either an illuminated, aerobic, comparatively nutrient-
poor water column or, at ebb tide, the atmosphere. This a and phaeopigments; while the maximum chlorophyll a
microenvironment is extremely patchy and is subject to values were in the top 2 cm, appreciable levels were
rapid and extreme variation, being directly affected by recorded down to 14+ cm and larger quantities of phae-
many factors. It is influenced by variatons in tidal expo- opigments were found at the same depth.
sure, sedimentation, higher plant cover, and surface and Underwood and Paterson (1993) recently investigated
subsurface herbivores and detritivores. These factors in seasonal changes in benthic microalgal biomass in the Sev-
turn affect light intensity, temperature, pH, salinity, levels ern Estuary, England. Chlorophyll a concentrations at three
of organic and inorganic nutrients, intensity of grazing, sites along a gradient of decreasing salinity varied both
and the stability of the sediment surface. The habitat of spatially and seasonally. There were significantly higher
epibenthic algae is virtually impossible to define or repro-
concentrations of chlorophyll a at the upper shore stations
duce adequately; thus when attempting to measure the
than the lower ones. Chlorophyll a concentrations also
performance of the algae in their native habitat, we must
maintain the integrity of the natural relationships of the varied seasonally, and were generally higher in the warmer
surface layer of the sediment. months, being positively correlated with temperature.

FIGURE 3.15 Seasonal cycle of (a) chlorophyll a, (b) carbon content, (c) number of aerobic heterotrophs, and (d) nitrogen content
in the top 5 cm of the sediments in the River Lynher estuary, England. Vertical bars are two standard errors. (Redrawn from Joint,
I.R., Est. Coastal Mar. Sci., 7, 190, 1978. With permission.)
Soft Shores 109

TABLE 3.8
Benthic Microalgal Chlorophyll a Levels Measured in a Range of Estuaries
Chlorophyll a
Locality (mg ch a m–2) Biomass Reference

Upper Waitemata Harbour, Auckland 0.6–6.7 0.072–8.04 Briggs (1982); Knox (1983a)
Avon-Heathcote Estuary, Christchurch 9.3–109.8 1.12–13.8 Juniper (1982)
Delaware Inlet, Nelson 12.5–30.5 1.5–3.66 Juniper (1982)
Nanaimo River Estuary, British Columbia 2.6–10.6 0.32–1.27 Naimen and Sibert (1978)
Netarts Bay, Oregon Means Davis and McIntire (1983)
Sand 46.2 —
Fine sand 74.7
Silt 93.7 —

Note: Most of the available data for other estuaries is expressed in terms of g chlorophyll a g–1 (dry sediment)
and thus are not easily translated into mg ch a m–2. Chlorophyll a values have been converted into biomass
estimates assuming a carbon:chlorophyll a ratio of 120:1.

However, increases in biomass also occurred during the trophic status of the three systems: Delaware Inlet (range
autumn and winter months when temperatures were low. 0.6 to 30.5) is oligotrophic, the upper Waitemata Harbour
A number of estimates of benthic microalgal chloro- (range 0.6 to 67) is mesotrophic, whereas the Avon-
phyll a levels are listed in Table 3.8. A wide range of Heathcote Estuary (range 9.3 to 109.8) is eutrophic.
values have been recorded dependent upon tidal level, Mean concentrations of chlorophyll a in the top cm of
season, geographic locality, and type of beach (sheltered sediment in the entire study period were 46.2 mg m–2
bay or inlet, estuary, or lagoon). For the New Zealand (sand site), 749 mg m–2 (fine sand site), and 93.7 mg m–2
estuaries, the ranges differ but are in accord with the (silt site). Other studies have reported increases in chlo-

TABLE 3.9
Estimates of Benthic Microalgal Primary Production from a Range of Soft Shores
Production
(g C m–2 yr–1) Chlorophyll Primary Production Rates
Estuary Method Range:Mean (mg m–2) (g C m–2 yr–1) References

Ythan Estuary, Scotland 14


C 116 25–34 µg g–1 4–26: 10 Leach (1970)c
sediment
South New England, USA 14C 81 100 8–31: 20 Marshall et al. (1971)c
Falmouth Bay, USA 14C 106 n.d. 5–80 van Raalte et al. (1976)c
Wadden Sea, The Netherlands 14C 60–140 40–400: 100 50–1100 Cadee and Hegemann (1974)c
Balgzand, Wadden Sea 14C 29–188: 85 3–13 µg g–1 0–900 mg C m–2 day–1 Cadee and Hegemann (1977)
sediment
River Lynher Estuary, England 14
C 143 30–80 µg g–1 5–115 Joint (1978)
Ems-Dollard Estuary, 14
C 62–276 33–184 1–120: 37 Colijn and De Jonge (1983)
The Netherlands
Ems-Dollard Estuary, O2 69–314 n.d. 0–1900 mg C m–2 day–1 van Es (1977)c
The Netherlands
False Bay, USA O2 143–226 30–70 µg g–1 0–100 Pamatmat (1968)c
Georgia salt marches, USA O2 200 n.d. 5–140 Pomeroy (1959)c
Bay of Fundy, Canada O2 47–83 10–500 47–83 Hargrave et al. (1983)c
North Inlet, SC, USA O 93 60–120 72–180 Pinckney and Zingmark
(1991)
Oosterschelde, The Netherlands 14
Ca 105–210 99–212 <1024b Neinhuis et al. (1985)
a Based on annual regression of chlorophyll to 14C-production as described by Colijn and De Jonge (1984).
b Taken from oxygen microelectrode measurements.
c References in Colijn and De Jonge (1984).
110 The Ecology of Seashores

rophyll a concentrations with increasing silt/clay content 3.5.1.4 Factors Regulating Benthic
of the sediment (Leach, 1970; Coles, 1979; Colijn and Microalgal Distribution, Abundance,
Dijkema, 1981). and Production
Production — Some estimates of benthic microalgal
production are given in Table 3.9. In the Sapelo Island Environmental factors: The are many potential factors
marshes, Pomeroy (1959) estimated gross microalgal pro- limiting the standing crop and production of benthic
duction at 200 g C m–2 and net production at not less than microalgae. Some of these such as sediment type, inter-
90% of this value. Gallagher and Daiber (1974) estimated tidal height, and seasonal changes in light intensity have
gross production for a Delaware salt marsh at 80 g C m–2, been dealt with in Section 3.5. In all investigations to date,
which was about one third of the net angiosperm above- production of benthic microalgae occurred predominately
ground production in that particular marsh. Van Raalte et when the sediments were exposed to the air with low
al. (1976) found that brief spring and autumn (fall) peaks values when the sediments were submerged. The tidal
in microalgal primary productivity coincided with blooms regime may also affect productivity indirectly through its
of filamentous green algae. Algal poduction was estimated influence on other parameters, including salinity, pH, tem-
at 106 g C m–2, or about 25% of the aboveground macro- perature, light intensity, and nutrients.
phyte production for the marsh. The salinity of the surface sediment in estuaries varies
In Netarts Bay, Oregon, Davis and McIntire (1983) from that of the overlying water at flood tide, to increasing
found that the maximum hourly rate of microalgal pro- salinity following evaporation, or decreasing salinity fol-
duction occurred when Enteromorpha prolifera sporlings lowing high rainfall at low ride. In the River Lynher Estu-
were abundant in the sediment. They found that a fine ary, England, Joint (1981) recorded salinity changes
sand site had the highest mean hourly rates of gross pri- greater than 20% over a tidal cycle. However, estuarine
mary production (47 mg C m–2 hr–1), followed by a sand benthic diatoms appear to be particularly tolerant of such
site (37 mg C m–2 hr–1), and a silt site (25 mg C m–2 hr–1). salinity changes (McIntire and Reimer, 1974). Fourteen
More recent estimates of benthic microalgal production at species of diatoms isolated from the Sapelo Island
Sapelo Island (Pomeroy et al., 1981) gave a value ot 190 marshes grew well in salinities of 10 to 30, and several
g C m–2, which was close to Pomeroy’s (1959) estimate. grew well over a range of 1 to 68 (Williams, 1964).
More than 75% of this microalgal production occurs when In the Sapelo Island marshes, the pH of the marsh
the sediment is exposed at ebb tide and at this time the surface sediments was found to be between 7 and 8, but
bare creek bank was the most productive. Conversely, it during low tide it was found that algal photosynthesis
is least productive when submerged on the flood tide. In could increase it to 9 (Pomeroy, 1959). It is possible that
the River Lynher Estuary, England, Joint (1978) found that inadequate supplies of CO2 and HCO3 could limit photo-
the rate of photosynthesis decreases rapidly as the mudflat synthesis under such conditions (Pomeroy et al., 1981).
was submerged and was not detectable only 30 minutes Seasonal variations in temperature do not appear to
after flooding. have a marked effect on microalgal photosynthesis and
Pickney and Zingmark (1993a,b) measured benthic production. Pomeroy (1959) and Van Raalte et al. (1976)
microalgal production over a period from April to October noted that photosynthesis rates were independent of tem-
in the North Inlet Estuary, South Carolina, in five different perature at suboptimal temperatures. Temperature can also
habitat types. The average annual production (in g C m–2 indirectly affect benthic microalgal production and biom-
yr–1) was highest in the short Spartina habitats (234.2), ass by influencing the activity of grazers.
followed by intertidal mudflat (190.9), tall Spartina (97.9), Benthic microalgae growing in estuarine intertidal
sand flat (92.8), and subtidal (55.9) habitats. There was a sediments are exposed to considerable variations in light
unimodal peak in biomass during the winter–early spring intensity. However, they are much less sensitive to high
period. Productivity was found to vary according to the light intensities and have the capacity to photosynthesize
tidal stage and the time of day which is related to the at lower light intensities than phytoplankton. Taylor
vertical migration of the microalgae within the sediments (1964) found very little photoinhibition at “full sunlight”
(Brown et al., 1972; Gallagher and Daiber, 1974, Pickney in experiments with diatoms from a Massachusetts inter-
and Zingmark, 1991). tidal sand flat, and that the photosynthesis was saturated
From the data in Table 3.9 it can be seen that there is at about 16% full sunlight. Cells receiving only 1% inci-
a general trend of increasing production in warmer waters, dent solar radiation were able to fix carbon at 35% of their
e.g., mean production was 31 g C m–2 in the Ythan Estuary, maximum rate. These results have been confirmed by
Scotland, 99 in the North Wadden Sea, and 143 in the other studies (Williams, 1964; Cadee and Hedgemann,
River Lynher Estuary. Values recorded in the New Zealand 1974; Colijn and van Buurt, 1975). Thus it is clear that
estuaries are comparable to those recorded in southern estuarine benthic microalgae are adapted to photosynthe-
U.S. estuaries. size at very low light intensities.
Soft Shores 111

Limitation by nutrients has been investigated in a or kept in the laboratory. Microalgal colonization in the
number of studies. Van Raalte et al. (1976) found that field was rapid, with chlorophyll a levels returning to
nutrient enrichment in a vegetated portion of a Massachu- control levels by day 10, while infaunal densities returned
setts salt marsh stimulated the productivity of the benthic to control levels within 40 days. Removal of the infauna
microalgae. One problem with experiments such as this in the laboratory, primarily tanaids, increased benthic
is that fertilization increases the growth of vascular plants microalgal growth. After 40 days, chlorophyll a was four
and thus reduces the light intensity reaching the sediment times greater and gross primary production two times
surface. Darley et al. (1981) incubated Sapalo Island fer- greater in the defaunated sediment than in the controls.
tilized sediment cores in the field and found that in cores These and other experiments have demonstrated that nat-
from the short Spartina marsh the algal standing crop and ural densities of infauna as well as epifauna can control
productivity both increased. However, on bare creek both microalgal biomass and production.
banks, similar experiments indicated that the benthic
microalgae were limited by the grazing activities of snails 3.5.1.5 A Model of Estuarine Benthic
and fiddler crabs. Microalgal Production
Biotic factors: From a number of studies it is clear
that the species composition of the benthic microalgal Figure 3.16 is a simplified model illustrating the forcing
community plays an important role in determining the functions and environmental variables that influence estu-
overall primary productivity. In an Oregon marsh the pres- arine microalgal biomass and production. The photosyn-
ence of sporelings of the green alga, Enteromotpha pro- thetically available radiation (PAR) at any point in time
lifera, increased production rates (Davis and McIntire, or position on the shore is determined by a complex of
1983). In the Delaware Inlet, New Zealand, Gillespie and factors including intertidal height, depth in the sediment,
MacKenzie (1981) found that the highest rates of benthic sediment type (fine or coarse), wave action, season (day
microalgal 14CO2 fixation occurred at sandy sites colo- length), and latitude (affecting the angle of incidence of
nized primarily by the flagellate, Euglena obtusa, some- the sun).
times with occasional blooms of the blue-green alga, Net production (Pn) is determined by the interaction
Oscillatoria ornata. Rates of fixation at these sites were of PAR, the physiological state of the algae, including the
generally 10 to 20 times greater than at sites inhabited by degree to which they are shade adapted, temperature,
other microalgal populations. The highest rate of fixation salinity, and the availability of nutrients (nitrogen, phos-
observed (216 mg C m–2 hr–1) occurred under bloom con- phorus, and silicate). The benthic microalgae (diatoms,
ditions of Euglena. Rates observed at other sites ranged flagellates, and seasonally in some estuaries the sporelings
from 1 to 5 mg C m–2 hr–1. of macroalgae, especially Ulva and Enteromorpha) are
Many infaunal and epifaunal deposit feeders ingest subject to grazing by sediment protozoa, meiofauna,
and assimilate benthic microalgae (Fenchel and Kofoed, infaunal deposit feeders, and epifuanal deposit feeders
1976; Levinton, 1980; Juniper, 1982). Experimental (especially gastropods).
manipulations of the populations of the estuarine gastro-
pods Hydrobia spp. (Fenchel and Kofoed, 1976; Levinton, 3.5.1.6 Surf-Zone Phytoplankton
1980), Nassarius obsoletus (Wetzel, 1977; Pace et al.,
1979), Benbicium auratum (Branch and Branch, 1980), Many exposed beaches are characterized by persistently
Illyanassa obsoleta (Levinton and Bianka, 1981; Connor dense populations of phytoplankton species, clearly visi-
and Edgar, 1982; Edwards and Welsh, 1982), and Amphib- ble as patches of colored water. The species concerned are
ola crenata (Juniper, 1981; 1982; McClatchie et al., 1982) diatoms and collectively they are known as “surf-zone
have demonstrated significant impacts on benthic microal- diatoms.” When present they develop dense localized
gal populations. The roles of these snails are discussed in accumulations known as cell patches, which are clearly
Section 7.3.5. In an experiment on estuarine sand flats of visible as dark brown stains composed of large numbers
the Wash, England, Coles (1979) killed populations of of cells floating on the surface where they are maintained
invertebrates (especially those of the amphipod, Coroph- by relatively stable foam. They have been recorded from
ium) and found that this was followed by a dramatic explo- most continents, and are characteristic of beaches with
sion of diatom numbers, which reached an average of 95 broard dissipative surf zones exposed to strong wave
× 104 cm–2 within a week compared to only 5 × 104 cell action. Thus they are typical of extensive beaches, not
cm–2 on the surrounding sand flats. being found along short stretches of sandy coastline or
Davis and Lee (1983) carried out a series of experi- pocket beaches.
ments in Yaquina Bay, Oregon, to determine the rates of Apart from the study by Cassie and Cassie (1968) on
recolonization of benthic microalgae and the effects of the the primary productivity of Chaetoceros armatum and Aste-
infauna on microalgal biomass and production. Estuarine rionella glacialis (= japonica) on the west coast of the
sediments were defaunated and transplanted in the field North Island, New Zealand, little attention was paid to the
112 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.16 An energy flow model of the interstitial system.

study of surf-zone diatoms until the late 1970s with the 1983), and Anaulus australis (McLachlan and
initiation of extensive studies along the Washington coast Lewin, 1981).
(Oregon, U.S.A.) (reviewed by Lewin and Schaefer, 1983). 2. Superimposed on the regular periodicity of
Other comprehensive investigations have been concen- appearance-disappearance is a mesoscale vari-
trated on South African beaches (McLachlan and Lewin, ability comprising a sequence of presence-
1981; Campbell and Bate, 1987; 1988; Talbot and Bate, absence over a scale of days, or even weeks
1986; 1987a,b; 1988,a,b,c,d; 1989). Talbot et al. (1989) (Talbot and Bate, 1988c).
have recently reviewed the ecology of surf-zone diatoms. 3. The third temporal feature is seasonality, e.g.,
Species diversity: The dominant taxonomic feature of Gianucia (1983) in southern Brazil found that
surf-zone diatoms is their low species diversity; all blooms of Asterionella glacialis increased from
reported occurrences of large accumulations of the diatoms late summer, throughout autumn and winter and
involve a single, or at the most two species. Six species tended to disappear in spring.
have been reported belonging to four genera: Anaulus, 4. A change in species composition has also been
Asterionella, Aulacodiscus, and Chaetoceros. At Sundays reported, both for the Washington and South
River Beach, South Africa, Campbell (1987) showed that African coasts.
within the surf-zone Anaulus australis made up 96.8% of
the phytoplankton numbers in the surface layer. The From numerous observations Talbot and Bate (1988a)
remainder of the species assemblage consisted of Asteri- have proposed the following model of patch formation
onella glacialis (1.3%), Navicula spp. (0.7%), and Aula- and decay. Coupled with a pattern of vertical migration
codiscus johnstoni (0.3%), with the bulk of the remaining between sand and foam, there are diel changes in cell
0.9% comprising species of Campylosira, Hemicaulis, division and the production of a mucous coat. In the early
Leptocylindricus, Nitzschia, and Rhizosolenia. morning, cells begin to divide. At this time they lose their
Frequency of patch occurrence: Cell patches are not mucous sheath. The loss of mucous (by an unknown pro-
a permanent feature of the surf zone and four major tem- cess) causes the cells to be released from the sediment by
poral features in their occurrence can be identified (Talbot the scouring action of the waves. The cells then enter the
and Bate, 1988b): water column and briefly become planktonic by attach-
ment to air bubbles that have been produced by wave
1. A diel periodicity, whereby cell patches form action. Cells then concentrate at the air-water interface
in the morning and are rare at dusk before dis- and complete the process of division (Figure 3.18). By the
appearing by nightfall (Figure 3.17). This pat- late afternoon, the recently divided cells once again
tern has been reported for Chaetoceros develop the mucous sheath, which provides them with an
armatum, Asterionella socialis (Lewin and active surface and enables them to switch their attention
Rao, 1975), Aulacodiscus kittonii (Kindley, from air bubbles to sand grains. Thus the diatom popula-
Soft Shores 113

FIGURE 3.17 Stylized diagram illustrating the diel changes in cell characteristics of numerous surf-zone species. Data compiled
from Lewin and Hruby (1973), Lewin and Rao (1975), and Talbot and Bate (1986; 1988c). (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and
McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 160. With permission.)

FIGURE 3.18 Model of diel patch formation and decay. (Redrawn from Talbot, M.M.B, Bate, G.C., and Campbell, E.E., Oceanogr.
Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev., 28, 163, 1989. With permission.)
114 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.19 Model of environmental requirements of surf-zone diatom accumulations. (Redrawn from Talbot, M.M.B., Bate, G.C.,
and Campbell, E.E., Oceangr. Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev., 28, 168, 1989. With permission.)

tion becomes nocturnally episammic until cell division is However, the bulk of the diatom population
again initiated early in the day. remains buried in the sediment with only a por-
Hypotheses concerning geographical distribution: tion of it entering the water column each day.
Why do some beaches support surf-zone diatoms and 2. An onshore/offshore migration, diatoms rising
others do not? In reviewing the work of the 1970s, Lewin toward the surface during the day and being
and Schaefer (1983) listed beach topography, wind, nutri- advected shoreward by wave bores. In the after-
ent supply, and rainfall as important determinants. Other noon, when the cells start sinking out of the
factors postulated as a result of subsequent research are foam, they may be transported beyond the surf-
the requirement for beach of a certain minimum length zone by rip currents and be deposited on the
(Garner and Lewin, 1981; Campbell and Bate, 1988), and seabed outside the breaker zone. Here they
a rip-current system related to the surf circulation (Talbot become available for entry into the surface
and Bate, 1988a). Several investigators have suggested a water the next morning if they are stirred into
direct wind influence on patch dynamics (Talbot and the water column.
Bate, 1988b). 3. The involvement of a storm/calm cycle of
Talbot et al. (1989) have proposed the model of envi- events that is irregular and largely predictable.
ronmental requirements for the development of surf-zone Increased wave action during storms causes
diatoms depicted in Figure 3.19. Active areas occur, at greater disturbance and turnover of the sedi-
least within the Southern Hemisphere, strictly between the ments in which the bulk of the diatoms reside.
latitudes 29°S and 34°S. This implies some overriding Consequently the richest diatom accumulations
climatic requirement. They propose that the meteorolog- occur during and immediately following condi-
ical requirement is for periodic high wave energy, which tions of high wave energy.
accompanies the passage of atmospheric disturbances, or
east-moving low pressure cyclonic systems that develop Spatial features in relation to rip currents: Long-
in the circumpolar westerlies of the Southern Ocean. shore concentrations of diatoms occur at certain points
Within the active areas, beach aspect relative to the direc- along the shore, often adjacent to rip currents (McLachlan
tion of the wave approach and the sediment particle size and Lewin, 1981). The opposing forces of incoming waves
if conducive, will result in beach morphodynamics that and outgoing rips create a bottle neck, or eddy effect,
range from transverse bar and rip to incipiently dissipative. where the diatom foam accumulates. In Angola Bay, South
Within this given morphodynamic state, two more impor- Africa, Talbot and Bate (1987b) found that at low tide
tant requirements are an ample supply of freshwater run- 94% of the 176 cell patches studies were found within a
off (enhanced nutrient supply), and an uninterrupted beach few meters of a rip current. In fully dissipative beaches
length of more than 10 km with some headland by which without rip currents, such cell patches are not as discrete.
the cells are trapped on a large scale and not swept away
from the area. 3.5.1.7 Epiphytic Microalgae
Brown and McLachlan (1990) have suggested that
three cycles can explain the dynamics of surf-zone patch Distribution Patterns — Epiphytic microalgae grow on
formation and decay: hard substrates (rocks, piles and other structures, and mol-
lusc shells), on the stems and leaves of marsh plants, the
1. The diurnal vertical movement between the leaves of sea grasses, the prop roots of mangroves, and on
foam during the day and the sediment at night. the fronds of macroalgae. The great diversity of sea grass
Soft Shores 115

species, morphology, and habitats in particular provide a total estuary, contributed 13 g C m–2 yr–1 (8.5% of the
substrate for the growth of a rich epiphytic community total estuarine primary production). In Flax Pond, New
(Adams, 1976a; Stoner, 1980; Jernakoff et al., 1996). Such York, Woodwell et al. (1979) recorded an epiphytic pro-
epiphytic communities comprise small macroalgae, duction which, averaged over the total area, gave a value
microalgae, bacteria, protozoa, and meiofauna, and they are of 20 g C m–2 yr–1 (3.7% of the total annual primary
variously referred to as epiphytic, periphyton, or aufwuch production). It is thus clear that epiphytes can contribute
associations or communities. Typically they contribute 10 one-fifth to one-third of the total estuarine community
to 50% of the combined sea grass-epiphyte production and primary production.
standing crop (e.g., Penhale, 1977). The epiphytes can be
closely connected to the sea grasses so that they exchange 3.5.2 ESTUARINE PHYTOPLANKTON
both nutrients and carbon (McRoy and Goering, 1974; Pen-
3.5.2.1 Introduction
hale and Smith, 1977). However, it has been demonstrated
by a number of investigators that dense epiphytic coloniza- Organisms in the plankton are generally assigned to three
tion can reduce the light available to the sea grass leaves compartmental groups: bacterioplankton, phytoplankton,
(Brix and Lyngby, 1985), and can directly inhibit the satu- and zooplankton. These groups are further subdivided into
rated photosynthetic response to light by up to 25% or more trophic levels on the basis of taxonomic categories well
(Sand-Jensen, 1975; Penhale and Smith, 1977). above the species level. Unfortunately this results in the
The epiphytic flora can be extremely diverse and can grouping together of organisms with different modes of
include as many as 100 species of microalgae and small nutrition, e.g., nonphotosynthetic flagellates are grouped
macroalgae. The bulk of the flora, however, is dominated together with algae and are considered to be phytoplank-
by a few species. McRoy and Helferich (1977) found that ton. In contrast, other protozoan groups, such as the cili-
the diatom, Isthmia nervosa, on the leaves of Zostera in ates and sarcodinians, are assigned to the zooplankton as
Alaska could contribute as much as 50% of the total leaf microzooplankton. In order to overcome these and other
plus epiphyte dry weight. Kita and Harada (1962) compared problems, Siebruth et al. (1978) proposed a scheme (Fig-
the composition of phytoplankton in a Zostera bed near ure 3.20) based on the level of organization (ultrastructure)
Seto, Japan, with the microalgae on the blades of the plants. and mode of nutrition.
They found that the two populations were distinct with very The heterotrophic organisms fall into five major cat-
little overlap. The overwhelming majority of the epiphytes egories: viroplankton, (viruses), bacterioplankton (free-
were diatoms, generally Cocconeis scutellum and Nitzchia living bacteria), mycoplankton (fungi), protozooplankton
longissima. The standing crop increased toward the tip of (apochlorite flagellates, amoeboid forms, and ciliates), and
the blade, averaging 0.1 mg dry wgt cm–2. In a study in the metazooplankton (the multicellular ingesting forms).
Yaquina Estuary, Oregon, Main and McIntire (1974) iden- The metazooplankton span the size range from the
tified 221 diatom taxa on the blades of Zostera marina. mesoplankton through the macroplankton to the mega-
Primary Production — Epiphytic algal production plankton. The mesoplankton consist mainly of copepods,
has been measured by a number of investigators who have while the macrozooplankton comprises mainly the larger
shown that it can be significant when compared with that crustacea such as mysids and euphausiids. Juvenile stages
of the host plant and the total ecosystem. Marshall (1970) of the latter, however, fall within the mesoplankton size
estimated the epiphytic algal productivity to be 20 g C range. The megazooplankton comprise the larger drifting
m–2 yr–1. In a detailed study of the epiphytes of the sea forms such as the coelenterates and appendicularians.
grass Thalassia in Florida, Jones (1968) found consider- The protozooplankton, mycoplankton, and the phy-
able seasonal variation in epiphytic productivity; peak toplankton are unicellular eucaryotes and fall into three size
rates occurred in February and March, and July to Octo- groupings: picoplankton (<2.0 µm), nanoplankton (2.0 to
ber, with very low and sometimes indictable rates of net 20 µm), and microplankton (20 to 200 µm). The bacteri-
production in the intervening months. He estimated the oplankton compartment consists of unattached unicellular
net epiphytic production in the summer to be 0.9 g C m–2 bacteria: these can be selectively filtered with 0.1 to
day–1 and 0.2 g C m–2 day–1 in the winter. The total 1.0-µm, porosity filters. In the scheme depicted in Figure
production of the epiphytes was estimated at 200 g C m–2 3.20 the heterotrophic components of the plankton have
yr–1; this value was 20% of the estimated net production been redefined into more discrete taxonomic groupings and
of the Thalassia bed of the area. Thayer et al. (1975) in an expanded range of redefined size groups. The size
showed that a Zostera marina bed in North Carolina pro- groupings are indicative of the growth and metabolic rates
duced on average 350 g C m–2 yr–1, while the associated of the organisms involved, generally a function of size
epiphytic algae (both microalgae and fine macroalgae (Sheldon et al., 1972). Figure 3.20 shows that there is little
contributed a further 300 g C m–2 yr–1. In Beaufort, North overlap between the size categories and compartmental
Carolina, Penhale and Smith (1977) measured epiphytic groups of plankton organisms, apart from the phytoplank-
production at 73 g C m–2 yr–1 which, averaged over the ton and protozooplankton, which occupy the same size
116 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.20 Distribution of different taxononic-trophic compartments of plankton in a spectrum of size fractions, in comparison
with a size range of nekton. (Redrawn from Siebruth, J. McN., Smetacek, V., and Lenza, J., Limnol. Oceanogr., 23, 1259, 1978. With
permission.)

categories. However, they are distinguished by the presence 3.5.2.2 Composition of the Phytoplankton
or absence of chlorophyll, although it has now been shown
Generally the dominant species groups are diatoms and
that many chlorophyll-containing flagellates and ciliates
dinoflagellates, while other important groups include
are mixotrophic, being capable of ingesting phytoplankton.
cryptophytes, chlorophytes (green microalgae), and chrys-
In this section we will be concerned with the phy-
ophytes (blue-green microalgae). Mention has already
toplankton component; the bacterioplankton will be con-
been made of the separation of the phytoplankton into net-
sidered in Section 3.8.4 while the zooplankton will be
or microphytoplankton, nanophytoplankton, and pico-
dealt with in Section 3.6.1. The contribution of phy-
phytoplankton (Table 3.10). The nanophytoplankton are
toplankton to the overall production of coastal waters and
numerically dominant in most estuaries, although the
estuaries in particular is dependent on a number of factors
major part of the biomass consists of net-phytoplankton.
of which salinity, temperature, availability of light (as
influenced by turbidity) and nutrients, and the configura- 3.5.2.3 Distribution and Seasonal Variation in
tion of the estuarine basin are important. In estuaries that
Species Composition
drain on the ebb tide to a system of low tide channels with
large areas of exposed mud and sand flats, the phytoplank- Due to the fluctuating temperatures and salinities that are
ton make a much smaller contribution than in deep-water found in estuaries, the phytoplankton tends to be both
estuaries in which the exposed mud and sand flats form a euryhaline and eurythermal. The phytoplankton of the
small percentage of the total area. lower reaches are generally dominated by diatoms, and
Soft Shores 117

motile they require turbulent mixing to remain suspended


TABLE 3.10 in the water (Smayada, 1983). As the diatom blooms
Composition of the Macrobial Community by decline the cells tend to sink to the bottom (often en
Size Class masse) (Smetacek, 1981). In some shallow estuarine sys-
tems, such as the Dutch Wadden Sea, blooms of diatoms
Size Class Heterotrophs Autotrophs and dinoflagellates alternate throughout the year, with the
Picoplankton Bacteria Cyanobacteria peaks of both groups occurring between April and Sep-
0.2–2.0 µm Microflagellates Chemolithotrophic bacteria tember (Cadee, 1986).
Eucaryote microalgae The relative importance of the net phytoplankton and
Nanoplankton Microflagellates Phytoflagellates the nanophytoplankton varies greatly depending on the
2–20 µm Naked ciliates Nonflagellate microalgae environmental conditions; competition for nutrients
Smaller diatoms appears to determine the species succession. Nanophy-
Microplankton Naked ciliates Larger diatoms toplankton, principally small flagellates and dinoflagel-
29–200 µm Tintinnids Larger dinoflagellates
lates, may play an important role particularly in the upper
Larger dinoflagellates
part of estuaries.
Amoeboid protozoa
Rotifers
Other metazoa 3.5.2.4 Biomass and Production

Measurements of the biomass and production of estuarine


dinoflagellates are less abundant, although they may be phytoplankton are necessary in order to understand the
important at certain seasons. Small nanoflagellates are contribution that phytoplankton makes to the total primary
usually abundant in the upper reaches. Neritic species productivity of the estuarine ecosystem, their role in estu-
from adjacent coastal waters penetrate varying distances arine food webs, and their contribution to the POM and
onto the estuary depending on their euryhalinity and the DOM pools.
number of neretic species is further reduced up an estuary. Biomass: Early estimates of standing crop were made
In the upper reaches, the phytoplankton community may by counting phytoplankton (principally diatom) cell num-
include characteristic estuarine species not normally bers. However, this does not take into account the contri-
found in the adjacent neritic waters or in the freshwaters bution made by the nano- and picophytoplankton. Esti-
of the rivers. Few freshwater species can tolerate even mates of phytoplankton standing crop are now generally
very low salinities, and consequently die as they are car- made from chlorophyll a concentrations. The values vary
ried by river flows into the higher salinities of the estuary. widely from below 0.5 mg ch a m–3 to as high as 100 mg
An example of the changes that occur in the phy- ch a m–3. There are wide variations in individual estuaries
toplankton species composition while moving from the in such estimates depending on the season. In addition
lower to higher salinities along the estuarine axis is there are geographic variations with the levels tending to
depicted in Figure 3.21 for the Palmico River estuary, be lower in estuaries at higher latitudes.
North Carolina, U.S.A. (Kuenzler et al., 1979). It can be Primary productivity: The absolute fixation rate of
seen that dinoflagellates dominate the samples from the inorganic carbon into organic molecules is the gross pri-
low salinity areas in the upper and middle estuary, with mary production (Pg). When corrected for the respiration
diatoms being of secondary importance. In the lower, of the autotrophs (R), Pg reduces to primary net produc-
higher salinity reaches of the estuary, diatoms and tivity (Pn):
dinoflagellates are of about equal importance, with the
former dominating in the winter and spring, and the latter Pg – R = Pn
becoming more abundant during the summer. This latter
trend appears to be common in many temperate estuaries, A major complication is that the microheterotrophs
including the lower Chesapeake Bay (Patten et al. 1963), coexist with and share the same size range as the autotro-
Long Island Sound (Riley and Conover, 1967), the lower phs, and in attempting to measure biomass or metabolism
Hudson River (Malone, 1977), and Doboy Sound, Georgia of one it is extremely difficult to discriminate the biomass
(Ragotzkie, 1959). These distribution patterns may reflect or metabolism of the other (Li, 1986). If the respiration
changes in temperature, insolation, water column stability, of all heterotrophs (both macroscopic and microscopic) is
nutrient availability, and the adaptations of the species to subtracted from Pn the residual is termed net community
exploit the changing conditions. Summer species production Pc.
(dinoflagellates) are known to have higher light optima Estimates of primary production are dependent on the
and shorter generation times than winter forms (diatoms), measurement techniques employed (Eppley, 1980; Peter-
which have lower light optima, longer generation times, son, 1980). The method most commonly used is the 14C
and a greater capacity for energy storage, but being non- uptake method of Steeman-Nielsen (1952). While there has
118 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.21 Seasonal changes in the total net phytoplankton abundance (as cell volumes) from the upper to the lower estuary
(salinity range given) in the Pamlico River estuary, North Carolina. Total cell volume (uppermost line in each panel) is given as a
logarithm, while relative fraction of total comprised by each taxonomic group is depicted as an arithmetic percent of the total. A.
Upper estuary, salinity range 0–8; B. Middle estuary, 6–12; C. Lower estuary, 10–16. (Redrawn from Kuenzler, E.J., Staley, P.W.,
and Koenings, J.P., Water Resources Institute, Raleigh, NC, Report No. UNC-WRRI-79-139, 1979. With permission.)

been much debate as to exactly what is measured by this zero to 4.8 g C m–2 day –1. The average for all the systems
method (Dring and Jewson, 1979), it is currently the only is about 0.70 g C m–2 day–1 (256 g C m–2 yr–1), a value
technique sensitive enough to measure the low rates of substantially higher than the 100 g C m–2 yr–1 reported by
production that are frequently encountered. However, the Ryther (1963) for coastal areas and is of the same order
results of 14C experiments are often difficult to interpret as Ryther’s value of 300 g C m–2 yr–1 estimated for
and a number of workers consider that the method in gen- upwelling areas. In high latitudes, light intensity may be
eral underestimates primary production (see Gieskes et al., critical while in tropical areas other factors such as sea-
1979). Bearing this in mind the production values that have sonal nutrient or salinity fluctuations may be more impor-
been determined by this method will be discussed. tant. Furnas et al. (1976) found that the annual carbon
Estimates of gross and net primary phytoplankton pro- production in temperate Naragansett Bay, U.S.A., was 308
duction from various estuaries are given in Table 3.11, g C m–2 of which 42% occurred in July and August. In
while the mean daily rates of primary production for the Sapelo Island marshes (Pomeroy et al., 1981), inves-
selected estuarine ecosystems from a range of geographic tigators found that the highest photosynthetic rates for
localities are shown in Figure 3.22. Rates range from near
Soft Shores 119

TABLE 3.11
Estimates of Gross and Net Phytoplankton Production from Various Estuaries
Production
(g C m–2 year–1)
Location Gross Net Reference

Narragansett Bay — 300 Furnas et al. (1976)


Duplin River, Georgia 248 — Ragotzkie (1959)
Beaufort Channel, North Carolina 255 — Williams & Murdock (1966)
Bogue Sound, Newport, North Carolina 100 — Williams (1966)
Cove Sound, North Carolina — 67 Thayer (1971)
North Inlet, South Carolina — 346 Sellner & Zingmark (1976)
Doboy Sound-Duplin River, Georgia — 375 Pomeroy et al. (1981)
Barataria Bay, Louisiana 598 412 Day et al. (1973)
San Francisco Bay, California — 5–318 Cole & Cloern (1988)
Nanaimo River estuary, British Columbia — 7.5 Naimen & Siebert (1979)
Langebaan Lagoon, South Africa — 56–314 Christie (1981)
Fala Lagoon, Natal — 2.8–65.7 Oliff (1976)
Cocjin Backwater, India 14–575.4 — Quasim (1970)
Bristol Channel, England — 7–165 Joint & Pomeroy (1981)
Westerchelde, The Netherlands — 122–212 Van Spaendonk et al. (1993)
Oosterschelde, The Netherlands — 301–382 Wetsteyn & Kromkamp (1994)
River Lynher estuary, England — 81.7 Joint (1978)
Sydney Harbour, Australia — 11–127 Relevante & Gillmartin (1978)
Upper Waitemata Harbour, New Zealand 200 140 Briggs (1982)

phytoplankton occurred in the water over the marsh on ever, considerably modified by other factors such as peri-
high spring tides. In this study the annual production in odicity in river flows and turbidity patterns.
the Duplin River and the adjacent Doboy Sound, Sapelo Of prime importance to photosynthesis is the amount
Island, was estimated to be 375 g C m–2 yr–1. of photosynthetically available radiation (PAR), or the
light in the range of wavelengths from 400 to 700 nm,
3.5.2.5 Factors Regulating Estuarine Primary which can be utilized by chlorophyll-bearing algae. Light
Production is reflected, absorbed, and refracted by dissolved and sus-
pended particles in the water. The extent to which light is
Numerous factors regulate the magnitude, seasonal pat- attenuated at a given depth is determined by the clarity of
tern, and species composition of phytoplankton photosyn- the water. Estuaries in general are turbid with much mate-
thesis, including light, macronutrients, macronutrients, rial, both organic and inorganic, in suspension. In addition,
temperature, grazing by protozoa, zooplankton and other as the phytoplankton blooms, the cells themselves dimin-
filter feeders, tidal mixing, and river flow effects. The ish the amount of light that penetrates the water column.
relative significance of these factors will vary with the In deeper estuarine water bodies, extreme vertical
type of estuarine system and geographic locality and we mixing of the water column can cause reduced photosyn-
will discuss their relative importance. thesis by transporting phytoplankton below the depth at
Light: Light is one of the most important variables which there is sufficient light to maintain growth. The
controlling phytoplankton photosynthesis. Total incident depth at which gross photosynthesis (Pg) is just equal to
radiation is a function of latitude and this is reflected in the algal respiration rate (R) is referred to the as the com-
the seasonal pattern of production. In Arctic locations pensation depth (Dc). Below this depth cells cannot sur-
there is a single strong seasonal peak in production, while vive because there is insufficient light for photosynthesis
temperate systems often show a strong spring and a lesser to produce the necessary energy for base respiration. This
autumn peak. The initiation of the winter-spring phy- Dc is often equated with the depth at which 1% of the
toplankton bloom has been demonstrated to be keyed to surface irradiation is available, or 2.5 times the Secchi
increasing light intensity in Long Island Sound and Nar- depth. However, since phytoplankton cells are being con-
ragansett Bay (Riley, 1967; Nixon et al., 1979). In tropical tinuously mixed throughout the water column, another
systems there is little predictable seasonality in phy- critical point is critical depth (Dcr), the depth to which an
toplankton production. These overall patterns are, how- entire phytoplankton population or assemblage can be
mixed while still maintaining photosynthesis (PI) (over
120 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.22 Summary of the average daily phytoplankton rates (solid circles) in 45 estuarine systems. Horizontal bars indicate
annual ranges. Season in which maximum and minimum rates occurred is also indicated. (W, winter; Sp, spring; Su, summer, F, fall
(winter). (Redrawn from Boynton, W.R., Kemp, W.M., and Keefe, C.W., in Estuarine Comparisons, Kennedy, V.S., Ed., Academic
Press, New York, 1982, 75. With permission.)

time and depth) and integrated respiration (RI), i.e., an phosphorus, and silicon. If they are in low supply they
average cell can be mixed from surface to Dcr and still can be limiting to phytoplankton growth. The ratios of
maintain a positive energy balance. At Dcr the vertically dissolved inorganic nitrogen (DIN = NO3 + NO2 + NH4)
integrated photosynthesis equals the vertically integrated to dissolved inorganic phosphorus (DIP) in studied estu-
respiration. When the depth of the mixed water column arine systems are low during periods of high phytoplank-
(Dm) exceeds Dcr , the assemblages of phytoplankton will ton production, except in highly eutrophic systems. The
not be able to develop net photosynthesis. Ragotskie significance of this ratio lies in the fact that algal produc-
(1959) showed that no net productivity occurred in estu- tion is constrained (among other things) by the require-
arine water near Sapelo Island, Georgia, when Dcr was ment for nitrogen and phosphorus in proportion to the
less than the mixed depth (which was identical to the mean atomic ratio of 16:1. Redfield et al. (1963) demonstrated
depth of the water column in this shallow, well-mixed what is now termed the “Redfield ratio,” i.e., the atomic
estuarine system). weights of the elemental composition of microalgae,
Macronutrients: Algal primary production requires C:N:Si:P, are on the order of 106:16:15:1. Water column
continuing availability of the macronutrients, nitrogen, nutrient concentrations of DIN:DIP less than the Redfield
Soft Shores 121

ratio would indicate that nitrogen is less abundant than grazing by zooplankton maintained the algal populations
phosphorus in terms of phytoplankton demand, while val- in a steady-state balance, the level of which was deter-
ues in excess of the ratio would indicate that phosphorus mined by other environmental conditions (e.g., nutrients,
is less abundant. light, temperature). In contrast, Cushing (1959), following
Boynton et al. (1982) analyzed seasonal N:P ratios the analysis of a simple predator-prey model, concluded
from 28 estuarine ecosystems and found that the ratios that grazing did affect the magnitude and timing of phy-
ranged from <1.0 to over 200. At peak production, nitro- toplankton blooms, and that a lag time between the peak
gen was consistently less abundant than phosphorus in abundances of phytoplankton and zooplankton popula-
nearly all systems. Exceptions are those systems that are tions was observed consistently. Other studies have dem-
heavily enriched by diffuse or point sources of nutrient onstrated that zooplankton grazing can alter the species
enrichment such as sewage inflows. Actual concentrations composition of phytoplankton communities by selective
vary considerably between various estuaries. In addition grazing on the larger diatoms, thus shifting the size com-
there may be substantial annual excursions in the N:P position of the assemblage toward smaller-sized species.
ratios, particularly in the river-dominated group. In Ches- Protozoa are significant grazers on the ultraphy-
apeake Bay, U.S.A., during periods of high river flow, toplankton (cells between 0.5 and 5 µm) (Turner et al.,
ratios of >60:1 have been recorded. These were due to 1986). Laboratory studies of the grazing capabilities of
very high concentrations of nitrogen rather than low con- pelagic ciliates, including tintinnids and aloricate species
centrations of phosphorus. Thus, because the estuarine have shown that they are adapted to graze 2 to 10 µm
environment generally has less nitrogen available per unit sized algal cells at high rates (Heinbokel and Beers, 1979;
of phosphorus than algal cells require, it is often concluded Verity, 1985; Jonsson, 1986). Sherr et al. (1991) found
that nitrogen is the more limiting nutrient for estuarine clearance rates of <6 µm sized algal prey by heterotrophic
photosynthesis. flagellates in a salt marsh tidal creek ranging from 0.004
While nitrogen is the macronutrient that most often to 0.83 l cell–1 hr–1 while those for ciliates ranged from
limits the production of phytoplankton under most circum- 0.24 to 8.3 l cell–1 hr–1. Estimated daily clearance rates by
stances, Smith (1984) and Smith et al. (1987) have pro- algivorous protozoa over a four-month period averaged
vided geochemical and mass balance data to suggest that, 45% of the water volume. The average grazing impact of
ultimately, P will limit production in coastal marine sys- the flagellates was about 33% of that of the ciliates for
tems. Furthermore, diatom production may often be limited 2 µm prey, and 50 and 85% that of the ciliates for 5.4 and
(both seasonally and annually) by the availability of silicon 3.4 µm sized prey, respectively. Reports of tintinnid con-
in the form of silicates (Officer and Ryther, 1980). Officer sumption of phytoplankton production in coastal waters
and Ryther (1980) suggest that diatoms utilize the plentiful range from 4 to 60% (Sherr et al., 1986). Microzooplank-
nutrient supplies (including silicon) built up over the win- ton, which is often reported as being dominated by alor-
ter, and this is followed by depletion of silicon, which is icate ciliates, has been estimated to graze between 10 and
regenerated more slowly than nitrogen or phosphorus. 80% of the primary production in many marine environ-
Temperature: Most phytoplankton species exhibit a ments (Capriulo and Carpenter, 1980; Burkill et al., 1987;
relatively narrow optimal temperature range for their pho- Rassoulzadegan et al., 1988). Evidence for the importance
tosynthesis and growth (Eppley, 1972). Goldman (1979) of heterotrophic dinoflagellates as grazers of algae in
showed that the temperature optima for five coastal phy- marine systems is also accumulating (Lessard and Swift,
toplankton species, as well as for a mixed assemblage of 1985). It is thus clear that in addition to the macrozoop-
these species, fell in the range of 20 to 25°C. Temperature lankton (especially copepods) and benthic invertebrate fil-
seems to exert a selective force for phytoplankton popu- ter feeders (especially bivalve molluscs), the planktonic
lations so that the temperature optima coincide with the protozoa are very important grazers on the phytoplankton.
prevailing local conditions. However, Karentz and Smay- Mallin and Paerl (1994) investigated the impact of
ada (1984) reported that the maximum abundances for 30 zooplankton grazing on the phytoplankton in the Neuse
algal species in Narragansett Bay occurred at temperatures River Estuary, North Carolina. Zooplankton community
3 to 14°C lower than their respective optimum growth grazing rates were generally lowest in the winter and
temperatures. This suggests that other overriding factors highest in the spring through late summer, ranging from
and not temperature determine the seasonal phytoplankton 0.1 to 310 ml–1 hr–1. Community grazing was positively
succession patterns. correlated with primary productivity and the abundance
Grazing: The impact of grazing, a mechanism regu- of total phytoplankton, centric diatoms, dinoflagellates,
lating phytoplankton productivity, has been the subject of and the small centric diatom Thalassiosira. On an annual
much debate. Steeman-Nielsen (1958), for example, basis the zooplankton community grazed approximately
argued that the commonly observed seasonal patterns of 38 to 45% of the daily phytoplankton production. Table
more or less coincidental peaks in phytoplankton and 3.12 gives estimates of zooplankton grazing in various
zooplankton abundance supported the hypothesis that estuaries. They range from 17 to 69%, demonstrating that
122 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.12
Effect of Zooplankton Grazing on Primary Production from a Range of Estuarine Systems
Primary Production
Grazed (%)
System Taxon Group Period Method Mean Range

Long Island Sound (Riley, 1956) Community Annual EST 69 —


all sizes
Solent Estuary, U.K. (Burkill, 1982) Tintinnids Annual EST 4 0–20
Long Island Sound, U.S. (Capriulo & Carpenter, 1989) Tintinnida Annual EST 27 —
Copepods 44 —
Gunpowder River, Maryland (Sellner,1983) Comunity Annual EST 17 1–>100
Beaufort Estuary, North Carolina (Fulton, 1984) Copepods Annual EST 45 0–>100
Narragansett Bay, Rhode Island (Verity, 1987) Tintinnids Annual EST 26 —
Halifax Harbour, Nova Scotia (Gifford and Dagg, 1988) Community Annual EXP 49 0–100
>102 m
Chesapeake Bay, U.S. (White & Roman, 1992) Community Mar–Oct EXP 51 0–100
>64 m
Neuse Estuary, North Carolina (Mallin and Paerl, 1994) Community Annual EXP 38 2–>100

Note: EXP = experimentally derived, EST = estimated by other means. Percent grazed given as means and range, if available.

the amount of phytoplankton production grazed by estu- In contrast to the Chesapeake Bay situation, high river
arine zooplankton is considerable. flow can lead to low phytoplankton abundance and pro-
Tidal mixing: In coastal environments, phytoplank- duction due to the washout of algal cells from the estuary
ton cells are subjected to vertical tidal mixing, in which as documented for the Duwamish River estuary, Oregon,
the intensity varies on a semidiurnal cycle. The vertically during high flow years (Welsh et al., 1972).
mixed cells may therefore experience light variations in a
combination of both circadian and semidiurnal tidal 3.5.2.6 A Model of Estuarine Phytoplankton
cycles. Legendre et al. (1985) in tank experiments with Productivity
water samples from the St. Lawrence Estuary, Canada,
observed semidiurnal cycles in photosynthetic efficiency Boynton et al. (1982) developed a conceptual model (Fig-
(aB) and intracellular chlorophyll a. They suggested that ure 3.23) of the factors influencing estuarine phytoplank-
such variations are possibly endogenous, phased on semi- ton production. Inputs of energy and materials or physical
diurnal variations in vertical tidal mixing (associated with characteristics (morphology) common to all estuarine sys-
variations in the light conditions). tems are shown as circles. Rectangles represent the mech-
River flow effects: Seasonal and interannual varia- anisms through which the inputs affect phytoplankton pri-
tions in river flow can influence phytoplankton production mary production, e.g., turbidity is depicted as influencing
and the species composition of the phytoplankton com- primary production and its impact in turn is enhanced by
munities in a number of ways, including (1) changes in algal biomass sediment from both external (riverine and
the input of nutrients from the watershed; (2) changing others) and internal (resuspension due to winds and tides)
the rates of dilution or advection of algal cells out of the sources. Data was collected from 63 estuarine systems
estuary; and (3) changing the availability of light to the covering latitude, insolation, temperature, extinction coef-
phytoplankton cells through stratification of the water col- ficient, mean depth, stratification depth, mixed depth, crit-
umn, gravitational circulation, and changes in the location ical depth, surface area, drainage area, freshwater input,
of the turbidity maximum. Boynton et al. (1982) noted tidal range, salinity, nutrient concentrations, nutrient load-
that the nutrient input as a result of a major tropical storm ing rate, chlorophyll a concentrations, and phytoplankton
(Agnes) in June 1972 resulted in inputs of nitrogen 2 to production rate (Keefe et al., 1981).These data were ana-
3 times higher than in the preceding or subsequent years. lyzed statistically to test hypotheses concerning the factors
While production in that year was high, peak production regulating temporal patterns.
occurred in the following year when nutrient inputs were Prior to the statistical analysis, Boynton et al. (1982)
more typical. Boynton et al. (1982) suggested that the high classified the estuarine systems into four groups (fjord,
summer rates of production appear to be supported pri- lagoon, embayment, or river dominated). Fjords were
marily by recycled nutrients, some fraction of which was defined as having a shallow sill and a deep basin with
introduced into the estuary during the spring runoff period. slow exchanges with the adjacent sea. Lagoons were con-
Soft Shores 123

FIGURE 3.23 Mean monthly phytoplankton production rates at six stations in central Chesapeake Bay, 1972 to 1977. Values below
peaks represent estimates of annual phytoplankton production (g C m–3 year–1). (Redrawn from Boynton, W.R., Kemp, W.M., and
Keefe, C.W., in Estuarine Comparisons, Kennedy, V.S., Academic Press, New York, 1982, 71. With permission.)

sidered to be those systems that were shallow, well mixed, Massachusetts (a back-barrier estuary), patches of the
slowly flushed, and only slightly influenced by riverine green alga, Cladophora gracilis, occur throughout (Roman
inputs. Embayments were considered to be deeper than et al., 1990). On vertical creek banks there is an intertidal
lagoons, often stratified, only slightly influenced by fresh- zone of fucoid algae (Ascophyllum nodosum ecad. scorpi-
water input, and having good exchange with the ocean. odes and Fucus vesciculosus) usually associated with tall
The category river dominated contained a more diverse Spartina alterniflora, an intertidal zone of filamentous
group of systems, but all members of the group were algae attached to the substrate of exposed creek-bank peat,
characterized by seasonally depressed salinities due to and a subtidal zone of assorted macroalgae. In the tropics
riverine inputs and variable degrees of stratification. there are smaller amounts of brown algae of the genus
Annual phytoplankton production means for river- Sargassum growing on hard substrates, while other brown
dominated estuaries, embayment, lagoons, and fjords were genera such as Colpomenia and Dictyota occur as epi-
0.58 ± 0.37, 0.36 ± 0.23, 0.49 ± 0.23, and 0.62 ± 0.53 g C phytes on sea grasses such as Posidonia and Thalassoden-
m–2 day–1, respectively. This indicated that estuaries with dron. In some Australasian estuaries a free-floating form
different physical characteristics commonly have compa- of the normally attached brown alga, Hormosira banksii,
rable rates of primary production, suggesting there are reproducing by vegetative division is common.
system-specific biotic and physical mechanisms operating Red algae are represented mainly by small species
in different estuarine systems. Boynton et al. (1982) found such as Polysiphonia, Ceramium, and Laurencia growing
that, in general, phytoplankton production and biomass as epiphytes on sea grasses and marsh plants, while spe-
exhibited weak correlations with a variety of physical and cies of Bostrychia and Calloglossa grow attached to salt
state variables in the estuarine systems that they consid- marsh plants and the boles and roots of mangroves. Com-
ered. They concluded that this perhaps indicated the sig- mon estuarine algae are species of the genus Gracilaria,
nificance of rate processes as opposed to standing stocks which originally grow on mudflats attached to pebbles,
in regulating phytoplankton production. living bivalves, and dead shells, but as they develop they
may become free floating. G. verrucosa is abundant in
3.5.3 ESTUARINE MACROALGAE South African estuaries where it forms the basis of an agar
industry (Day, 1981d). Hedgpeth (1967) records
3.5.3.1 Composition and Distribution
Gracilaria in the Laguna Madre of Texas, while species
Macroscopic algae in general are not as well represented of Gracilaria secundata are widespread in New Zealand
in estuaries as the other producers (marsh plants, sea estuaries (Henriques, 1978).
grasses, and mangroves). The species that occur are The most common estuarine algae are green algae
restricted to a small number of genera that can tolerate belonging to the genera Enteromorpha, Ulva, Ulothrix,
turbidity, silt deposition, and changing salinity patterns. Cladophora, Rhizoclonium, Chaetomorpha, and Codium.
There are, however, some exceptions. Species of brown Filamentous species of Enteromorpha and Cladophora
algae belonging to the genera Fucus, Pelvetia, and Asco- grow as epiphytes on sea grasses and salt marsh plants.
phyllum are abundant on rocky substrates in North Atlantic Larger green algae, especially Ulva lactuca and Entero-
estuaries, while smaller plants of Fucus and Pelvetia grow morpha spp., often form extensive mats on estuarine mud-
among the vascular marsh plants. In the Nauset Marsh, flats worldwide.
124 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.24 Total dry weight at a series of 37 representative stations (each 1 m2 in the Avon-Heathcote Estuary, New Zealand,
over the period of January 1972 to May 1973. (Redrawn from Knox, G.A., Estuarine Ecosystems: A Systems Approach, CRC Press,
Boca Raton, Florida, 1986a, 79. With permission.)

3.5.3.2 Biomass and Production found that the growth in U. lactuca was stimulated by
increasing the amount of either nutrient.
Studies on the photosynthesis and respiration rates of estu- In the Avon-Heathcote Estuary where U. lactuca was
arine algae include studies on Polysiphonia from Gent Bay generally the dominant species, a second species of green
Estuary (Fralick and Mathieson, 1975), Hypnea from a alga, Enteromorpha ramulosa, was twice as abundant as
mangrove fringed estuary in Florida (Dawes et al., 1976), Ulva in the summer of 1969, but since then it has not
six species of algae from an estuary in Oregon (Kjeldsen occurred in the same abundance. Enteromorpha is more
and Pinney, 1972), and six species of algae from a man- sensitive to temperature fluctuations than Ulva, and a mild
grove and salt marsh estuary in Florida (Dawes et al., preceding winter may be the explanation for its domi-
1976). In addition Christie (1981) has investigated the nance. Laboratory experiments (Steffensen, 1974) showed
standing crop and production of Gracilaria verrucosa in that between 15 and 18°C, winter plants of U. lactuca
Langebaan Lagoon in South Africa, and Knox and Kilner grew 15 to 20 cm in length in 4 to 6 weeks, while below
(1973) and Steffensen (1974a) have studied the annual 15°C the rates of growth were very much slower. No
changes in the standing crop of the green algae, Ulva growth of Enteromorpha was detected below 12°C while
lactuca and Enteromorpha ramulosa, in the Avon-Heath- some growth in Ulva was detected at 10°C.
cote Estuary, New Zealand. Figure 3.24 depicts the seasonal variation in total
In the Avon-Heathcote Estuary, New Zealand, large organic dry weight of the three dominant algal species
populations of the sea lettuce, Ulva lactuca, have become in the estuary from 37 stations in 1972–1973. The sea-
established over the past 40 years. Since 1960 a series of sonal pattern in the growth of all three species is evident.
studies (Knox and Kilner, 1973; Steffensen, 1974) have However, both Enteromorpha and Gracilaria die down
documented the increase in algal density. From these stud- in the winter, while substantial Ulva biomass persisted
ies it became evident that the increase in algal biomass over the winter. Ulva plants usually develop attached to
was associated with the discharge of increasing amounts cockle shells, but as they grow the thalli reach a size and
of treated nutrient-rich sewage effluent to the estuary. buoyancy that uproots the shell leaving the thalli to drift
The link between luxuriant growth of Ulva and avail- with the currents. These drifting thalli, and fragments
able nutrients was examined at the beginning of the cen- broken from them, continue to grow over the summer
tury (Cotton, 1911) and has been confirmed by numerous and autumn, forming large drifts of unattached plants.
reports since (Wilkinson, 1981). As early as 1914, Forster These form the bulk of the winter biomass. Summer
(1914) demonstrated that growth of U. lactuca was stim- biomass values of up to 130 g m–2 (dry weight) have
ulated by additions of urea, acetamide, and ammonium been recorded.
nitrate. Waite and Mitchell (1972) examined the effect of Table 3.13 gives macroalgal biomass and production
adding NH3-N and PO4-P in varying combinations and estimates for a range of estuaries. Highest biomass den-
Soft Shores 125

TABLE 3.13
Biomass and Production Estimates of Macroalgae from Various Estuaries
Max. Biomass Max. Production Annual Production
Estuary Genus g DW m–2 mg C DW–1 h–1 g C m–2 yr–1 References

Mai Po Pond (HK) Enteromorpha 200 1.3a 50.6 (2.3%) Lee (1989)
Nanaimo Estuary (BC) 0.9 (0.1%)b Naiman and Sibert (1978)
Nauset Marsh (MA) Ascophyllum 1500c 390f Roman et al. (1990)
Fucus 400d 110f
Cladophora 640e 380f (13%)
Wilson Cove (CA) 0.4–3.1g Littler and Murray (1974)
Tagus Estuary (P) Ascophyllum 375d 0.4 405k Ferreira and Ramos (1989)
Ulva 160h 1.0 213k
Gracilaria 80i 1.2 92k
Coos Bays (OR) Enteromorpha 1050 13.3m 1060l Pregnall and Rudy (1985)
Gray Harbor Estuary (WA) Enteromorpha 31.4g 48 × 106 (22)n,g Thom (1984)

Note: In the column giving annual production values, the contribution of macroalgal production is given. HK, Hong Kong; BC, British Columbia;
MA, Massachusetts; CA, California; P, Portugal; OR, Oregon; WA, Washington.
a PQ = 1. Net primary production, estimated from O2-method.
b Percentage of total production on intertidal mudflat (including intertidal phytoplankton production, 12.1%).
c Ascophylum nodosum.

d Fucus vesiculosus.

e Cladophora gracilis.

f Net production estimates from changes in biomass.

g From 3 to 4-h O -exchange measurements. P = 1.2. Several macroalgae.


2 Q
h Ulva lactuca.

i Gracilaria verrucosa.

k Net production from 0.5 to 1-h O -exchange measurements. P = 1.


2 Q
l From 3-h 14CO -fixation measurements.
2
m g C m–2 day–1.

n k g C yr–1.

Source: From Heip, H.R., Gossen, N.K., Herman, P.M.J., Kromkomp, J., Middleberg, J.J., and Stoetaert, K., Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev.,
33, 27, 1995. With permission.

sities and production seem to occur when hydrodynamic Heathcote Estuary, Christchurch; Knox and Kilner, 1973;
energy is relatively low, such as lagoons and tidal inlets. Knox, 1992), and on decay provide an abundant source
In open river-dominated estuaries, especially in funnel- of detritus for detritus feeders. The physical presence of
shaped estuaries, biomass seems to be lower, although the mats may provide shelter from predation for other
on hard substrates in the intertidal, local densities of animals, e.g., shrimps and larval fishes, although they may
macroalgae are often found, especially in northern tem- also act as refuges for predators. Mats also reduce oxygen
perate estuaries. High biomass and production often exchange with the sediments, accumulate silt, and inter-
occur where there is the free-floating form of the green fere with the feeding activities of suspension feeders. They
alga Ulva. also can act as a physical barrier to mudflat feeding fish
and birds. When the mats decay they cause the surface
3.5.3.3 Impact of Macroalgal Mats on the sediments to become anoxic with the RPD layer reaching
Benthic Fauna the surface. Foolad (1983) showed that concentrations of
the ammonium ion (NH4+) reaches toxic levels in the mats
Mat-forming algae, principally Enteromorpha spp. and producing sublethal effects on the bivalve Cerastoderma.
Ulva sp., as discussed above, develop rapidly on temperate In extreme conditions they can cause the death of infaunal
estuaries during the spring, especially where there are macroinvertebrates.
large inputs of nutrients from sewage discharges (Knox Possible effects of algal mats are summarized in the
and Kilner, 1973; Steffenson, 1974; Reise, 1984). Such flow diagram in Figure 3.25. Hull (1987) examined the
algal mats provide food for grazing molluscs (e.g., Zeacu- impact of algal mats (principally Enteromorpha spp.,
mantus subcarinatus and Diloma subrostrata in the Avon- especially E. intestinalis, with Ulva lactuca, Chaetomor-
126 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.25 Possible impacts of algal mats on estuarine benthic ecosystems. (Redrawn from Hall, S.J., Oceangr. Mar. Biol. Annu.
Rev., 32, 210, 1994. With permission.)

pha linum, and Cladophora sp.) in the Ythan Estuary, 3.5.4 SEA GRASS SYSTEMS
Scotland, by manipulating algal density at 0, 0.3, 1, and
3.5.4.1 Introduction
3 kg fresh weight m–2 (corresponding to control, low-,
medium, and high-density). Many of the effects observed Sea grasses are characteristic features of shallow coastal
were similar to those occurring during organic enrichment, seas, coral reef lagoons, and estuaries. According to den
notably large numbers of the opportunistic polychaete, Hartog (1967) there are 49 species in 12 genera of marine
Capitella capitata, the bivalve, Cerastoderma edule, and aquatic angiosperms with the ability to function normally
the snail, Hydrobia ulvae, increased in abundance, while and complete their reproductive cycle when fully sub-
the polychaete, Pygiospio elegans, and the oligochaetes, merged in the marine environment. Many genera have a
Tubifcoides benedini and Tubifex castatus, showed no con- worldwide distribution with Thalassia, Thalassodendron,
sistent response. The abundance of the tube-dwelling Cymodocea, Posidonia, Halodule, and several genera in
amphipod, Corophium volutator, was markedly affected warm and tropical waters, and Zostera, Halophila, Rup-
by the algal cover. Initially densities were low but pia, Potamogeton, and Zannichellia extending into tem-
increased to high densities following the burial of the mats perate estuaries. The common eelgrass, Zostera, and its
in October. subgenus, Zosterellia, are widely distributed in the tem-
Nothko and Bonsdorff (1996) studied the population perate zones of North America, Europe, Asia, and the
responses of benthic invertebrates to drifting mats of algae temperate coasts of Australia and New Zealand. Many of
(Cladophora, Enteromorpha, Pilayella, and Fucus) in the these genera are euryhaline but their extension into regions
northern Baltic Sea. Massive die-offs of benthic inverte- of lowered salinity is variable. Posidonia, Thalassia,
brates were recorded. The community dominants in abun- Cymodocea, and Thallasodendron prefer salinities above
dance (Hydrobia spp.) and biomass (Macoma balthica) 20 while Zostera and Halodule tolerate salinities as low
experienced strong population reductions after 9 days of as 10; Ruppia and Potamogeton prefer low salinities while
algal stress. Within 5 weeks population crashes were Zannichella extends into freshwater and is seldom found
recorded for the sedentary polychaetes, Manayurikia aes- in salinities above 10.
tuarensis and Pygospio elegans, while populations of the Sea grass systems vary from a few plants to extensive
errant polychaete, Nereis diversicolor, and tubificid oli- meadows composed of a single species. Such meadows
gochaetes remained stable. are highly productive ecosystems with a rich associated
Soft Shores 127

fauna. Excellent reviews of sea grass ecosystems are those 1981d). The depth to which a particular species grows is
edited by McRoy and Helfferich (1977) and Phillips and a complex function of water turbidity, sedimentation
McRoy (1980). Stevenson (1988) has more recently regimes, wave action, and salinity.
reviewed the comparative ecology of submerged grass
beds in fresh and marine waters. 3.5.4.3 Biomass and Production

3.5.4.2 Distribution and Zonation Biomass: While sea grasses have a large biomass of
leaves, the majority of the biomass of the plants is in the
Important factors affecting the colonization and distribu- roots and rhizomes in the sediment and this is very difficult
tion of sea grasses include the morphology and character to sample because of the deep penetration of the roots
of the bottom, the sources, routes and rates of sediment (Jones, 1968; Zieman, 1975). However a number of esti-
transport, and the rates of sediment accumulation. Other mates of the root (including rhizomes):shoot ratio can be
factors include light, temperature, salinity, waves and cur- calculated from Table 3.15. It can be seen that this ratio
rents, and the availability of seed. Once they have become is usually >1 and in some cases it is very much higher. A
established, sea grasses may significantly impact on the characteristic of many sea grasses is their rhizomatous
prevailing sedimentary processes depending on the spe- growth. This may help protect loss of perennial meristems
cies composition and the density of the plants. Sea grasses from wave action and conserve energy and nutrients
alter the sedimentation processes in a number of ways, within the beds (Kenworthy and Thayer, 1984). In addi-
but the major effects are to increase the sedimentation tion, since the roots of aquatic vascular plants are func-
rates by preferentially concentrating the finer particle sizes tional in terms of nutrient uptake, large root biomass (and
(see Figure 3.3), and to stabilize the deposited sediments. surface area) provides for increased nutrition from sedi-
This is due to the entrapment of waterborne particles by ments in oligotrophic coastal waters (McRoy and Bars-
the grass blades which slow the currents passing over the date, 1970). Although the rhizomes themselves may not
sediment surface, the formation and retention of organic be as important in the uptake, they provide “safe storage”
particles produced locally within the grass beds, and the for nutrients and photosynthetic products protected from
binding and stabilizing of the substrate by the grass rhi- both wave action and from most grazers.
zome and root systems. Alteration of the sediments may There are a large number of literature values for sea
lead to an increase or decrease in the sea grass colonization grass plant biomass (see Table 3.15 for some representa-
pattern with the possibility of partial or complete replace- tive values). The bulk of the these measurements are con-
ment of the pioneering species by another, e.g., the Halod- centrated in two species, Zostera marina and Thalassia
ule to Thalassia succession documented by Phillips testudinium. For Z. marina, biomass estimates for above-
(1960). Sediments in sea grass beds are often anoxic below ground biomass range from 75 to 2,060 g dry wgt m–2.
the surface layer. The wide diversity of values that have been estimated is
Table 3.14 gives the depth distribution of the principal dependent upon the habitat sampled, the number of rep-
sea grass genera. The main factors limiting the depth to licate samples taken, and the methods used.
which the species grow is light availability and abrasion Primary production — Methods of estimation: Sea
by sand-laden water in the more turbulent habitats. In grasses present a number of problems in the estimation of
many estuaries Zostera extends no more than a meter their primary production and a variety of techniques have
below low water, but in clear estuaries it may extend down been used to overcome this. One approach has been to
to 6 m, and it grows to a depth of 30 m off California. measure the changes occurring in the amount of standing
Halophila has been recorded from depths as great as 90 stock over the growing season (Pomeroy et al., 1981).
m, although many species have restricted depth distribu- However, one of the problems encountered is to account
tions. In deeper tropical waters, where wave action is low for the loss of plant material over the growing season. In
and water clarity high, species such as Halophila have addition, many sea grasses, including tropical and subarc-
ovate leaves with prostrate stems unlike the linear leaves tic ones, are perennial and maintain significant winter
of species that occur where wave action is higher. Posi- populations. Consequently, this method, which was used
donia descends down to at least 60 m. Phyllospadix in early studies, has been superseded by other techniques.
extends down from the lower eulittoral to 30 m under Increasingly, production estimates derived from mark-
favorable conditions. In southern Mozambique Halodule ing techniques have been used and these have proved to
uninervis may extend from MLWN to below MLWS. be a considerable improvement over the measurement of
Thalassodendron ciliatum grows among the lower Halod- changes in biomass. The marking technique fixes the
ule and extends to 5 to 10 m below MLWS. Cymodocea amount of standing stock present at a particular point in
rotundata, C. serrulata, Zostera capensis, and Halophila time and allows the more exact measurement of plant
ovale grow near MLWS, while Syringodium isoetifolium growth over a defined time interval. The technique
and Thalassia hemprichii both grow subtidally (Day, involves the marking of grass blades with a small stapler
128

TABLE 3.14
Depth Distribution of Sea Grass Species
Zostera Zostera
subgen subgen
Halodule Zosterella Zostera Cymadocea Thalassia Syringodium Phyllospadix Enhalus Posidonia Halophila Heterozostera Amphibolis Thalassodendron

Mideulittoral + + – – – – – – – + – – –
Belt between + + + + + + + + – + + – –
MLWN and
MLWS
Upper sublittoral + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Lower sublittoral + – + – – – + – + + – + +

Source: From den Hartog, C., Helgol. Wiss. Meeresunters, 15, 96, 1967. With permission.
The Ecology of Seashores
Soft Shores

TABLE 3.15
Comparison of the Biomass and Productivity of Selected Sea Grass Species
Peak Biomass (g dry wgt m–2) Rate of Productivity
NPP
Species /Location Above Below Total (mg O2 hr–1 g–1) (g C m–2 day–1) (g m–2 day–1) Reference

Poisodonia oceanica
Mediterranean, Italy 600–1,700 — — 0.8–4.4 Ott and Mauer (1977)
Poisodonia australis
Port Hacking, Aust. 80 195 275 1.9 Kirkman and Reid (1979)
Spencer Gulf, Aust. 616 — 2,457 5.5 West and Larkum (1979)
N.S.W., Aust. 137–453 847–25,550 1.9–5.2 West and Larkum (1979)
Syringodium filiforme
St. Croix, Florida 15–200 0.3 Zieman and Wetzel (1980)
Thalassia testudinium
Cuba 76–517 8.0 Buesa (1975)
Puerto Rico 2,800 Odum et al. (1974)
Bibimi Harbour, Bahamas 200 1.8–2.4 2.6–3.9 Capone et al. (1979)
Zostera marina
Lake Grevelingen, The Neth. 75–94 35–50 110–144 1.7 Nienhuis and De Bree (1980)
Oresund, Den. 290 160 450 2.9 Wium-Andersen and Borum (1980)
Vellerup Vig, The Neth. 226 217 443 5.9 Sand-Jensen (1975)
Nabeta Bay, Japan 222 71 292 7.2 Mukai 918710
Izembek Lagoon, Alaska 500 900 1,400 2.8 Kentula and McIntire (1986)
Netarts Bay, Oregon 84–256 56–214 140–470 4.8 7.2–10.3 McRoy (1974)
Cymodoce nodosa
Mediterranean 15–340 5.5–18.5 Gelner (1959)
Halodule wrightii
North Carolina 0.5–2.0 Dillon (1971)
Amphibolis antarctica
Shark Bay, Aust. 300–850 300–1,150 600–2,000 2–17 Walker (1985)
Heterozostera tasmanica
Australia 83–218 1.3–3.6 Bulthuis and Woelkerling (1983)
129
130 The Ecology of Seashores

and measuring the growth that has occurred after a spec- that for Zostera growing in Denmark, the living rhizomes
ified time interval, as well as the new leaves produced increased from 100 to 200 g dry wgt m–2 throughout the
during the time that has elapsed. Details of the technique growing season, while the leaves and flowering shoots
will be found in Zieman (1975) and Zieman and Wetzel increased from 50 to 230 g dry wgt m–2.
(1980). The technique suffers from the inability to mea-
sure short-term (hours) rates for total plant production 3.5.4.4 Factors Affecting Sea Grass Production
(Zieman and Wetzel, 1980), since the experiments must
be carried our for periods of a least 8 to 12 days in order Light: Solar radiation is often regarded as the ultimate
to allow for the significant emergence of new leaves. In limiting factor in any autotrophic system. Photosynthesis
addition, production estimates by the marking technique versus irradiance (P-I) curves typically exhibit an initial
do not measure losses associated with excretion, slough- linear response with increasing irradiance, with a gradually
ing, and herbivore consumption. decreasing slope until saturation is achieved, after which
Changes in the dissolved oxygen and pH concentra- a plateau may be reached with no photosynthetic response
tions in the water have been used by several workers to to increased irradiance. Williams and McRoy (1982) have
measure the products of photosynthesis and respiration. demonstrated similar light responses for six sea grass spe-
Increasingly the 14C uptake technique has been used to cies growing in different regions from 10 to 50° latitude.
estimate productivity in sea grass (McRoy, 1974). This In most estuaries light attenuation is often severe due
technique, however, may underestimate productivity to the high turbidity associated with suspended seston
because it assumes that inorganic carbon is taken up exclu- (sediment, organic matter, and phytoplankton), which lim-
sively from the water column, and 14CO2 may be stored its the availability of light to submerged sea grasses (Wet-
and recycled in the lacunar gas spaces (Penhale and zel and Penhale, 1982). In tropical lagoons the water clar-
Thayer, 1980; Sondergaard, 1990). ity is higher and consequently sea grass can grow to
Production estimates: Reviews by McRoy and greater depths.
Helfferich (1977), McRoy and McMillan (1977), Phillips Nutrients: Sea grasses are capable of deriving their
and McRoy (1980), and Zieman and Wetzel (1980) con- nitrogen and phosphorus from two sources: (1) the water
cluded that sea grasses potentially have both high standing column via uptake by the leaves, and (2) the sediment
crop and productivity (up to 10 to 20 g C m–2 day–1). Table interstitial water via roots and rhizomes (Izumi and Hat-
3.15 lists some representative estimates of sea grass pro- tori, 1982; Thursby and Harlin,1984; Short and McRoy,
duction. From the data in the table, two trends emerge. 1984). These two methods of uptake of nitrogen are geared
The values demonstrate that sea grass productivity can to the ambient nutrient conditions the plants experience.
rival the most productive agricultural areas (Westlake, When there is sufficiently high concentration in the water,
1963). Reliable estimates have shown that Zostera marina leaf uptake predominates; however, when nitrogen is
can attain productivities of 8 g C m–2 day–1 and estimated depletes in the water, root uptake takes over.
yearly production of 600 g C m–2. Due to greater overall Phosphorus is assimilated predominately through the
radiation input and longer growing season, tropical sea roots. McRoy and Barsdate (1970) have estimated the
grasses can have still greater productivities. Beds of daily movement of phosphorus in an eelgrass (Zostera
Thalassia testudinium have been reported to produce up marina) stand and have shown that it is excreted into the
to 16 g C m–2 day–1. Using a marking technique, Green- overlying water via the leaves. Orth (1977) demonstrated
away (1976) estimated that the yearly production of a rapid a positive growth response by Z. marina to the
Thalassia was 825 g C m–2. It is thus clear that sea grasses application of a commercial fertilizer (containing both
rank among the most productive communities existing. nitrogen and phosphorus) indicating that the plants were
Productivity estimates recorded in the literature have nutrient limited. Similar responses have been observed in
been concerned primarily with aboveground production. Naragansett Bay (Harlin and Thorne-Miller, 1981) and in
If the belowground production is taken into account, the Western Australia (Baluthius and Woelkerling, 1983). The
production estimates would be very much higher. nitrogen requirement of sea grasses may in part be sup-
Root:shoot ratios range from 0:24 for Zoztera marina in plied via nitrogen fixation by bacteria and blue-green algae
Japan to 3:46 for the same species in Denmark. Peak on the sea grass leaves and in their sediments. McRoy and
aboveground biomass estimates range from 75 to 500 g Goering (1974) reported that the nitrogen fixed by the
dry wgt m–2 for Zostera marina, and 76 to 500 g dry wgt epiphytes can be transferred to and absorbed by the sea
m–2 for Thalassia testudinum. Zieman (1975) found that grass host. Table 3.16 compares measured nitrogen fixa-
Thalassia leaves usually constituted 15 to 22% of the total tion rates in a range of sea grass communities. From this
dry weight of the plant, while Patriquin (1973) estimated table it can be seen that the proportion of the nitrogen
that the short shoot and rhizomes accounted for only 10 requirements that can be met by nitrogen fixation range
to 13% of the net production. Sand-Jensen (1975) found from 1 to about 100%.
Soft Shores 131

TABLE 3.16
Comparison of Nitrogen-Fixation Rates Associated with Sea Grass
Communities
Sea Grass or N2-Fixation Fraction (%) N Required
Macrophyte Location (mg N m–2 day–1) (for plant growth)

Thalassia testudinium Florida


Sediments 0–13 0–23
Epiphytes 11–28 20–50
Barbados
Sediments 27–137 100+
Zostera marina Long Island Sound
Sediments 2–17 3–28
Epiphytes 0 0
Myriophullum spicatum Chesapeake Bay
Epiphytes 3 2

Source: From Day, J.W., Jr., Kemp, W.M., and Yanez-Aranciba, A., Estuarine Ecology, John Wiley
& Sons, New York, 15, 1989, 246. With permission.

3.5.4.5 Fate of Sea Grass Primary Production assumptions. They analyzed evidence from over 100 pub-
lications and concluded that grazing on sea grasses has
There is a paucity of information on the fate of sea grass been underestimated and that it is more widespread than
production. These systems, as we have seen, are highly previously thought.
productive. In temperate regions, direct grazing on the sea Mateo and Romero (1997) have recently investigated
grass leaves is low (Mann, 1988), but more substantial in the detritus and nutrient dynamics of the sea grass Posi-
the tropics. The current paradigm covering sea grass graz- donia oceanica in the Mediterranean (Table 3.17). At 5
ing contends that it is small, usually less than 10% of the m, the amount of exported leaf litter represented carbon,
annual aboveground primary production, with the bulk of nitrogen, and phosphorus losses of 7, 9, and 6% of plant
the sea grass leaf production entering the marine food web primary production. About 26% of the carbon produced
as detritus (Mann, 1988). Information on the fate of this by the plants in one year was immobilized by burial in
detritus is scarce (Hemmiga et al., 1991). However, Val- the underground compartment, i.e., as roots and rhizomes.
entine and Heck (1999) have recently questioned these Annual nitrogen and phosphorus burial in the sediment

TABLE 3.17
Poisodonia oceanica. Dry Weight, Carbon, and Nutrient Budget in
Medes Islands, N.W. Mediterranean (Percentage Values Relative to
Annual Production are Given in Parentheses)
Dry Weight C N P

Production 826 (100%) 326 (100%) 13.9 (100%) 1.168 (100%)


Fate
Export 112 (14%) 27 (%) 1.2 (9%) 0.070 (6%)
Burial 206 (25%) 84 (26%) 1.1 (8%) 0.060 (5%)
Nutrient recycling
Leaves 6.2 (45%) 0.525 (46%)
Belowground 0.9 (6%) 0.372 (10%)
Respiratory consumption
Aerobic 143 (17%) 57 (1%) 1.9 (14%) 0.114 (10%)
Anaerobic 9 (1%) 4 (1%) 2.2 (16%)
Fine particulate detritus 356 (48%) 159 (49%) 0.4 (3%) 0.027 (2%)

Source: From Mateo, M.A. and Romero, J., Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser., 151, 60, 1997. With
permission.
132 The Ecology of Seashores

was 8 and 5% of the total plant N and P needs, respec- factors, and more recently anthropic factors such as fires,
tively. Respiration consumption (aerobic and anaerobic) cutting, dyking, grazing, and ditching have in many areas
of carbon leaf detritus represented 18% of the annual profoundly influenced the distribution of salt marsh species.
consumption. An additional, but very substantial loss of One of the characteristics of a mature salt marsh is
carbon as very fine particulate organic matter was esti- the presence of creeks and drainage channels. They form
mated at approximately 48%. The fate of this fine material a network over the marsh, becoming progressively nar-
was undetermined. It would either be exported or enter rower and shallower as they subdivide in a more or less
the surface sediments. regular pattern (Wiegert et al., 1981). Tidal waters enter
and leave the marsh through this network (Figure 3.26).
3.5.5 SALT MARSHES A feature of salt marshes is the widespread occurrence
of dominant genera such as Salicornia, Suaeda, Spartina,
3.5.5.1 Introduction Juncus, Arthrocnemum, and Plantogo. In most marshes a
Salt marshes are a common feature of most estuaries and characteristic banding or zonation pattern occurs. These
they have a wide distribution throughout the world, espe- zones are the result of differences in reproduction and
cially in temperate zones. Numerous studies have shown growth, and differential response to environmental gradi-
that they are among the most productive plant communi- ents encountered from low to high water. The plants
ties anywhere. In addition they play a very important role respond to factors such as elevation, drainage, sediment
in estuarine ecosystem dynamics since they: (1) provide type, salinity, and the oxidation-reduction state of the sed-
a food source through their production of organic detritus iments. Some examples of typical patterns are shown in
to both estuarine and coastal water consumers; (2) serve Figure 3.27. On the Atlantic coast of the United States
as a habitat and nursery for large numbers of both juvenile where over 6,000,000 ha of salt marshes occur, the smooth
and adult estuarine animals; and (3) regulate important cordgrass Spartina alterniflora dominates the marsh
components of estuarine chemical cycle (Day et al., 1987). between mean sea level and mean high water. Above its
In this section the composition, distribution, and produc- upper limit, the tufted hairgrass (Deschampsia caespitosa)
tivity, as well as the factors affecting production will be occurs. On the European side of the North Atlantic the
discussed. Recently there have been a number of reviews flora is much more diverse and heterogeneous; for exam-
of the ecology of salt marshes including H.T. Odum et al. ple, in the U.K., there are marked differences between the
(1974), Nixon (1980), Pomeroy and Wiegert (1981), marshes bordering the North Sea, the English Channel,
Zedler (1982), Josselyn (1983), Mitsch and Gosselink and the Atlantic Ocean. The North Sea marshes frequently
(1986), Teal (1986), Dijkema (1987), and Adam (1990). have as codominants the seapink (Ameria), sea lavender
(Limonium), sea plantago (Plantago maritima), and spe-
3.5.5.2 Development, Distribution, and cies of Spergularia and Triglochin. The Atlantic marshes
Zonation tend to be used for cattle and sheep grazing and are dom-
inated by the grasses Puccinellia and Festuca. On the
Salt marshes are intertidal ecosystems dominated by south coast of England, the introduced cordgrasses Spar-
rooted plants in areas regularly inundated and drained by tina x townsendii and S. anglica have been spreading
the tides. They occur primarily on temperate coasts but rapidly and replacing the original more diverse flora. In
occasionally form in the tropics on salt flats not occupied South Africa the ricegrass, Spartina maritima, dominates
by mangroves, and they develop in sheltered situations a band above mean high water. Then follows a band of
where silt and mud accumulate. They are shaped by the glasswort, Sarcocornia, with mixed plants of Chenolea
interaction of freshwater, seawater, sediments, and vege- diffusa and Limonium linifolium. This in turn on the higher
tation. For their development they require protection from shore is replaced by a band of Sporobolus virginicus with
high energy waves and they therefore are found in lagoons, the rush, Juncus krausii, and occasional plants of Dis-
in inlets behind barrier islands, or in the protection of an phyma crassifolium.
estuary. Here the slowing down of water currents permits Until the 19th century introduction of Spartina
the deposition of fine sediments and the building up of alterniflora into Europe from North America, only S. mar-
extensive, gently sloping beaches. The growth of the itima, a small species rarely exceeding 0.2 m in height,
plants can usually keep pace with sediment deposition so was found in northwest Europe. However, Spartina has
that over long periods of time considerable accumulation only become a major component of the salt marsh vege-
of sediments and peat can occur, especially on shores tation since the appearance of the S. maritima — S. alterni-
where sea level is rising relative to the land. flora infertile hybrid, S. x townsendii, and the fertile
The vegetation patterns in marshes is influenced by a amphidiploid derived from it, S. anglica (Gray et al.,
complex of environmental factors including the frequency 1990). Since the first recorded occurrence of S. x townsen-
and range of the tides, salinity, microrelief, nature of the dii in 1870 (Marchant, 1967), the species has spread both
sediment, ice-scouring, and storms. In addition, historical as a result of deliberate plantings and natural dispersal to
Soft Shores 133

FIGURE 3.26 Diagram of the marshes of Sapelo Island, Georgia. The classic work of the Spartina marshes was carried out in the
watershed of the Duplin River, a brackish tidal stream that is tributary to Doboy Sound. (Redrawn from Wiegert, R.G., Pomeroy,
L.R., and Wiebe, W.T., Ecology of a Salt Marsh, Pomeroy, L.R. and Wiegert, R.G., Eds., Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1981. 9. With
permission.)

occupy an area of about 25,000 ha in northwest Europe. that are reached only by fortnightly spring tides. In such
S. x townsendii has been introduced into New Zealand areas increased salinity of the interstitial water due to
where the fertile S. anglica appears to have also arisen. evaporation from the marsh surface profoundly influences
In many parts of New Zealand, Spartina is now well the size and distribution of the dominant plants. The
established as a result of deliberate plantings and natural development of the levees also influences the tidal move-
spread (Odum et al., 1983). In Pelorus Sound on the north- ment of water over the marsh. A perched water table
ern coast of the South Island, S. anglica can establish itself behind the levees holds interstitial water that is more
on stony beaches where it accumulates sediment and saline than tidal water and largely anaerobic (Odum and
spreads to cover the original beach. Heald, 1975; Nestler, 1977). Depending on the conditions,
Spartina anglica generally occupies a zone on the shore different growth forms of S. alterniflora occur. Adjacent
between MHWN and MHWS, with occasional clumps to the creeks are found tall (>2 m), robust plants with low
above and below these limits. The frequency and periodic- densities (30 to 50 stems m–2). Behind the levees and at
ity of tidal submergence appears to be a important factor the head of the creeks, where sediment salinities average
in its distribution. On both the British (Gray et al., 1990) 35 to 40, are found short (25 cm), high density plants (up
and New Zealand shores (Odum et al., 1983), S. anglica to 300+ stems m–2).
invades mudflat zones not occupied by native macrophyte
species. The species composition of the benthic infauna is 3.5.5.3 Primary Production
different within the S. anglica from that on the open mud-
flats. In particular many polychaete and bivalve species are The primary productivity of salt marsh plants and the
eliminated. This is believed to have limited feeding oppor- factors affecting it have been extensively studied. The bulk
tunities for wading birds. However, documented evidence of the studies are for Spartina alterniflora, although there
of an impact on bird populations is rare, and the overwin- is a fair amount of information available for other species
tering populations of most species of waders have remained (see Turner, 1976; Long and Mason, 1983; Mitsch and
constant or increased in size on British shores since nation- Gosselink, 1986). Most of the production values have been
wide counts began in the early 1970s (Goss-Custard and calculated from changes in live and dead plant biomass
Moser, 1988). An exception is the Dunlin, Calidris alpina, over an annual cycle. In temperate regions the live biomass
the overwintering numbers of which had declined to almost increases during the growing season (spring to autumn)
half by 1988 since 1973–74 (Salmon and Moser, 1985). and the plants then flower and die. As the grass dies the
However, the decline may be due to a factor, or factors, live biomass decreases and the dead organic matter
unrelated to the spread of Spartina. increases. In spring the biomass of the dead grass
A characteristic feature of Spartina marshes is the decreases as it decomposes. However, in subtropical and
development of natural levees along the banks of tidal tropical regions there is some growth year-round. In addi-
creeks (Figure 3.28). As a result there are extensive areas tion not all salt marsh plants have distinct seasonal patterns
134 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.27 Some characteristic salt marsh vegetation patterns. A. Northern U.S. Atlantic coast. B. Southern U.S. Atlantic coast.
C. Northern U.S. Pacific coast. D. Ashmead Knysna Estuary, South Africa. (A, B, and C redrawn from Gallagher, J.L., in Coastal
Ecosystem Management, Clark, J.R., Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York. 1977, 754 and 755. With permission. D redrawn from Day,
J.H., in Estuarine Ecology with Special Reference to South Africa, Day, J.H., Ed., A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam, 1981, 92. With
permission.)

of growth, and there are also distinct differences in both duction using destructive (harvesting) techniques. These
live and dead biomass between streamside and inland are: (1) estimation of live dry weight; (2) estimation of
marsh areas due to a complex of factors such as tidal maximum standing crop; and (3) maximum-minimum
flooding, and the nutrient chemistry, salinity, and redox (i.e., the maximum biomass reached during the year —
potential of the sediment. the minimum biomass recorded during the year). These
Long and Mason (1983) have reviewed the various techniques assume that no material is lost before maxi-
methodologies used for the estimation of marsh plant pro- mum biomass has been reached, but this clearly is not the
Soft Shores 135

FIGURE 3.28 Schematic cross-section through the Sapelo Island salt marsh, showing levee and low marsh with tall Spartina
alterniflora, and high marsh with short S. alterniflora. The level reference line is approximately at mean high water. (Redrawn from
Wiegert, R.G., Pomeroy, L.R., and Wiebe, W.J., The Ecology of a Salt Marsh, Pomeroy, L.R. and Wiegert, R.G., Eds., Springer-
Verlag, Berlin, 1981. With permission.)

case. Thus most of the estimates of production using these minor contribution when the huge area occupied by
techniques are underestimates of the overall production. S. alterniflora is considered.
Consequently a number of methods have been developed Hatcher and Mann (1975) have compared the produc-
to overcome this (e.g., Smalley’s method; Smalley, 1959). tion of various salt marshes along the Atlantic and Gulf
One technique determines the changes in both live and coasts of the U.S. They record a net production of 289 g
dead standing crop at regular intervals and the use of C m- 2 yr–1 in Nova Scotia, a minimum of 133 g C m–2 yr–1
techniques to estimate the loss of both live and dead stand- in New Jersey, and a maximum of 1,153 g C m–2 yr–1 in
ing crop at regular intervals between sampling dates Georgia. In spite of local variations it is apparent that
(Wiegert and Evans, 1964). Other techniques include dif- production increases toward the tropics.
ferent types of tagging to measure increase in height, Long and Woolhouse (1983) and Knox (1983c) give
diameter, and number of leaves, as well as the disappear- data for the production of Spartina anglica in England
ance of individual plants and leaves (Hopkinson et al., and New Zealand. Production for this species in the Hum-
1978). Hopkinson et al. (1978) found that the different ber estuary, England, was 900 g C m–2 yr–1, while the same
techniques for measuring annual net production in Lous- species in Pelorus Sound, New Zealand, had a very similar
iana gave highly variable results. Gas-exchange measure- production of 955 g C m–2 yr–1.
ments have generally given results which are in close Production varies widely over a given marsh depend-
agreement with the harvest techniques (Houghton and ing on the duration of tidal inundation, drainage, substra-
Woodwell, 1980). A comparison of the various methods tum elevation gradient, age of the marsh, sediment nutrient
can be found in Kirby and Gosselink (1976), Hopkinson status, and salinity. In Spartina marshes, as mentioned
et al. (1978), Linthurst and Reimold (1978), Shew et al. above, the plants tend to be taller and more productive
(1981), and Long and Mason (1983). along the edges of the creeks (low marsh), and shorter and
Aboveground production: At least 90% of the work less productive as distance from the creek increases (high
carried out on salt marsh productivity has been carried out marsh). Gallagher et al. (1986) found an almost 2.5-fold
in North America and the majority of this is concentrated difference in the production of tall and short S. alterni-
on Spartina alterniflora. Most of the values in the litera- flora. The tall Spartina has a mean biomass of 1,966 g
ture are for net production calculated from changes in the dry wgt m–2, while the shortest stands back from the creeks
aboveground live and dead biomass over an annual cycle. had only 397 g dry wgt m–2. In the Pelorus marsh, New
Table 3.18 lists organic production estimates for emergent Zealand, tall S. anglica had a biomasses ranging from 932
macrophyte species from a range of localities. From this to 1,368 g dry wgt m–2, whereas the short form had bio-
table it can be seen that not only are there wide variations masses ranging from 215 to 766 g dry wgt m–2 .
in productivity between species, but that there is also Belowground production: The estimation of below-
variation within individual species. Species with the high- ground production presents a number of difficulties. Sam-
est productivity are Distichlis spicata (4,214 g C m–2 yr–1), pling is a problem, especially in species where much of
Spartina cynoduroides (5,996 g C m–2 yr–1), and Spartina the belowground material consists of large, irregularly
patens (3,824 g C m–2 yr–1). However, in terms of total distributed components such as tubers and rhizomes. Table
contribution to overall marsh production along the east 3.19 lists data for belowground productivity for ten marsh
coast of North America, these species make a relatively species along the east coast of North America. Estimates
136 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.18
Aboveground Primary Production Estimates for Estuarine and Salt Marsh Plants
(g C m–2 year–1)
Locality Species Production Reference

North Carolina Juncus roemerianus 280–612 Waits (1967), Foster (1968, 1982),
Stroud & Cooper (1968)
Florida Juncus roemerianus 425 Heald (1969)
East and Gulf coasts, U.S. Spartina alterniflora 220–2,000 Smalley (1959), Williams &
Murdock (1969), Kirby (1972),
Odum & Fanning (1973)
Long Island, North Carolina Spartina patens 650 Odum (1983)
Spartina patens with 670 Waits (1967)
Scitpus robustus
California Spartina foliosa 108–276 Marshall & Park (1976)
Sapelo Island, Georgia Spartina alterniflora
short 520 Gallagher et al. (1973),
tall 1,480 Linthurst & Reimhold (1978b)
Distichus spicata 4,214
Spartina cynosauroides 5,996
Spartina patens 3,824
Sporobolus virginicus 1,372
England Spartina anglica 900 Long & Woolhouse (1983)
New Zealand Spartina anglica 950 Odum et al. (1983)
Oregon Mixed communities 92–1,130 Eilers (1979)
(Carex, Jucus, Scirpus)
California Salicornia virginica 3,844 Packham & Liddle (1970)

are variable, ranging from 0.22 to 4.78 for the tall form were 1.42 yr–1 for S. cynosuroides and 3.22 yr–1 for
of S. alterniflora, to 0.45 to 6.2 for short form. In general S. alterniflora.
belowground production is higher in the short Spartina. Root-to-shoot ratios: Root:shoot ratios in marsh spe-
Pomeroy et al. (1981) list estimates for the under- cies reflect differences between species and difference in
ground production of seven marsh plants on the Sapelo plants of the same species growing in different environ-
Island marsh. While the belowground production was the ments. Table 3.20 gives root:shoot ratios for four species
same for both short and tall S. alterniflora, the below- of marsh plants along the western Atlantic coast of the U.S.,
ground production of the former was 59% of the total along with data from other localities. Most estimates range
production compared to only 34% for the latter. For the from 1.2 to 5.4 for the short form of S. alterniflora, and
other species, apart from Juncus roemerianus, the below- 0.5 to 8.25 for the tall form, although ratios as high as 50
ground production was small compared to that of the have been reported for the short form (Gallagher, 1974).
aboveground. Generally in the same marsh, the ratios are much higher
Recently Schubauer and Hopkinson (1984) estimated for the short form than for the tall one. Values for the rush,
above- and belowground emergent macrophyte production Juncus roemerianus, range from 0.80 to 8.7. In the Pelorus
and turnover in a coastal marsh system in Georgia, U.S.A. marsh, New Zealand, the ratios for the short and tall forms
Peak live aboveground biomass was 1.6 times higher for of S. angelica were 11.6 and 1.7, respectively.
Spartina cynosuroides than for S. alterniflora. Live biom-
ass was 2.4 times more belowground for S. cynosuroides 3.5.5.4 Factors Affecting Production
and 1.7 times for S. alterniflora. They found that rhizomes
made up 76 and 87% of the live belowground biomass Within salt marshes there is considerable spatial and tem-
during the year. Belowground production was measured poral environmental heterogeneity, much of which is
with a technique that partially accounted for midseason related to the frequency and duration of tidal cover. E.P.
decomposition. Total plant production was estimated to Odum (1969) has described salt mashes as pulse-stabilized
be 7,620 g dry wgt m–2 yr–1 for S. alterniflora and 7,708 systems due to the tidal regime that limits the type of
g dry wgt m–2 yr–1 for S. cynosuroides. Belowground pro- vegetation at particular levels. In addition to tidal rise and
duction was roughly 1.6 times that of aboveground pro- fall, a variety of other factors influence the growth and
duction. Turnover rates for belowground live material productivity of salt marsh plants. Changes in the physical
Soft Shores 137

TABLE 3.19
Belowground Production Estimates for Salt Marsh Species at Several
Locations along the Atlantic Coast of the U.S.
Production
Species (kg m–2 year–1) Location Reference

Borrichia frutescens 0.28 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)


Distichlis spicata 1.07 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
3.20 Delaware Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
2.78 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1979)
Juncus gerardia 4.29 Delaware Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
1.62 Maine Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Jumcus roemerianus 1.36 Mississippi de la Cruz and Hackney (1977)
4.4–7.6 Alabama Stout (1978)
3.36 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Phragmites communis 3.65 Delaware Gallagher and Plumley (1079)
2.81 New Jersey Good and Walker (1977)
Salicornia virginus 0.41 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
1.43 Delaware Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Spartina alterniflora
Tall form 2.1 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
0.5 North Carolina Stroud (1976)
2.9 New Jersey Good (1977)
3.3 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1979)
2.4 New Jersey Good and Walker (1977)
3.5 Massachusetts Valiela et al. (1976)
0.22 Maine Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Short form 2.02 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
0.56 North Carolina Smith and Odum (1981)
0.46 North Carolina Stroud (1976)
3.2 New Jersey Good (1977)
2.4 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1979)
2.3 New Jersey Smith et al. (1979)
3.6–6.2 Alabama Stout (1978)
Spartina cynosuroides 2.2 Mississippi de la Cruz and Hackney (1977)
3.56 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Spartina patens 0.31 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
0.47 Delaware Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
2.5 Massachusetts Valiela et al. (1979)
0.54 Maine Gallagher and Plumley (1979)
Sporobolis virginus 0.58 Georgia Gallagher and Plumley (1979)

or chemical environment include solar radiation, temper- Heat energy controls the process of evaporation
ature, nutrient concentrations, sediment type, drainage, that brings about the transport of nutrients and
oxygen concentration, and pH. The individual plant spe- essential elements from the sediment to the
cies in a marsh differ in their reaction to these factors. leaves in the replacement of the water lost by
Here we will consider the ways in which these factors evapotranspiration. Solar radiation, tempera-
interact to determine the nature of the salt marsh plant ture, and evaporations act together to produce
community (Figure 3.29). differences in salt marsh production over a lat-
itudinal gradient as discussed above for salt
1. Solar radiation, temperature, and evapotranspi- marsh production along the U.S. Atlantic coast.
ration: The levels of solar radiation impact 2. Salinity: There is considerable literature on the
directly on photosynthetic rates. They also affect salinity relationships and physiological
plants indirectly because changes in radiation responses of halophytes to salinity gradients, and
lead to changes in temperature, and temperature I do not propose to discuss them in detail here.
directly affects the rate of metabolic processes. Readers are referred to Waisel (1972) and Chap-
138 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.20
Some Published Root:Shoot Ratios for Salt Marsh Plants
Species Ratio Location Reference

Distichlis spicata 7.2 Georgia Gallagher et al. (1978)


4.5 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1982)
Juncus roemerianus 0.80 Mississippi de la Cruz and Hackney (1977)
3.26 Alabama Stout (1978)
3.7–8.7 Florida Kruczyzsko et al. (1978)
8.2 Georgia Gallagher (1974)
Spartina alterniflora
Tall 1.43 Georgia Gallagher (1974)
0.3–0.4 North Carolina Stroud (1976)
4.53 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1979)
8.25 Massachusetts Valiela et al. (1978)
Short 3.72 Alabama Stout (1978)
48.90 Georgia Gallagher (1974)
1.2–1.3 North Carolina Stroud (1976)
4.7 New Jersey Smith et al. (1979)
5.24 New Jersey Good and Frasco (1979)
Sportina anglica
Tall 1.7–1.9 New Zealand Knox (1983d)
Short 8.6–20.0 New Zealand Knox (1983d)
Juncus maritimus 4.1 New Zealand Knox (1983d)
Leptocarpus simplex 3.4 New Zealand Knox (1983d)

man (1974) for details. At high salinities, osmotic 3. Aeration: The amount of oxygen present in the
stress (resulting in reduced water uptake) and cell sediment has been found to have a positive
membrane damage are likely to be limited. Halo- effect on the growth of S. alterniflora (Lin-
phytes seem to deal with osmotic stress by selec- thurst, 1979, 1980a) and other marsh plants
tively concentrating preferred ions, while they (Linthurst and Seneca, 1981). Thus, maximum
have evolved metabolic adaptations to deal with growth occurs in oxygenated sediments, and the
high salt concentrations. In addition they have H2S produced in anaerobic sediments inhibits
the capacity to remove salt via salt glands respiration and nutrient uptake. Sediment drain-
(Waisel, 1972), hence the salt deposits often age is an important factor affecting oxygen con-
found on the tips of S. alterniflora leaves. centrations and the growth of marsh plants.
The effect of salinity on the growth and dis- Well-drained sediments have higher oxygen
tribution of Spartina alterniflora has been levels because the air spaces can hold atmo-
intensively studied. Mooring et al. (1971) found spheric oxygen, and streamside marshes gener-
that S. alterniflora grows best at a salinity of ally have the best drainage. Field studies have
10. Nestler (1977) found that the interstitial shown that reduced drainage conditions result
water in the sediments of the Sapelo Island in a decrease in the total biomass of S. alterni-
marshes formed salinity clines across the flora (Mendelssohn and Seneca, 1980; Lin-
marsh, with the lowest average values in the thurst and Seneca, 1981). Wiegert et al. (1981)
creek beds with increasing values with increas- have found that increasing sediment drainage
ing distance from the creeks. Biomass, height, in an intermediate-height S. alterniflora marsh
and leaf area (but not shoot number) were all increased plant biomass beyond that of an adja-
negatively correlated with salinity. Linthurst cent undisturbed plot, and shifted a number of
(1980a), working in North Carolina, found that other characteristics toward typical tall S.
salinity increases of 15 decreased biomass, den- alterniflora.
sity, and mean height of S. alterniflora and sed- 4. Tidal inundation: In Long Island Sound, where
iment MOM (macroorganic matter, i.e., > the tidal range changes from 0.7 near the mouth
2 mm) an average of 42, 32, 22, and 37%, to 2.26 m near the head of the inlet, Steever et
respectively. An increase in salinity from 15 to al. (1976) found that marsh productivity was
45 decreased biomass, density, mean height, correlated with tidal range, the correlation coef-
and MOM 66, 53, 38, and 61%, respectively. ficient being better than 0.96. They also found
Soft Shores 139

that there was a 26% reduction in the produc- thesis. In C3 plants it is phosphoglyceric acid
tivity of a gated marsh compared to an adjacent and for C4 plants it is oxalocetic acid. C4 plants
ungated one. An analysis of a variety of data have much higher light and temperature satura-
from the North American Atlantic coast fitted tion levels than C3 plants. For example the sum-
the trend of increasing productivity with mer temperature optimum for S. alterniflora (a
increasing tidal height. Odum (1969; 1974) C4 plant) is 30 to 35°C while that of Juncus
refers to tidal energy as an “energy subsidy,” roemerianus (a C3 plant) is 25°C. As a conse-
performing the work of mineral cycling, food quence, as temperature or light rises, the pho-
transport, waste removal, etc. He claims that: “It tosynthetic rate for C3 plants levels off earlier
is clear that the energy subsidy provided by the than that of C4 plants. There is also less water
tidal flow more than compensates for the energy transpired per unit of photosynthesis in C4
drain of osmoregulation required by a high plants. Since C4 plants (especially S. alterni-
salinity environment.” As Mann (1982) points flora) constitute the great bulk of the salt marsh
out, this energy subsidy theory is an attractive plants, this is an important factor in their high
one, but the evidence is mainly correlational, productivity of salt marshes.
and as we have seen there are other factors 8. Synthesis: Chambers (1982) has advanced a
involved in determining marsh productivity. model (Figure 3.29) of the interactions between
5. pH: In laboratory experiments, Linthurst the factors which affect S. alterniflora growth,
(1980b) found that S. alterniflora growth was either directly or indirectly. Edaphic factors
optimal at pH 6 as compared to pH 4 and 8. control the heterogeneity in height, biomass,
Short S. alterniflora with its shallow root sys- and productivity. Field and laboratory studies
tem may be subjected to changing pH when have shown that salinity is an important factor
periods of high temperature, low tides, and rain- that can influence S. alterniflora growth,
fall prevail. S. alterniflora was found to be although there are some marshes where both
inhibited at pH 8, a pH observed in areas subject tall and short forms occur in the absence of
to dieback in a North Carolina marsh (Linthurst salinity gradients.
and Seneca, 1981).
6. Nutrients: There have been numerous investi- Fertilization experiments have shown that the growth
gations of the impact of nutrients, especially of tall S. alterniflora is not nitrogen limited, but that the
nitrogen, on the growth of marsh plants (e.g., productivity of the short form can be increased by nitrogen
Sullivan and Daiber, 1974; Broome et al., 1975; additions. Other studies have shown that the apparent
Haines and Dunn, 1976; Mendelssohn, 1979; nitrogen limitation in the short form is not due to the
Valiela and Teal, 1979b; Buresh et al., 1980). shortage of available nitrogen, but to an attenuation in
In laboratory experiments, it was found that an nitrogen uptake kinetics. Salinity stress-caused diversion
increase in nitrogen from a natural level to 168 of nitrogen to the production of osmotica can also reduce
kg ha–1 increased biomass, density, and mean the amount of nitrogen available for growth.
height 2.02, 1.46, and 1.26 times (Linthurst, High sulfide concentrations and consequent low oxi-
1980b; Linthurst and Seneca, 1981). High lev- dation-reduction potentials in the rhizosphere can affect
els of N and aeratioin together, in comparison nitrogen-uptake kinetics. High sulfide and anoxia can also
with low levels of both if these, produced cause structural damage or changes in the roots, which
increases of 4.53, 2.71, 1.88, and 2.24 times in could affect nutrient uptake. Sediment drainage, iron con-
biomass, density, mean height, and macroor- centrations, oxygen diffusion from S. alterniflora roots,
ganic matter. High levels of N and aeration and plant productivity itself can all affect sulfide concen-
together, in comparison with low levels of both trations and redox potentials.
of these, produced increases of 4.53, 2.71, 1.88,
and 2.24 times in biomass, density, mean 3.5.5.5 Marsh Estuarine Carbon Fluxes
height, and macroorganic matter.
7. Photosynthetic pathways: A major factor that Marshes are inundated on each tide and the tidal ebb and
is partly responsible for the high productivity flow have the potential to exchange dissolved and partic-
of salt marshes is that many species of marsh ulate organic matter between the marshes and the adjoin-
plants have C4 biochemical pathways of photo- ing estuarine waters. These exchanges have been the focus
synthesis. C4 plants have higher levels of pro- of much research over the past few decades (early studies
duction than the other group of plants, the C3 reviewed by Nixon, 1980; later studies include Roman and
plants. The distinction refers to the number of Daiber, 1989; Dame et al., 1991b, and Williams et al.,
carbon atoms in the initial product of photosyn- 1992). The early studies suggested that there could be
140 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.29 Relationship between factors directly and indirectly affecting the growth of Spartina alterniflora. Solid lines are
positive effects, dashed lines are negative effects. (Redrawn from Chambers, A.G., in Estuarine Comparisons, Kennedy, V.S., Ed.,
Academic Press, New York, 1982, 239. With permission.)

large-scale exportation of organic material from the creek, oyster reef, tall marsh, mid-marsh, and short marsh.
marshes to adjacent waters (Odum and de la Cruz, 1967), The areas of each subdivision and their annual primary
a view that became widely referred to as the “outwelling production are given in Table 3.21. Total annual primary
hypothesis” (Odum, 1980; Dame et al., 1986). However, production was 1.61 × 106 kg C, with 6.7 × 105 kg C of
controversy has arisen as to the correctness of the original this contributed by the aboveground production. Figure
hypothesis, and while a number of studies (e.g., Nixon and 3.30 depicts the carbon fluxes between the marsh, oyster
Ovaitt, 1973; Axelrod, 1974; Knox, 1983a: Dame et al., reef, the creek, sediments, and the North Inlet. Only about
1991b) have documented exports of organic carbon, others 10% of the total carbon produced within the system was
(e.g., Nadeau, 1972; Heinle and Flemer, 1976b; Woodwell exported (1.6 × 105 kg C/1.61 × 106 kg C), which repre-
et al., 1977; Valiela et al., 1978; Haines, 1979) were unable sents about 14% of the aboveground production. Since
to measure net export from tidal wetlands. As Odum et al. there is very little peat formation in this system most of
(1979) point out, the export/import debate has been con- the remaining organic carbon must be decomposed in situ.
fused by the varied use of the term “export.” To some, From Figure 3.30 it can be seen that only a small amount
export is simply the transfer of marsh-produced organic of the carbon exported in the tidal water was from the salt
carbon and nutrients to nearby water bodies such as tidal marsh. Most of the carbon export (89%) from the basin
creek systems. To others this same term applies to the long- can be accounted for by primary production of phy-
range movement of particulate and organic carbon and toplankton, macroalgae, and benthic microalgae within
nutrients out of the estuaries into adjacent coastal waters. the creek.
This latter view will be considered in Section 4.11. Table 3.22 summarizes data on organic carbon fluxes
The bulk of the studies on export/import have been from salt marshes and comparisons of TOC fluxes with
conducted on the east coast of the U.S.A. and most of net aerial production. From this table it can be seen that
these, in turn, have focused on low elevation Spartina the TOC export as a percentage of the net primary pro-
alterniflora marshes (exceptions include Kokkinn and duction varies from as low as 3% to as high as 63%. Values
Allanson, 1985; Abd Aziz and Nedwell, 1986; Baird and for TOC fluxes range from an import of 123 g C m–2 yr–1
Winter, 1989). Only a limited number of investigations to an export of 486 g C m–2 yr–1. However, these global
have been conducted on high elevation marshes (excep- export/import values do not reflect the true export picture.
tions include Borey et al., 1983; Jordon and Correll, 1991; When time series plots of the data are made (Figure 3.31)
Taylor and Allanson, 1993). Along the east coast of the it can be seen that in most systems there is a varied pattern
United States, high elevation marshes are characterized over a year with both import and export showing pro-
by the macrophytes Spartina patens, Distichilis spicata, nounced seasonal peaks. Overall, the carbon exports are
and Juncus spp., while low marshes are typically vegetated a function of the relative sizes of the marsh and the adja-
solely by S. alterniflora. High marshes occur above mean cent open water systems.
high water (MHW), while low marshes can extend from Taylor and Allanson (1995) investigated tidal fluxes of
MHW to mean low water (MLW) (McKee and Patrick, total (TOC), dissolved (DOC), and suspended particulate
1988). High marshes are flooded less frequently, and for (POC) organic carbon between a high Sarcocornia perennis
shorter periods than low marshes. — Chenolea diffusa salt marsh and the Karienga estuary,
Dame et al. (1991b) investigated the processing of South Africa. The marsh showed an annual export of TOC
carbon by the Bly Creek salt marsh-estuarine ecosystem of +16 g C m–2 yr–1, with 80% of this occurring in the
in North Inlet, South Carolina. For the purposes of the dissolved form. These fluxes were similar to those reported
study, the area was subdivided into the following regions: for high elevation Spartina patens and Distichlis spicata
Soft Shores 141

TABLE 3.21
Net Primary Production in the Bly Creek Basin
Area Phytoplanktona Microbenthicb Macrobenthicc Grassd Total
Subsystem (m2) (gC m–2 yr–1) (gC m–2 yr–1) (gC m–2 yr–1) (gC m–2 yr–1) (gC yr–1)

Creek 1.28 × 105 265 400 450 0 1.43 × 108


Oyster reef 1.00 × 103 0 400 790 0 1.19 × 106
Tall marsh 3.99 × 104 0 400 290 2078 1.10 × 108
Mid-marsh 8.46 × 104 0 400 20 666 1.19 × 107
Short marsh 4.06 × 105 0 400 10 2888 1.34 × 109
Total system 6.61 × 105 1.61 × 109
a Sellner et al. (1976).
b Zingmark unpubl.
c Coutinho (1987).
d Dame & Kenny (1986).

Source: From Dame, R.F., Spurrier, J.D., Williams, T.M., Kjerfve, B., Zingmark, R.G., Wolaver, T.G., Chzanowski,
T.H., McKellar, H.N., and Vernberg, F.J., Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser., 72, 160, 1991. With permission.

marshes on the east coast of the U.S.A. Borey et al. (1983) for Coon Creek (Borey et al., 1983), but is much smaller
documented TOC exports of +25 g C m–2 yr–1 from Coon than the 21 to 24% (Dame et al., 1991b; Williams et al.,
Creek, a high marsh in Texas, United States, while Jordan 1992) and 43% (Dame et al., 1986) reported for low
and Correll (1991) reported a similar export of +49 g C marshes. This suggests that for high marshes a relatively
m–2 yr–1 from a high marsh in the Rhode River, Maryland, large proportion of the macrophyte production is “con-
U.S.A. These fluxes, however, are an order of magnitude sumed” by the marsh by respiration or burial processes. A
smaller than for most low S. alterniflora marshes. carbon budget for the Karienga marsh indicated that the
The TOC exports from the Karienga marsh amounted respiration was the larger of the two pathways of carbon
to about 6% of its macrophyte production, and is the lowest consumption. Respiration by marsh sediments (+189 g C
percentage reported in Table 3.22. It is similar to the 13% m–2 yr–1) and to a lesser extent by marsh crabs (+27 g C

FIGURE 3.30 Carbon fluxes for the Bly Creek system, North Inlet. All production values are for net primary production adjusted
for area. Total system area is 6.612 × 105 m–2. Redrawn from Dame, R.F., Spurrier, T.R., Williams, T.M., Kjerfve, T.H., McKellar,
H.N., and Vernberg, F.J., Mar. Ecol. Progr. Ser., 72, 160, 1991. With permission.
142

TABLE 3.22
Summary of Organic Carbon Fluxes from Salt Marshes, and Comparison of TOC Fluxes with Net Aerial Primary Production
Organic Carbon Flux Net Aerial Primary TOC Export as % of
Production Net Aerial Primary
System DOC POC TOC (g C m–2 yr–1) Production Form of Marsh Source

Ware Creek, Virginia, USA +80 +35 +115 599 19 Spartina alterniflora Axelrad et al. (1976)
Carter Creek, Virginia, USA +25 +116 +142 599 24 Spartina alterniflora Axelrad et al. (1976)
Flax Pond, New York, USA +8 –61 –53 372 na Spartina alterniflora Woodwell et al. (1979)
Canary Creek, Delaware, USA +104 +55 +159 252 63 Spartina alterniflora Roman and Daiber (1989)
Coon Creek, Texas, USA +21 +4 +25 550–900 3–5 Spartina patens Borey et al. (1983)
Distichlis spicata
High Marsh, Rhode River, Maryland, USA +43 +14 +57 nd nd Spartina patens Jordan et al. (1983)
+49 Distichlis spicata Jordan and Correll (1991)
Ems-Dollard, Marsh, The Netherlands +15 –140 –125 500 na Puccinellietum maritima Dankers et al. (1984)
Spartina anglica
North Inlet, South Carolina, USA +328 +128 +456 1059 na Spartina alterniflora Dame et al. (1986)
Bly Creek, South Carolina, USA +250 –31 +219 1028a 21 Spartina alterniflora Williams et al. (1992)
+272 –30 +242 1028a 24 Dame et al. (1991b)
Kariega Marsh, South Africa +13a +3a +16a 200–300 5–8 Spartina perennis Taylor and Allanson (1995)
Chenolea diffusa

Note: Because patterns of fluxes of DOC and POC can be different, and certain studies measured only one, only the data from those studies that measured both components are included,
nd: not applicable; – values net imports: + values net exports.
a Area-weighted aerial production values for tall, medium, and short forms of Spartina; areas from Dame et al. (1991).
The Ecology of Seashores
Soft Shores 143

ence between the two marsh types is probably a function


of their different elevations and degree of water exchange
with adjoining systems. The high marshes are inundated
only at spring tides. This infrequent inundation means that
they do not support high benthic microalgal populations.
Primary production of benthic microalgae has been shown
to be correlated with sediment water content (Sullivan and
Moncreif, 1980). In addition the plants on the high marshes
form dense canopies that have a greater shading effect than
that of the low marsh S. alterniflora. They also trap
detached material in contrast to the vertical canopies of the
low marsh (Borey et al., 1983) facilitating decomposition
within the marsh rather than in the adjoining estuary.
Chambers et al. (1985) summarizes data on the con-
centrations of particulate and dissolved organic carbon in
the Duplin River and Sapelo Island marshes, the tidal
exchange of POC and DOC in the marsh, the standing
stock and movement of S. alterniflora wrack, and the
removal of carbon from the surface of the marsh by rain.
Figure 3.32 is a diagramatic representation of the carbon
cycle in the Sapelo Island marsh. Carbon enters the system
as CO2 fixed by S. alterniflora (and a smaller amount fixed
by algae). Anaerobic degradation releases both CO2 and
methane. Material is eroded from the surface of the marsh
and washed into the creeks and the upper Duplin River
by rain. Some of this material diffuses downstream or is
flushed out by severe rainstorms, leaving as exported POC,
DOC, and some algae and other microorganisms. The bulk
of the material, however, is picked up on flood tides and
deposited on the marsh. In the course of this cyclic dep-
osition and erosion, aerobic degradation can release CO2
from the water and allow incorporation of carbon into
mobile migrant organisms that can leave the system.
Organisms that feed in the marsh during high tide and
then return to tidal creeks and rivers during ebb tide may
move substantial amounts of carbon off the marsh in their
FIGURE 3.31 Time-series plots of the relative magnitude guts, and then release much of it into the water as feces.
(within each data set) of the export and import of particulate
In addition, shrimp that feed in the marsh and tidal creeks
organic carbon over an annual cycle reported for several marshes
along the Atlantic coast of the U.S. The measurements do not
as juveniles move out of the system as adults, accounting
include nekton, large “rafts” of Spartina, or bed load transport. for the removal of some carbon. Female blue crabs that
In some cases the original paper did not present a plot of the leave the creeks and rivers to spawn seldom return. This
data, and in others the data were displayed in different forms is another source of carbon removal.
(linear interpolations or polynomial regressions). Data for Great
Sippewissett from Valiela et al. (1978); for Flax Pond from 3.5.6 MANGROVE SYSTEMS
Woodwell and Whitney (1977), Woodwell et al. (1977), and
Woodwell et al. (1979); for Gott’s Marsh from Heinle et al. 3.5.6.1 Introduction
(1976); for York River marshes from Moore (1974). (Redrawn
from Nixon, S.W., in Estuarine and Wetland Processes, Hamil- Soft sediment tropical and subtropical coasts are charac-
ton, P. and MacDonald, K., Eds., Plenum Press, New York, 1980, terized by dense growth of shrubs and trees usually
487. With permission.) referred to as mangrove swamps or mangrove forests. The
term “mangrove” refers to two different concepts. First it
m–2 yr–1) accounted for 70% of the macrophyte production. describes an ecological group of halophytic shrubs and
This value is less than half of the approximately 76% tree species belonging to some 12 genera in eight different
calculated to be available for export from the low elevation families of plants (Waisel, 1972). In another sense the term
Bly Creek marsh (Dame et al., 1986; 1991b). The differ- refers to the complex of plant communities fringing trop-
144 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.32 Diagrammatic representation of the carbon cycle in the Sapelo Island, Georgia, salt marshes.

ical and subtropical shores. Chapman (1977) prefers to For reviews of the ecology of mangroves, readers are
refer to these communities or formations as “mangals” referred to MacNae (1968), Lugo and Snedaker (1974),
(MacNae, 1968; Chapman, 1977), reserving the term man- Walsh (1974) Chapman (1976b; 1977), Clough (1982),
grove for the individual species or genera. Here the term Teas (1983), Robertson and Alongi (1992), and Twilley et
mangrove system or mangrove ecosystem will be used. al. (1996).
Mangrove systems occur generally between 25°N and
25°S. On the east coasts of Africa, and in Australia and 3.5.6.2 Distribution and Zonation
New Zealand they extend 10 to 15° further south. Man-
groves (Avicennia marina) grow as far south as Ohiwa Mangrove systems range from the complex, species-rich
Harbour (30° 01’S) in New Zealand and Corner Inlet, assemblages such as those found on the west coast of
Victoria (38° 55’S) in Australia. In the United States black Malaysia, which may contain as many as 20 mangrove
mangrove shrubs occur along the northern coast of Mexico species, to ones composed of a single species such as the
at 29°N. The most luxuriant and diverse mangrove forests New Zealand Avicennia marina community. They grow
occur in Southeast Asia and northern Australia where no from the highest level of spring tides down to about mean
fewer than 36 species of true mangroves occur. Biogeog- sea level and are characteristically found on accreting
raphers recognize two main group of mangroves: the Old shores. MacNae (1968) and Saenger et al. (1977) give
World Group with about 60 species and the New World many examples of the zonation patterns of mangrove for-
Group with only about 10 species. It is believed that the ests. On some gently sloping tropical shores, the mangrove
center of evolution of mangroves was in the Indo-Malaya- system may extend up to 5 km from the seaward edge and
sian area from which they spread to other regions. may cover many thousands of hectares in a single estuary.

FIGURE 3.33 Zonation on a mangrove shore in Morrumbene Estuary, Mozambique, east coast of southern Africa. (Redrawn from
Day, J.H., in Estuarine Ecology with Special Reference to Southern Africa, Day, J.H., Ed., A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam, 1981d, 90.
With permission.)
145

A typical zonation pattern is illustrated by the man- pneumatophores, which grow vertically upwards from the
grove shore on Morrumbene Estuary in Mozambique on underground root system. The pneumatophores, prop
the east coast of southern Africa (Figure 3.33). From roots, and the boles of the trees are covered with moss-
extreme high water spring tide (EHWS) to mean high like growths of algae such as Bostrychia and Calloglossa.
water spring tide (MHWS), there is a diverse and variable Lugo and Snedaker (1974) classified the mangrove
assemblage of halophytes dominated by Sporobolus vir- systems of south Florida into six types (Figure 3.34),
ginicus, the glasswort, Sarcocornia, and the rush, Juncus depending on the specific situation in which they grow.
krausii. The region between MHWS to mean tide level Four species of mangrove (Rhizophora mangle, Avicennia
(MTL) is covered by a mature forest of mangroves. It germinans, Laguncularia racemosa, and Conocarpus
includes an upper fringe of Avicennia marina, thickets of errecta) occur in these in varying mixtures. The formation
Ceriops tagal, then Bruguiera and Rhizophora mucronata and physiognomy of these six types are apparently
in seepage channels, and a lower fringe of Avicennia and strongly controlled by the local pattern of tides and terres-
Sonneratia alba. The genera Bruguieria and Rhizophora trial surface drainage. This classification, with local vari-
can be distinguished by their prop roots, especially the ations, seems to apply the mangrove systems generally.
latter species in which the roots emerge from the trunk In the more diverse Malaysian mangrove systems,
high above the ground and arch downwards, forming a Watson (1928) recognized five zones based on the fre-
dense, almost impenetrable tangle that traps sediments. quency of inundation. Beginning at the lowest level these
The genus Avicennia has numerous breathing roots or are: (1) species growing on sediments flooded at all times:

FIGURE 3.34 The six mangrove community types. (Redrawn from Day, J.W., Jr., Hall, C.A.S., Kemp, W.M., and Yanez-Aranciba,
A., Estuarine Ecology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1987, 194. As modified from Lugo and Snedaker, 1974. With permission.)
146 The Ecology of Seashores

no species normally thrive under these conditions but gas exchange characteristics of three mangrove species
Rhizophora mucronata may; (2) species on sediments distributed along a salinity gradient in Florida. Thus “man-
flooded at medium tides: species of Avicennia, Sonneratia grove distribution (zonation?) can be viewed as an oppor-
griffithii, and bordering rivers, Rhizophora mucronata; (3) tunistic response of certain species to more or less favored
species on sediments flooded at normal high tides: most changing environmental conditions whose characteristics
mangroves, but species of Rhizophora tend to be domi- within a region are primarily controlled by past and
nant; (4) species on sediments flooded by spring tides present geomorphic processes” (Thom, 1982).
only: Bruguiera gymnorphiza, and B. cylindrica; and (5) Oliver (1982) has discussed the role of environmental
species on land flooded by equinoxal or other exceptional factors, with special reference to climate on the develop-
tides only: B. gymnorphiza dominant, but Rhizophora api- ment of mangrove systems. Figure 3.35 from Oliver sum-
culata and Xylocarpus granatum may coexist. marizes the interrelationships of the various factors. It can
Most of the ecological literature on mangroves is con- be seen that the system is characterized by a number of
cerned with descriptions of species composition and plant feedback loops, e.g., the establishment of a mature, well-
zonation patterns and is heavily weighted toward the clas- developed mangrove community has a modifying influ-
sical successional view (Chapman, 1970l; 1974; 1976a,b; ence on the very climate and other factors that brought
Walsh, 1974). This model emphasizes biotic processes about its initial development. From the diagram it can also
including sediment accumulation and plant community be seen that climate has many indirect effects on mangrove
changes from a pioneer through to a climax stage. The communities, particularly through its influence on the
schemes proposed were based on the frequency of inun- nature and scale of the geomorphic process outlined
dation, and salinity of the dominant tree species. above, as well as on the complex relationships of the
sediment biogeochemistry.
3.5.6.3 Environmental Factors
3.5.6.4 Adaptations
In recent years, in contrast to the older successional model,
an alternative one has been advanced that seems to better Mangroves live rooted in a saline anaerobic substrate;
fit the observed facts (Thom, 1967; 1974; 1981; 1982). abundant salt is usually toxic to woody plants, and oxygen
This alternative model views mangroves as opportunistic is necessary for root respiration, so the question is, how
species, colonizing available substrates. In this context do these plants persist, grow, and reproduce successfully?
mangroves zonation patterns are primarily seen as the In addition, the plants must cope with periodic fluctuations
result of the ecological responses of the species to external and extremes of the physicochemical parameters of their
conditions of sedimentation, microtopography, estuarine environment. Saenger (1982) has reviewed the morpho-
hydrology, and geochemistry (Thom, 1982). logical, anatomical, and reproductive adaptations of man-
According to Thom (1982) there are three major com- groves, while Clough et al. (1982) have done likewise for
ponents of the environmental setting of any locality in their physiological processes.
which mangroves occur: geophysical, geomorphic, and
biologic. The first of these includes a variety of physical 1. Leaf adaptations: The leaves of most man-
forces such as sea level change, climate, and tidal factors. groves exhibit a range of xeromorphic features,
The second component is essentially the product of the such as a thick-walled epidermis, thick waxy
physical forces. It includes factors such as the depositional cuticles, a tomentum of variously shaped hairs,
environment, the extent to which this is dominated by sunken stomata, and the distribution of cuti-
wave, tidal, or river processes, and the impact of the micro- nized and sclerenchymatous cells throughout
topography of particular landforms (e.g., river levees, the leaf. These are xeric characters that have
beach-ridge swales) on plant establishment, growth and developed in response to the physiological dry-
regeneration. Land surface elevation, drainage, and stabil- ness of the environment.
ity, in combination with substratum or sediment properties 2. Salt regulation: As a group, mangroves do not
(texture, composition, structure, etc.), nutrient inputs, and appear to be obligate halophytes, as many spe-
the salinity regime, combine to produce environmental cies grow well in freshwater. However, most
gradients within the coastal region. Different species, or species grow best at salinities over the range
different ecotypes within a species, according to their from freshwater to normal seawater (Clough et
physiological responses to the above factors, will establish al., 1982). As they normally grow in saline envi-
themselves where they find the combination of conditions ronments they absorb sodium and chloride ions,
favorable. Thus there are established species composition and they have evolved various physiological
and distribution patterns as well as gross and net produc- adaptations to control the uptake and concen-
tivity along environmental gradients. For example, Lugo tration of the ions in their tissues (Walsh, 1974).
et al. (1975) reported differential responses in the in situ The wide range of adaptations include the
147

FIGURE 3.35 Interrelationships of environmental factors in mangrove ecosystems. (Redrawn from Oliver, J., Mangrove Ecosystems
in Australia, Clough, B.F., Ed., Australian National University Press, Canberra, 1982, 29. With permission.)

capacity of the roots to discriminate against negatively geotrophic, unbranched (Avicennia,


NaCl (Chapman, 1976b), the possession by Xylocarpus), or branched (Sonneratia) arising
some species of salt-secreting glands in the from the cable root system; (3) knee roots, mod-
leaves (Clough et al., 1982; Saenger, 1982), the ified sections of the cable roots with a period
accumulation of salt in the leaves and bark of negative-geotrophic followed by a period of
(Chapman, 1976b), and the loss of salt when positive-geotrophic growth (Bruguiera, Ceri-
leaves and other organs are shed. ops, Lumnitzera); and (4) stilt roots, positively
3. Sediment adaptations: Adaptations that enable geotrophic arching (Rhizophora), or straight
mangroves to overcome the problems of anaer- (Ceriops), generally branched roots arising
obic sediments and of anchoring the plants in from the trunk and growing into the substrate.
often semifluid sediments include the some- The evidence that these structures are adapta-
times complicated root systems with their great tions for subterranean root aeration comes from
diversity of form and function and the almost a variety of sources. Firstly, those mangroves
universal presence of aerenchyma and lenticels. growing at lower tidal levels, and consequently
Below the sediment surface, all mangroves pos- the most frequently inundated, tend to posses
sess a system of laterally spreading cable roots the greatest array of root types. Secondly, the
with smaller descending anchor roots. The root presence within the aboveground roots of par-
system generally penetrates less than 2 m and enchymatous tissue, and the widespread occur-
tap roots have not been reported (Walsh, 1974). rence of numerous lenticels. The mechanism of
Despite the shallowness of the root system, the air intake by these roots through the develop-
belowground to aboveground biomass ment of a negative gas pressure has been inves-
(root:shoot ratio) is higher than that of other tigated by Scholander et al. (1962).
vegetation types. Most species of mangroves 4. Reproductive adaptations: In several genera the
possess, in varying combinations, the following fruits contain seeds that develop precociously
array of aboveground root types (Percival and while still attached to the tree. Some species,
Womersley, 1975): (1) surface cable roots e.g., Bruguiera, Ceriops, and Rhizophora, are
(Aegialtis, Excoecaria); (2) pneumatophores, viviparous in that the embryo ruptures the peri-
148 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.23
Mangrove Forest Biomass
Aboveground Biomass
Locality Latitude Mangrove Species g dry wgt m–2 g Cm–2 t ha–1 Reference

Panama 9°N Rhizophora brevistyla 27,921 11,168 279.2 Golley et al. (1975)
Thailand 8°N Rhizophora apiculata — — 159.0 Christensen (1978)
Puerto Rico 18°N Rhizophora mangle 6258 2514 62.9 Golley et al. (1962)
Phillipines 12°N Mixed mangrove species — — 45.9 de la Cruz and Banaag (1967)
Florida 26°N
Overwash Rhizophora mangle 11,958 4783 124.6 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Riverine Rhizophora mangle 9281 3928 118.9 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Riverine Rhizophora mangle 17,390 6956 136.0 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Succession Laguricularia racemusa 812 324 49.0 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Japan 24°N Rhizophora mucroriata — — 108.1 Suzuki and Tagawa (1983)
Briguiera gymnorhiza – — 97.6 Suzuki and Tagawa (1983)
Rhizophora + Briguiera — — 78.6 Suzuki and Tagawa (1983)
Australia
Sydney 34°N Avicennia marina — — 128.4 Briggs (1977)
Westernport Bay Avicennia marina 8600 3440 86.0 Clough and Attiwell (1975)
New Zealand 37°S
Upper Waitemata Harbour Avicennia marina 3887 1556 — Knox (1983b)
Tuff Crater Avicennia marina (tall) — — 104.1 Woodroffe (1982a)
Tuff Crater Avicennia marina (short) — — 6.8
Lucas Creek Avicennia marina 5619 2248 — Knox (1983b)

carp, and grows beyond it, sometimes to a con- Belowground biomass data are available from only a
siderable extent (MacNae, 1968). In other limited number of localities. Unlike temperate forests
species, e.g., Aegialtis, Avicennia, and Langvin- where roots seldom make up more than 20% of the total
cularia, the embryo, while developing within the biomass, mangroves have relatively high root:shoot ratios
fruit, does not enlarge sufficiently to rupture the varying from –.20 to 1.73 (Lugo and Snedaker, 1975;
pericarp; these genera are termed cryptovivipa- Clough and Attiwell, 1975). The reasons for such high
rous. Saenger (1982) has reviewed the signifi- ratios has been discussed above.
cance of viviparity in mangroves. Its adaptive Primary production: With few exceptions (Bunt et
significance could include rapid rooting, salt reg- al., 1979) net primary production of mangroves has been
ulation, ionic balance, the development of buoy- estimated from measurements of photosynthesis and res-
ancy, and nutritional parasitism. However, many piration of individual leaves or small branches (Golley, et
apparently successful mangrove species (e.g., al., 1962; Lugo and Snedaker, 1975). The estimates
Osbornia, Sonneratia, Lumnitzera, Xylocarpus, derived from this method generally fall within the range
and Excoecaria) do not possess viviparous that might be expected for a woody plant with the C3-
fruits. The propagules of all mangroves are pathway of carbon fixation. The studies, however, usually
buoyant and are adapted to water dispersal. do not include measurement of the respiration of parts of
the plants other than leaves. Lugo et al. (1975) suggest
3.5.6.5 Biomass and Production that 4 to 10% of gross primary production might be lost
Biomass: In 1974 Lugo and Snedaker (1974) reviewed via respiration from stems and surface roots. Values for
the then available data on the standing stocks of man- gross primary productivity range from 1.4 g C m–2 day–1
groves from a range of localities. In Table 3.23 their data to 13.9 g C m–2 day–1 , or 10.7 t ha–1 yr–1.
has been augmented by more recent studies. The biomass 3.5.6.6 Litterfall
data show considerable variability, but nevertheless some
general trends can be seen, e.g., tropical forests, with the Mangrove litter comprises leaves, twigs, inflorescences
greatest range of species and tree height, have the highest and fruits, and forms the primary source of organic detritus
aboveground biomass. The variability in the data is a in tropical estuaries. Gill and Tomlinson (1969) in their
reflection of the age, stand history, and structural differ- studies of red mangrove in southern Florida, found that
ences, as can be seen in the Florida forests (riverine, flowering, fruit formation, and leaf fall occurred at mea-
overwash, succession). surable rates in all seasons. However, peak rates of leaf
149

fall occurred during the summer months when air temper- groves, the fact that 94% of the basin was covered by low,
atures and incident light were at their annual peaks. The generally sparse mangroves resulted in an estimate for the
following are some case history studies of litterfall. 21.6 ha crater of 153 tons, an average of 7.6 t ha–1. Lit-
Tuff Crater, New Zealand: Woodroffe (1982a,b; terfall beneath the tall mangroves was estimated at 7.6 ±
1985) investigated litterfall in Tuff Crater near the south- 2.5 t ha–1 yr–1, and 3.3 ± 0.5 t ha–1 yr–1 beneath the short
ern latitudinal limit of mangroves in New Zealand. Here mangroves. The value for the taller mangroves was similar
the sole species, Avicennia marina var. resinifera, adopts to that reported for mangroves in many other parts of the
two distinct growth forms, taller tree-like mangroves up world, but because of the extensive low sparse mangroves,
to 4 m tall along the banks of the tidal creek, and low the total for the basin was estimated at 2.7 t ha–1 yr–1.
stunted shrub mangroves generally less than 1 m tall on Woodroffe (1985) also found that 78% of the total litterfall
the mudflats. Average aboveground biomass for the taller beneath the tall mangroves (2 to 4 m) and 69.2% beneath
mangroves was estimated to be 104 t ha–1 and for the lower the low mangroves (less than 1.5 m tall) were recorded
6.8 t ha–1. While the value for the taller mangroves was during the months of December to April (Figure 3.36).
similar to those reported for more complex tropical man- Storm events can have a marked impact on mangrove litter

FIGURE 3.36 Litterfall by components beneath tall and short mangroves in Tuff Crater, New Zealand (4 November
1980–2 November 1982). (Redrawn from Woodroffe, C.D., N.Z. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 16, 182, 1982b. With permission.)
150 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.37 A schematic representation of the cycling of litter from the K. candel mangroves of tidal shrimp pond at Mai Po.
(Redrawn from Lee, S.J., Est. Coastal Shelf Sci., 29, 85, 1989. With permission.)

production (Goulter and Alloway, 1979). A storm in Tuff grove systems, which are more open systems with much
Crater in April 1981 with wind speeds reaching 113 km greater tidal exchange and higher rates of export.
hr–1 accounted for a particularly large litterfall when over Frequent inundation hastens litter turnover in two
a period of a week 18% of the annual total was recorded. important ways. First, tidal inundation facilitates the
Hong Kong tidal shrimp pond: Lee (1989) investi- export of litter, especially the freshly fallen components
gated production and turnover of the mangrove, Kandelia (Boto and Bunt, 1981; Twilley, 1985). Second, a moist
candel, in a tidal shrimp pond (10 ha) at Mai Po Marshes, environment accelerates disappearance rates by enhancing
northwest Hong Kong for a period of two years (Figure microbial decomposition and promoting consumption by
3.37). Litter production averaged 11,070 t ha–1 (equivalent amphipods, gastropods, and brachyurans (Twilley et al.,
to 4.880 × 107 kcal ha–1), with wood and leaf materials 1986). In the Mai Pond system the daily export is very
contributing, respectively, 56.5 and 53.94% of the total. low, estimated to be 1.024 × 10–2 g dry wgt m–2, equivalent
The reproductive plus frass component contributed to about 0.34% of the daily litter production.
40.69%. The litterfall pattern was bimodal, with high Litter production estimates for a range of mangrove
inputs in spring (February to June) and late summer systems are given in Table 3.24. They range from 32 g m–2
(August to November). The mean standing litter biomass for succession forest in Florida to 10,210 g m–2 for a
recorded during the study was 9.587 ± 0.556 t ha–1 (4.969 Panamian forest. The contribution of leaf litter to total
× 107 kcal ha–1), with respective contributions by the three litterfall has been calculated to be 6.7 t ha–1 yr–1 in Thailand
components of 19.07, 432.26, and 38.65%. Residence (8°) (Christensen, 1978), 4.75 t ha–1 yr–1 in Puerto Rico
times (standing biomass/production) of the three compo- (Golley et al., 1962), and 5.62 t ha–1 yr–1 in Tuff Crater,
nents were extraordinarily long, and were estimated to be, New Zealand (Woodroffe, 1985). Total litterfall has been
respectively, 980, 300, and 252 days. Residence times investigated for a range of mangrove species on Hinchin-
were related to both inundation frequency and crab (Chi- brook Island, Great Barrier Reef, Australia (18°S) (Bunt,
romanthes spp.) consumption. As the Kandelia stands are 1982). Rates of total annual litterfall on a yearly basis
largely located above the mean high-water mark, there ranged from 365 to 2,810 g m–2 yr–1, with a mean of 2,280
was little export of litter. The litter production was largely g m–2 yr–1. Rates also varied between the different species.
decomposed or consumed by the macrofauna in situ cre-
ating a large energy sink, which was not coupled to the 3.5.6.7 The Fate of Mangrove Leaf Litter
adjacent waters.
Figure 3.37 is a schematic representation of the Early models of mangrove ecology built on findings from
cycling of litter within the system. This represents the Florida mangrove ecosystems were strongly influenced by
energy flow pattern typical of landward mangrove com- the salt marsh research along the Atlantic coast of North
munities. Due to the marked reduced inundation frequency America. In the Florida model, the production of organic
and duration in such forests, and in situ litter accumulation detritus from mangroves was considered to be little affected
and turnover, low export is characteristic of such systems, by biotic processes such as herbivory (Heald, 1971): the
resulting in internal cycling energy pathways. In addition bulk of the mangrove detritus being exported via tidal
such mangrove stands are subject to continuous accretion action to support consumers in the adjacent estuarine
due to the dominance of a mainly depositional sedimen- waters (Odum and Heald, 1972; 1975). However, recent
tary regime. This contrasts with riverine and fringing man- research on non-Florida mangroves (Robertson and Alongi,
151

TABLE 3.24
Mangrove Forest Litter Production
Litter Production
Locality Latitude Mangrove Species g dry wgt m–2 g Cm–2 Reference

Thailand 8°N Rhizophora apiculata 670 268 Christiansen (1978)


Rhizophora apiculata 340 — Poorvachiranan and Chansang (1982)
Panama 9°N Rhizophora brevistyla 10,210 4084 Golley et al. (1975)
Malaysia 12°N Rhizophora apiculata 1390 — Sasekumar and Loi (1983)
India 15°N Rhizophora officiralia 1020 — Wafar et al. (1997)
Rhizophora apiculata 1180 — Wafar et al. (1997)
Rhizophora macronala
Sonnerata alba 1700 — Wafar et al. (1997)
Puerto Rico 18°N Rhizophora mangle 1399 559 Golley et al. (1962)
Florida 26°N
Overwash Rhizophora mangle 4295 1718 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Riverine Rhizophora mangle 3393 1357 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Succession Rhizophora mangle 32 13 Lugo and Snedaker (1974)
Equator 2.25°N Rhizophora mangle 1054 — Twilley et al. (1997)
Rhizophora hurrisonii
Australia
Queensland 20°S Avicennia marina 960 384 Bunt (1982)
Sydney 34lS Avicennia marina 580 332 Briggs (1977)
Westernport Bay 38°S Avicennia marina 260 80 Clough and Attiwell (1975)
New Zealand 37°S Avicennia marina (tail) 810 324 Woodroffe (1982b)
Avicennia marina (short) 365 146 Woodroffe (1982b)

1992; Robertson et al., 1992; Lee, 1995; 1997; 1999) has metabolic processes or returned to the system through crab
led to a reappraisal of the nature and diversity of forces feces (67%). Some of this fecal material would eventually
shaping mangrove ecosystem structure and function. be exported from the mangroves. The above values are
As we have seen, mangrove systems produce consid- comparable to those obtained in the Coral Creek man-
erable quantities of litter. The question then is what is the groves in Queensland, which have similar inundation char-
fate of this litter? As discussed above a percentage of the acteristics, that is, inundation at most high tides (Robert-
litter will be exported (Table 3.25). Recent studies on trop- son, 1987). Robertson (1986) found that 28% (range 22 to
ical mangroves have demonstrated that sesarmine crabs 42%) of the annual leaf litter was removed by crabs. These
play a critical role in the fate of mangrove litter. Robertson figures are within the range of 10 to 48% reported by Jasper
(1986) estimated that these crabs (Sesarma spp.) could (1989). Boto and Bunt (1981), working on the same site,
remove >28% of the litter production in mixed Rhizophora estimated the export of macroscopic litter to be 19.5 kg
forests. This finding was later backed by similar findings ha–1 day–1 without taking into consideration crab activity.
from southeast Asia (e.g., Lee, 1989; 1997), Africa (e.g., Robertson (1986) modified Boto and Bunt’s (1981) figures
Emmerson and McGwynne, 1992; Steinke et al., 1993), to 15.3 kg ha–1 day–1, or 63% of the litter fall after taking
and Australia (Micheli, 1993). Recent studies in Latin into consideration removal by crabs. The export of leaf
America also suggested that crabs consume much of the litter was 7.7 kg ha–1 day–1 or 52% of leaf litter production.
mangrove leaf litter (Twilley et al., 1986; 1997). Jaspar From Table 3.26 it can be seen that the percentage con-
(1989) conducted a detailed study on the fate of leaf litter sumption of leaf litter by crabs in a number of studies
in a Malaysian mangrove area of tidal inundation classes ranged from 9 to 79% with a mean in the order of 50%.
III and IV (Watson, 1928), that is, areas that are inundated Crabs are not the only invertebrates involved in the con-
by normal high and spring tides, respectively. The “disap- sumption of mangrove leaf litter. Slim et al. (1997) found
pearance” of leaf litter was partitioned as follows: tidal that in the relatively elevated Ceriops tagal forest in Kenya,
export, which accounted for 36 to 78% (22 to 26% being which is only flooded during spring tides, crabs were
leached out from the leaves and the rest by particulate absent and the detritivorous snail Terebralia palustris was
export); macrofeeders (mainly sesarmid crabs) activity, the major benthic organism responsible for litter removal.
depending on the population density, accounted for 10 to Camilleri (1992) investigated leaf litter processing by
48%; and microbial activity accounted for 0 to 20%. Of invertebrates in a Queensland mangrove forest. Figure
the 10 to 48% biomass consumed by crabs, only 14% was 3.38 depicts the leaf litter processing by the guild of detri-
converted to crab biomass, with the rest being used in tovores. At least 50 species of invertebrates depend on the
152 The Ecology of Seashores

organisms, growth of the microbial community


TABLE 3.25 is also influenced by the leaf shredders, since
Estimates of Litter Export from Selected Mangrove microorganisms enhance the mineralization
Ecosystems rate of plant detritus (Fenchel and Harrison,
1976), the processes that enhance rapid leaf
Litter Export breakdown, such as the rate of leaf shredding
Locality (kg ha–1 day–1) Reference
into small POM, may be significant in making
Malaysia 12.4 Gong & Ong (1990) nutrients available to the trees.
Northeastern 15.3 Boto & Boto (1981) 5. The plant tissues are broken down to the level
Australia (amended by Robertson, 1986) of organelles, thus simplifying the structure and
Florida 2.5 Lugo & Snedaker (1973) chemical composition resulting in the plant cell
Florida 8.0 Odum & Heald (1972) contents (cellulose and hemicellulose) being
Puerto Rico 11.0 Golley et al. (1962)
freed from degradation-resistant material such
as lignin and thus facilitating degradation by
senescent leaves that fall from the mangrove trees as a microbial organisms.
food source. The leaf shredders consist of three feeding
groups: (1) large crabs represented by Sesarme erythro- Lee (1997) investigated the value of crab-consumed
dactyla, which eats leaves where they fall or drags them and processed mangrove material to coprophagous mac-
into their burrows to be consumed later; (2) amphipods, rofauna in a tropical mangrove ecosystem and found that
isopods, and smaller crabs; and (3) polychaetes, especially crab fecal material supported faster growth and lower mor-
Capitellides sp., and chironomid larvae. These groups feed tality in the amphipod Parayallela sp. compared to fresh
successively on smaller particles as the leaves are broken mangrove detritus. The crab fecal material, now finely
down. The role of species that shred whole leaves into fragmented and low in deterrent chemical such as tannins,
small particles in mangrove forests is significant for five is ideal for microbial colonization. It forms the basis of a
reasons (Camilleri, 1992): coprophagous food chain both in the mangrove benthos
and among pelagic consumers (e.g., copepods) upon
1. They prevent mangrove leaf material from resuspension and export to adjacent waters as “micro-
being washed out of the forest. particulate organic carbon” (micro-POC). Robertson et al.
2. They make POM available as a food source to (1992) estimated that “micro-POM” made up about 17.0%
detritovores that feed on fine POM, e.g., a com- of all mangrove export from their study site in Missionary
parison of the length of particles in the rectum Bay, northeastern Australia.
of Sesarme erythrodactyla (32 to 1 117 µm) A number of studies (e.g., Boto and Bunt, 1981; Twil-
with that in the proventriculus of sediment-eat- ley, 1985; Robertson, 1988; Robertson et al., 1988; Lee,
ing crabs such as Heloecius cordiformes (30 to 1995) have determined net export of detritus from man-
600 µm), Australopus tridentata (53 to grove forests with the contribution to adjacent sediments
888 µm), and molluscs (<50 to 1,200 µm), sug- dependent on the ratio of the size of the vegetated area to
gests that these latter groups feed on detrital open ocean area, the geomorphology of the tidal basin,
particles egested by S. erythrodactyla. tidal amplitude, and water motion. Robertson et al. (1988)
3. They regulate the size of POM in the environ- have recently estimated direct export of particulate organic
ment. matter from the mangroves on Hinchinbrook Island and
4. Since the size of POM influences the rate at its channel on the Queensland coast to adjacent Mission-
which it is colonized by microfauna and micro- ary Bay and the Great Barrier Reef (GRB) lagoon to be

TABLE 3.26
Consumption of Mangrove Litter by Crabs
%
Locality Crab Species Consumption Reference

Northeastern Australia Sesarmides 22–43 Robertson (1986)


Southern Africa Sesarma meinerii >44 Emmerson and McGwynne (1992)
Australia Sesarma meinerii 71–79 Robertson and Daniel (1989)
Malaysia Sesarma meinerii 9–30 Leh and Sasekumer (1985)
Hong Kong Chiromanthes sp. >57 Lee (1989)
East Africa Sesarmides 21.7–40.3 Slim et al. (1997)
153

FIGURE 3.38 Leaf Litter processing by a guild of detritovores at Myora Springs, Stradbroke Island, Queensland. S = POM from
“sloppy” feeding; F = fecal POM. (Redrawn from Camilleri, J.C., Mar. Biol., 114, 143, 1992. With permission.)

on the order of 25,00 tons C yr–1. However, Robertson et fort, the emergent macrophytes were major contributors
al. (1988) estimate that most of this detritus is deposited in Flax Pond (74.7%, Spartina), Sapelo Island (84%,
over a wide area of the GBR lagoon (260 km2) giving an Spartina), the Upper Waitemata Harbour (31.4%, man-
annual flux of litter to the adjacent waters of 52 g C m–2 groves, Avicennia), Grays Harbor (20.7%), and Mai Po
yr–1. Alongi et al. (1989) have determined that the man- (96.7%, Phragmites 46% and Kandelia, 50.7%). Sub-
grove litter exported to the adjacent nearshore waters is merged macrophytes were major contributors in the Nan-
of poor nutritional quality (e.g., high C:N ratio, refractory aimo River estuary (42.1%, eelgrass, Zostera), Grays
nature of the constituents, and high tannin content), with Harbor (54.7%, eelgrass, Zostera), and Bot River estuary
enhancement of bacterial activity and DOC fluxes appar- (72%).
ent only in a semienclosed area of highest litter deposition. From the table it can be seen that each system has its
Alongi et al. (1989) and Alongi (1990a,b) demonstrated own characteristics, depending on the mix of primary
from detritus enrichment experiments that addition of producers. In some of the studies, not all of the producers
unprocessed mangrove detritus did not promote either were measured, especially the epibenthic microalgae. If
bacteria growth, DOC flux, or microfauna abundance in they had been measured, the relative contributions would
laboratory microcosms. have been different.

3.5.7 RELATIVE CONTRIBUTIONS OF THE VARIOUS


PRODUCERS 3.6 SOFT SHORE FAUNA

In Table 3.27 information is listed for eight estuarine 3.6.1 ESTUARINE ZOOPLANKTON
studies for which data is available on the major primary 3.6.1.1 Introduction
producers. The different systems vary widely in their
relative contributions. Phytoplankton contribution, where Zooplankton are the small or weakly swimming animals
measured, varied from 43.3% in Beaufort to 2.2% in Flax that are found in estuarine waters. Together with the phy-
Pond. Epiphyte production has been measured in only toplankton, bacterioplankton (free-living bacteria), myco-
two of the studies where they were estimated to contribute plankton (fungi), and protozooplankton (apochloritic
8.5% (Beaufort) and 3.7% (Flax Pond), respectively. It is flagellates, amoeboid forms, and ciliates) they constitute
likely that most systems would have the same relatively the plankton community.
low contributions. In Flax Pond fucoid macroalgae con- Estuarine zooplankton in contrast to that of the open
tributed 20.5%, while in Grays Harbor macroalgae con- ocean is limited by two features. First, the turbidity can
tributed 12.4%. In the other studies they were a minor limit phytoplankton production and thus limit the food
contributor. Epibenthic microalgae were significant con- available for the zooplankton, although many estuarine
tributors in the Upper Waitemata Harbour (35.9%), while zooplankters have been shown to feed on bacterial aggre-
in the Nanaimo River estuary they contributed a similar gates and detritus, and thus the phytoplankton concentra-
39.5%. In the other studies they contributed between 5 tions may not be as limiting as has been assumed. Second,
and 10%. While Spartina contributed only 9.8% in Beau- and often more importantly, currents, particularly in small
154 The Ecology of Seashores

TABLE 3.27
Total System Net Primary Productivity in Selected Estuarine Ecosystems
Production
Site Producer (g C m–2 year–1) Reference

Beaufort, North Phytoplankton 66.0 (43.3%) Penhale & Smith (1977)


Carolina Zostera marina 58.0 (38.8%)
Epiphytes 73.0 (8.5%)
Spartina alterniflora 15.0 (9.8%)
Total 152.6
Flax Pond, New York Phytoplankton 11.7 (2.2%) Woodwell et al. (1977)
Epiphytes 20.0 (3.7%)
Epibenthic macroalgae 30.0 (5.6%)
Fucoid algae 75.0 (20.5%)
Spartina alterniflora
Aboveground 292.0 (54.5%)
Belowground 108.0 (20.2%)
Total 535.0
Sapelo Island, Georgia Phytoplankton 79.0 (6.0%) Pomeroy et al. (1981)
Epibenthic microalgae 150.0 (10.0%)
Emergent macrophytes
Aboveground 608.0 (42.0%)
Belowground 608.0 (42.0%)
Total 1,445.0
Grays Harbor, Washington Phytoplankton 64.5 (2.3%) Thom (1984)
Epibenthic microalgae 280.5 (9.9%)
Macroalgae 348.7 (12.4%)
Zostera 1,541.5 (54.7%)
Emergent macrophytes 582.4 (20.7%)
Total 2,817.3
Barataria Bay, Louisiana Phytoplankton 167.2 (18.4%) Day et al. (1973)
Epibenthic microalgae 195.2 (21.8%)
Epibenthic macroalgae 10.3 (1.2%)
Spartina alterniflora 607.2 (69.0%)
Total 879.9
Bot River Estuary, South Africa Phytoplankton 58.0 (7.0%) Bally et al. (1985)
Epibenthic algae 58.0 (&.0%)
Phrahmites australis 111.0 (14.0%)
Submerged macrophytes 558.0 (72.0%)
Total 815.0
Tidal Pond, Mai Po, Phytoplankton 20.3 (0.9%) Lee (1989)
Hong Kong
Macroalgae 50.6 (2.3%)
Kandelia kandel 1,108.2 (50.7%)
Phragmites communis 1,004.9 (46.0%)
Upper Waitemata, Phytoplankton 120.0 (25.3%) Knox (1983a)
Harbour, New Zealand
Epibenthic microalgae 145.6 (30.8%)
Macroalgae 1.4 (0.3%)
Mangroves (Avicennia) 148.49 (31.4%)
Total 473.49

shallow estuaries and those dominated by river flow, can 3.6.1.2 Composition and Distribution
carry some of the zooplankton out to the sea. Grindley
(1981) has recently reviewed the zooplankton of estuaries As in the adjacent coastal waters, the zooplankton of estu-
with special reference to South African estuarine systems, aries can be subdivided into the holoplankton species,
while Miller (1983) has compiled a general review of which are planktonic throughout their life cycle, and the
estuarine zooplankton. meroplankton species, which are planktonic for only part
155

FIGURE 3.39 Abundance cycles of Acartia clausi and A. tonsa in central Narragansett Bay. Numerical densities for adults and older
copepodites (summed) are shown for each species. (Redrawn from Miller, C.B., in Estuaries and Enclosed Seas, Ecosystems of the
World 26, Ketchum, B.H., Ed., Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1983, 108. With permission.)

of the time — for example at night only, such a mysids. from January through June. In July they drop quickly to
The mesoplankton also includes the larval stages of zero and are rapidly replaced by densities of A. tonsa (IV,
benthic invertebrates and fishes that spend part of their V, and VI) on the order of 102 m–3. A clausi reappears and
life cycle in the plankton. begins to increase in about January. P. minutus has the
Holoplankton: The holoplanktonic fauna is domi- same sort of cycle as A. clausi with winter and spring
nated by small species of copepods, although most of the densities around 1,400 m–3. Oithona spp. have no clear
taxa found in neritic seas are also found in estuaries, seasonal cycle. Typical densities are 150 m–3.
particularly if the salinities are high. Chaetognaths, cteno- Meroplankton: The meroplankton are a very diverse
phores, and ciliates, especially Tintinnidae may be com- group comprising representatives of many phyla. Most
mon, and large rhizostomid jellyfish may be seasonally common are the larval stages of benthic invertebrates
abundant. However, foraminifera, hydroid medusae, (especially polychaetes, barnacles, mussels, and gastro-
euphausiids, salps, and larvaceans are usually scarce. pods), and the eggs, larvae, and juveniles of adult nekton
A dominant copepod in many estuaries is Acartia (shrimps, crabs, and fishes), and the sexual stages of
tonsa, a euryhaline (salinity range 0.3 to 30+) and hydrozoan and scyphozoan coelenterates. Meroplanktonic
eurythermal (5 to 35°C) species. In studies of the zoop- mysids, cumaceans, tanaidaceans, amphipods, and iso-
lankton of Barataria Bay, Louisiana, A. tonsa accounted pods are abundant at night, but spend their daytime on the
for 60% of the zooplankton countered by Gillespie (1971) bottom or in the surface sediments.
and 83% of those countered by Cuzon du Rest (1963). In Microzooplankton: It is only comparatively recently
Biscayne Bay and Card Sound, Florida, A. tonsa and Para- that the importance of microzooplankton in estuarine
calanus parvus were the dominant species (Reeve, 1975). pelagic waters has been recognized. Together with the
Mean numbers in Card Sound and south and central Bis- heterotrophic pico- and nanoplankton, they constitute the
cayne Bay were 300, 187, and 2,833 m3 for A. tonsa and water column microbial community. Protozoa dominate
524, 87, and 516 m3 for P. parvus, respectively. In the the nano- (2 to 20 µm) and microzooplankton assemblages
Damariscota River estuary, Maine, Lee and McAlice in pelagic waters and collectively they comprise what is
(1979) estimated that there were 28,882 copepods m–3, called the protozooplankton. They function as predators
with 8,571 A. tonsa m–3, 7,360 Eurytemora herdmanni of bacteria and small phytoplankton, as prey of larger
m–3, and 3,753 Acartia clausi m–3. zooplankton, and as agents for the remineralization and
Many surveys of the zooplankton of Narrangasett Bay, recycling of elements essential for phytoplankton and
Massachusetts, (reviewed in Miller, 1983) have shown that microbial growth (Sherr and Sherr, 1984; Porter et al.,
copepods are the dominant group, accounting for 80% or 1985). The picoheterotrophs are small heterotrophic
more of the individual animals on an annual average. flagellates and they are important grazers of bacteria. The
Among the dominants are Acartia clausi, A. tonsa, nanoheterotrophs comprise two groups, microflagellates
Pseudocalanus minutus, and Oithona spp. Rotifers are and nonloricate, or naked, ciliates (i.e., those that do not
abundant in the late winter, and cladocerans are abundant possess a lorica or shell), and they also are major consum-
in the early summer. The two species of Acartia alternate ers of bacteria. Frequently observed microflagellates
seasonally (Figure 3.39). A. clausi copepodites IV, V, and include monads, euglenoids, choanoflagellates, chry-
VI are present in densities on the order of 5 × 103 m–3 somonads, and dinoflagellates. In addition to bacteria, the
156 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.40 Seasonal changes in chlorophyll a, ultramicroplankton (20–64 µm), microzooplankton (64–200 µm) in Card Sound,
Florida. (Redrawn from Reeve, M.R., Estuarine Research, Vol. 1, Cronin, L.E., Ed., Academic Press, New York, 1975, 364. Based
on Reeve and Cosper, 1973.)

ciliates feed on autotrophs in both the pico- and nano- high, that numbers vary widely, and that the relative
planktonic size ranges. Spirotrichous ciliates are the dom- importance of the various groups of microzooplankton not
inant microheterotrophs, with most species falling into only vary widely in any one estuary, but also from estuary,
two orders Oligotrichina and Tintinnida. Tintinnids feed to estuary.
mostly on small flagellated phytoplankton. A second
group of protozoans of importance in the microzooplank- 3.6.1.3 Temporal and Spatial Patterns
ton are the large, unpigmented dinoflagellates. Amoeboid
protozoans including naked amoebae, foraminiferans, and Seasonal Changes — Seasonal zooplankton patterns in
radiolarians may be transiently abundant. estuaries are much more variable than those in the open
The relative densities from macrozooplankton, micro- ocean due to several factors. Meroplankton are much more
zooplankton (64 to 200 µm), and ultrazooplankton (20 to important in estuaries and the recruitment of the larvae of
64 µm) in Card Sound, Florida, (Figure 3.40) indicate that different benthic species into the water column occurs at
the microzooplankton can be two orders of magnitude many different times of the year. In addition there are a
more numerous than the macrozooplankton. For example, variety of different food sources in estuaries and the estu-
tintinnids have a annual mean density of 121,000 individ- arine zooplankton are less dependent than the open ocean
uals m–3 as compared with 2,933 m–3 for Acartia tonsa, zooplankton on phytoplankton. The comparative lack of
the dominant zooplankter. In Long Island Sound, Capriulo water column stratification in shallow estuaries is also a
and Carpenter (1980) noted that tintinnids and total micro- factor. The changing salinity patterns due to seasonal high
zooplankton numbers varied widely, with tintinnids rang- freshwater input from the inflowing rivers can have a
ing from 1,000 to 9,600 cell l–1 and total numbers ranging marked impact on the species composition and abundance
from 1,000 to 10,500 l–1. In Terebonne Bay, Louisiana, of the zooplankton. The closing of the estuarine mouth,
Gifford and Dagg (1988) reported the following densities which occurs seasonally in some estuaries, can bring about
(in cells l–1): tintinnids, 540–1 to 1,400; nonloricate ciliates, hypersaline conditions and this can markedly affect the
3,160 to 20,360; other ciliates, 420 to 3,500; and zooplankton.
zooflagellates up to 18,000. From these and other studies Vertical Migration — In many estuaries there is a
it is evident that microzooplankton densities are generally scarcity of zooplankton in the waters during the hours of
157

FIGURE 3.41 Stylized distributions of four categories of holoplanktonic copepods in a hypothetical estuary. Darkened arrows indicate
the drift of animals produced in areas shown by diagonal lines; the lines are closely spaced in the center of propagation. Relative
development in an estuary is a function of salinity distribution and net circulation. Redrawn from Jeffries, H.P., in Estuaries, Am.
Assoc. Adv. Sci. Spec. Publ. 83, 1982, 502. With permission.)

daylight and the settled volumes of zooplankton obtained high variability in species composition and abundance
in surface hauls in daytime is commonly less than one between stations in sampling programs. In almost all estu-
tenth of that found at night. Many estuarine zooplankters aries, the greatest species diversity occurs near the mouth
exhibit diurnal vertical migration patterns, reacting posi- where there is a wide range of neretic species. If species
tively to low light intensities and ascending toward the diversity is plotted against salinity for a particular estuary,
surface at sunset. In addition, meroplanktonic species such it is found that peak diversity occurs near 35, and diversity
as amphipods, isopods, mysids, and tanaidacean, which decreases with greater variation in salinity. Below a salin-
spend the day in the surface sediment, ascend into the ity of 2 an increase in diversity may occur as a result of
water column at night. penetration of freshwater species into the upper estuary.
According to Grindley (1964) the survival value to On the basis of the observed patterns, the zooplankton of
estuarine zooplankton of inhibition by low surface salinity estuaries may be divided into four components on the basis
is that it probably helps them to maintain their position of salinity tolerance: (1) a stenohaline marine component
within the estuary. In estuaries where there is usually a penetrating only into the mouth area; (2) a euryhaline
net surface outflow of low salinity water, and a compen- marine component penetrating further up the estuary; (3)
sating influx of saline water along the bottom, the vertical a true estuarine component comprising species confined
migration behavior enables the zooplankton to drift alter- to the estuary; and (4) a freshwater component comprising
nately up and down the estuary and thus maintain their species normally found in fresh water (Figure 3.41).
position in the estuary. When floods occur, however, they
would be in danger of being swept out to sea if they rose 3.6.1.4 Biomass and Production
to the surface. The observed inhibition of vertical migra-
tion produced by a strong salinity discontinuity would Peak abundance and peak production are not always
prevent this. closely connected in time, principally due to predation,
Diversity and Spatial Variability — Due to a variety which removes much of the production. Heinle (1966)
of factors including water mass movements, vertical studied production of Acartia tonsa in the Patuxent River
migration, influx of larvae, and predation the distribution estuary, Maryland. Growth of this copepod from egg to
of estuarine zooplankton tends to be very “patchy,” with the next generation required 7, 9, and 13 days at 29.5,
158 The Ecology of Seashores

22.4, and 15.6°C, respectively, indicating a strong temper- inflow can flush the zooplankton out of the estu-
ature dependence of growth. Heinle estimated that pro- ary. The volume of the freshwater inflow also
duction for A. tonsa during a month period in summer was impacts on the salinity patterns in the estuary.
0.19 g dry wgt m–2 day–1. The number of generations per 3. Salinity: Salinity tolerance is one of the most
year is dependent on the temperature. In Arctic estuaries important factors limiting the distribution and
Acartia clausi generally has only one generation in a year abundance of estuarine zooplankton. Salinity,
(Evans and Grainger, 1980), while in the English Channel in addition to affecting the overall composition
there may be as many as five or six generations. Estimates of the zooplankton, may affect individual spe-
of zooplankton biomass range from 1.0 to 1 014.5 mg m–3. cies at different stages of their life cycle. Grind-
Values for annual production like those for biomass ley (1981) has carried out experiments on the
vary widely. For Richards Bay, South Africa, Grindley and salinity tolerance of species of Pseudodiapto-
Woolridge (1974) estimated net secondary zooplankton mus, which are known to inhabit estuaries with
production at 12 mg (dry wgt) m–3 day–1, or approximately a wide range of salinities. P. hessei has been
4.4 g m–3 yr–1. This gave a P:B ratio of 0.04 over 24 hours, found in water from less than a salinity of 1 to
or a P:B ratio of 13 over a year. Reeve (1975), for central 74, while P. stuhlmanni occupies a similar range
Biscayne Bay and Card Sound, Florida, calculated a mean from less than 1 to 75. Survival experiments for
daily production of 97.2 and 9.2 mg (dry wgt) m–3, respec- both species indicated peak survival at a salinity
tively, corresponding to 46.1 and 4.6 g C m–3 (carbon as of 35, but a wide tolerance reaching above a
50% of organic dry wgt). This can be compared with salinity of 70. However, like the Australian spe-
values obtained by Riley and Conover (1967) for zoop- cies, Gladioferens imparipes, which also has a
lankton production in Long Island Sound, which he wide salinity tolerance (Hodgkin and Rip-
described as a “somewhat estuarine environment of mod- pingdale, 1971), their distribution is limited by
erately high productivity,” of 27 mm m–2 day–1 in a 20-m other factors since they dominate both in the
deep water column. In the case of Long Island Sound, the hypo- and hypersaline regions of the estuary. In
P:B ratio was only 0.027 (i.e., one tenth of that for Bis- the more normal salinities near the mouths of
cayne Bay). On the other hand, in Barataria Bay, Day et estuaries they cannot compete with the marine
al. (1973) calculated a net annual production of 25 g dry neritic species. Grindley (1981) lists the
wgt m–2 yr–1 (12.5 g C m–2 yr–1). recorded salinity ranges of 31 estuarine copep-
ods from South African estuaries. Of these, five
3.6.1.5 Factors Influencing Distribution and belonging to the genera Arcartia, Halicyclops,
Production Oithona, and Pseudodiaptomus have wide
salinity tolerances. Six other species have tol-
1. Type of estuary: The type of estuary plays an erances ranging from a salinity of about 20 to
important role in determining both the distribu- 35, while the rest are restricted to waters around
tion and production of the zooplankton. Espe- 30 to 35.
cially important is the ratio of estuarine water 4. Temperature: Information discussed earlier
volume to tidal prism volume, and the conse- showed that the growth rates of zooplankton are
quent resident time of the water in the estuary. temperature dependent, resulting in higher
If this is high, zooplankton will have a longer numbers of generation per year in warmer
time to develop and grow within the estuary and waters. Seasonal changes in abundance result
less risk of being flushed out of the system. In from changes in larval recruitment, which is
most estuaries there is a point above which the also temperature dependent.
residence time of the water is sufficient for the 5. Predation: Zooplankton predators may appear
zooplankton to survive, while nearer the sea the in large numbers when their prey is abundant.
rapid tidal exchange results in this area being The impact of predators has been documented
dominated by neritic zooplankton. For each by a number of authors. It has been demon-
species there is a balance between the exchange strated that an increase in tentaculate cteno-
ratio of the water and the coefficient of repro- phores (and sometimes jellyfish) is often
duction required to maintain the population. accompanied by decreases in the numbers of
Population increase can occur upstream, while copepods. This has been documented in the
nearer the mouth, tidal dispersion will produce shallow bays of Long Island Sound (Barlow,
a decrease (Grindley, 1977). 1955), Narragansett Bay (Deason and Smay-
2. The volume of freshwater inflow: This is related ada, 1982), Delaware Bay (Cronin et al., 1962),
to the tidal prism and water volume. When the the Patuxent River (Herman et al., 1968), the
tidal prism is small, large volumes of freshwater Mississippi Sound (Phillips et al., 1969), and
159

FIGURE 3.42 Approximate weight ranges of meiobenthic faunal groups. (Redrawn from Mann, K.H., The Ecology of Coastal
Waters, Blackwell Scientific, Oxford, 1982, 186. With permission.)

Barataria Bay (Gillespie, 1971). Phillips et al. The physical extreme occurs on coarse-grained, steep,
(1969) concluded that ctenophores and jelly- high energy, reflective beaches subject to strong wave
fishes constituted the most important group of action. Here large volumes of water are flushed through
predators on zooplankton because of their peri- the beach face and drain rapidly back to sea due to the
odic extreme local abundance and voracious high permeability of the sand. Thus on such beaches the
feeding habits. Deason and Smyada (1982) interstitial biota is well developed and no matter how large
studied ctenophore-zooplankton-phytoplankton the organic input, oxygen demand never exceeds the sup-
interactions in Narragansett Bay, Rhode Island ply. Here the interstitial fauna has a deep vertical distri-
between 1972 and 1977. They found that in four bution of up to several meters. This fauna is adapted pri-
of the years, the beginning of the pulse by the marily to the physical environment, i.e., high interstitial
ctenophore, Mnemiopsis leidyi, was accompa- water flow rates, desiccation during low tide, and distur-
nied by a rapid decline in zooplankton density bance of the sediment by wave action. Most beaches are
and a summer phytoplankton bloom. intermediate between these two extremes, with a combi-
nation of both chemical and physical gradients shaping
3.6.2 INTERSTITIAL FAUNA the interstitial climate.

3.6.2.1 The Interstitial Environment 3.6.2.2 The Interstitial Biota

The physicochemical characteristics of the interstitial It is often convenient to separate the benthic biota of soft
environment have already been considered in Section 3.2. shores according to size into macrobenthos, meiobenthos,
The interstitial environment spans a continuum of con- and microbenthos with dividing lines at about 1.0 mm
ditions ranging between chemical and physically con- and 0.1 mm and 10–4 and 10–10 g wet weight (Mann, 1982)
trolled extremes. The chemical extreme is represented by (Figure 3.42). The latter two categories, which occupy
low energy, sheltered, dissipative beaches of fine sand to the interstices between the sediment grains include bac-
mud, where water filtration through the sediment is neg- teria, fungi, microalgae, protozoans, and metazoans. The
ligible and the organic input is high. Here, apart from a roles of the bacteria and protozoans will be considered
thin surface layer and the oxygenated zones around the in detail later. Here details will be given of one study of
tubes and burrows of macroinvertebrates, oxygen is in their dynamics.
limited supply. Consequently, the sediment becomes Alongi (1985b), in a series of laboratory studies, inves-
largely deoxygenated and steep gradients in the intersti- tigated the impact of physical disturbance on selected
tial chemistry develop. Since the oxygen is concentrated microbiota (bacteria, the hypotrich ciliate Aspidisca sp.,
at the surface, it is here that the bulk of the interstitial and zooflagellates of the suborder Bodina). He found that
fauna is found. both numbers and growth rates of the bacteria were
160 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.43 Abundance and biomass ranges of macro-, micro-, and meiofauna from sublittoral sandy sediments. (Redrawn from
Fenchel, T., Annu. Rev. Ecol. Syst., 9, 99, 1978. With permission.)

affected little by sediment disturbance, or by the presence and Thiel (1988), Hicks and Coull (1983), Heip et al.
of meiofauna. The dynamics of the bacterial populations (1985), and Coull and Chandler (1992) have all reviewed
presumably reflect a balance between nutrient supply various aspects of meiofaunal ecology. The meiofauna
(organic enrichment) and the effects due to physical dis- (small metazoans) can be subdivided into two groups:
turbance and grazing (White, 1983). Using literature values
for ingestion rates of bacteria by flagellates (Sherr et al., 1. Temporary meiofauna comprising the larval
1983; 1991), ciliates (Fenchel, 1975c), nematodes (Tietjen, stages of benthic macroinvertebrates. At times,
1980), and harpacticoid copepods (Hicks and Coull, 1983), after settlement following pelagic larval
and averaging protozoan and meiofaunal standing stocks stages, they can become very dense, but they
and bacterial productivity over the experimental period, on are only temporary in the sense that if they
average only 9 to 11% of the bacterial production was survive long enough they grow out of the meio-
consumed by the protozoans and only 2 to 4% of the faunal size range.
production was ingested by the meiofauna. Populations of 2. Permanent meiofauna include representatives of
the ciliate Aspidisca sp. were generally more abundant in the Rotifera, Gastotricha, Kinorhyncha, Nema-
disturbed cultures that received both low and high detritus toda, Archiannelida, Tardigrada, Copepoda,
rations, especially in the presence of meiofauna, but no Ostracoda, Mystacocarida, Halicarina, many
persistent responses were detected for the flagellates. groups of Turbellaria and Oligochaeta, some
There are a limited number of studies in which all Polychaeta, and a few specialized species of the
components, macro-, meio-, and microfauna, have been Hydrozoa, Nemertina, Bryozoa, Gastropoda,
measured. Figure 3.43 depicts data from a sand beach Aplacophora, Holothuroidea, and Tunicata (Fig-
where the smaller animals (microfauna) dominate numer- ure 3.44). These species pass through their com-
ically, but the macrofauna dominates in terms of biomass plete life cycle as members of the interstitial
(Fenchel, 1978). The actual ratios between the three fauna living in the interstices between the sedi-
groups depend largely on the sediment type with, for ment grains. There is an overlap at the lower
example, the microfauna being very common in fine sand end of the meiofaunal size range with the pro-
but scarcer in muddy sediments. tozoa of the microfauna, particularly the ciliates.

3.6.2.3 The Meiofauna The meiofauna occupy a position of considerable sig-


nificance in biodegradable processes in sediments, espe-
Swedmark (1964), McIntyre (1969), Coull (1973; 1988; cially in the finer sediments of mudflats and estuaries
1990), Fenchel (1978), Coull and Bell (1979), Higgens (Fenchel, 1969; 1972; McIntyre, 1969; Gerlach, 1971).
161

FIGURE 3.44 Some characteristic meiofaunal genera from soft sediments. (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and Mclachlan, A., Ecology
of Sandy Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 182. With permission.)

These processes involve the breakdown of plant material µm. Below 100 to 125 µm mean particle diameter, the
to smaller detrital particles and its subsequent mineraliza- interstitial fauna is absent. Purely interstitial groups (e.g.,
tion by microorganisms (see Section 3.6.4). A wide range Gastotricha) are thus excluded from very fine sands and
of feeding types enables the meiofauna to occupy several muds, while exclusively burrowing groups (e.g., Kino-
trophic levels and this, together with their relatively high rhyncha) are excluded from medium to coarse sands
densities, greatly enhances the flow of energy to the detri- (Coull, 1988). In sands of 200 to 300 µm, nematodes are
tal subsystem. usually dominant, whereas in sands coarser than 350 µm
Two groups of meiofauna have been distinguished: copepods are usually more abundant, while in sands of
burrowing muddy sediment forms and interstitial sandy 300 to 350 µm these two groups are equally abundant
sediment forms. The former group burrows through the (McLachlan et al., 1981). Most exposed beaches have
sediment, displacing particles as they move, and their body sands coarser than 200 µm and consequently have an
form tends to be streamlined (Figure 3.44) making bur- almost exclusive interstitial fauna.
rowing easier. Interstitial meiofaunal species reside within In contrast to the robust burrowing forms, the inter-
the spaces between the sand grains. In general nematodes stitial meiofauna are often slender and vermiform (Figure
are the dominant meiofaunal taxon, although they may be 3.44) . Because of their small size they have reduced cell
exceeded in some sediment by harpacticoid copepods. size and a simple organization, with a body length as little
In sands coarser than 200 µm median particle diam- as 0.2 mm. Body walls are usually reinforced by cuticles,
eter, virtually all the meiofauna are interstitial forms spines, or scales, or protection against abrasion is afforded
(Wieser, 1959). Body size tends to decrease as grain size by an ability to contract. Locomotion can be by ciliary
and consequently pore space decreases (Swedmark, gliding, writhing (nematodes), or crawling (in crusta-
1964). Harpacticoid copepods can remain interstitial ceans). Due to their reduced cell numbers, gamete pro-
down to a particle size of between 160 and 170 µm duction is low, fertilization is internal, brood protection
(McLachlan, 1978), and nematodes down to 100 to 125 common, and pelagic larvae absent.
162 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.45 Schematic illustration of the mechanisms (active, passive) by which meiofauna move between the sediments and
water. Four factors influencing entry are identified: flow, structure, taxonomic composition, and disturbance. Habitats are listed as
generalized examples where active vs. passive recruitment of meiofauna is expected if the conditions listed in the factor column
above the respective habitats prevail. (Redrawn from Palmer, M.A., Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser., 40, 48, 1988b. With permission.)

3.6.2.4 Meiofaunal Recruitment and For the meiofauna of areas that are hydrodynamically
Colonization benign and dominated by active swimmers (e.g., sea grass
beds), water column recruitment would involve substrate
Early studies assumed that meiofauna had low rates of choice through active swimming. Recent studies have
dispersal and were basically sediment bound, and that shown that meiofaunal dispersal in sea grass beds is prima-
colonization of new areas occurred via migration through rily an active process (Hicks, 1986; Walters and Bell, 1994).
the sediments (Swedmark, 1964; McIntyre, 1969). A key Hicks (1986) estimated that 3 to 13% of the available har-
factor here is the size of the new area and the distance the pacticoid copepods (sediment and blade species) migrated
meiofauna must travel to colonize an area (Hockin and into the water column. Walters and Bell (1994) found that
Ollason, 1981). However, studies have shown that when of 28 species of copepods found regularly in the sediment,
large areas are defaunated colonization can occur within 19 species are also found to migrate vertically into the water
hours (e.g., Sherman and Coull, 1980). It is highly unlikely column. Such migrations occurred primarily at night.
that animals 200 to 88 µm in length could burrow dis- In areas free of aboveground vegetation and more
tances of meters in a matter of hours. Thus it must be rigorous hydrodynamically (e.g., tidal flats, beaches), pas-
concluded that meiofaunal recruitment must take place sive recruitment processes dominate and are modified by
primarily via the water column. This conclusion was behaviors that may influence transport and settlement.
recently confirmed by the experiments conducted by Disturbance events such as sediment resuspension by
Savidge and Taghon (1988). strong wave action and tidal currents, and the feeding
Palmer (1988b) has recently reviewed dispersion mech- activities of various fish species such as flatfishes and rays,
anisms in marine meiofauna. Two distinct patterns exist for can cause suspension of the meiofauna in any habitat.
recruitment via water column pathways: active entry of the Passive suspension may be augmented by active swim-
meiofauna into the water and passive erosion of the meio- ming once the disturbance has taken place.
fauna from the sediments. A number of studies have shown
that both adult and juvenile meiofauna are regularly found 3.6.2.5 Meiofaunal Population Density,
in the water column, e.g., Kern and Bell (1984), Palmer and Composition, and Distribution
Gust (1985). Palmer (1988b) has advanced a conceptual
model (Figure 3.45) in which four factors interact to deter- On average one can expect to find 106 m–2 meiofaunal
mine whether active vs. passive mechanisms are most impor- organisms and a standing crop dry weight biomass of 1
tant for a given community, namely taxonomic composition, to 2 g m–2. These values, however, will vary according to
hydrodynamics, aboveground structure, and disturbance. season, latitude, water depth, substrate, etc. (Gerlach,
163

FIGURE 3.46 A schematic diagram of the sediment at a muddy and sandy site in North Inlet, South Carolina, U.S.A., with numbers
and biomass at the two sites. The oxidized layer at the muddy site is limited to about 1 cm, while at the sandy site it varies between
10 and 15 cm. (Redrawn from Coull, B.C. and Bell, S.S., Ecological Processes in Coastal and Marine Systems, Livingston, R.J.,
Ed., Plenum Press, New York, 1979, 199. With permission.)

1971). According to McLachlan et al. (1977), average and clayey sediments the meiofauna changes completely
macrofaunal to meiofaunal ratios are 1:105 for numbers, and is dominated by nematodes capable of burrowing.
5:1 for biomass, and 1:1 for production. Thus while the However, there is richer fauna inhabiting the upper 1 mm
meiofauna are quantitatively important, they still account or so of these sediments, and harpacticoids, ostracods,
for only approximately 23 µg organic carbon ml–1 sedi- foraminifera, and various annelids, along with nematodes,
ment, compared with a values of approximately 90 µg are found in abundance. Figure 3.46 schematically illus-
organic carbon ml–1 for the combined macrofauna and trates mud and sand cores and the redox layers with the
bacteria (Gerlach, 1978). However, they may be quantita- mean number and biomass of the meiofauna from 5 years
tively more important in estuaries that are considerably of monthly data in the North Inlet, South Carolina. The
richer than in other sediments. The average meiofaunal muddy core has twice the meiofaunal biomass of the sand
density in sand flats appears to be about 1,000 10 cm–2, core. The former has twice the biomass of the latter, and
and some areas may achieve this in nematodes alone in it the fauna is concentrated in the top 1 cm, whereas in
(Fenchel, 1969). An increase in meiofaunal density is usu- the sand core the fauna is distributed to a depth of 10 to
ally found on mudflats where the average is in the region 15 cm. Another meiofaunal community is that inhabiting
of 3,000 10 cm–2, although densities of up to 6,000 10 cm–2 the anoxic sediments below the redox discontinuity layer.
have been recorded (Rees, 1940). Salt marshes are char- Here occur anaerobic species of ciliates, together with a
acterized by very high meiofaunal numbers. Teal and few species of flagellates, nematodes, turbellarians, roti-
Wieser (1966) recorded 12,000 10 cm–2 in a Georgia salt fers, gnathostomulids, and gastrotrichs.
marsh, while Wieser and Kaniwasher (1961) found 1,785 Nematodes are usually the dominant group accounting
10 cm–2 in a Massachuetts salt marsh. In Knysna Estuary, for more than 80% of the total meiofauna. In a study of
South Africa, Dye (1977) recorded densities between 493 an estuarine salt marsh in Barataria Bay, Louisiana, it was
and 19,682 10 cm–2. Possibly the highest recorded meio- found that the nematodes comprised 87% of the total meio-
faunal density is that of 30,000 to 65,000 10 cm–2 found fauna (DeLaune et al., 1981). Total numbers of meiofauna
in the salt marshes of the Swartkops Estuary, South Africa were highest in early March and lowest in October with a
(Dye and Furstenberg, 1981). mean of 2.9 × 106 m–2. This is comparable to those of a
There are also differences in the composition of the South Carolina estuarine marsh where the nematode num-
meiofauna according to sediment type. Fenchel (1978) bers averaged 3 × 106 m–2 (Sikora, 1977) (Figure 3.47).
distinguishes three main meiofaunal assemblages. In well- Sikora and Sikora (1982) investigated the distribution of
sorted sands with particle diameters greater than 100 µm nematodes in salt marsh sediments in North Inlet, South
with the interstices filled with water rather than clay or Carolina, along a transect through low intertidal, midtidal,
silt, there is a rich interstitial fauna comprising ciliates, and high intertidal creek bank to the low marsh. The annual
tardigrades, turbellarians, gastrotrichs, oligochaetes, mean number of subtidal nematodes was 45% of the mean
archianellids, harpacticoids, ostracods, and others. In silty numbers of the high intertidal creek bank nematodes. In
164 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.47 Distribution of nematodes with depth and Eh profile if the sediments in Barataria Bay, Louisiana, U.S.A. (Redrawn
from Sikora, W.B. and Sikora, J.P., Estuarine Comparisons, Kennedy, V.S., Ed., Academic Press, New York, 1982, 272. With
permission.)

the high marsh, or short Spartina alterniflora zone, the 1983; Montagna, 1984); bacterial grazing, how-
number of nematodes were lower than in the high intertidal ever, rarely results in a reduction in bacterial
tall S. alterniflora zone (Bell, 1980). Total microbial bio- productivity and more often has a stabilizing
mass, as calculated from sediment ATP determinations, effect, removing senescent cells and maintain-
was higher in the tall S. alterniflora zone just above the ing the cell growth in an exponential phase
high intertidal creek bank than in the short S. alterniflora (Montagna, 1984).
zone. The subdominant meiofaunal group is usually the 3. The “gardening” effects of meiofauna enhance
harpacticoid copepods. Their distribution is strongly influ- bacterial stocks; excreted mucus is colonized
enced by factors such as desiccation and oxygen availabil- by microorganisms, and they are in turn
ity. Thus, they occur near the surface of the sediment and cropped by the meiofauna.
are more abundant toward the lower tidal levels. Popula- 4. Secretion of N- and P-containing dissolved
tion density decreases markedly in muddy areas. metabolites by the meiofauna supports the
Dye and Furstenberg (1981) reviewed the literature growth of bacteria.
on meiobenthic densities through the mid-1970s and 5. Meiofaunal bioturbation enhances geochemical
reported an average of about 3 million individuals m–2 in fluxes (Aller and Aller, 1992), especially the
mudflats and 5 million m–2 in salt marshes, but noted diffusion rates of oxygen.
densities of up to 30 and 60 million m–2 in the Swartkops 6. The mechanical breakdown detrital particles by
Estuary in South Africa. In general, meiobenthic densities meiofauna supports bacterial decomposition
of between 100,000 and 10 million individuals m–2 are (Tenore et al., 1977).
reported and biomass values vary from by four orders of 7. Competing with infaunal macrobenthos for
magnitude between approximately 0.01 and 10 g C m–2. food and space (McIntyre, 1969; Marshall,
1970; Tenore et al., 1982).
3.6.2.6 Role of Meiofauna in Benthic
Systems The role of meiofauna in energy flow in benthic eco-
systems will be considered in Chapter 6. Here we will
Meiofauna affect the availability of detritus and its utili- deal with meiofaunal food resources and the extent to
zation by detritus-feeding macrofauna by: which the meiofauna form part of the diet of other animals.
Individual meiofaunal species may be specialized to feed
1. Enhancing the mineralization of detritus (Find- on diatoms, cyanophytes, flagellates, heterotrophic bacte-
lay and Tenore, 1982). ria, fungi, yeasts, detritus, and other meiofauna, while
2. Grazing on bacteria, fungi, and microalgae some are filter feeders. Many species select prey by size
(Alongi and Tietjen, 1980; Montagna et al., and many partition food size niches by one standard devi-
165

ation (Fenchel, 1968). Most turbellarians are predatory, (1975) and Siebert et al. (1977) demonstrated that juvenile
oligochaetes feed on detritus and bacteria, nematodes feed salmon in British Columbian estuaries feed almost exclu-
on a variety of foods, including bacteria, diatoms, and sively on harpacticoid copepods, while W.E. Odum and
detritus, and copepods consume bacteria (Coull, 1988). Heald (1975) reported that meiobenthic copepods com-
Feeding categories for nematodes include nonselective prised 45% of the gut contents of North American grey
deposit feeders, epigrowth feeders, and omnivore/preda- mullet. In addition, Sikora (1977) has reported that nem-
tors (Wieser, 1953). atodes provide a significant proportion of the food of the
Food inputs to the interstitial system include (Brown grazing glass shrimp Palaemoneted pugio.
and McLachlan, 1990): Hicks (1985) has investigated the biomass and pro-
duction of the meiobenthic harpacticoid copepod Paras-
1. Primary production by interstitial benthic tenhelia megarostrum in Pauatahanui Inlet, New Zealand,
microalgae (photoautrophs). and its exploitation as a food resource by juvenile flatfish.
2. Dissolved and particulate organics flushed He found that P. megarostrum reached a density of
through or pumped into sand beaches by wave 263,000 m –2 , the highest recorded density for a
action and reworked by burrowing invertebrates. meiobenthic harpacticoid copepod. The mean sediment
3. Particulate detritus (derived from macrophytes, density in January, when 60% of the population was con-
macroalgae, and phytoplankton) deposited on tributed to by nauplii, was 441 ± 179.9 10 cm–2 . Biomass
the surface sediments of the more sheltered was estimated at 0.605 g ash-free dry wgt m–2 year–1, or
shores and sand-mudflats, and subsequently 0.42 g C m–2 year–1. Annual production based on a P:B
buried by the action of burrowing invertebrates. ratio of 15 and a 30% correction for nauplii production
4. Chemoautotrophic synthesis in sheltered gave an upper estimate of 9.074 g ash-free dry wgt m–2
beaches with reduced layers. year–1, or 3.630 g C m–2 year–1. O-group flatfish within a
size range of about 8.0 to 35.0 mm standard length were
The primary consumers of the organic matter are the found to feed predominantly on the harpacticoid copepods
bacteria that mostly coat the sediment grains, but also with P. megarostrum forming 95% of the intake. The mean
occur in the interstitial waters. Autotrophs (cyanobacteria, number of P. megarostrum found in the juvenile flatfish
diatoms, and flagellates) as well as the heterotrophic bac- guts was 264.8 ± 143.3. If a daily gut turnover rate of
teria are consumed by the heterotrophic flagellates and three is assumed, then it was estimated that the daily
ciliates, as well as by the meiofauna. removal rate of P. megarostrum was 0.00377% and the
The belief had been that nematodes and other meio- annual removal rate 1.38%. This low removal rate of har-
fauna in general were a trophic dead end, either acting in pacticoid copepods by fish predators has been confirmed
competition with macrofauna for food resources or simply in a number of other studies; e.g., 0.59% of the standing
functioning as nutrient recyclers (McIntyre, 1969; Mar- crop each day by the spotted dragnet Calliomymus paucir-
shall, 1970; Heip and Smol, 1976). Recent research (e.g., adiatus in sea grass beds in Biscayne Bay, Florida (Sog-
Elmgren, 1978) has suggested that nematodes, which were ard, 1982; 1984); 1.2% of the standing crop per day by
thought to have little nutritive value, are indeed consumed juvenile plaice (Bregnballe, 1961); while Alheit and
and their production passed up the food chain. Nonselec- Scheibel (1982) estimated that the daily predation rate by
tive deposit feeders such as some polychaetes, echinoids, juvenile tomates Haemulon auriolineatum would have lit-
holothurians, and sipunculids in swallowing sediment, tle effect on the harpacticoid populations. Thus there is
must also ingest the nematodes and other meiofauna. general agreement: although the harpacticoid copepods
Gerlach (1978) points out, “bacterial biomass is not very are an important food resource for juvenile fishes, they
much higher than meiofaunal biomass; therefore meio- exert little regulatory control on their populations.
fauna automatically has to be considered as an important Meiofauna, and in particular the nematodes, play
source of food, if the concept of non-selective feeding is important roles in facilitating the decomposition of
valid.” He further suggested that meiofauna (including For- organic matter and in influencing sediment stability. Evi-
aminifera) in subtidal sand bottoms contributed about 20% dence has accumulated to show that the breakdown and
to the energy webs of deposit-feeding macrofauna. Platt mineralization of organic matter by bacteria is stimulated
and Warwick (1980) consider that the reason why nema- significantly by the meiofauna, especially by the nema-
todes are not more frequently reported in the guts of con- todes (Tenore et al., 1977; Gerlach, 1978). The burrowing
sumers is that, once macerated, they are difficult to identify. and feeding activities of the meiofauna not only improve
Fish, especially in their larval stages, are now known the exchange of metabolites, but in feeding on the bacteria
to consume large quantities of meiofauna, especially har- they maintain them in a “youthful” condition by maintain-
pacticoid copepods (Feller and Kaczynski, 1975; Gross- ing their populations at the point of maximum growth (the
man et al., 1980; Godin, 1981; Alheit and Scheibel, 1982; log phase) or sustainable yield. Studies of impact of the
Coull, 1990; Feller and Coull, 1995). Feller and Kaczynski burrowing activities of marine nematodes on the sediment
166 The Ecology of Seashores

Coull (1999) has discussed the relative roles of bio-


logical controls on estuarine meiobenthos, i.e., the relative
roles of top-down or bottom-up controls. Top-down (pre-
dation) control: As discussed above, predators appear to
have minimal impact on meiofaunal populations. The
meiofaunal prey have the ability to reproduce rapidly and
thus they can “out-reproduce” the removal due to preda-
tion. Bottom-up (food) control: Montagna (1995) stated
that meiofauna graze an average of 1% of the microbial
biomass per hour. This rate and the rate of turnover of the
bacteria and benthic microalgae led Montagna et al.
(1983) to state: (i) “it is certain that meiofauna will never
run out of food”; (ii) “bacterial production and turnover
is more than sufficient to satisfy the demands of the meio-
faunal population,” and (iii) “… meiofauna are not grow-
ing so fast that they are limited by microalgal food.” It is
thus clear that biological controls (predation and food
limitation) do not act in the ways they do on macrobenthic
populations.

3.6.3 SOFT SHORE BENTHIC MACROFAUNA


3.6.3.1 Introduction

There is an enormous literature on the distribution and


abundance of benthic macroinvertebrate animals. Wolff
(1983) has reviewed estuarine benthic ecology and Reise
(1985) tidal flat ecology. Excellent broad, process-orien-
FIGURE 3.48 A schematic diagram of the factors affecting tated discussions of benthic community dynamics in
meiobenthic food web structure. coastal waters are found in Livingston (1979) and Mann
(1982), while Parsons et al. (1979), Valiela (1995), and
microenvironments has shown that they play two opposing Alongi (1998) present overviews of coastal ecology.
roles with respect to sediment stability. First, they assist Detailed accounts of the ecology of sandy beaches are to
in bioturbation and second, by producing a network of be found in McLachlan and Erasmus (1983) and Brown
mucus-lined burrows (Cullen, 1973; Rieman and Schrage, and McLachlan (1990). McCall and Tevesz (1982) provide
1978), they assist sediment stabilization. detailed accounts of animal-sediment relationships, while
Lopez and Levinton (1987) discuss the ecology of marine
3.6.2.7 Factors Involved in the Structuring of deposit feeders. Recent accounts of trophic relationships
Meiofaunal Communities in the marine benthos are to be found in the volumes edited
by Barnes and Gibson (1990) and John et al. (1992).
Figure 3.48 depicts the web of abiotic paramaters and Four types of sedimentary coasts providing habitats
ecological interactions that together act to determine the for benthic macroinvertebrates can be recognized. The
composition of meiofaunal communities. The sedimentary habitats with the lowest species diversity are the exposed
complex interacts with the physicochemical parameters to sand beaches. As shelter increases, the habitats become
set the limits over which the various species can exist. more complex and the diversity of the fauna increases.
Reproduction, recruitment, and colonization of new or dis- In addition, rooted plants (macrophytes) become a feature
turbed habitats interact with the complex of environmental of the shore. In temperate regions salt marshes composed
and biotic factors to determine species diversity and abun- of terrestrial halophytes are either restricted around high
dance. Food (bacteria and benthic microalgae), dissolved tide level (e.g., Europe) or they extend to about mid-tide
and particulate organic matter, predation by the macrob- level (e.g., Atlantic coast of North America, South
enthos, biogenic structures such as the tubes of tube-build- Africa). Muddy sediment accumulates within these
ing invertebrates, sediment biofilms, and bioturbation by marshes. Toward the tropics, mangroves replace the
the benthic infauna and disturbances, such as those due to marshes on the upper shore, but both may occur together.
the feeding activities of some fishes, constitute a biogenic On all sheltered shores, sea grasses occur at various levels
complex acting on the meiobenthic communities. on the shore.
167

The benthic fauna can be subdivided into the epifauna major taxa, although polychaete worms, molluscs, and
(living on the surface of the sediments) and the infauna crustaceans (isopods, amphipods, crabs, and callianassid
(burrowing or tube-building species). The epifauna com- shrimps) predominate. Fishes are a very important mac-
prises motile species such as surface deposit-feeding and rofaunal group on such shores. In contrast, mudflats are
carnivorous or scavenging snails, starfishes, and crusta- dominated by tube-dwelling species (many polychaetes
ceans, crabs, and shrimps. In addition some sessile and amphipod crustaceans), relatively sedentary bivalves
bivalves (mussels and oysters) build up reefs that provide living at various depths within the sediment, burrowing
a habitat for a wide variety of sessile and motile species. species (especially polychaetes and crabs), and represen-
However, in many systems the bulk of the epifaunal bio- tatives of many other taxa including nemertines, anthozo-
mass is composed of fish species. The dominant infaunal ans, platyhemninthes, sipunculids, echiuroids, echinoids,
species comprise polychaetes, bivalves, amphipods, and holothurians, ophiuroids, and insects.
callianassid shrimps.
3.6.3.2.1 Sand beaches
Traditional approaches to the study of the macrob-
enthos have involved the use of community concepts such The distribution of macrobenthic animals on sandy
as classification of species associations, diversity, succes- beaches exhibit patchiness, zonation, and fluctuation due
sion, and stability/time relationships often involving to tidal and other migrations. Patchiness results chiefly
sophisticated mathematical analyses. However, such from passive sorting by waves and swash, and from local-
approaches have not proved to be particularly useful in ized food concentrations (McLachlan and Hesp, 1984).
understanding the dynamics of benthic communities Depending on the morphodynamic beach state, the scale
(Wildish, 1977). of the patches may vary from 10 m on reflective beaches
with cusps (McLachlan and Hesp, 1984) to 100 m on high-
3.6.3.2 Macrofaunal Zonation Patterns energy intermediate/dissipative beaches (Bally, 1981).
The differential distribution of the biota across a beach
In this section the two extreme beach types, exposed sand from high tidal to subtidal levels has been the subject of
beaches and sheltered mudflats, will be considered. How- a considerable number of studies. A number of schemes
ever, it should be borne in mind that these two extremes have been proposed to describe such zonation patterns
grade into each other through fine sands and muddy sands. (Figure 3.49). Dahl (1952) introduced a scheme of zona-
On exposed sand beaches the animals present are charac- tion consisting of three zones similar to those for rocky
terized by a high degree of mobility, including an ability shores. These zones were based on the distribution of
to burrow rapidly. They include representatives of the crustaceans and comprised a “subterrestrial fringe,” char-

FIGURE 3.49 Three schemes of sandy beach zonation. (Redrawn from McLachlan, A., in Sandy Beaches as Ecosystems, McLachlan,
A. and Erasmus, T., Eds., Dr. W. Junk Publishers, The Hague, 1983, 337. With permission.)
168 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.50 Zonation of intertidal macrofauna in the East Cape, South Africa, including a moisture profile for the surface sand
(after Wendt and McLachlan, 1985). (Redrawn from McLachlan, A., NATO Advanced Workshop on Behavioral Adaptation to Intertidal
Life, Chelazzi, C. and Vannani, M., Eds., Plenum Press, New York, 1988, 463. With permission.)

acterized by ocypodid crabs (in the tropics and subtropics (4) a zone of saturation, permanently saturated with water
or talitrid amphipods (on temperate and subpolar shores), but with little interstitial water flow (see Figure 3.49).
a “mid-littoral zone,” characterized by cirolanid isopods Pollack and Hammon (1971) further developed this
(although these may be absent in cold regions), and a scheme by subdividing the zone of drying into zones of
“sublittoral fringe” with a mixed fauna characterized by dry sand and drying sand.
hippid mole crabs in the tropics and haustoriid and other Various authors have used these different schemes
amphipods on temperate shores. with somewhat conflicting results (Knox, 1969a; Bally,
Salvat (1964; 1966; 1967) proposed an alternative 1983; Went and McLachlan, 1985). Brown (in McLachlan,
scheme based on physical factors. He defined four, not 1983) considers that only two “indisputable” zones occur
three, zones: (1) a zone of drying, or of dry sand, normally universally on sandy shores — a zone of air-breathing
wetted only by spray; (2) a zone of retention, reached by animals at the top of the shore and a zone of aquatic
all tides, where some moisture always remains around the breathers lower down. McLachlan (1988), on the beaches
sand grains even after gravitational water loss; (3) a zone of the East Cape, South Africa, related the distribution of
of resurgence, reached by all tides, which is subject to the intertidal macrofauna to the Salvat zonation scheme
considerable water movement during ebb and flow; and (Figure 3.50). A similar pattern was found by Knox
169

FIGURE 3.51 Schematic diagram showing the distribution of the fauna on the New Brighton Beach, South Island, New Zealand.
(From Knox, G.A., in The Natural History of Canterbury, Knox, G.A., Ed., A.H. & A.W. Reed, Wellington, New Zealand, 1969a,
530. With permission.)

(1969a) on a New Zealand sand beach (Figure 3.51). A that a yearly study is needed to give a representative pic-
recent detailed analysis of zonation on Oregon beaches ture of the zonation patterns in microtidal beaches.
has led to the conclusion that four zones do indeed exist McLachlan and Jamarillo (1995) have recently
there, even if these zones are difficult to define accurately reviewed zonation patterns on sandy beaches. They
(McLachlan, 1990a,b). emphasize that, “There is no relationship between macro-
From the studies detailed above it is clear that, faunal zones and long-term or mean tidal levels: zones
depending on the type of beach, three major zones can be rather adjust each day to the limits of the beach as defined
distinguished with possibly the subdivision of the lower by the excursions of the swash zone; thus, “boundaries”
zone into two subzones on dissipative beaches. However, that may be recognized during the low tide period include
other workers (e.g., Raffaelli et al., 1991) consider that the drift zone or the highest swash line, the low-tide swash
apart from a high shore zone, biological zones are difficult zone (which may be anywhere from 1 m to >100 m wide)
to define on sandy shores. and the effluent line.” (Figure 3.53). Each species responds
Brazeiro and Defeo (1996) carried out a yearly study independently to the shore physical gradient and distribu-
of the macroinfauna of a dissipative beach on the Atlantic tions vary from day to day. They concluded that virtually
coast of Uruguay. An average zonation pattern with three all sandy shores studied to date display three zones as
main belts was recognized between the sand dunes and detailed below, which may be distinguished by the pres-
the lower levels of the swash zone. (Figure 3.52). This ence of characteristic faunal elements.
pattern roughly matched traditional zonation schemes,
whereas monthly patterns did not always fit them. Impor- 1. Supralittoral zone: This zone is situated at and
tant spatial variability of the macroinfauna was observed, above the drift line in sand dry at the surface.
with aperiodic and seasonal components. They concluded It is inhabited by the following taxa in any
170 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.52 Intertidal distribution of macroinfauna at Abarra del Chuy beach, Uruguay. The average position of the upper limit
of the swash zone (HWL) (+ 1 SD) throughout the study period is indicated. The different scales concerning the number of individuals
refers to densities (individuals m–2). (Redrawn from Braziero, A. and Defeo, O., Est. Coastal Shelf Sci., 42, 526, 1996. With
permission.)

combination: talitrid amphipods (Tylos, both the littoral and sublittoral zones can be
Talorchestia), oxypodid crabs, less commonly distinguished.
cirolanid isopods of the genus Excirolana, and
insect larvae and adults, especially where there McLachlan et al. (1984) investigated the distribution
is macroalgal litter. of the fauna across three high-energy surf zones in front
2. Littoral zone: This spans the intertidal zone of well-studied intertidal beaches and concluded that the
proper. The taxa characteristic of this zone are patterns that they found could be integrated with the
true intertidal species and may include cirolanid intertidal distribution zones. They distinguished a “surf
amphipods, other isopods, haustoriid and other zone,” or “inner turbulent zone” benthic fauna, which
amphipods, spionids (such as Scololepis), included the same species as those found in the sublit-
opheliids (such as Euzonus) and other polycha- toral fringe, or zone of saturation, and extended beyond
etes, bivalve molluscs (especially Donocids), the breakers. Some distance outside the breaker zone,
and calianassid shrimps. this gave way to the “outer turbulent zone,” which
3. Sublittoral zone: This zone has its upper margin included species colonizing stable bottoms. Similar asso-
near the effluent line. It is characterized by a ciations have been found by other workers off high
greater species diversity including, hippid energy beaches (Knox, 1969a; Christie, 1976). Brown
crabs, mysids, idoteid, oedicerotid and haus- and McLachlan (1990) have combined the findings of
toriid amphipods, calianassid shrimps, neph- this study with those of the intertidal zone to yield a
tyid, glycerid and other polychaetes, and scheme for zonation patterns on open sandy shores (Fig-
holothurians. On some beaches subdivisions of ure 3.54).
171

FIGURE 3.53 McLachlan and Jaramillos (1995) scheme for describing zonation patterns on sandy beaches. (a) Zonation on an
intermediate ocean beach, and (b) variation in zones across a range of beach types. (Redrawn from McLachlan, A. and Jaramillo,
E., Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev., 33, 327, 1995. With permission.)

The prime causes of zonation across a sandy beach There are a number of characteristics common to mud-
and its surf zone are exposure, changing wave energy flat areas worldwide. They include:
levels, and sediment water content and stability. All of the
zones and their boundaries shift with tides and storms, as 1. The presence of large numbers of deposit-feed-
does the fauna itself. Thus the macrofaunal populations ing gastropods. Common genera are Hydrobia,
do not occupy fixed discrete area or time periods, except Littorina, Ilyanasssa, Potamopyrgus, Amphib-
on the more sheltered shores and are thus difficult to define ola, and Ulva.
in terms of tidal levels. 2. Burrowing crabs are a common feature with
large numbers of species in the tropics decreas-
3.6.3.2.2 Mudflats ing toward the higher latitudes. Crabs of the
Mudflats are characteristic of the upper ends of sheltered Families Oxopodidae, Grapsidae, Portunidae,
bays, inlets, and estuaries. These flats have gentle slopes and Hymenodomatidae dominate the epifauna.
and the sediments vary from muddy sands (fine sands with J.H. Day (1981b), for southern African estuarine
a high percentage of the silt/clay fraction) to muddy mudflats, recorded 67 species in the Morrum-
deposits predominantly composed of the silt/clay frac- bene Estuary, 18 species in southern Cape estu-
tion). The redox potential discontinuity layer (RPD layer) aries, and 4 species in Atlantic coast estuaries.
is close to the surface with only a thin oxidized surface Common Oxopodidae, burrowing, deposit-feed-
layer. The organic content of the sediments is high and ing species worldwide include species of the
increases with the fineness of the sediments. The upper genera Uca, Macrophthalamus, Helice, Cleis-
margin of these mudflats often has a fringe of salt marsh tostum, Hymensoma. Fiddler crabs (Uca spp.)
vegetation, while lower down, eelgrass (e.g., Zostera) often dominate in the mid and upper intertidal
often forms extensive beds. The ecology of salt marshes regions on subtropical and tropical shores.
and eelgrass beds will be discussed in the next chapter. 3. Amphipod detritovores are often abundant,
Accounts of the distribution of the macrofauna on especially tube-dwelling Corophium spp.
mudflats will be found in J.H. Day (1981a) (South Africa), 4. Burrowing shrimps, such as species of Upoge-
Morton and Miller (1968) (New Zealand), Inglis (1989) bia and Callianassa are a feature of many mud-
(Australia), Perkins (1974), Reise (1985) (Europe), Rick- flats, especially on tropical shores.
etts et al. (1985) (North American west coast), and Raf- 5. Deposit-feeding polychaetes are usually domi-
faelli and Hawkins (1996) (Northern Europe). nant (along with bivalve molluscs), especially
172 The Ecology of Seashores

FIGURE 3.54 Generalized scheme of zonation on sandy shores. (Redrawn from Brown, A.C. and McLachlan, A., Ecology of Sandy
Shores, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1990, 132. With permission.)

in the mid and lower eulittoral. Species of lug- 8. Species diversity and total abundance is higher
worm (Arenicola or related genera) are a uni- than on sand beaches. The number of species
versal feature. Some species, e.g., Capitella present may exceed 100, and the densities,
capitata and Heteromastus filiformis, are cos- 100,000 m–2 (and may approach 200,000 m–2).
mopolitan. Common genera are Aonides, Boc-
c a rd i a , Po l y d o r a , S c o l e c o l e p i d e s , 3.6.3.2.3 Sea grass beds
Haploscoloplos, Spio, Prionospio, and Tharyx. A distinguishing feature of sea grass beds is the signifi-
Many of these attain very high densities. cantly greater abundance of animals and the number of
6. Both bivalve suspension feeders (common gen- species present as compared with adjacent unvegetated
era are Cerastoderma, Mytilus, Mya, Austrove- areas (Kikuchi and Peres, 1977; Orth et al., 1984; Orth,
nus, and Panope) and deposit feeders (common 1992). Hypotheses suggested for this abundance and diver-
genera are Macoma, Dosinia, and Tellina) are sity include habitat complexity, refuge from predation,
widespread. Suspension feeders also feed on increased food supplies, hydrodynamic effects on larval
phytoplankton, particulate organic matter, and supply, and stable substrates. Manipulative laboratory and
resuspended living and nonliving particles. field experiments have shown that this high diversity may
7. Scavenging and carnivorous gastropods include result from complex, and highly interrelated plant-plant,
species belonging to the genera Nassarius, Nat- plant-animal, plant-physical environmental, and animal-
acia, Polynices, and Cominella. animal interactions. These studies have shown that:
173

1. Foraging success of predators is reduced by


macrophyte complexity, whether measured as
density of shoots or biomass.
2. There is a nonlinear relationship between habitat
complexity and predation success, i.e., a thresh-
old level of complexity was necessary before
foraging success was significantly reduced.

Current research on sea grass biota centers around the


role of structural complexity, initial settlement densities
of recruiting individuals, the physical location of a sea
grass meadow in relation to larval supply or source of
adults or juveniles, and the ability of individuals to move
within or between sea grass areas once settled, in deter-
mining population abundances in a given sea grass area.
Since sea grasses modify hydrodynamic processes, they
also play an important role in determining larval supply
rates and larval settlement.

3.6.3.3 Diversity and Abundance

The distribution, diversity, and abundance of animals on


FIGURE 3.55 The relationship between beach state and mac-
beaches has been related to many factors, including sed-
robenthic abundance and diversity. (Redrawn from McLachlan,
iment particle size and/or organic content (McIntyre, A., in NATO Advanced Research Workshop on Behavioral Adap-
1970; Bally, 1981; McLachlan et al., 1981; Lopez-Cotelo tation to Intertidal Life, Chelazzi, C. and Vannani, M., Eds.,
et al., 1982), beach slope (McLachlan et al., 1981), sed- Plenum Press, New York, 1988, 383. With permission.)
iment moisture (Hayes, 1977; Salvat, 1964; 1966; 1967;
Bally, 1981), food in the surf water (Brown, 1964; size, and wave energy (Hb modal breaker height). Several
McLusky et al., 1975; McLachlan et al., 1981; Hutchings significant trends were evident. Species diversity showed
et al., 1983), and dynamic changes such as those due to a linear increase from reflective to dissipative (Figure
storms (Brown, 1971). 3.55), and from steep to flat shapes, whereas abundance
Bally (1981; 1983) summarized the results of 105 showed a logarithmic increase in response to the same
beach macrofaunal surveys up to 1981. He concluded that, changes. Biomass was, however, best correlated with wave
whereas diversity (species richness) and abundance energy, increasing logarithmically with an increase in
decrease with increasing exposure, individual size modal breaker height. The probable explanation is that
increases, often yielding a high biomass. The highest wave energy controls surf-zone productivity and food
reported biomass values have all been recorded from very inputs to the sediment community. Finally, mean individ-
exposed beaches of the intermediate to dissipative types, ual size of an organism on a beach was correlated with
with large populations of filter feeders in the form of Dean’s parameter, slope and particle size with the latter
bivalves (Donax and other species) and mole crabs (Emer- giving the best fit. Thus the average size of organisms on
ita). Examples are the Eastern Cape, South Africa, with a beach becomes smaller as the sand gets finer and the
7,000 g m–2 dry biomass (McLachlan, 1987), Brazil with beach flattens and tends to move to the dissipative state.
roughly the same biomass (Gianuca, 1983), and Peru with A recent study by Jaramillo and McLachlan (1993) sam-
a dry biomass of no less than 25,700 m–1. pled 10 exposed sandy sites covering a range from reflec-
McLachlan (1983) demonstrated a relationship tive to dissipative in south-central Chile and their findings
between species diversity on the one hand and slope and confirmed the conclusions discussed above. The number
particle size on the other, for a range of medium- to high- of species, abundance, and biomass per beach in general
energy micro/mesotidal beaches around the South African decreased with increasing particle size and beach face
coast. Both diversity and abundance increased as the sands slope (steeper beaches), and increased for reflective to
became finer. In a more complete analysis combining data dissipative conditions. The best fit for the number of spe-
from 23 beaches in Australia, South Africa, and Oregon, cies was with Dean’s parameter, whereas for abundance
U.S.A. (McLachlan, 1990a), diversity (species richness), and biomass the best fits found were with particle size.
total abundance, biomass, and mean individual biomass McLachlan et al. (1981) has calculated meiofaunal and
were all regressed against Dean’s parameter (Ω), a mea- macrofaunal biomass of two high energy surf-zones in
sure of the morphodynamic state, beach slope, particle southern Africa. In the three zones, surf, transition, and
174 The Ecology of Seashores

outer turbulent zone, the meiofaunal biomass was 32 g m–1, best be referred to as “coenocline,” or community gradi-
48 g m–1, and 148 g m–1, at Kings Beach, and 160 g m–1, ent, and the estuarine ecosystem gradient as an “ecocline”
103 g m–1, and 254 g m–1 at Sunday River. Macrofaunal (Whittaker, 1967).
biomasses were generally 0 to 0.1 g m–2 in the surf zone, Early estuarine benthic ecologists found it useful to
1 to 10 g m–2 in the transition zone, and up to 150 g m–2 classify segments of the estuarine ecocline into zones of
in the outer turbulent zone. Thus biomasses within the surf similar biotic composition and to relate these zones to the
zone are reduced and increase offshore. Parallel to the distribution of salinity. A variety of classification schemes
increase in biomass is an increase in species diversity. The have been proposed, especially by researchers working in
ratios of macrofaunal biomass/meiofaunal biomass for the the large homeohaline brackish systems such as the Baltic
three zones were 0.2, 6.0, and 28.4 at Kings Beach and and Zuiderzee (reviewed by Sergerstraale (1959) and
0.2, 3.3, and 46.8 at Sunday River. Thus, passing down the Remane (1971). Boesch (1972, 1973) investigated the
turbulent gradient the macrofauna increases considerably zonation of the macrobenthos along a homeohaline estu-
in importance in relation to the meiofauna. arine gradient in the Chesapeake Bay-York River estuary,
and a seasonally poiklohaline estuarine in the Brisbane
3.6.3.4 Distribution Patterns of Estuarine River, Australia (Boesch, 1977). From these studies he
Macrofauna concluded that the designation of portions of the estuary
as polyhaline, mesohaline, oligohaline, etc. was futile. He
There is a very considerable literature on the distribution found, however, that both estuaries had what can be
patterns of estuarine plants and animals. Details will be termed euryhaline marine species, euryhaline opportun-
found in the reviews of Lauff (1967), Wolff (1980; 1983), ists, and estuarine endemics (see Figure 3.56). In a homi-
Odum et al. (1974), Perkins (1974), Day (1981a), ohaline estuary the dominant and characteristic species of
McLusky (1981), Knox (1986a,b), and Day et al. (1987). the macrobenthos progresses from stenohaline marine
In this section we will concentrate on the distribution species on the continental shelf to a diverse assemblage
patterns of estuarine macrobenthic animals. The distribu- of euryhaline marine species in the lower reaches of the
tion of estuarine macroalgae, macrophytes, phytoplank- estuary. Many euryhaline species, however, present in
ton, and zooplankton have already been considered, and fully marine habitats, are more common and abundant in
nekton will be dealt with in a later section in this chapter. the lower estuary. The coenocline further grades into dom-
From the literature, there emerges a picture of the biota ination by opportunistic euryhaline species and estuarine
responding in an often complex manner to gradients of endemics broadly around a salinity of 18. The euryhaline
environmental factors such as sediment grain size and opportunists are mostly small polychaetes and include
organic content, salinity and nutrient distributions (both several well-known opportunistic species. Euryhaline
water column and interstitial), and tidal height. The biotic opportunists decline in importance and number up-estuary
changes along this estuarine complex gradient can perhaps as their salinity tolerance limits are reached and give way

FIGURE 3.56 Distributional classes of species in a homeohaline estuary. (Redrawn from Boesch, D.F., in Ecology of Marine Benthos,
Coull, B.C., Ed., University of South Carolina Press, Columbia, 1977, 260. With permission.)
175

broadly at a salinity of 5, to virtually complete dominance oyster reef ecology can be found in Dame (1972), Bahr
by estuarine endemics. The estuarine endemics decline in (1976), and Bahr and Lanier (1981). Mussel beds on the
importance and number as the water becomes fresher. surface of low energy beach flats are a common feature
In general, the estuarine limits of marine and estuarine of European coasts, e.g., the Dutch Wadden Sea (Reise,
organisms are set by tolerance of low salinities. Similarly, 1985). Accounts of the ecology of such mussel beds are
the down-estuary limits of freshwater species are generally to be found in Beukema (1981).
set by tolerance of high salinity. In addition to the salinity Epibenthic crustaceans, especially penaeid shrimps
tolerances of adult individuals, larval and juvenile toler- and blue crabs, are abundant in sea grass beds. Densities
ances and the effect of salinity on reproduction may also of macrocrustaceans in Florida sea grass beds averaged 90
determine distributional limits along the estuarine coeno- m–2. In Texas salt marsh habitats (Zimmerman and Minello,
cline (Kinne, 1971; Schleiper, 1971). There is no simple 1984), total densities of penaeid shrimps and blue crabs
explanation of the distribution patterns within estuarine (Callinectes sapidus) were 35.5 to 80.2 m–2 in vegetated
ecosystems. While salinity gradients are perhaps the dom- areas in contrast to 1.2 to 19.9 m–2 in nonvegetated areas.
inating factor, important differences between different
estuaries exist in geomorphology, sedimentology, hydrog- 3.6.3.6 The Hyperbenthos
raphy, anthropogenic modification, and biogeography. The
last factor can be important. For example, in the Avon- The term hyperbenthos is a term applied to the association
Heathcote Estuary, New Zealand, there are only six species of small animals living in the water layer close to the
of crabs (Knox and Kilner, 1973), whereas in the Brisbane seabed (the boundary layer) (Mees and Jones, 1997). The
River estuary there are 23 species (Snelling, 1959). fauna is composed of two groups (Wang and Dauin, 1994;
Increased interspecific competition in the latter estuary Wang et al., 1994): (1) near-bottom zooplankton (sub-
will be an important factor affecting distribution patterns. divided into meroplankton (copepods, crustacean larvae,
chaetognaths, polychaete larvae) and macrozooplankton
3.6.3.5 Epifauna (postlarval fish); and (2) the “permanent hyperbenthos”
(mysids, cumaceans, decapods, amphipods, isopods, and
Animals and plants that live on the surface of beaches and pycnogonids). Many of the latter group occur in the
mudflats are termed the epifauna. Such species are absent mobile sediment surface layer and they make periodic
on high energy beaches where the animals present burrow movements into the water column. Such movements may
into the sediments, although they may emerge to the sur- be erratic, at specific times of the day or year, or at certain
face when the tide is in or during the hours of darkness. life-history stages (Day et al., 1987; Jones et al., 1989).
On mudflats and in estuaries, on the other hand, epifaunal Nocturnal vertical movements into the water column have
communities are developed to a greater or lesser extent. been reported for amphipods, isopods, cumaceans,
On mudflats the most conspicuous epifaunal species are mysids, copepods, and decapod crab larvae.
surface deposit-feeding snails belonging to a variety of The vertical migrations are probably related to the
genera (including Amphibola, Hydrobia, Potamopyrgus), availability of food in the superficial layer (sedimented
carnivorous gastropods, and some crab species. phytoplankton and detritus, resuspended phytoplankton,
In estuarine areas in particular, reef builders, oysters, benthic microalgae and detritus, as well as meiobenthos).
and mussels form conspicuous assemblages at particular The hyperbenthos plays an important role in the coupling
levels on the shore. These aggregations of suspension of the benthic and pelagic food webs. Many hyperbenthic
feeders can form structures of considerable vertical extent species are omnivores, feeding on detritus, microalgae,
with living bivalves in the surface layer and dead shells and zooplankton. In addition the hyperbenthos, especially
below. The eastern oyster (Crassostrea virginica), which the crustaceans, contribute significantly to the diet of many
ranges along the American Atlantic coast from Nova species of postlarval and juvenile fish (McCall and Flee-
Scotia to Venezuela, builds massive intertidal reefs, espe- ger, 1995).
cially in estuaries. These reefs form islands of hard sub-
strates in otherwise soft sediments. Where present they 3.6.3.7 Soft Shore Macrofaunal Feeding Types
help to prevent erosion, influence the velocity and direc-
tion of water currents, regenerate nutrients, deposit large While invertebrates living in soft sediments are usually
quantities of organically rich fecal pellets and pseudo- classified as carnivores, deposit feeders, or suspension
feces, provide a substrate for the attachment of an array feeders, such divisions can be misleading and may not
of sessile invertebrates such as barnacles, hydroids, ascid- apply to the same species in different locations or under
ians, sponges, bryozoans, and tube-building polychaetes, different environmental conditions. Many infaunal spe-
and shelter and food for many motile species such as cies can switch between deposit feeding and suspension
flatworms, polychaetes, gastropods, amphipods, isopods, feeding, depending on the flow regime (Brafield and New-
and fishes. Detailed discussions of oyster biology and ell, 1961; Dauer et al., 1981; Taghorn and Greene, 1992).
176 The Ecology of Seashores

At low flow speeds, feeding is almost exclusively on experimental demonstrations of intra- and interspecific
particles on the sediment surface. At higher flow speeds, interactions and resource depression.
distinctive shifts in feeding behavior are now known to Lopez and Levinton (1987) point out that because
occur in several species. These behavioral changes are most sediments consist primarily of mineral grains (nor-
often characterized by reorientation of feeding append- mally in excess of 95%), and because much of the organic
ages to feed on particles in the overlying water. Even in matter present is typically refractory humic material,
the absence of behavioral shifts, many invertebrates that deposit feeders subsist on a remarkably poor food
feed at the sediment-water interface (e.g., some bivalves resource. Consequently they must process large quantities
with short siphons) make little distinction between of sediment to obtain their food and their feeding rates
recently deposited particles and particles in suspension. are considerable, e.g., the New Zealand marine pulmonate,
Dauer et al. (1981) used the term “interface feeders” to Amphibola crenata, ingests sediment hourly at a rate of
refer to such species, which are not obligatory deposit or up to four times its dry tissue weight (Juniper, 1981).
suspension feeders. Potential food for deposit feeders includes microbes (bac-
teria, fungi, protozoa, and microalgae), meiofauna, and
3.6.3.7.1 Deposit feeders nonliving organic matter. While the sedimentary microbes
Deposit feeders meet their nutritional requirements from are an important source of protein, it is clear that the
the organic fraction of ingested sediment. They are a dom- majority of deposit feeders require an additional carbon
inant component of mudflat and estuarine benthic com- source in order to meet their nutritional requirements. The
munities where they are responsible for extensive sedi- only deposit feeders that appear to be able to meet most
ment reworking and microbial grazing. There is a general of their metabolic demands from microbial food sources
tendency for deposit feeders to predominate in fine sedi- are surface deposit feeders such as tellinid bivalves,
ments with a high clay and organic content. Suspension deposit-feeding gastropods such as Hydrobia spp., Ilya-
feeders, on the other hand, reach their optimum abundance nassa obsoleta, and Amphibola crenata, and some tentac-
in coarser sediments with a mean grain size of 0.18 mm. ulate polychaetes.
In their study of the intertidal benthic fauna of a Florida Coexistence of species requiring similar limiting
estuary, Bloom et al. (1972) identified species assem- resources implies a mechanism of niche partitioning. In
blages in which the number of deposit- and suspension- recent years there have been a number of investigations
feeding species were inversely related. Hughes and Tho- of the differences in resource exploitation among coexist-
mas (1971) demonstrated that 46% of the variance in the ing deposit-feeding species (Fenchel, 1975a, b; Fenchel
occurrence of polychaetes and echinoderms in a coastal et al ., 1975; Levinton, 1979; Lopez and Kofoed, 1980;
bay was associated with an area of soft mud. Whitlach, 1980; Levinton and De Witt, 1989). Whitlach
Levinton (1979), Levinton and Lopez (1987), and (1980) investigated the patterns of foraging and distribu-
Lopez et al. (1989) have reviewed the role of deposit- tion of 19 species of infaunal polychaetes inhabiting sand
feeding invertebrates in soft-bottom benthic communities. and mudflats in Barnstable Harbor, Massachusetts. Two
Levinton (1979) lists the impact that dense populations of major feeding groups were recognized: surface-feeding
deposit feeders have on the benthic system as: (1) altering species, including all species living in vertically posi-
the texture and resuspension properties of the sediment tioned tubes or burrows and collecting food from the sed-
(Rhoads, 1973; 1974); (2) influencing the vertical distri- iment-water interface with palps or tentacles (e.g., the
bution of chemical pore water properties; (3) changing spionids, Polydora ligni, Scolecolepides viridis, and Pri-
bacterial and microalgal standing stocks (Fenchel and onospio heterobranchiata) and burrowing species, consti-
Kofoed, 1976; Lopez and Levinton, 1987); (4) influencing tuting a rather loosely defined group containing species
microbial population dynamics (Lopez et al., 1977; Juni- feeding below the sediment surface (e.g., the capitellids
per, 1981); and (5) influencing the patterns of larval Capitella capitata and Heteromastus filiformis, the orbi-
recruitment (Rhoads, 1974; Woodin, 1974). The high den- niid Scoloplos acutus, and the cirratulid Chaetozone sp.).
sities of deposit feeders, which may exceed 100,000 m–2 In both groups, between-habitat species richness was pos-
(Knox, 1977), suggest that they play an important role in itively correlated with food-resource supplies in the sed-
accelerating detrital breakdown and the regulation of iment. Food resources were allocated among the deposit
deposit-feeding populations by influencing resource avail- feeders in two primary ways: with respect to particle size
ability. Levinton (1979a) considers that three lines of evi- and among subsurface feeders, according to vertical space
dence suggest that resources are limiting to deposit-feed- utilization. For surface feeders the median particle size
ing benthic populations: (1) correlations of population ingested for the surface feeding polychaetes Scolecolepi-
density with food-related parameters, such as the organic des viridis was about 10 µm, whereas that of Spiophanes
content of the sediment, percent clay, and microbial abun- bombax was 90+ µm, while for subsurface feeders it was
dance; (2) patterns of niche structure of coexisting deposit- about 15 µm for Tharyx sp. and about 90 µm for Scoloplos
feeding species that show little niche overlap; and (3) acutus. Many other species showed similar differences.
177

The majority of the species selected the smaller and more 3.6.3.7.2 Suspension feeders
abundant size-fractions present in the sediments. While Species feeding on organic particles suspended in the
all of the surface-feeding polychaetes collected particulate water are termed suspension feeders (also referred to as
material from the sediment-water interface, burrowing filter feeders); their potential food sources are phytoplank-
species were found at different levels within the sediment. ton, zooplankton, suspended bacteria, organic aggregates
Estimates of overlap in food size and